
iMH 



CRITICISMS 

MASSED ON THE SECOND EDITION OF THIS WORK. 



n^ ¥' 



From the XLVII. JVb. of the JVbrth Amencan Revieta, 
The author has shown much ability, both in regard to the metho- 
dical arrangement of his materials, and the clear expositions he has 
given of the principles and difficulties in the grammatical construction 
of the language. His views are well explained in the preface, from 
which it is evident, that he has studied the subject with care, and 
gained much practical knowledge from experience. In the full con- 
jugations and copious list of irregular verbs, and in the illustration of 
all the rules of syntax, by explanations, remarks, and well chosen 
examples, this gi-ammar is deciiUjdly supenor to any we liave seen. 
This we deem particularly worthy of notice, because the success of 
the learner in studying .Spanish, as perhaps almost every other lan- 
guage, depends very much on the readiness with which he may be- 
come acquainted with the verbs and syntax. That terrible critx to 
all beginners, the different uses of the verbs ser and estar^ the authoi' 
lias laboured with earnestness and ingenuity to remove. He has ex- 
plained the difficulty with as much clearness, probably, as the nature 
of the subject will admit. 

Mr. Cubi has published in this country a small Spanish dictionary, 
com])iied Ironi the best authorities, designed as a manual for learners; 
and also selections from classical Spanish writers. Within the last 
year he has published a grammar in Spanish, intended for the South 
American market. To a gentleman of his talents, zeal, and indus- 
try, we cannot but wish a success proportioned to his ardour and 
exertions. 



From the BuUimore Gazette. 
The second edition of this elementary work has just issued from 
the press, an<l were it not for the title page, might pass for an entire 
new work. Mr. Cubi has had the advantage of much experience as 
an instructor ot the language, since the first publication of his gram- 
mar. He appears to have minutely noted the difficulties experienced 



by his numerous scholars, and has explained them iti the most satis- 
factory manner. Those great obstacles to the rapid progress of the 
student, the irregular verbs, the differences between ser and estar, 
and the personal pronouns, are removed by the ample elucidations of 
the author. The alphabetical list of the former, the full explanation 
and copious notes on the latter, make them plain to the dullest com- 
prehension. 

Some questions of pronunciation have likewise been investigated, 
on which much dispute formerly existed. The disposition of the ex- 
ercises has been altered materially for the better. The declensions 
of the nouns and verbs are all of them translated, which is essentially 
necessary for the English learner; and what is invaluable to a person 
•who wishes assistance in translating, and who is prosecuting the study 
of the language by Iwnself, a copious index of each point treated of in 
the work is added. This last is of itself an improvement entitling the 
second edition to great praise. In every point of view, this work may 
be looked upon as by far the best now before the public for the useful 
purposes for which it is intended. 



From the United States Litei^ary Gazette, 
Mr. Cxjbi has made many important additions and improvements 
in his second edition, which give evidence of much care and exertion; 
and we cheerfully recommend it to all, who are desirous of obtaining 
a thorough knowledge of the Spanish language. 



ANEW 



SPANISH GRAMMAR, 



TO EVERY CLASS OF LEARNERS. 



/ 
BY MARIANO CUBI Y SOLER. 



THIRD EDITION, 

REVISED, CORRECTED, SIMPLIFIED AND MUCH IMPROVED. 



BALTIMORE: 

PrBLlSHED BY FIELDING LUCAS, JUN'R, NO. 133 MARKET STREET. 

LONDON: 

BY BOOSEY & SONS, BROAD STREET, ROYAL EXCHANGE. 

1826. 



^^^>ii^^^ 



L\0 1 



DISTRICT OF MARYLAND, TO IVITI 

BE I r REMEMBERED, That on the nineteenth day of July, in the fifty- 
first year of the Iiult-peiidence of the United States of Ame?iea. jMaiiano Cubi 
y Solei-, of the said district, hath deposited in this office, the title of a book, th^ 
i-ighl wliereof he claims as author, iu the words following, to wit: 

"A New Spanish Grammar, adapted to every class of learners By Mariano 
Cubi y Soler. Third edition, revised, corrected, simplified and much improved.'* 

In conformity to the act of the Congrei'^ of the United States, entitled "An 
act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies of maps, charts 
and books, to the authors and propr'-ef-.-i of such copies, during the times 
therein mentioned;" and also to the act, entitled "An act supplementary to an 
act, entitled 'An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the copies 
of maps, charts and books, to the authors and proprietors of such copies 
during the times therein mentioned.' and extending the benefits thereof to 
the arts of designing, engraving, and etching hisforical and other prints.'' 
PHILIP MOORE, 
Clfrk of the District (^Maryland, 

J. D. Tovi, frinttr' 



I. 



:/ PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. 



For the unexampled patronage which has been ex- 
tended to this work, the author cannot but feel grateful 
to the American people. His exertions to render it 
more and more worthy of their approbation, have not 
been in any manner suspended or relaxed. 

In the second edition the economy of the work was 
entirely changed, and the most essential parts, com- 
pletely remodelled. This tended to establish its 
character more extensively, and it became generally 
used both in North and South America. Utility 
has been the sole aim of the author; and he has con- 
sequently availed himself of any remark, whether kind- 
ly suggested, or clothed in the asperities of enmity, 
which might render this work more worthy of public 
patronage. This third edition will, he hopes, afford 
sufficient evidence in support of this assertion. 

That the rules of orthography might not be without 
practical illustrations, the author has annexed to them 
a few reading lessons, which he has WTitten himself, to 
introduce whatever words he considered necessary for 
the improvement of the student's pronunciation. The 
explanations of the tenses have been simplified, and 
placed under the liead of Syntax. The complaint, 
with regard to the difficulty which the scholar encoun- 
tered in the commencement of the exercises, will na 
longer exist Their arrangement has been entirely 
1* 



■n. PREFACE. 

changedi and those under the first rules, written in a 
manner suitable to the capacity of young persons^ 
Every rule which was before considered either incor- 
rect or obscure, has been rendered accurate and per- 
spicuous. The whole grammar has, in fine, been re- 
vised and improved with all care and attention possible. 
To conclude these few remarks, the author will 
observe, that as language is antecedent to grammar, 
grammar can scarcely be called original; that there 
are certain rules immutably fixed, which have been, 
and must necessarily be the same so long as language 
exists; that, with regard to these, all grammarians 
have drawn from the same source, or one has followed 
the footsteps of another; and that, therefore, the public 
will not think the less of this production if some traces 
of the Spanish Academy, Fernandez, McHenry, Mur- 
ray, and other authors, are occasionally to be marked 
in it. For, with the exception of these instances, the 
writer thinks he has a claim to originality. Nor will 
it be withheld from him by any impartial judge, who 
will compare this work with any other of a similar 
nature now extant* 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 



It is a remarkable circumstance, that the Spanish 
language, which, since the days of Shakspeare, has 
remained in a state of oblivion, should now become an 
indispensable study, in a polite or commercial educa- 
tion. The gallant struggle of the Spaniards against 
the efforts of Napoleon; and the glorious achievements 
accomplished in South America, are the principal 
causes to which this revolution may be attributed. 

To support the Spanish literature, or to exhibit the 
merits of the illustrious men, who have enriched it 
with their productions, has, until lately, been consider- 
ed a useless and an idle task. It is only within these 
last eighteen years, that the English reviewers,* the 
German professors,! and the French literati,.t have 
viewed with astonishment and surprise the "prodigious" 

* See the Edinburgh Review, for Oct. 1306, p. 224— the Edin- 
burgh Review, for Oct. 1823-24, p. 393. This number contains 
a critical essay on the lyric poetry of Spain, which highly sup- 
ports the eminent character of this periodical work. 

t Lectures on the History of Literature, Ancient and Modern, 
by Frederick Schlegel, in 2 vols., — vol. 1, pp. 343 — 346: vol. 2, 
lectures xi. xxii. and pp. 186, 187, 188, &c. See the 3d vol. of 
the excellent History of Elegant Literature, by Bouterwek, (Ges« 
«hichte der Poesie und Beredsamkeit seit dem Ende des dreizehur 
ten Jahrhunderts,) 12 vols. Svo., 1801—1819. 

X See Sismundi's Literature of the South, (De la Litterature dn 
Midi de I'Europe,) 4 vols. 8vo., 1813. 



viii PREFACE. 

genius of Lope de Vega, and Calderon de la Barca: 
the ''sublimity and sympathetic feeling" of Garcilaso, 
and Boscan; and the ''lofty merits" of Frai Luis de 
Leon, Mendoza, Montemayor, Lrcilla, &c. Cervantes 
himself, whose Don Quixote is, "of all works of wit, 
the richest in spirit and invention, " and his Numanciaj 
SL perfect piece of dramatic composition, had not, until 
lately, been shown in a proper light. Now, however, 
that the merits and defects of the Spanish literature 
are daily placed before our view, in an able and unpre- 
judiced manner,* and that perfect translations! of the 
authors of merit who have been concealed for ages, are 
continually issuing from the press, the public may judge 
for itself. 

While the pens of the literary world are thus em- 
ployed in tracing the beauties and merits of the authors 
and language of Spaing it has been presumed, that to 

* A course of lectures on the History and Criticism of Spanish 
Literature, has been written by Professor George Ticknor, of 
Boston. This is certainly the production of much taste and la- 
bour. Although it has not yet been published, we have had the 
pleasure of perusing it; and we do not hesitate to pronounce this 
work, for plan and execution, the best of the kind, that has yet 
appeared. The perfect acquaintance which this gentleman pos- 
sesses with the Spanish language; the access which he has to 
the best editions of the many works he mentions; and his inde- 
fatigable industry in the pursuit of literary and scientific know- 
ledge, have rendered him so completely master of the subject he 
handles, that his production may be considered an invaluable 
acquisition, and entitled to the thanks of every friend to litera» 
ture and science. 

t See the works of Garcilaso de la Vega, surnamed the prince of 
Castilian poets, translated into English verse; with a critical and 
historical essay on Spanish poetry, and a life of the author; by 
J. K. Wiffeo, 8vo. 



PREFACE. ix 

labour in a work, which might tend to facilitate the ac- 
quisition of this noble idiom, could not but be desirable. 
This is the object of the present performance: how far 
it may prove successful, experience alone can deter- 
mine. The anxiety which the author feels for the 
diffusion of his native tongue, and the sense of grati- 
tude which he cherishes towards this nation, are the 
only motives that have induced him to embark in the 
present undertaking. 

In the composition and arrangement of this grammar, 
it has been the wish of the author to adapt it to all 
classes of learners. It is not, however, to be pre- 
sum.ed, that the necessity of teachers will be super- 
seded. The impression that a work can be written, by 
means of which alone, any capacity may learn the 
science it treats, is as common as it is fallacious. AVe 
cannot regard the books or methods adopted to com- 
pass the object of our pursuit-^, under any other aspect, 
than indispensable or necessary aids. They may afford 
more or less advantages, in proportion as they are 
adequate or indiflerent^ but the final success of the 
student will, and must absolutely depend, on his ap- 
plication, knowledge, capable instructors, particular 
talents, or appropriate age. This is as true as it is 
apparent. Can a youth, who has scarcely had time to 
leai'n the rudiments of his own language, understand 
the nature of another, with the same facility as the adult, 
who, by study and reflection, has acquired experience; 
quickened his penetration, and matured his judgment? 
Or, can a person without any general knowledge, and 
perhaps imperfect in his maternal tongue, apprehend 
AS rapidly, and apply as judiciously, the rules of any 



X PREFACE. 

science, as he who has made universal information the 
object of his constant pursuit? 

It must be confessed that these considerations have 
prevented the author from annexing to this volume the 
common and attractive phrase of ^''without a teacher ^^"^ 
not, however, from bestowing upon it all the labour 
and study possible, to render it as perspicuous and in- 
telligible, as the subject would permit. The convic- 
tion, that human capacity is limited in its operations, 
and that it is to very few individuals that nature has 
been bountiful in her gifts; has also induced the author 
to use his utmost efforts in endeavouring to place the 
contents of this grammar in a constant and regular 
gradation; and to make its arrangement suitable to the 
various modes of instruction. 

On the present edition of this work, more care and 
attention have been bestowed, than it was supposed it 
would ever require. The rapidity with which the first 
impression has been exhausted; the encomiums past 
upon it by the most eminent American journals; and 
the promptitude with which it was introdtKjed into the 
institutions of the United States, where the Spanish 
forms a branch of their instruction, are circumstances 
as flattering as they were unexpected to the writer. 
They have given impulse to new studies and researches; 
new discoveries have ensued, and when a second edi- 
tion of this performance has become necessary, the 
additions and improvements have been so numerous, 
that it may be pronounced almost a different book. 

It is hoped that, although no grammar can be entirely 
new, this may have claims, both in plan and execution, 
to some originality. It has not been a hasty produc- 
tion, nor has the zeal of the author been abated by 



PREFACE. xi 

difficulties, or has, in anj manner, the consideration, 
that seldom does the writer of an elementary work obtain 
much credit for his toil, weakened his exertions. When 
therefore, it shall be found, that in this present task, 
errors have been committed, or room for improvement 
has been left, let it be attributed to the deficiency of the 
author, and not to his pressure of time or want of study. 

As simplicity and clearness have been the guides by 
which the writer of this work has been directed, he 
has divided it into Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, 
and Prosody. These are the heads most commonly 
used, and most generally understood. It has always 
been the peculiar care of the author, never to sacrifice 
perspicuity to novelty, or precision to fancy. He is 
perfectly convinced, that how philosophical or logical 
soever new technical terms or modes of expression may 
appear, they always destroy the very purpose for which 
they are intended. 

It is a matter of peculiar gratification, that English 
words have been found, by means of which, the pre- 
cise and exact sound of the Spanish vowels can imme- 
diately be attained. The consonants have also been 
rendered perfectly intelligible; and rules for the true 
Castilian pronunciation have been laid down. As the 
sound of some consonants has given rise to various 
discussions, tiiey have been explained at large; and it 
is presumed, that irrefragable authorities having been 
produced, their pronunciation will now be permanently 
established. The hope may, therefore, be indulged, 
that the study of Spanish orthography will no longer be 
considered as a matter of difficulty. 

W ith a View to affi)rd greater facilities to those in- 
dividuals, who, being unacquainted with tlie rudiments 



xii PREFACE. 

of language in general, are anxious to acquire the 
Spanish, a concise treatise on grammar has been intro- 
duced into Etymology. The gender of nouns will, the 
author trusts, be found remarkably simple. A few 
clear and succinct rules, to distinguish it, have been 
given, and the exceptions to these rules, are placed in 
alphabetic order. Great care has been taken to place 
the declensions within the reach of any common capa- 
city. In regard to cases, two only have been adopted. 
It was imagined, that by this means, the difficulties, 
rules and anomalies of the Spanish language, could be 
much better elucidated, than if six had been used. 
Independently of this, the Castilian idiom differs, in 
this respect, from the ancient languages, in which, the 
words receive new modifications, according to their 
position in the sentence. 

The verb being the principal mover and spring of 
language, much attention has been bestowed upon it| 
and it is fondly hoped, not without some success. New 
and easy modes of conjugating the verbs have been in- 
troduced^ and to render them easy of acquisition, the 
English equivalent has always been added. The 
irregular verbs, which have always been considered 
one of the greatest intricacies in the study of the Span- 
ish language, no longer will present, it is believed, any 
difficulty to the learner. 

During the sixteenth and successive centuries, the 
tenses of Spanish verbs, underwent some changes, and 
a variety of riiodifications. To prevent the embarrass- 
ment which this novelty might offer, when the student 
should peruse the books written in those days, a view 
of the ancient terminations has been annexed to the 
verbs. Strong as the notion was, that the use of the 



• PREFACE. xiii 

tenses, which had been copied in the first edition of 
this volume, was beyond the possibility of change; fur- 
ther experience and study have devised some improve- 
ments and meliorations, which it is presumed, will not 
be altogether unworthy of the public. 

In the progress of the art of acquiring foreign lan- 
guages, it must be considered as a lamentable circum- 
stance, that each professor should be addicted to form 
a method of his own; and that whilst scientific men 
have been occupied in exploring the abstract regions of 
language, they should have left to the caprice of fashion, 
or to the fancy of innovators, the steps which end, 
where philosophical researches commence. Within late 
years, however, we find some individuals employed in 
explaining the elements of grammar, whose names 
cannot be mentioned without sentiments of reverence. 
It is to this circumstance, that we are to attribute the 
general adoption of exercises, to explain, elucidate, and 
impress the grammatical rules. This custom must be 
considered as the greatest advancement which has been 
made towards the art of acquiring languages. 

In taking a view of the many advantages resulting 
from the adoption of exercises, some are found, which 
cannot be passed in silence. By means of these prac- 
tical themes, no rule can be too obscure for the student's 
penetration; or misapprehended through his want of 
judgment. Practice brings his knowledge to the test^ 
if there be any deficiency or mistake, it immediately be- 
comes apparent; and it can therefore be supplied or cor- 
rected, by the explanation of an instructor, or the re- 
• newed efforts to which the learner is impelled. The 
act of correcting, either by writing or reading, a num- 
ber of sentences in which the rule, note, or observation 
2 



xiv PREFACE. 

in question is applied, must necessarily inculcate it on 
the student's mind; and the frequency of reference, 
supplies him with an abundance of words, and what is 
better, with the power of using them correctly. To 
the young beginner this method will teach, that some- 
thing more than mere repetition is necessary for im- 
provement; and in the adult, it will supersede the apti- 
tude which he once had to recollect words, and which he 
maynow have insensibly lost, either by the want of prac- 
tice, or the habit of reflection. Exercises will tend to 
establish firmly the long neglected truth, that he who re- 
collects a rule, may fail in the application of it; — that the 
manner in which a child acquires its native tongue, is, 
and must be essentially different from what vocabula- 
rists call to learn a language as nature teaches it;— that 
in the first instance, we acquire the oral signs, and their 
use, by the sensation which their sound and the novelty 
of their application produces upon our tender faculties, 
and the insensible impression' created in us by the con- 
stant desire of expressing our wants, or the curiosity we 
feel as new objects are presented to our view; — that in 
the second, we must possess a good memory to acquire 
a number of words and sentences, which, when known, 
(as no rules are given for their application,) throw the 
mind into confusion, the moment they are to be modi- 
fied, or our ideas differ from those conveyed in the 
phrases learned; — that to know the rules, or under- 
stand the books of an idiom, is not to speak it or to 
write it; — and that, practice in language, as in all 
other sciences, is the soul of improvement. 

These reflections, which the experience of years em- ■ 
boldens the author to believe are founded on the solid 
principles of common sense, have induced him to sup- 



PREFACE. XV 

ply every syntactical rule, note, and observation of 
this grammar, with a number of coi-respondmg exer- 
cises. In the arrangement of them, it will be per- 
ceived, that the gradual progress of the student, has 
been an object of great consideration. Much attention 
has also been paid to their selection. None have been 
admitted but those wliich had a moral tendency, or 
which would afford the student some instruction, in the 
various departments of useful learning. 

Reference has always been preferred to repetition; 
the author being convinced, that this is what most ac- 
customs the learner to study and reflection; the only 
two means by which he can make any rapid or solid 
advancement. 

As it cannot be supposed, that every one who will 
use this work, to acquire a knowledge of the Spanish 
language, has directed his attention to rhetoric, logic, 
or universal grammar; the rules, notes, or observations^ 
which, for the want of those studies, might appear 
obscure, have been fully explained. 

Having taken into consideration, that this work is 
intended to carry the student through a theoretical, as 
well as practical course of Spanish; peculiar care has 
been taken that the difference between the Imperfect, 
and the Preterite tenses; that of Ser and Estar; that 
of le and lo; the use of se; and of the pronouns in 
general, should be treated in a perspicuous and com- 
prehensive manner, to remove the impression that these 
parts of speech constitute insurmountable barriers in 
the acquirement of this language. 

As the speaking of the Spanish with propriety, as 
far as pronunciation is concerned, depends on a good 
knowledge of the accent: this has been treated at full 



m PREFACE. 

length in Prosody. The Versification has been mucR 
enlarged, and written in Spanish. This change has 
been effected, under the persuasion that it would afford 
infinite advantages to the learner. 

In the Appendix, the sjnonymes have been increas- 
ed| and the colloquial idioms, useful words, dialogues, 
and commercial documents, corrected and much im- 
proved. This grammar has also been supplied with an 
alphabetical Index, which, it is imagined, will be of 
great service to those persons, who, having learned the 
Spanish, may have occasion, from time to time, to solve 
some rising difficulties. In fact, nothing susceptible 
of melioration, has remained unnoticed^ and every 
thing, within the power of the author, that could ren- 
der this work valuable, has been added. 

It has been his constant care to avoid typographical 
mistakes, or inaccuracies of language; fully persuaded, 
that these imperfections are more apparent and inju- 
iious in grammars than in other works. As to the first, 
justice compels him to say, that owing to the accustom- 
ed unremitting attention of the printer, the number of 
them is so insignificant, that an errata is rendered to- 
tally unnecessary. Respecting the second, if any have 
escaped, the wTiter hopes, that as he has expressed 
himself in a foreign idiom, they will be regarded with 
some degree of lenity. 

The author will finally observe, that having been 
animated by the desire of being serviceable; no toil has 
been considered too irksome — no research too labo- 
rious — no study too difficult — no expense too great, to 
produce a complete Spanish grammar. Whether his 
wishes have been realized, he entirely leaves to the 
future decision of a free and enlightened people,' 



HISTORICAL SKETCH 



CASTILIAN LANGUAGE. 



That idiom, which has so often exacted the appella- 
tion of "the language of the gods," from men, both 
candid and learned, is spoken in that country, known 
in ancient times by the name of Iberia, from the river 
Iberus, by which it is watered. All eminent writers 
concur in the opinion, that, about fifteen hundred years 
before Christ, it was peopled by a colony of Phoenicians, 
who gave it the name of Spania, which, in their lan- 
guage, means a rabbit, from the multitude of these ani- 
mals which inhabited this place when they first entered 
it. ' 

After the Phoenicians had remained in peaceful pos- 
session of this country for 1142 years, in 468, before 
our era, it was entered by the Cartliaginians. This 
people, concealing their real intentions under the pre- 
text of commerce, began, by insinuating means, to 
strengthen themselves in this territory; but their inimi- 
cal designs were soon manifested; for, 233 years after 
their first appearance, Hamilcar, their general, brought 
2* 



sviii HISTORY OF THE 

the unsuspecting Phoenicians entirely under his do- 
minion. 

The unjust Carthaginians did not, however, long en- 
joy the benefit of this ungenerous and treacherous con- 
duct. In the year 200, before Christ, the Romans, 
whose power was now wide and irresistible, took pos- 
session of that country;— established there their own 
form of government; — introduced their own language; — 
and habituated the natives to their manners and cus- 
toms, for the space of 616 years, during which period 
they kept this territory under absolute subjection. 

When in 416, that mighty empire, at the mention of 
which all nations trembled, was inundated by hordes of 
fierce northern tribes, and was precipitated from that 
pinnacle of glory and power, to the vale of obscurity 
and insignificance, Spania, like most of Europe, was 
overrun by hosts of these barbarous invaders. In pro- 
portion as the Romans, in Spania, were subdued, they 
were, no doubt, anxious to be understood by their 
assailants, that, by this communication, their fall might 
be less intolerable. To accomplish this, they were 
obliged to have recourse to the desperate remedy of 
mutilating their precious and sonorous language. The 
Goths or Teutonicks, on the other hand, being unac- 
quainted with the beauties of language, were not ambi- 
tious either to refine or impart their idiom to the newly 
conquered provinces. As they found several difficul- 
ties to surmount in the Latin, they were unwilling to 
adopt this language of the subdued Romans. Among 
the greatest difficulties which the Goths experienced 
in the adoption of the Roman language, was the de- 
clension of nouns, for which reason they abandoned 
them, and in their place substituted prepositions. 



eASTILIAN LANGUAGE. xix 

This inflection of language, how trivial soever it may 
appear at first, hastened, more than any thing else, the 
destruction of the Latin and Gothic tongues in Spania; 
for, in 623, not long after the entire rejection of the 
declensions, when the Goths obtained full possession 
of that portion of the Roman empire, these two lan- 
guages were so adulterated, that they entirely con- 
stituted a new dialect, which received the name of 
Romance. This Romance became then the vernacular 
tongue of all Spania. 

In the year 714, when the Arabs suddenly over- 
whelmed, like a mighty torrent, all this country, the 
Romance underwent new modifications. It was then 
that it received those palatical sounds and sonorous 
expressions, which so eminently characterize the noble 
Castilian language. 

During the contests of the descendants of the Goths 
with the Musselmen, the Romance was recovering 
strength, in proportion as the former were gaining su- 
periority over the latter. As the first descendants of 
the Goths who distinguished themselves against the 
Musselmen, were natives of a province of that territory 
called Castilla, Castile; they all received the appella- 
tion of Castellanos, Castilians. 

The Phoenician term, Spania, had also now been 
converted into Espaiia, Spain, and thus the inhabitants 
of this country in general, were, and have ever after 
been, called Uspaholes, Spaniards. When the Spa- 
niards had entirely shaken off their Arabic yoke, the 
Romance received so great a cultivation in Castile, 
that it afterwards obtained the name of La Lengita 
Castellana^ the Castilian language, an appellation 



XX HISTORY OF THE 

which we ought always to give to the idiom of Spain, 
when spoken in its purity. 

Notwithstanding all the adulterations which the 
Latin or Roman language had undergone, when any 
thing was to be committed to public writing, it always 
appeared in the Latin language in its most correct 
state. This was continued until the time of Alphonsus 
the Wise, who, seeing the superiority which their own 
language would obtain if properly cultivated, prohibited 
the custom of writing in Latin, royal ordinances, con- 
cessions, privileges, and other public documents. 

This prince, the father of Castilian literature, evinced 
the greatest enthusiasm in the cultivation of the Ro- 
mance. To excite a taste and eagerness for it in every 
Castilian heart, he furnished, in the new language, a 
code of laws, which his father, St. Ferdinand, caused 
to be framed by the best advocates of his time. These 
laws were divided into sections or heads, called parti- 
das. Such was the reputation which these laws had 
acquired, that partida, when used in reference to them, 
became a term of excellence; and when Alphonsus had 
concluded them in the Romance, he entitled them las 
leyes de las partidas. The style in which he wrote these 
laws was so pure and majestic, that it not only dis- 
played the beauty and strength of the language at that 
early period, but it was not surpassed, or even equalled, 
by many cotemporary or posterior productions. 

These glorious labours of Alphonsus, which show at 
once his learning and attachment to his country, had 
the desired effect. They roused from a dormant state 
the Castilian genius — communicated emulation to those 
cold and indifferent hearts — showed them the treasure 
they possessed in their then imperfect language ; and 



CASTILIAN LANGUAGE. xxi 

literature and science became the objects of the Castil- 
ian mind. The Spaniards being inspired with this 
praiseworthy ambition,, thought of soaring higher than 
employing themselves, as they had done heretofore, in 
writing ballads and chivalric poems. For sOon after, 
the Chronicles of king St. Ferdinand, Don Alphonsus 
the Wise, Don Sancho IV. Don Ferdinand IV. and 
Don Alphonsus XI. appeared written in this language, 
which was not an inconsiderable step towards its per- 
fection. 

Whilst the Castilian genius was thus employed in 
beautifying and perfecting the newly adopted language, 
Pedro Lopez de Ayala^ that classical writer, made his 
appearance; and composed in a chaste, handsome, and 
relatively speaking, elegant style, the Chronicles of 
king Don Peter, those of Don Henry II., and those of 
Don John I. 

The Spaniards, at a very early period, were inspired 
with an almost irresistible taste for the romance, and 
in this species of composition they then excelled, and 
have ever after equalled, and even surpassed all other 
European nations. As to the chivalric writings, the 
Spaniards also distinguished themselves over the 
French, Italians, and English. In all their composi- 
tions, particularly in that entitled the Cid, the name of 
whose author was buried with himself, or has unfortu- 
nately remained concealed to the present day, the true 
Castilian spirit, a simplicity at those times not to be 
excelled, and a national feeling, worthy of the highest 
encomiums, manifested themselves. 

The greatest monument, however, that perpetuates 
the memory of the early efforts of Castilian genius, is 
the production of Juan Manuel^ efttitled, '''•El Condc 



xxii HISTORY OF THE 

Luccmor,^'^ Count Lucanor. This work, though writ- 
ten in the beginning of the fourteenth century, is not 
distinguished by any of the pomp or ostentation which 
disfigured, in some measure, the productions of that 
age. Experience and observation seem to have enrich- 
ed the author's fertile mind with a great fund of practi- 
cal philosophy, and modest, dignified sentiment, which 
he infused into the spirit of his writings. In his style 
he introduces no sought beauty or artificial embellish- 
ment^ a natural and even neglected simplicity pervades 
throughout, which greatly enhances the vast erudition 
and deep reflections with which all his works abound. 

This writer was a lineal descendant of king St. Fer- 
dinand, and distinguished for every good and great 
quality, that can adorn the human mind. Under king 
Alphonsus XL, he achieved so many heroic exploits, 
and performed so many brilliant actions, that obtained 
him a lasting glory. Endowed, as he was, with senti- 
ments lofty and generous, and with a judgment that 
nothing could misguide, he never became the victim of 
kingly jealousy or of party feeling. A universal ad- 
miration of the man and his works, was the happy lot 
of this author to enjoy during his life? and it has been 
the monument consecrated to his memory after his 
death. 

The productions of such a character and at such a 
period, gave great impulse to the budding genius of the 
Spaniards. Their effect on the language was not so 
immediate, half a century having elapsed since the 
wise Alphonsus had used so many exertions to carry it 
to some degree of perfection. The polished form, how- 
ever, that the Castilian idiom assumed in the fifteenth 
century, was owing in a very great measure to the la- 



CASTILIAN LANGUAGE. xxiii 

hours and popularity of Don Juan Manuel. This age 
is conspicuous in the literary annals of Spain for having 
produced Juan de Mena, the first of the Spanish great 
poets. Immortal praise is due to this son of the Muses 
for the labours he bestowed on his maternal tongue, 
and for his exertions to improve it, without the aid of 
any other dialect or idiom. 

Boscan, Garcilaso de la Vega, and liUis de Leon, 
the three greatest stars that, in the sixteenth century, 
rose to illumine the dawn of Castilian poetry, changed 
in some degree the character of the language. By their 
close imitation of the Italian poets, they gave the Span- 
ish those soft and sweet tones, which are heard amidst 
its Latin majesty, Gothic strength, and Oriental pomp. 

By the labours of these eminent authors, the Spanish 
idiom had taken some rapid strides towards refinement 
and elegance. Happily, they were only harbingers of 
the degree of perfection to which it would be carried 
by a Cervantes, whose genius for the Romance has been 
the inimitable example of all other nations, and by 
which he has immortalized his name and his composi- 
tions. By a Francisco de Quevedo Villegas, whose 
prose and poetical writings are entitled to the highest 
admiration of the learned. By a Granada, whose 
chaste and eloquent style will ever be the pride of 
Spain. By an Alego Venegas, a Fernando Perez de 
Oliva, whose profound and philosophical treatises will 
always be read \nth interest and advantage. By a 
Lopez de Vega, a Calderon de la Barca, whose dramatic 
powers have entitled Spain to the boasted appellation 
of being equal to any as to comedy. By a Juan Rufo, 
an Alphonso de Ercilla, whose two heroic poems. La 
Austriada of tlie fonner. La Araucaua of the latter, 



xxiv CASTILIAN LANGUAClE. 

reflect honor on the poesy of Spain. By a Solis, a 
Clarijo, a Palafox, an Argensola, a Jovellanos, a Mon- 
tengon, an Isla, a Melendez Valdez, and, in fine, by 
numberless other eminent writers, who have rendered 
Spain, in a literary point of view, the competitor of 
any country. 



CONTENTS. 



PART I.— ORTHOGRAPHY. Page. 

Characters of the Spanish language, .... 25 

Sound of the vowels, 26 

Sound of the consonants, ib. 

Rules to rea'd the Spanish, without any foreign accent, 29 

Diphthongs and Triphthongs, . . . '. . 31 

Reading lessons, . ...... 32 

On spelling, 43 

A list of words similar in sound, but different in spelling, 44 
On the manner of dividing the Spanish, words into syllables, 45 

Of some marks used in punctuation, ... 46 

The Accent, . 47 

List of Abbreviations used in writing, . . . 49-54 

PART II.— ETYMOLOGY. 

Of the Noun, . 56 

Of Augmentative and Diminutive nouns, ... 57 

Of Collective nouns, .^ ib. 

Of Gender, 58 

Of Number, 64 

Of Case, . 65 

Of the Article, 67 

Of the Adjective, 69 

Of the degrees of Comparison, 71 

Of Cardinal and Ordinal numbers, .... 72 

Of Pronouns, . 75 

Pronouns, personal, relative, .interrogative, definitive, 76-80 

Of Verbs. . 80 

Of number, person, tense, mood, participle, gerund, 82-84 

Of Conjugation, . . ..... 85 

Conjugation of the auxiliary verbs, , . 85-100 

Of regular verbs, , , , lOO 



xxvi CONTENTS. . 

Formation of the tenses of the regular verbs, , 101-108 

Formation of the participle and gerund, . . 107-108 

Conjugation of regular verbs active, . . . 109-116 

Conjugation of passive verbs, .... 117-119 

Conjugation of a reflective verb, .... 119-121 

Regular verbs, . . . . . . . . 121 

Irregular verbs, . . 122 

Conjugation of the irregular verbs, .... 125 

Alphabetical list of all the irregular verbs, . . 156-164 

Impersonal verbs, . ib. 

Defective verbs, , . . . " . . . . 169 

Irregular participles, . . . . . . 171 

Properties of some participles, . . . , . 1 74 

Ancient and modern terminations of verbs, . . 175 

Of Adverbs, . 179 

Adverbial phrases, ■ . • 183 

Of Prepositions, . . 184 

English prepositions, with their correspondent in Spanish, 185 

Of Conjunctions, . , 188 

Of Interjections, 190 

PART III. —SYNTAX. 

Explanation of some marks used in the exercises, . 192 

Agreement of the Article, rule 1, notes and exercises, . 193 

Use of the Article, rules 2, 3, 4, 6, 6, 7, notes and exercises, 194-205 
Omission of the Article, rules S, 9, 10, l\, notes and exercises, 205-213 
Use of the neuter article la, rule 12, notes and exercises, ib. 

Rules for the use of the English definite article c, . 214 

Use of the noun, ruie 13, noies and ea?emses, . . . 219 
Observations on the Adjectives, . . . . 221 

Agreement of Adjectives, rule 14, notes and exercises, 222-226 
Position of Adjectives, rule 15, notes and exerciseSy . ib. 

Accidents of Adjectives, rule 16, notes, &c. . 229-235 

Of Comparison, rides 17, IS, notes and exercises, . 235-240 

Of Superlatives, rules 19, 20, notes and exercises, . 240-244 

Of Adjectives which require some prepositions, • 244-247 

Of Pronouns, ........ 248 

Of Personal Pronouns, . ... . . . 249 

Observations on vos^ vosotros and vmd., , • • ib. 

Position of the Nominative, and exercises^ > > - 250 



CONTENTS. xxvii 

Position of the Ist objective case, and exercises, . 25S 

Position of the 2d objective case, and exercises, . . 266 

Use of the 1st objective case, and exercises, . . 257 

Use of the 2d objective case, and exercises, . . . 259 

Observation on the two objective cases, and exercises, . 261 

Observation on se, and exercises^ 263 

Observation on le and Zo, and exercises, . , . 267 

Agreenient and use of possessive pronouns, . . . 270 

Observation on the possessive pronouns, and exercises, . 274 

Agreement and relations of relative pronouns, notes, &c. 279 

Use of the relative pronouns, rules, notes, and exercises, 280 

Interrogative Pronouns, notes and exercises, . . 286 
Agreement and use of demonstrative pronouns, 288-295 
Indefinite Pronouns, rules, notes, and exercises, . 296-304 

Of Verbs, 305 

The present tense, 305 

Imperfect Indicative, 309 

Perfect Indefinite, 310 

Observation on the Imperfect and Perfect, . . .311 

Perfect Definite, 314 

Pluperfect, 316 

Future Imperfect, . * 318 

Future Perfect, ib. 

Imperative mood, 320 

Subjunctive mood, 322 

Present, . ib. 

Imperfect, . 323 

Terminations ra, ria, se, 324-326 

Perfect, 329 

Pluperfect, 330 

Future Imperfect, 331 

Future Perfect, 332 

Observation between the imperfects and future of the sub- 
junctive, ib. 

Infinitive mood— present, perfect, gerund, participle, 334-338 

Recapitulatory exercises of the tenses of verbs, . . 340 

Agreement of verbs, . ..... 344 

Collective nouns, . 349 

Use of /looer and fener, ■. 351 



xxtiii CONTENTS. 

Use of ser and estar, ...,.., 354 
Recapitulatory exercises on the impersonal and irregular 

verbs, . ....... 363 

Government of verbs, ....... 366 

Of verbs governing the infinitive, ..... 367 

Verbs governing the indicative or subjunctive, notes and 

exercises, . . . . . , . .370 

Of verbs requiring certain prepositions, . . . 374 

Verbs requiring the preposition de, notes and exercises, . ib. 

Verbs requiring the preposition a, notes and exercises, 378 

Verbs requiring en, notes and exercises . . . 382 

Verbs requiring con, 383 

Of Prepositions required by verbs of motion, notes, obser- 
vations and exercises, ...... 385 

Of Adverbs, notes, observations and exercises, . . . 389 

Of Prepositions, 390 

Of Conjunctions, nofes and ea;e?-cises, .... 391 

Of Interjections, wo^es and ea^ercises, .... 397 
Prudence — Gratitude — Discretion — Employment of time — 

Judgment; — being extracts, used as exercises, . 398-403 

PART IV.— PROSODY. 

Accent, 405 

Rules to know on vt^hich vowel to lay the stress in the 

tenses of verbs, 409 

APPENDIX. 

Colloquial idioms, . 411 

Synonymes, . ....... 423 

A concise and useful vocabulary of the most necessary 

words, . . ...... 428 

The most necessary and useful dialogues, . . 443 

Commercial documents, 461 

Versification, . • 470. 

Alphabetical Index, . , . . . , . 481 



SPANISH GRAMMAR. 



Spanish Grammar is the art of speaking and of 
writing the Spanish Language with propriety. It is 
divided into four parts, viz: Orthogi'aphj, Etymology, 
Syntax, and Prosody. 

PART I. 

ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Orthography shows the sound, power, and proper 
combination of letters, to form syllables or words. 

The Spanish Alphabet is composed of the following 
Characters: A, B, C, CH, D, E, F, 
Names:* «/i,t bai, thai, chaV, they, o, ai'ffey, 

G, H, I, J, K, L, LL, M, 
hay, at'chey, ee, hot'tah, kah, ai'ley, aiVliey, ai'mey 

N, N, 0, P, Q, R, S, T, 

ai'ney, ain'niey, o, pay, koo^ air'rey, ais'sey, tay, 

V, V, X, Y, Z. 

00, vai, ai'keez^ eegreeai' ghah, thai'tah, 

* The name should not be mistaken for the sound of the letters. 
For instance, the name of the character Z, is Ihnitah; at the same 
time that its sound is like tli in thanks. The name has therefore 
relation to the peculiar appellation by which a letter, when it 
forms no combination with others, is distinguished. The sound 
is that noise which is made in pronouncing a letter when com- 
bined Avith others. 

t The author is well aware that it is impossible to give, by 
English sounds, the names of the Spanish letters exactly, as a 



26 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

A, E^ I, 0, U, are called vowels, because they con- 
tain a perfect sound in themselves; all the rest are 
consonants, because it is impossible to utter them with- 
out the assistance of the vowels. 

The consonants are divided into mutes, and semi- 
vowels. Mutes are those letters, the sound of which, 
begins with themselves, and the vowel is placed last. 
They are B, C, CH, D, G, J, K, P, Q, T, V, Z. 

Semivowels are those, whose sound cannot be uttered 
without beginning with a vowel, such are: F, H, L, 
LL, M, N, N, R, S, X. 

SOUND OF THE VOWELS. 

The sound of the Spanish vowels, is exactly the same 
as that of the English vowels, in the following words: 

BdiV, Pr^y, Pique, No, Rvde. 



SOUND OF THE CONSONANTS. 

B, D, F, K,* L, M, N, P, T,t V, sound as in Eng- 
lish. 

Spaniard would pronounce them. He has, however, endeavoured 
to effect it, as well as the variety of sound that can be formed by 
the several combinations of the letters of the English Alphabet, 
would permit him. 

* This letter is used in foreign words only, its place being sup- 
plied in Spanish by c and q. 

t The sound of d and f, is not exactly the same in English, as 
it is in Spanish. There is a difference, which, although trifling 
in itself, is very perceptible, and therefore should be noticed. 

It will be observed, that, in speaking the English, the sound of 
t and d, is formed by striking the end of the tongue against the 
roof of the mouth. In Spanish the end of the tongue is used in 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 27 

C, before «, o, ?/, or a consonant, sounds like k; as, 
caco, cuco; before e, f,* like th in the word ^AicA;/ as,. 
Ciceron. 

CH, is pronounced like ch in the English word cha- 
rity; as, chalon, chacho. 

the same manner, but instead of striking the palate, it strikes the 
upper teeth. The d, therefore, uttered after the Spanish manner, 
is very similar to the sound of th, in the English word f/ian, 
f/iough, &c. 

This sound of (?, not being very easy, those Spaniards who 
have not attended particularly to the study of elocution, are 
apt to give this letter, when it terminates a word, the sound of t.. 
Those whose education has been neglected, do not pronounce it 
at all. Certain it is, however, that one of the principal rules of 
the Spanish orthography is, never to give two sounds to a letter, 
nor ever to express two sounds by one single character. From 
this then it follows, that not to pronounce the d at the end of 
words, or to pronounce it like t, is inconsistent with the funda- 
mental rules of Spanish orthography, and that, it must necessa- 
rily be pronounced as in any other part of the word. The sound 
of d therefore at the end of Spanish w^ords, is like, or very nearly 
like, ih, in soof/i, loa/Ae, &c. as, Deidad,verdad, tened, ardid. This 
sound is supported by the most eminent Spanish preachers, ora- 
tors, lawyers, such as Ergiiellas, Galiano, &c. 

* With regard to the sound of c, before e or i, it must be ob- 
3erved, that it is not universal. In some provinces of Spain, as 
for instance, Galicia, Estremadura, Jlsturias, and in all South Jlmtri- 
ca, the generality of people sound it as s, in the English words, 
set, seat. The Andalusians give it a kind of lisp, and sound it 
with some affectation. It is in old and new Castile alone, that 
it is universally given to this letter the sound of th. But as the 
most erudite people of all the provinces both of old and new 
Spain, sound the c in the manner that is done by the Castilians; — 
as no rules of the Spanish Academy at Madrid, are more strongly 
inculcated than those relative to the sounding of the c before e or 
i like th in the English words thank, thick; — and as this sound, 
according to our opinion, is the most compatible with the genius 
of the Spanish languagCj we have no hesitation in saying, that 



28 , ORTHOGRAPHY. 

G, Ijefore a, o, u^ or a consonant, sounds as in Eng- 
lish in the word gate.^ as, gana^ laguna; before e, i, ?/, 
as the English aspirate hf as, gigo^ geme. In the 
syllables gue, gui^ the u is mute, unless there oe a 
diseresis on it. 

H, is never pronounced. 

J, sounds always as g^ before e, i; eiS,jaco^jo, 

LL, sounds like the li of the English word pavilion; 
as, Uanto, lloro^ llega. 

N, sounds like ni in the English word pinion; as 
iiono, nudo, Una, 

Q, which is always followed by w, is pronounced as 
In English. In the syllables que, qui, the u is mute^ 
unless there be a diuresis on it. 

R,t sounds rough; 1st, when it is doubled; Sndly, 
when it begins a word; and 3rdly, after I, n, s; in all 
other caseSj it is pronounced smoothly. 

those who wish to speak the Spanish with purity, should adopt 
this manner of pronouncing the c. 

* Absolutely speaking, the English possesses no equivalent to 
the sound of Spanish g before e or i. The sound of the aspirate 
h in horde, host, seems to be the most similar to it. It is not how- 
ever, exactly alike. There exists some difference, which is this, 
that the sound of the English aspirate h is effected by an effort of 
the throat; and the Spanish g by an effort of the palate. It is 
for this reason, that the late Spanish writers on orthoepy, call 
this, a palatical, not a guttural sound. The author concurs per- 
fectly well with their opinion; and he, therefore, advises those 
persons anxious to acquire this sound, never to endeavour to 
form it by a strong impulse of the throat and lungs, but by a gen» 
tie effort of the upper end of the root of the mouth. 

f The Rj in the Spanish language, must always be thrilled; 
that is, it must be sounded by applying the end of the tongue to 
1>,p inside of the upper teeth, and make it vibrate, 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 29 

S, is always sounded as in the English word six^ as, 
sesos, sesera. 

X, before a vowel without a circumflex accent, sounds 
like g before e, i; as, coxo; in all other cases as in 
English; as, extinguir, exdmen. 

Y, is sounded as in English. When it stands alone, 
in which case it is a conjunction meaning and, it must 
be pronounced as i* in the English words fatigue^ ma- 
chine; as, padre j madre; father and mother. 

Z, sounds always as th in the word tliorn; as, zazoro^ 
zarza. 

Fundamental rules to read the Spanish loithout any 
foreign accent. 

1st. To pronounce every letter, except the /i, and 
the u in gue, gui, and que, qui. 

2nd. To pay particular attention to the peculiar ac- 
cent of each word, to know which, rules are given in 
Prosody. 

3rd. To sound every vowel fully and distinctly, 
leaving, as it were, the consonants to take care of 
themselves. 

4th. Never to pass over the small words, but to pro- 
nounce them clearly and distinctly. Tliis rule must 
be particularly attended to, as it is a cliaracterlstic of 
the English language never to have such words as, me, 
the, to, up, on., in, &c., sounded distinctly; unless the 
meaning of the sentence should reouire an emphasi« 
upon them. 

5th. Never to give a very strong emphasis to any 
particular word in the sentence; for, as every word is 

* Many late authors make use of i instead oft/, to express thi? 
conjunction. 



80 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

fully pronounced, there is not much room for particu- 
larizing any one with uncommon vehemence. 

6th. In the general tone of conversation, the sound 
must never be transmitted to the throat, as is generally 
done in English at the end of sentences; but let it be 
extinguished in the hollow of the mouth. 

7th. It is necessary not to fall into the erroneous 
impression that the Spaniards sound the letters B and 
V alike. There is no rule in the late treatise upon 
orthography, by the Spanish Academy at Madrid, which 
is so strongly inculcated as the one relating to the 
difference which must necessarily exist between the 
sound of B and V. The Spanish Academy, ought, on 
any occasion, to be sufficient authority to prove the 
correctness of any rule we may be disposed to give. 
But, as this erroneous impression has become very 
general, particularly among those persons, who, not 
understanding the Spanish language perfectly well, 
have heard native Spaniards speak, we shall explain 
the reason which has induced them to form an opinion 
so contrary to the rules of Spanish pronunciation. 

The Spaniards in pronouncing the V, join, like the 
English, the upper teeth to the lower lip. But, as in 
all those languages which have been chiefly formed 
from the Latin, the consonants are never sounded 
strongly, the pressure in Spanish, is not so strong as it 
is in English. In fact, none of the consonants are so 
strongly pronounced in Spmiish^ Italian^ &c., formed 
from the Latin, as they are in English, Gennan, &c. 
Hence it is, that the sound of V seems to be so near 
that of B; and that persons, who are not perfectly con- 
versant with the Spanish, find it so difficult to perceive 
the distinction between these two sounds; but which 
•listinction, is, in fact, as great as it is in English* 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



31 



DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 

When in the same syllable two vowels come together 
they are called a diphthong; and when three, a triphthong. 





Diphthongs, 




ai, as in 


amms, 




ye love. 


au, 


causa., 




cause. 


ei, 


tenets, ret 




ye havei king- 


ea, 


sea, 




let it be. 


eo, 


reo. 




culprit. 


eUf 


dewda. 




debt. 


ia, 


tia, 




aunt. 


ie, 


hien, 




well. 


io, 


\io. 




bundle. 


ill, 


\iifdaL, 




widow. 


oe, 


roe, 




he gnaws. 


oi, 


sols, doi, 




ye are 5 give. 


Utty- 


ipua, 




sharp point. 


lie, 


hueyo. 




egg- 


ui, 


ciadado, 




care. 


no, 


ardz^o. 




' arduous. 




Triphthongs. 




iai, 


teniais, 




ye had. 


iei, 


lidieis, 


ye may contend. 


uai, 


santigwms. 


huei, 


ye bless; ox. 


uei, 


averigzVeis, 


ye may investigate. 



Whenever any of the vowels of the diphthongs are ac- 
cented, they cease to be diphthongs; because each 
vowel belongs then to a separate syllable; as, lei, bria^ 
k-f, bri-o. 



35 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

READING LESSONS. 







Lesson 1. 






Woi 


'ds of 


one Syllable, 


la 


the 




sud 


south 


ml 


dog 




luz 


light 


dar 


to give 




cruz 


cross 


san 


saint 




frai 


father 


ser 


to be 




rei 


king 


ver 


to see 




sets 


six 


el 


he 




veis 


ye see 


te 


tea 




reo 


culprit 


sS 


I know 




leo 


I read 


mes 


month 




sien 


temple 


ir 


to go 




mio 


mine 


niit 


a thousand 




tio 


uncle 


fin 


end 




lio 


bundle 


col 


cabbage 




Bios 


God 


sol 


sun 




doi 


I give 


por 


for 




soi 


I am 


don 


gift 




vol 


I go 


un 


one 




juez 


judge 


su 


his 


Le« 


iSON 2. 






Words of 


two Syllables. 




Accent over the first. 


ar4e 


art 




lu-na 


moon 


al-ma 


soul 




ra-yo 


ray 


ham-bre Imnger 




cla-ro 


clear 


dn-gel 


angel 




ye-lo 


ice 


saurto 


saint 




glo-bo 


fflobe 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



mr-te 


north 


ner-vio 


nerve 


es-te 


east 


ve-na 


vein 


oes-te 


west 


san-gre 


blood 


ist-mo 


isthmus 


pe-lo 


hair 


cues4a 


cost 


fren-te 


forehead 


fo-so 


ditch 


cue-llo 


neck 


pol-vo 


dust 


pe-cho 


breast 


lo-do 


mud 


hom-hros 


shoulders 


o-la 


w'£i\e 


co-do 


elbow 


puer-to 


port 


ma-no 


hands 


fuen-te 


spring 


ce-ja 


eyebrow 


si-glo 


age 


o-dio 


hatred 


a-no 


year 


go-zo 


joj 


mar-zo 


March 


de-seo 


desire 


ma-yo 


May 


vis-ta 


sight 


ju-lio 


July 


oi-do 


hearing 


quin-ce 


fifteen 


tac-to 


the touching 


ho-ra 


hour 


guan-tes 


gloves 


lu-nes 


Monday 


sue-gro 


father-in-law 


jue-ves 


Thursday 


sim-bol 


symbol 


vier-nes 


Friday 


ju-go 


juice 


al-va 


dawn 


ja-que 


bully 


tar -de 


evening 


jue-go 


play 


no-che 


night 


yer-ro 


error 


fies-ta 


holiday 


jar-ro 


pitcher 


cuer-po 


body 


zon-zo 


dunce 


hue -so 


bone 








L 


ESSON S. 






Accent 


over the second 




na-riz 


nose 


re-loj 


watcli 


a-loR 


wing 


bas-ton 


stick 


a -mar 


love 


cor- don 


tag 



34 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



ju-bon 


spencer 


Ge-sus 


Jesus 


mu-ger 


woman 


do -lor 


pain 


pin-tor 


painter 


ver-dad 


truth 


Plu4on 


Pluto 


sa-lud 


health 


In-'gles 


English 


pre-til 


breastwork 


Fran-ces 


French 


ju-gad 


play ye 


Sac-son 


Saxon 


ja-bon 


soap 


du-dad 


city 


sa-gaz 


sagacious 


fi-gon 


cook shop 


US-ted 


you 


por-tal 


threshold 


gor-jal 


collar 


jar-din 


garden 


bajad 


descend ye 


si-llon 


armchair 


dei-dad 


deity 


per-diz 


partridge 


cau-sais 


ye excite 


pi-chon 


pigeon 


ren-dis 


ye surrende:P 


ja-mon 


ham 


te-neis 


ye hold 


mor-tal 


mortal 


vol-veis 


ye return 


vir-tud 


virtue 


ger-men 


germ 


so-cial 


social 


lu-gar 


village 


sa-lon 


hall 


ea-fe 


coffee 


fi-lial 


filial 


so-lar 


ground-floor 




Lesson 4. 






Words of 


three Syllables. 




Accent over the second. 


hor-ras-ca storm 


gra-ni-zo hail 


es-tre-lla 


star 


se-re-no 


evening dew 


htc-ma-no 


humane 


pe-lle-jo 


skin 


cria-tu-ra 


creature 


ca-be-za 


head 


co-lo-nia 


colony 


ce-le-bro 


brain 


con-da-dc 


shire 


me-gi-lla 


cheek 


a-bis-mo 


abyss 


mu-ne-ca 


wrist 


eo-lla-do 


hill 


ro-di-lla 


knee 


ml-za-da 


cause-way 


me-mo-ria memory 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



35 



ca-mi-no 


road 


ves-ti-do 


dress 


cas-cci'jo 


gravel 


he-bi-llas 


buckles 


ar-ro-yo 


brook 


som-bre-ro 


hat 


es-tan-que 


pond 


cor-ba-ta 


cravat 


E-ne-ro 


January 


pa-ra-gua 


umbrella 


ma-na-na 


morning 


en-ca-ge 


lace 


cua-res-ma 


lent ^ 


zar-ci-llos 


ear-rings 


do-min-go 


Sunday 


sor-ti-ja 


ring 


in-vier-no 


winter 


man-ti-lla 


shawl 


a-yu-no 


fast day 


man-gui-to 


snuff 


a-bue-lo 


grand-father 


con-de-sa 


countess 


mu-cka-cho 


boy 


mar-que-sa 


marchioness 


mo-ci-to 


lad 


se-no-ra 


lady 


ma-dras-tra 


step-mother 


vi-driT-'o 


glazier 


his-nie-to 


great grand 


li-bre-ro 


book-seller 




son 


can-te-ro 


mason 


cu-na-do 


brother-in- 


Bo-hS-mio 


Bohemian 




law 


Pru-sia-no 


Prussian 


so-hri-no 


nephew 


Po-la-co 


Pole 


her-ma-no 


brother 


mer-ca-do 


market 


pa-dri-no 


god-father 


pa-la-cio 


palace 


pa-dras-to 


step-father 


co-me-dia 


play-house 


jKi-rien-te 


relation 


a-jon-ge 


birdlime 


o-bis-po 


bishop 


men-jun-ge 


a beverage 


sol-te-ro 


bachelor 


don-ce-lla 


maid 


his-nie-to 


grand-son 








Lesson 5. 






Accent over the first. 




vas-ta-go 


bud 


bi-bli-co 


biblical 


cd-ma-ra 


chamber 


bu-ca-ro 


earth-vessel 


bdr-ba-ro 


barbarian 


cdr-di-ne 


hinge 


ge-ne-ro 


kind 


laU'da-no 


laudanum 



m 



36 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



ha-ja-mar 


low water 


cdl-cu-lo 


calculation 


hi-ga-do 


liver 


cS-du-la 


slip of paper 


huer-fa-no 


horfan 


ce-fi-ros 


zephyrs 


Bd-va-ro 


Bavarian 


S-po-m 


epoch 


Hiin-ga-ro 


Hungarian 


e-po-do 


epode 


In-cli-to 


renowned 


gim-ni-co 


gymnastical 


dn-gu-lo 


angle 


ju-bi-lo 


jubilee 


ti-tu-lo 


title 


in-ti-mo 


injtimate 


hdl-sa-mo 


balsam 


vd-li-do 


valid 


Id-gri-ma 


tear 


ro-tu-lo 


inscription 


Ids-ti-ma 


Ft J 


ndu-ti-ca 


nautical 


jd-be-ga 


moorish flute 


. ul-ti-mo 


last 


jd-ca-ra 


prattle 


tdc-ti-ca 


tactics 


prdc-ti-ca 


practice 


pul-pi-to 


pulpit 


s6-li-do 


solid 








Lesson 6^ 






Words of four Syllables. 




Be-pu-bli-ca 


republic 


ma-yo-rdz-go heir 


es-pi-ri-tu 


spirit 


za-pa-te-ro 


shoemaker 


n-ni-vSr-so 


universe 


ho-ri-z6nte 


horizon 


e-le-men-tos 


elements 


bo-fi-cd-rio 


apothecary 


fe-sur-reodon resurrec- 


cer-ra-ge-ro 


locksmith 




tion 


in-vd-li-do 


invalid 


es46-ma-go 


stomach 


jor-na-dz-ta 


little jour- 


Ja-za-ri-no 


Algerine 




ney 


jo-cun-di-ddd 


jocundity 


in-flec-si-on^ 


inflexion 


jar-re-ti-Ho 


little ram 


las-ci-vid-so 


lascivious 


jar-di-ni-co 


little gar- 


par-vi-fi-co 


parsimo- 




den 




nious 


a-jon-jo-li 


purging 


pa-ja-ri-co 


little bird 




grain 


pe-pi-na-zo 


blow with 


a-la-bdn-za 


praise 




cucumber 



DRTHOGRAPHY. 



37 



Lesson 7'. 
Words of five^ six^ ^c. 
Re-tro^gra-da-cion 
ge-ne-ra-li-si-mo 
Ge-ro-so-li-7ni-td-no 
Jo-co-sa-mai-te 
lu-ju-rio-sa-men-te 
pe-chi-co-lo-rd-do 
no-na-ge-nd-rio 
im-pres-cin-di-ble 
pa-ra-do-gi-co 
hi-po-ces-ti-de 
ca-pe-Iar-den-te 
in-cer-ti-dum-bre 
ca-ha-lle-ri-za 
de-se-cha-da-men-tt 
ar-qui'tec-tu-ra 
con-des-cen-den-cia 
ec-sa-ge-ra-cion 
es-tra-or-di-na-ria-men-tc 
gra-cid-si-si-mo 
mag-na-ni-mi-ddd 
ra-zo-na-mien-to 
ri-si-bi-li-ddd 
su-pers-ti-cio-so 
re-mo -li-mien-to 
re-in-cor-po-ra-cidn 
ir-re-mi'Si-ble-men-te 
con-de-co-ra-ci6n 
re-mu-ne-ra-cion 
in-de-pen -den-da 
al-ti-so-ndn-cia 
tem-pes-tl-va-men-te 
4 



Syllables, 
retrogradation 
commander in chief 
native of Jerusalem 
jocosely 
luxuriously 
goldfinch 
nonagenarian 
inseparable 
paradoxical 
a shoot of the cistus 
a funeral pile 
inceititude 
stable 
vilely 

architecture 
condescendence 
exaggeration 
extraordinarily 
very gracefully 
magnanimity 
speech 
risibility 
superstitious 
act of regrinding 
re-incorpoiation 
unpardonably 
decoration 
remuneration 
independence 
high so'Jtidedness 
opportunely 



38 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Lesson 8. 
LA LENGUA CASTELLANA. 
Este noble idioma que se distinguio en los tiempoc 
de obscuridad j riideza por su cultivo j magestad; en 
los dias de ilusti^acion y elegancia, le vemos estendido 
liasta los ultimos coniines del nuevo miindo, j sobrepii- 
jar en utilidad a los demas del orbe. Digan lo que 
quieran los enemigos de esta lengua, jamas podran 
negar, que tanto por riqueza, j hermosura, como por 
copiosidad j energia, no iguale y aun Ueve ventaja a 
cuantos se conocen. Los autores que con sus pro- 
ducciones imortales la ban enriquecido, son y seran el 
deleite y la admiracion de los siglos presentes y venide- 
ros. No hai materia por abstrusa que sea por la cual 
la Espaiia no haya producido varones insignes que la 
hayan tratado como merecia. No hai ninguna especie 
de poesia ya sea del genero elevado 6 del simple en que 
no cuente esta nacion sus hijos eminentes. No hai 
ningun evento historico, ocurrido en tiempos antiguos 6 
modernos, que no se halle mencionado con veracidad, 
pureza y elegancia, por los cronologos de esta nacion. 
La Espaiia ha producido tambien hombres elocuenti 
simos; profundisimos jurisconsultos, grandes astrono- 
mos, que con todos los demas varones ilustres en la 
literatura y en la ciencia, han elevado el magestuoso 
idioma Espaiiol al auge en que se halla. 

Lesson 9. 

LA LENGUA INGLESA. 

Pretenden muchos que a este sublime idioma le faltan 

conos suaves; que la frecuencia de s fuerte hace sus sen- 

tencias desagradables al oidoj que sus aspiraciones le 



GRTHOliRAPHY. 39 

quitan sii elegancia? j que se lialla todavia en un estado 
de rudeza ;Ciian ciega es la iguorancia! Nada es su~ 
perfluo en un lenguage, toda voz tiene su propio lugar 
seiialado. j siempre sera dura 6 suave, harmoniosa 6 
desagradable, segun se use en la frase. Ni la s, ni la //. 
ni la sh, son de ninguna desventaja; al contrario cuan- 
do se hayan de espresar palabras que por su sonido se 
quiera hacer entender el sentido, son e:5tas letras las 
que mas lo efectuan. 

Tiene el idioma Ingles tantos difereiites sonidos, 
tantas modificaciones de acento y enfasis, tanta variedad 
de pronunciacion, que hace su adquisicion dificilisiina 
d todo estrangero. No es pues de cstranar que uno? 
desalentados por sus dificultadesj j otros frustados en 
la esparanza de adquirirle, le hayan pronunciado en un 
estado de rudeza. Sin embargo no se espresan asi, 
aquellos, que, penetrados de los obstaculos que han de 
vencerse en el estudio de esta lengiia, le hayan abierto 
por medio de su perseveranciu y aplicacion, sus inmen- 
sos tesoros; aquellos, digo, que enlienden y sienten la 
suavidad y fuerza que se deben dar a muchos sonidos. 
cuya dureza solo ecsiste en la iniaginacion de los prin- 
cipiantes. Pero a que discurrir sobre los meritos de uij 
idioma que fue sacado de su rudeza por Chocer, eleva- 
do por Shakespear, Milton y Dryden. y establecido poi 
Johnson? ^De un idioma, que si le hallamos energico en 
las obras profundi sima.s de Locke, Stewart, y Brown: 
le admiramos magnifico en los labios de Chatham y 
Burke, y se convierte en melifluos acentos en la? 
paginas de Pope? <:De un idioma que sirve hoi dia 
para decorar los conceptos de tantos eminentes varones. 
cuyos acentos retumban por todos los hemisferios del 
*nundo civilizado? 



4d ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Lesson 10. 

LOS NORTE AMERICANOS. 

Jamas ha presentado el mundo en su marcha hacia la 
perfeccion, un fenomena tan estupendo como le presen- 
tan hoi dia los Estados Unidos. Ni las historias anti- 
guas, ni las modernas, nos hablan de una nacion que en 
el cortisimo espacio de medio siglo despues de haberse 
emancipado de una de las mas formidables naciones del 
mundo, compita en elegancia, ilustracion, j energia a 
cuantas contiene el orbe civilizado. Un progreso tan 
rapido, en estos siglos de luces, ha formado en los habi- 
tantes de esta nacion un caracter mui diferente de los 
conocidos antes. Su deseo de libertad, les hizo valero- 
sos^ sus sucesos, nobles y humanosj su emulacion, activos; 
iu comercio, sagaces; sus instituciones y naturaleza, re- 
decsivos y graves. Sin embargo las dos calidades que 
dan mas golpe en los Americanos, son su energica activi- 
dad y su madura reflecsion, que nacen de las institucio- 
nes del pais. Estas se ven en todas sus operaciones, y 
son las que dan origen a tantas otras calidades, que la 
ignorancia y falta de conocimiento les dan muchas veces 
mal sentido. Estas son las que les hacen ser temperados 
en sus demostraciones, lo que se convierte muchas 
veces en falta de sensibilidad; las que les inspiran sen- 
limientos de decoro en sus amistades, que se considem 
muchas veces como a falta de sociabilidad^ las que les 
hacen siempre estar dentro los confines de la prudencia 
en las acciones de la vida, que se iniplica frecuente- 
mente a policia refinada^ las que les hacen observantes, 
y estudiosos de las cosas y de los hombres, cautos en 
sus espresiones, y reservados en sus costumbres, lo que 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 41 

se toma frecuentemente por frigidez de almaj las que les 
hacen persuadir que pueden hoi levantarse todos en 
cuerpos formidables a repeler el enemigo, y manana 
volver a sus ocupaciones, que se interpreta en orgullo 
y altivez. Pero si estas dos calidades lian deslumbrado 
a muchos que no los conocen, han servido a levantar 
una sociedad civil, que hace gloria a la nacion a quieii 
los Americanos deben su ecsistencia. Faltas, ni a nin- 
gun individuo, ni a ninguna nacion pueden faltar; y el 
que considere que aun cuando las cosas humanas se 
trageran a su mas alto auge de perfeccion podrian me- 
jorarse, no encontrara dificultad en perdonar las que 
nazcan de la grandeza. 

Lesson 11. 
INDUSTRIA. 
;Qu6 cosa mas necesaria en esta vida que la iiidus 
tria.^ (jQuien pudo jamas adelantar en ninguna empresa 
sin ella.^ ^jQuien se encontro jamas libre de corazon. 
desenredado de vapores melancolicos, sin esta hija de 
la felicidad.^ ; Ah, que engaiiados vivis, los que pensais 
que la indolencia trae consigo reposo! De nada nos 
sirven nuestras facilidades si no nos valemos de ellas 
por medio de nuestros esfuerzos personates. Mira, 
reconoce, observa aquellos hombres que les hace el 
mundo tantos acatamientos, y les da tantas alabanzas 
por su ingenio y talentos; observalos, digo, y veras 
cuan pocos mementos de su vida sacrifican a la indo- 
lencia. ,;Que fruto sacaria el labrador de sus fertile? 
terrenos, si con su industria no los cultivase? ^'De que 
servicio puede ser el hombre a sus semejantes, si no 
pone en accion las potencias que le fueron concedidas 
por el Omnipotente.P Piensa, ;0 mortal! que haciendo- 
4* 



4a ORTHOGRAPHY. 

te iltil a los hombres, cumples tino de los tines por que 
fiiiste piiesto en este valle de miserias. (-'Como piiede& 
'pues hacerlo sin la actividad^ como puedes cumplirla, 
si permitas que tus facultades esten adormecidas, j 
queden sepultadas en un profundo letargo, durante los 
preciosos momentos de tu vida? 

Lessox 12. 
LA RELIGION. 
(jQuien saco a los hombres de un estado de tinieblas^ 
Y barbaridad.^ (jQuien les inspire aquellos sentimientos 
elevados y nobles que vemos espresados en tantas 
ocasiones.^ iQuien difundio por tanta parte del globo la 
civilizacion.^ jQuien liace temblar al malo, engoifar en 
un pielago de miserias al incredulo, j elevar a tan alto 
grado el alma del justo.*^ La religion. Ellapura, casta, 
y firme, al mismo tiempo que perfecciona nuestra na- 
turaleza; nos inspira en nuestras perfidias, un pavor 
terrible, que cuanto le ocultamos con la cara, tanto 
nos roe el eorazon. Si, tu, ;0 adorable religion! tan 
perseguida de los malos, eres la que les pones a sus ojos 
ios medios de la eterna salvacion. Tu eres la que por 
tantos titulos debieran abrazarte; la que por los vincu- 
los de la gratitud, debieran adorarte. ; Que locura del 
hombre, despreciar al que le ofrece los medios de feli- 
cidad temporal y eterna ! t Que ceguera, no ver la rapi- 
dez con que vuela al tiempo hacia la eternidad donde 
nuestra suerte se decidira! Pero todavia mas ceguera, 
no querer seguir los santos dogmas que provienen del 
Eterno, para asegurar en esta vida la salvacion de la 
atra. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 45 

ON SPELLING. 

According to the rules given, for the pronunciation 
of consonants: c, or q; z, or c; g, or j; &c. might be in- 
discriminately used in the syllables cua, cuo; ge, gi, &c. 
The best usage, however, has sanctioned the following 
rules, which must be observed b j every accurate writer, 

1st. C is always to be used in the syllables ce, ci^ 
and not z; although c and z in these cases, sound alike; 
as, celos, and not zelos. 

2nd. P is never to be followed by /?, an/ being sub- 
stituted in place of these two letters; as, /«/«?? o-e, and 
not phalange; but whenever it shall be found in books 
written long since, or in proper names of countries, 
places, &c. the ph is to be pronounced as in English. 

3rd. Q is used only in the syllables que, qui; qiiiero, 
quema: qua, que, qiii, quo, are to be written with c; as. 
ciianto, cuento, cuota. 

4th. X; thig letter, when found in books, is to be pro- 
nounced according to the rules given, but now its pala- 
tical sound is supplied by^ before a, o, u, and by^, be- 
fore e, i; so that, the palatical sounds in Spanish, must 
always be spelled thus, ja, jo, ju, ge,^ gi. The sub- 
stitute of X before a consonant, must be an s; as, estre- 
mo, and not extremo; escitar and not excitar; and be- 
fore a vowel with a circumflex accent on it a cs; as 
ecsdmen and not exdmen,'\ 

* Many persons write the syllables ge, gi, with j. Others write 
some words with g, and some with j. The most simple manner, 
and therefore the most consistent with the rules of the Spanish 
Orthography is, to write the syllables ge, gi, always with g. 

t This letter x has therefore been exploded from the Spanish 
Alphabet. We must say, however, that some persons, do not, as 
yet, use the cs instead of x. In this case, they never place the cir- 



44 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



5th. Heretofore the y has been used both as a conso- 
nant, and a vowel. Now, the most eminent Spanish 
writers, use it as a vowel only. Hence the syllables 
«?/, ey^ oy^ uyr are no longer written with a y, but 
with an z; as, estai, rei^ soi, muL 

N. B. Words are to be written as they are pro- 
nounced. 

^ List of Words similar in Sound, but different in 
Spelling, 
dcerbo, harsh 

Acervo, a head 

Halal hallo! 

Jlla, wing 

Ahi, there 

m, alas ! 

Hai, there is 

Corbeta, a sloop 

Corveta, a curvet 

Deshojar, to deprive of 

leaves 
Desojar, to deprive of ejes 
Envestir, to invest 

Embestir, to attack 

Envestidura^ an investment 
Embestidura, an attack 

Grabar. to engrave 

Gravar, to oppress 



Ha, 


he has 


A, 


to 


Halon^ 


a halloo 


Mon, 


a pinion 


Hastcu 


until 


Asia 


a haft 


Hdtago 


a herd 


Atago, 


a cross path 


Haya, 


a beach tree 


Aya, 


a governess 


He, 


I have 


E, 


and 


Herrar, 


to shoe horses 


Errar 


to err 


HHiea, 


a phthysis 


Etica, 


ethics 


Hierro, 


iron 


Yerro, 


error 



eumflex aceent over the vowel which the x precedes. In reading 
the late publications, the x, is to be pronounced as cs; whether 
the vowel has a circumflex accent or not. 

* Some authors use the i instead of the conjunction y, and say, 
siete i ocho, seven and eight. This practice is not sufficiently ge- 
neral to sanction its adoption. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



45 



Hita, 


a brad nail 


Vaqueta, 


sole leather 


ltd. 


eta 


Baqneta, 


a ramrod 


Ho-ear, 


to turn over the 


Varon, a male human being 




leaves of a book 


Baron, 


a baron 


Ogear 


to start game 


Varolii a, 


descent by male 


Holal 


halloo ! 




issue 


Ola, 


a wave 


Baronia, 


a barony 


Hondas. 


slings 


Vasto, 


extensive 


Ondas, 


billows 


Basto 


coarse 


Huso, 


a spindle 


Vendicion, 


a sale 


Uso, 


usage 


Bendicion, 


a blessing 


Bebelarse, to rebel 


Veneficiar. 


to bewitch 


Revelarse, to reveal 


Beneficiar. 


to benefit 


Rib era, 


a shore 


Venejicio, 


bewitching 


Rivera, 


a rivulet 


Beneficio, 


beneficent 


Falar,'^ 


vallar 


Veta, 


a mineral vein 


Balar, 


to bleat 


Beta 


a rope's end 


Valon, 


a Walloon 


Volada, ■ 


the flight of birds 


Balon 


a large bale 


Bolada, the act of bowling 



Observations on the manner of dividing the Spanish 
Words into Syllables. 

Compound words are to be divided into their two 
component parts; as, ab-negacion, con-cavidad, pre- 
ambido, mal-rotar. 

When the second component part of a w ord begins 
with s, followed by another consonant, the s belongs to 
the first part; as, cons-truir, ins-pirar, pers-picaz. 

Two vowels coming together, must be parted; as, 
Sa-avedra, le-er, pi-zsimo, co-operar. 

* It is to be observed, that between Volar and Balar and other 
words of this kind, there is a similarity, not a sameness of soun(J. 



46 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

A consonant coming between two vowels, belongs to 
the vowel bj which it is followed; as, a-mor^ pe-yia^ 
le-che,* ga-llo.* *- 

Two consonants, coming between two vowels, are 
divided; as, al-zai\ cas-tor^ 7yidr-tir. 

But should the first consonant be the semivowel/, or any oi 
the mutes, and the second I or r, both the consonants are then 
joined to the vowel by which they are followed; as, ta-bla, co-bre, 
la-cre, an-drajo. 

Except, at-leta, and at-lante. 

When s is preceded bj b, /, m, n, or r, and followed 
bj another consonant at the same time, s must be join- 
ed to the consonant by which it is preceded; as, Ams- 
terdam. 

Four consonants coming between two vowels are 
equally divided between them: as, tr<ans-cribir. 

Of some of the Marks used in Punctuation. 
Note of Interrogation (?). 
This mark is not only used at the conclusion; but also 
placed, inverted at the beginning of an interrogatory, 
in order to warn the reader; unless the preceding words 
convey a sufficient warning; as, ''•^Que es lo que vmd. 
acostumbra comer?^^ pregunto al enfermo. 

'•''Jihora bien^^^ me pregunto friamente el chalan^ '^cu- 
anto pide vmd. por su midaP^ 

Note of Admiration (1). 
This note is also inverted at the beginning of ejacu- 
lations, when the preceding words are not sufficient to 
prepare the reader; as, jMirdndome con ternura esclama- 
ba, ''o que gracioso eres y que lindoP^ '•'•jPastas didces 

* Ch and II ^re deemed only single consonants. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



4T 



mr 



y viandas sucidentasP^ esclamo suspenso y admirado el 
doctor. 

Diaeresis (••). 

This is used only over the u of ue and ui^ when the 
u is to be sounded: as ungUento, argUir. 

The Accent ('). 

Accent, in orthography, is the mark which is placed 
over some letters to denote the manner of their pro- 
nunciation. In vSpanish it is commonly placed over that 
vowel on which the stress is laid in pronouncing a word, 
if it cannot be ascertained without. 

(1.) Monosyllables having only one signification are 
never accented; as, cal, pan, coz, mat. 

(2.) Monosyllables, having more than one signification, 
should be accented when they are more slowly pro- 
tiouncedj as mz, me; mi, my; tu, thou; /w, thy; el, he; 
rl the, &c. 

(3.) The vowels a, e, 6, u, when used either as pre- 
positions or conjunctions, should always be accented; 
as, voi a Londres; padre 6 hijo; cruel e ingrato. 

(4.) Dissyllables and polysyllables ending in a vowel, 
may be accented on any vowel (the penultima except- 
ed) Mhereon the stress is laid; a.s,cdntico, espiritic, san- 
Ifsimo, Bercebu, alia. 

(5.) But if to some person of a verb ending in an ac- 
cented vowel the case of a pronoun should be added, 
tiie accent must be continued although it fall on the 
penultima; as, temi, temile; enseno, ensehola; rniro, rai- 
rome. 

(6.) Dissyllables ending in a diphthong are never ac- 
cented; as, indio, Julio, agua, gloria, mutuo, fragile. 



48 ORTHOGHAPHY. 

All words which end in y must not be accented; as. 
Paraguay^* Rey, Comboy. 

(7.) Trisyllables and polysyllables ending in two 
vowels, must be accented on whichever of the two vow- 
els the stress happens to be laid; as, alegria, puntapie. 
ganzua, continue: see No. 9. 

Except the first and third persons singular of the imperfect of 
the indicative, and of the subjuHCtive ending in ia, which are 
never accented; as, temia, amaria, sw/nna, Sfc. 

(8.) Trisyllables and polysyllables ending in any of 
these diphthongs ia, ie, io, iia, lie, uo, must be accent- 
ed on any vowel (the penultima excepted) whereon the 
stress is laid. 

(9.) Words ending in ae, ao, au, ea, oa, oe, oo, (not 
being diphthongs) must not be accented j as, j»e/e«, Sarao^ 
albacea. But should these two vowels form a diphthong, 
the word must be accented on whatever vowel the stress 
is laid; as, heroe, linea, eterea, 

(10.) Words ending in a consonant maybe accented 
on any of the vowels (except the last) whereon the 
stress is laid; as, drhol, virgen, metamorfosis, alferez. 

Except the second person singular and third pLiral of the future 
indicative, which are always accented on the last vowel ; as, ama- 
rds, vendrdn, and surnames ending in ez, which are never accent- 
ed; as, Sanchez, Fernandez, Martinez. 

(11.) Verbs or nouns which require to be accented ift 
the singular generally retain the accent, on the same 
syllable, in the plural; as, vendre^ vendremos; salio, 
salieron; drbol, drboles. 

Except cardcter, which changes into earaderes in the plural 
number. 

* According to the new manner of spelling; these, and similar 
words, should be written with an i: vSee page 44 rule 6th. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



4S 



(12.) If to an unaccented person of a verb, consist- 
ing only of two syllables, we affix one or more prono- 
minal cases, the first vowel must then be accented f asi, 
oye, oyeme; compra, compramelo; but if the person of 
the verb consist of more than two syllables, its penul- 
tima should be accented; as, entrega^ entregalo, entre- 
gaselo; . comuniquemos, comuniquemoslo. 

(13.) If an adverb ending in mente be formed from 
an unaccented adjective, the adverb remains unaccent- 
ed; as, feliz, felizmente; humilde^ hwnildemente; but 
should the adjective be accented, the accent continues 
on the same vowel in the adverb; as, fdcil, fdcibnente^ 
dificil, dificilmente; inutile iniUilmente. 

(14.) If a dissyllable ending in two vowels be in- 
creased by the prefixing of a monosyllable, the penul- 
tima is then generally accented; as, via, desvia; Hay 
deslia. 

The other marks used in punctuation are employed 
in the same manner as they are in English. 



List of Abbreviations used in Writing. 



A. C. 


Aho Christiano 


Christian year 


A. 


arrobas 


9.5 pounds weight 


A. A. 


autores 


authors 


Adm°'. 


administrador. 


administrator 


Ag'. 


Agosto 


August 


am". 


amigo 


friend 


Ant'. 


Antonio 


Anthony 


App^". 


apostolico 


apostolic 


Art\ 


articido 


article 


Ar-zbpo. 


arzobispo 


archbishop 


B. 

5 


beato 


blessed 



60 



ORTHOGIJAPHV. 



b. 


vuelta 


turn over 


B. 


bachiller 


bachelor of aits 


B. L. M. 


heso las manos 


kiss the hands 


B. L. P. 


beso los pies 


kiss the feet 


B'^ . P . 


beatisimo Padre 


most blessed Fathef 


C. M. B. 


cuyas manos beso 


whose hands I kiss 


C. P. B. 


cuyos pies beso 


whose feet I kiss 


Cam". 


camara 


chamber 


Cap. 


capituto 


chapter 


Cap. 


capitan 


captain 


Capp". 


capellan 


chaplain 


Col. 


coluna 


column 


Comis". 


comisario 


commissary 


Comp. 


compahia 


company 


COIT". 


corriente 


current 


Cons". 


consejo 


council 


D\ 


don 


Mr. 


D. 


dona 


Mrs. 


D, 


doctor 


doctor 


D. D. 


doctores 


doctors 


Dho. 


dicho 


ditto or said 


Dro. 


derecho 


right or duty 


Diz% 


Diciembre 


December 


Dom". 


Domingo 


Sunday 


Ec". 


edesiastico 


ecclesiastic 


En°. 


Enero 


January 


Esc-. 


escehntisimo 


most excellent 


Esc^\ 


escelencia 


excellency 


Fho, flia 


fecho^ fecha 


dated 


Feb^ 


Febrero 


February 


Fol". 


folio 


folio 


Fr. 


frai 


brother of religious or 
ders 



Fraii'^? 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 01 

Francisco Francis 



Frnz. 


Fernandez 


a Spanish surname 


G**', or gue guarde 


preserve 


Q. D. G. 


que Dios guarde 


whom God preserve 


Gra. 


gracia 


grace 


Gen'. 


general 


general 


111. 


ilustre 


illustrious 


111-. 


ilustrisimo 


most illustrious 


Jnq". 


inquisidor 


inquisitor 


Jhs. 


Gesus 


Jesus 


J. 


Juan 


John 


Lib. 


libro 


book 


Lib'. 


libras 


pounds 


Lin. 


linea 


line 


Liz°. 


licenciado 


licentiate 


M. R S. 


mui poderoso senor 


most powerful lord 


W. 


madre 


mother 


M. 


m07isieur 


monsieur 


W\ 


mayor 


eldest 


M^ A% 


muchos anos 


many years ' 


Mag^ 


magestad 


majesty 


Man'. 


Manuel 


Emanue) 


May-. 


moyordomo 


stevrard 


Mig'. 


Miguel 


Michael 


Minro 


ministro 


niinistei 


Mfd. 


merced 


grace 


Mm. 


Martin 


Martin 


Mrnz. 


Martinez^ 


a Spanish surname... 


Mro. 


maestro 


master 


Mrs. 


maravedis 


mistress 


M. S. 


manuscrito 


manuscript 


M. S S. 


maniiscritos 


manuscripts 



n 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


N. S. 


nuestro Senor 


our Lord 


N. S-. 


nuestra Senora 


our Lady 


Nro. 


nuestro 


our 


Nov-. 9^ 


. Noviembre 


November 


Obpo. 


ohispo 


bishop 


Oct'. 8'\ 


Octubrt 


October 


On. 


Onzas 


ounces 


Orn. 


or den 


order 


P. D. 


posdata 


postscript 


P. 


para 


for 


n 


padre 


father 


p\ 


Pedro 


Peter 


p. 


par 


for or by 


P'\ 


plata 


silver or plate 


p'% 


parte 


part 


p.o 


puertQ 


port 


Pag. 


pagina 


page 


PI. 


plana 


page 


Pp- 


publico 


public 


Pral. 


principal 


principal 


Pror. 


proeurador 


solicitor or protector 


Prov. 


provisor 


vicar general 


Q% 


que 


that 


Q". 


quien 


who 


R. R'-. 


real, reales 


royal 


R, 


reales 


rials 


Rev-o. 


reverendisimo 


most reverend 


R^°. 


reverendo 


reverend 


R'. 


recibi 


I received 


s. 


san or santo 


saint 


§", 


san 


saint 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 



53 



S^^ 


santo 


saint 


S. M. 


su magestad 


his majesty 


s. s; 


sii santidcid 


his holiness 


S. orS^ 


senor 


sir 


Seb". 
Secret'. 


Sebastian 


Sebastian 


> secretaria 


secretaryship 


Secret'". > 


' 




Secret'. ^ 






s-. 


. secretario 


secretary 


Secret'". ^ 


. 




Se . 7'\ 


Sefiembre 


September 


S-. 


serenisimo 


most serene 


Serv\ 


servicio 


service 


Serv"\ 


servidor 


servant 


Sig. 


sigtdente 


following 


SS™". P% 


santisimo padre 


most holy father 


SS"°. 


escribano 


notary 


Sup". 


suplica 


entreaty or petition 


Sup". 


suplicante 


petitioner 


Super''. 


superintendente 


superintendant 


Ten'% 


teniente 


lieutenant 


Tom. 


tomo 


volume 


Tpo. 


tiempo 


time 


V. V .Ven 


. venerable 


venerable 


V. A. 


vuestra alteza 


your highness 


V. B^ 


vuestra beatitud 


your blessedness 


V. E. 


vucelencia 


your excellency 


V. G. 


verbigracia 


for example 


Vm. Vmd 


. vuesamerced or usted 


a title similar to wor 
ship in English 


Vms. 


ustedes 


your worships 


V. P. 


vuestra paternidad 


your paternity 



I 



54 ORTHOGRAPHY. 

V, S. vuesenoria or usza your iordsliip 

V. S. vuestra santidad your holiness 

V. S. S. vuesenorias your lordships 

V. S. I. vuesenoria ilustrzsima your grace 

Y\ vellon bullion 

Vol. volumen volume 

Vro. vuestro your 

X""". diezmo tithe 

Xptiano. Cristiano Christian 

Xpto. Crist Christ 

XptobaL Cristobal Christopher 



PART II. 
ETYMOLOGY. 

Etymology treats of words and their derivations^ 
enumerates their different species, and shows their va- 
rious modifications. 

Words are divided into primitive and derivative. 
A primitive word is that which is formed from no other 
word in the same language; as, cielo^ heaven; viento, 
wind. 

A derivative is derived from some otlier word in the 
language; as, celeste, heavenly; ventoso, windy. 

The Spanish language is composed of nine different 
sorts of words, called parts of speech: namely, Noun, 
Article, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, 
Conjunction, Interjection. 

1. A noun is a word which presents to the mind the 
idea of any object, being, or thing whatever; as, Nue- 
va-York, New-York; Sol, Sun; ciudacl, city. 

2. An article is a word placed before a noun, to de- 
note the full extent of its signification; as, la reina, the 
queen; el hombre, the man. 

3. An adjective is a word used to express the quali- 
ty of a noun; as, hombre valeroso, a valiant man; mu- 
ger virtuosa, a virtuous woman. 

4. A pronoun is a word placed instead of a noun, to 
prevent the too frequent repetition of the same word; 
as, '•'eljusto aborrece el pecado, el le detestas^^ the right- 
eous man hates sin^ he detests itc 



56 ETYMOLOGY, 

5. A verb denotes the existence, action, or ptlssion 
of things 5 that is, being, doing, or suffering; as, eJ ec- 
siste, he exists; ella escribe, she icrites; el es herido, he 
is ivoimded. 

6. Adverbs serve to modify the signification of verbs; 
as, lee bien, he reads well; es tarde, it is late. 

7. Prepositions shew the relation that one word has 
with another; as, el fue de Baltimore a Boston^ he 
wentfro7n Baltimore to Boston. 

8. A conjunction connects words and sentences to- 
gether; as, tu J el soisfelices^ porque sois bttenos, thou 
and he are happy because vou are good. 

9. An interjection is a part of speech, which expres- 
ses the passions or emotions of the mind of the person 
who speaks; as, ""O hombrel man mudable eresP^ 
man how cfiangeable thou art! 

OF THE NOUN. 

A noun is a word which presents to the mind the 
idea of any object, being, or thing whatever; as JVue- 
va-Yorkj New York; Sol, Sun; ciudad, city. It is di- 
vided into three kinds, proper, appellative or common, 
and abstract. 

A Proper noun is that which relates to an individual 
person or thing; as Londres, London; Sol, Sun; Fila- 
deljia, Philadelphia; Espaha, Spain. 

An appellative is a name descriptive of a class of 
similar persons or things; as," animal, animal; ciudad, 
city; hombre, man; mesa, table. 

An M struct is a name which relates to an object, that 
exists in the mind only; as, corage, courage; tiempo, 
time; virtud, virtue. 



ETYMOLOGY. 5T 

There are other nouns, which, although included 
in the foregoing classes, are distinguished by other 
names, for greater grammatical perspicuity. These 
are: augmentative, diminutive, and collective nouns. 

Of j^ugmentative and Diminutive Nouns. 

There are in Spanish, some derivative nouns which 
are formed by the addition of certain terminations to 
their primitives. They are called augmentative and 
diminutive; because they denote increase or decrease 
in the noun from which they are formed. 

The terminations adopted to denote increase are: 
azo, on, and ote — and those to express decrease are: 
ico, illo, ito, and uelo; as, from hombre, man: is deriv- 
ed hombron, hombrazo, hombrote, a large man; from 
libro, book, is derived librillo, librito, libruelo, a small 
book. Jllo, sometimes, and uelo, almost always, denote 
contempt and disgust. 

0/ Collective JVouns. 

Nouns singular, representing several persons or things, 
are called collectives. They are divided into definite 
and indefinite. 

Definite collective nouns are those, which define the 
persons or things of which they are composed; as, re- 
gimiento, many soldiers; arboleda, many trees. 

Indefinite collective nouns, denote a number of inde- 
termined persons or things; as, turba, a crowd; injini- 
dad„ infinity; muchedumbre, multitude. 



58 ETYMOLOGY. 

TO NOUNS BELONG GENDER, NUMBER, AND CASE. 

Gender. 

Gender is the distinction of sex 5 there are properly 
speaking two genders only: masculine, denoting ob- 
jects of the male kind, and the feminine, denoting ob- 
jects of the female kind; as, hombre, man; muger, wo- 
man; libro, book; mesa, table. 

Some nouns which are so indefinitely used, that their 
gender cannot be determined, are termed neuter; and 
they must always be preceded by the neuter article lo; 
as, lo biieno, the good, or that which is good; lo ^nalo^ 
the bad, or that which is bad. 

Others which are equally applicable to objects denot- 
ing the male or female kind, and vary the article to show 
the distinction of genders, are called common; as, c^ 
testigo, the male witness; la testigo, the female wit- 
ness; el homicida, the homicide (man;) la homiciday 
the homicide (woman,) 

Others which, without varying the article, denote 
either the masculine or the feminine of a genus, arfe 
termed epicoen; as, elraton, the male or female mouse; 
la rata, tlie male or female rat; el j^cito, the duck, or 
drake. 

Rules to distinguish the Geiider of Nouns. 

There are two methods of distinguishing the gender 
of Spanish nouns; first, by their meaning, and second- 
ly, by their termination. 

Rule 1. Nouns which signify males, or which denote 
dignities, professions, employments, &c. applicable to 
men, are masculine; and those which signify females, 



ETYMOLOGY- 5§ 

or the dignities, professions, &c. generally applied to 
women, are feminine; as, hombre, man; caballo, horse; 
emperador^ emperor; monge, monk; sastre^ tailor, &c. 
and muger^ woman; gallina hen; emperatriz, empress; 
monja, nun; costurera^ sempstress, &c. 
N. B. Haca^ a ponj, is always feminine. 
Bule 2. Nouns ending in «, d, ion, are feminine; 
nouns ending otherwise, are masculine; ?i^,ventana, win- 
dow; salud, health; ititencion, intention; tcdle, shape; 
aleltf jilly-flower; clavel, pink. 

Rule 3. All abstract nouns, ending in ez, are femi- 
nine; as, esfrechez, narrowness; redondez, roundness; 
palidez, paleness. 

Bide 4. The names of the alphabetic characters, as 
well as of the figures of rhetoric, poetry, and grammar, 
(except metaplasmo, pleonasmo, hyperbaton^) are femi- 
nine. 

Ride 5. The names of sciences, arts, rivers, moun- 
tains, winds, and seasons, follow the rule of their ter- 
mination, according to rule the 2nd: hence Dibiijo^ 
Tajo, Helicon, Norte, Invierno, are masculine; and, 
Teologia, Escidtura, Tramontana, Primavera, are fe- 
minine; except Etna, wliich is masculine. 

Rule 6. Nouns which are used only in the plural are 
of the gender to which they would belong, according to 
their termination, had they a singular number. Thus 
VI ceres, provisions, is masculine; and teno.zas, tongs, is 
feminine; these being the genders to which vivere, and 
tenaza, would be referred, had the said nouns a singu- 
lar number; except efemerides, fasces, fauces, Hares, 
preces, trebedes, which are feminine. 

Rule 7. The names of the musical notes which com- 
pose the octave are masculine; as, el re, el mif el la, el 
fa, ^'c. 



i 



60 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Gender of Nouns. 

Exceptions from Rule 2. 

Feminine Nouns which do not end in a, d, ion. 



Sguachirle 


C Slipslop; (a fcinc/ 
I of beverage) 


catdstrofe 


catastrophe 


certidumbre 


certainly 




Chydromel; lio- 


cerviz 


cervix 


aguamiel 


< ney and loa- 


cliurre 


grease 




( ter.) 


clase 


class 


alache 


shad 


clavazon 


row of nails 


alsine 


chickweed 


clave 


key 


unagdlide 


i pimpernel; {a 
'[ plant) 


clemdtide 


( climber; (a 
I plant) 


anagiris 


beautrefoil 


din or crin 


mane 


antiperistasis 


antiperistasis* 


codorniz 


quail 


apoteosis 


( apotheosis ;(dei- 
( Jication) 


cohorte 


cohortet 


col 


cabbage 


arrumazon 


stowage 


colapiscis 


isinglass 


ave 


a fowl 


compdges 


a joint 


azumbre 


a measure 


corriente 


stream 


Bacdris 


flea-bane 


corte 


court 


harbarie 


barbarity 


costumbre 


custom 


harbechazon 


fallowing time 


coz 


kick 


hcifie 


basis 


crasicie 


flood tide 


bezoar 


bezoar 


creciente 


hilis 


bile 


crenche 


< the parting of 
( the hair 


binazon 


< the second 
\ ploughing 


crisis 


crisis 


Calvicie 


baldness 


cruz 


cross 


cal 


lime 


cumbre 


summit 


calle 


street 


Decretal 


decretals 


capelardente 


a funeral pile 


desazon 


uneasiness 


capital 


metropolis 
( a general term 


diapedisis 


( diapedis; (ooz- 
\ ing of blood) 


' tarambre 


} for hides of 


diartrosis 


diarthrosis§ 




y all kinds 




C diesis or sharp; 


came 


flesh 


diesis 


< (a musical 


car eel 


prison 




( term) 


cargazon 


cargo 


diocesi 


diocese 


caridtide 


caryatidesf 


dulcedtimbre 


sweetness : 


* 'I'he action of two contrary qualities, one of which, by its opposi- 


tion, lieightens the other 






t Columns or pilasters under the figures of women dressed in long 


robes. 








^ A body 


Df Roman troops com 


)Osed of 500 men. 


§ Anatomical term, meaning loose juncture of the bones. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



61 



< smooth speed- 
l vre]l;(a plant) 

an herb 
C emphyteusis; 

< {alienation of 
( property) 

epiglottis* 
( bastard hfille- 
\ bore 

spheroid 

species 

race 

scarlea;(a;}Zanf) 
( aetites; (eagle 
I bone) 

phalanx 

hunger 

phase 

visage 

faith 

fever 

forehead 

fountain 
( dead-nettle; 
I (hemp) 

people 

gratiola(rtn herb) 

flock 

hunger 

bundle 

helix 
( pellitory; (an 
I herb 

( haematites; (ore 
I of iron) 
( hemionite; a 
\ plant) 

rust of iron 

dregs 

gall 
( hypocist; (a 
I plant) 

hypostasis! 

hypothesis 

a kind of cake 

sickle 



Matine 
enante 

enfiteiisis 

epiglotis 

epipactide 

esferoide 
especie 
estirpe 
etiopide 

elites 

Falange 
fame 
fase 
faz 
fe 

Jievre 
frente 
fuente 

Galiopsis, 

gente 

gi-aciadei 

grei 

Hambre 

haz 

helice 

helgine 
hematites 

hemionite 

herrumbre 

hez 

hiel 

kipocistide 

hipostasis 
hipotesis 
hojaldre 

hoi 

* Cartilage of the larynx, which covers the wind-pipe, 
t A theological term, meaning person. 

\ A glass espherically convex on both sides, such as a burning glass, 
a spectacle glass, &c. 
6 



Incertidnmbre 


imcertainty 


indole 


temper 


ingle 


groin 


imdgen 


image 


intemperie 


( intemperate^ 
I ness 


labor 


work 


lande 


( a species of a- 
\ corn 


landre 


( a glandular 
I swelling 


laringe 


larynx 


laude 


praise 


leche 


milk 


legumbre 


pulse 


lei 


law 


lente 


lens| 


liebre 


hare 


Hendre 


nit 


lis 


flower de lys 


lite or litis 


litigation 


luinbre 


fire 


luz 


light 


Have 


key 




fmace; (the se- 


Mdcis 


i cond of three 
1 coverings of a 
[^ nutmeg) 






mono 


hand 


jnansedumbre 


meekness 


mengxiante 


ebb tide 


rnente 


mind 


metamorfom 


metamorphosis 


metemsicosis 


metempsychosis 


metropoli 


metropolis 


miel 


honey 


mies 


crop 


mole 


mass 


molicie 


effeminacy 


muchedumbre 


multitude 


muerte 


death 


mugre 


dearth 


Aao 


ship 


nariz 


nose 


nave 


vessel 


nieve 


snow 



i 



I 



62 



ETYMOLOGY. 



ninez 
noche 


childhood 
night 


sardonics 


( sardonyx; (a 
( precious stone\ 


nube 


cloud 


sarten 


frying pan 


idue- 


nut 


sazon 


season 


Palmacristi 


palmachrist 


sede 


seat 


par af rase 


paraphrase 


segazon 


reaping time 


paraltcsis 


parallax* 


segur 


axe 


paralisis 


palsy 


selenites 


selenitesj 


paranesis 


paranesis 


senal 


signal 


paraselene 


mock moon 


serie 


series 


parte 


part 


serpiente 


serpent 


patente 


patent 


servidumbre 


servitude 


paz 


peace 


sien 


temple 


peplide 


wild purslain 


sineresis 


synaeresis§ 


perdiz 


partridge 


sinderesis 


remorse 


pesadumbre 


grief 


sinrazon 


wrong 


peste 


plague 


sintdcsis 


syntax 


pez 


pitch 


sirte 


quicksand 


piel 


skin 


sobrehaz 


surface 


pirdmide 


pyramid 


sobrepellis 


surplice 


pigide 


pixf 


suerte 


chance 


planicie 


plain 


superjicie 


superfice 


plebe 


rabble 


Tarde 


afternoon 


\ plomazon 


1 the gilders' 
] cushion 


teame 


a kind of stone 


techumbre 


roof 


podre 


P"^ . ,, 


temperie 


temperature 


polispdstos 


tackle of pulleys 


tesis 


thesis 


pomez 


pumice 


tez 


complexion 


progenie 


progeny 


tilde 


tittle 


prole 


issue 


ttsis 


phthisis 


q,uiete 


quietus 


torre 


tower 


j Jlaiz 


root [of malady) 


tos 


cough 


1 ' raquUis 


rickets; (a sort 


trabazon 


juncture 


razon 


reason 


trabe 


beam or girder 


res 


head of cattle 


tribu 


tribe 


Sangre 


Wood 


tripods 


tripod 


sal 


salt 


troge 


granary 


1 salumbre 


oxide of salt 


troj 


granary 


salve 


the salve regina 


Ubre 


udder 


salsifracs 

■ 


< saxifrage; (a 
I plant) 


urdiembre 
Varice 


warp 
varix|j 



* Parallax, an astrononiical term, signifying the distance between 
the true and the apparent place of any star viewed from the earth, 
t A little box in vvhich the consecrated host is kept. 
X Crystalized gypsum. 

§ A figure by which two syllables are united into on?., 
d Dilation of a vein, 



ETYMOLOGY. 



63 



velambre 


( certain nuptial 
( rights. 


vocal 
voz 


vowel 
voice 


vez 


time 


Zoster 


shingles 


vislumore 


glimmering 







Exceptions to Rule % 

Masculine Nouns with Feminine terminations. 

dogma 
drama| 
embryon 
enigma 
enthymen^ 
epigram 
sperm 

sparrow ;( a 6ird) 
Ca custom house 
i_ cutter 
maintop taclile 
a standard 
gyjst 
language 
telescope 
lute 

lemma|j 
manna 
map 
murrain 
paradignx 
umbrella 
musical staff 
planet 
poem 
Cprism;(«niMsfrw- 
(_ment of opticks) 
problem 
essay 
measles 
symptom 
system 

* A great swell of waters. 

t A transposition of the letters of a name, sentence or phrase. 
% And also its compounds; as, melo-drama, 

§ An imperfect syllogism, consisting only of an antecedent, and a 
consequential proposition. 
J A proposition previously assumed- 



Jicsloma 


axiom 


dogma 




C the chief of a 


drama 


adalid 


< band of war- 


Embrion 




( riors. 


enigma 


^dema 


prop 


entimema 


alamud 


a door bar 


epigrama 


albacea 


executor 


esperma 




■ a measure con- 


Gorrion 


alamud 


taining about 
the 9 th part 


gum-dacosta 




of a bushel 


guardavela 


aluvion 


alluvion* 


guion 


anagrama 


anagramf 


Huesped 


anbtwion 


sudden shock 


Id'wma 




( aneurism,(adis- 


Largomira 


aneurisma 


< ease of the ar- 


laud 




( teries) 


lema 


antipoda 


antipode 


Mand 


archilaud 


species of lute 


inapa 


ardid 


stratagem 


morrion 


ataud 


coffin 


Paradigma 


avion 


martin ; (o bird) 


paragua 


Cesped 


turf 


pentagrama 


chirrion 


tumbril or cart 


planeia 


clima 


climate 


poema 


cometa 


comet 




cnsma 


chrism 


prisma 


Dia 


day 


prcblema 


diafragma 


midriff 


progimnasma 


diagrama 


diagram 


Sarampion 


dilema 


dilemma 


stntoma 


diploma 


diploma 


sistema 



64 



ETYMOLOGY. 



sofa 
sofisma 


sofa 
sophism 




tapaboca 


Ca slap on the 
I mouth 


sud 


south 




ieorema 


theorem 


Taknud 


talmud* 




Viva 


cheer — huzza 


tema 


theme 










Nouns used with either article. 


Albald 


certificate 


Hermafrodita 


hermaphroditfe 


anatema 


anthema, 


{or eX- 


hiperbole 


hyperbole 




eommunication) 


Mar 


seaj 


oste 


artf 




mdrgen 


margin 


Canal 


canal 




Jfema 


seal of a lettei 


cisma 


schism 




orden 


order§ 


mtis 


skin 




Peringue 


dripping 


Dote 


dowry 




puenie 


bridge 


Emhlema 


emblem 




Reuma 


rheum 






Of Number, 





Number is that property of a noun by which we de- 
note one or more of the same class. There are two 
numbers 5 the singular, which signifies only onej as, 
ciudad, city; rio, river; and the plural, which denotes 
more than one; as, ciudades, cities, rios, rivers. 

Formation of the Plural Number. 

The Spaniards form the plural of their nouns by ad- 
ding an s, to the nouns ending in a rowel not accent- 
ed; as, libro, a book; libros, books; tintero, an inkstands 
linteros^ inkstands; and by adding es, to those which 
end with an accented vowel or a consonant; as, alholz, a 
granary; alholies, granaries; arbol, a tree; arboles, trees. 

If the final consonant be a z, it must be changed into 
ces; as, luz, a light; luces, lights. 



• A book containing the doctrines and laws of Moses. 

t It is almost always feminine in the plural; as, las artes mechanicas. 

I All the compounds of mar,- as, bajamar, &c. are feminine. 

§ When synonymous with command, it is feminine. 



ETYMOLOGY. 65 

If it be an i, it must be changed into yes; as, rei, a 
king; i^eyes, kings. 

N. B. The following nouns undergo no change in the 
plural: cortaplumus, penknife; sacamuelas, toothdraw-. 
er; sacatrdpos, corkscrew; Lunes, Monday; 3Iartes, 
Tuesday; 3Iiercoles, Wednesday; Jueves, Thursday; 
Viernes, Friday. 

These are used only in the plural: 

Albricias, a gift; alicates, pincers; bofes^ lungs; des- 
pabiladeras, snuffers; livianos, lights; lldres, pot-hang- 
ers; puches, pap; tendzas, tongs; trebedes, trevet; vis- 
peraSj vespers; viveres, provisions. 

Of Case, 

Case exhibits the different relations of nouns. 
The Spanish nouns have two cases; the nominative 
and the objective.* 

* In thus assigning two cases to Spanish nouns, the author has 
deviated from almost every Spanish grammarian, and even from 
the Academy at Madrid. Case, from (casus,) signifies, in its strict- 
est sense, the manner or mode in which a word stands in a sen- 
tence, and thereby, the relation which it bears to any other word, 
unaided by any other part of speech. In Spanish, properly speak- 
ing, nouns can only have one case, or in other words, they can 
only stand in one manner, as their relation to other words, is en- 
tirely expressed by prepositions. Thus in the phrase, "esfe libro es 
da Pedro,^'' {this look is Peter^s) it would be impossible to say that the 
relation existing between liiro and Pedro was expressed by either 
of the words, because it entirely depends on the preposition de. 

In the Greek, Latin, and all other ancient languages, the sub- 
stantives themselves either with, or without modification or in- 
flection, are expressive of the relation which they bear to other 
words. They are therefore susceptible of cases, or of standing in 
as diflferent manners, as they have inflections or modifications. 
It is true these languages are not destitute of prepositions. This 
6^ 



I 



66 ETYMOLOGY. 

The nominative case simply expresses the name of a 
thing, or the subject of a verbj as, el padre, the father^ 
el embajador escribe, the ambassador writes. 

The objective case expresses the object of an action^ 
or of a relation I and generally follows a verb or a pre- 
position^ as, con la pluma escribid el rei la carta, with 
the pen did the king write the letter. In this sentence 
the nouns pluma and carta are both in the objective 
case 5 pluma, because it has the preposition con prefix- 
ed 5 and carta, because it is the object to which the 
action of the verb is transmitted. 

circumstance, however, though it has misguided many gramma- 
rians, and has led them to the belief, that prepositions are nothing 
but mere modifications, is very strongly in favour of the Spanish 
nouns having but one case. If prepositions are but modifica- 
tions, how does it happen, that they always, in the ancient 
languages, presuppose the necessity of inflection in the word they 
govern? The author cannot conceive how it could be possible that 
a word should be modified to express a relation, which was plain 
ly and clearly pointed out by a preposition. Should it be taken 
lor granted, as many have done, that prepositions are always 
understood; and that, to modify a word, and to employ a pre- 
position to express the same relation, is merely to effect it in a 
more conspicuous or energetic manner, we must always come to 
the first conclusion, that substantives in ancient languages are sus- 
ceptible of being modified; and of thus expressing, without the 
necessity of prepositions, their various relations. Now it is per- 
fectly well known, that substantives of modern languages, the 
German and some other excepted, are not susceptible of any 
change, modification or inflection, which is the same as to say 
that they have no cases. 

It is also erroneous to suppose that prepositions in modern lan- 
guages are mere modifications, for the same reason stated above, 
that prepositions exist in ancient languages, in which, substan- 
tives are susceptible of modification. Besides, if we supposed 
prepositions to be modifications every one should govern oj; direct 



ETYMOLOGY. 



07 



Declension of Nouns. 

Singular. 

Nominative. Mesa, table. 

Objective. mesa, table. 

Plural. 

Nom. Mesas, tables. 
Object, mesas, tables. 

OF THE ARTICLE. 

An article is a word placed before a noun, to denote 
the full extent of its signification 5 as, la reina, the queen^ 
el hombre, the man. 



a new case, which the genius of any language cannot, in any man- 
ner, sanction. 

With regard to pronouns and verbs, there is a much greater si- 
milarity between the modern and ancient languages. In English, 
Spanish, French, &c. we find that pronouns are susceptible of in- 
flection and of modification. We say icAo, whosi, whom; and in 
Spanish, Yo, mi, me, &c. As to the verbs, they undergo nearly the 
same variations in Spanish, French, &c. as in Latin and Greek. 
It is remarkable that English verbs are less susceptible of inflec- 
tion, than those of any language known. However, the deficien- 
cies of inflection are supplied by the constant use of personal 
pronouns, and by a variety of auxiliary particles. As verbs de- 
note the existence of things and circumstances, together with the 
time of existence, verbs must have tenses and moods. The di- 
Tision of these in the ancient languages, being, so far, the most 
simple, is, perhaps better calculated for the modern languages than 
any other. 

In regard to cases or the modifications undergone by substan- 
tiyes, adjectives, and pronouns, according to their relations with 



68 ETYMOLOGY. 

The article, like nouns, has the variation of gender, 
number, and case. 

The Spanish articles are; 

el, the, for the masculine singular. 
los, the, for the masculine plural. 
la, the, for the feminine singular. 
las, the, for the feminine plural. 
lo, the, for the neuter, which has no plural; it 
being always prefixed to singular nouns. 

Nouns declined with the Article. 

MASCULINE* 

Singular. 
Nom. El ret, the king. 
Object. *al rei, to the king. 

other words, the ancient, differ so essentially from the modern lan= 
guages, that we can no longer follow^, in this respect, the Latin 
grammar. As grammar is merely a collection of rules, gathered 
after a language has been formed, grammar must yield to the na- 
ture of the language it treats, and not the language to the caprices 
of grammarians. Hence, and be it said to the honour of Beattie 
and Murray, it has been found expedient to assign but two cases 
to all the languages, the substantives, adjectives and pronouns of 
which, are susceptible of very limited modification. One of these 
cases is called the nominative, to express the subject of an action 
or relation, and the objective, to express the object of this action 
or relation through the medium of a verb or preposition. 

This is the division of cases which the author of this grammar 
lias adopted. He is fully convinced that it is the most consistent 
with the genius of the Spanish, and the only one which can 
render to Americans or Englishmen, the rules of this grammar 
perfectly clear and simple. 

* alj to the, is a contraction of a el; and del, of the, of tie e?v 



ETYMOLOGY. 69 

Plural. 
Nom, Los reyes, the kings. 
Object, d los reyes, to the kings 

Singular. 
Nom. El libro, the book^ 
Object, al libro, to the book. 

Plural. 
Nom. Los libros, the books. 
Object, d los libros, to the books. 

FEMININE. 

Singular. 

iVbm. La rema, the queen. 
Object, a la reina, to the queen. 

Plural. 

Nom. Las reinas, the queens. 
Object, a las reinas, to the queens. 

Singular. 

Nom. La casa, the house. 
Object, d la casa, to the house. 

Plural. 

Nom. Las casas, the houses. 
Object, d las casas, to the houses, 

OF THE ADJECTIVE, 

An adjective is a word used to express the quality of 
a noun^ as, hombre valeroso, a valiant man^ muger vir'- 
tuosa, a virtuous woma». 



TO ETYMOLOGY. 

Nouns declined with Jidjedives. 
Singular. 

Nom. El hombre sabio, the wise man. 
Object al hombre sdbio, to the Avise mam 

Plural. 

Nom. Los hombres sabios, the wise men. 
Object, a los hombres sabios, to the wise men. 

Singular. 

Nom. La muger buena, the good woman. 
Object, d la muger buena, to the good woman- 

Plural.. 

Norn* Las mugerea buenas, the good women. 
Object, d las mugeres buenas, to the good women. 

Since the adjective expresses the quality of the sub- 
stantive or noun, it is evident that it never can be used 
in a sentence without having a substantive, either ex- 
pressed or understood, to which the quality implied in 
the adjective is applicable. 

If to the noun understood we can ascribe a gender, 
the adjective is preceded by the article which the noun 
understood would require; as el bueno ama la virtud, a 
good man loves virtue. If the adjective qualifies some 
thing to which we cannot ascribe a gender, the adjec- 
tive, in that case, is preceded by the neuter article; as, 
el le dijo que no leyera, pero ella hizo lo contrario, he 
told her not to read, but she did the contrary. When- 
ever therefore we can prefix to the adjective in English, 
that which, or what, we must use in Spanish, the neu- 



ETYMOLOGY. 71 

ter, not the definite article. Thus we might have said, 
she did that which or ivhat was the contrary. 

N. B. The plural of adjectives is formed like the plu- 
ral of substantives. 

OF THE DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 

There are three degrees of comparison, termed the 
positive, the comparative and the superlative. 

The positive is simply the adjective^ as, bueno, good; 
malo, bad. 

The comparative increases or lessens the quality of 
the positive, and is also used to compare one object 
with another; as, grande, great; mas grande, greater^ 
bueno, good; mejor, better; el sol es mas brillante que 
la lima^ the sun is brighter than the moon; el sol es mas 
brillante que las piedras preciosas, the sun is brighter 
than precious stones. 

The superlative increases or diminishes the significa- 
tion to the highest, or lowest degree; as, el sol es un 
planeta mui brillante, or brillantisimo, the sun is a very 
bright planet. When the superlative is to express com- 
parison, we must prefix el mas, most; or el menos, least, 
to the adjective, which must be followed by the preposi- 
tion de; as, Pedro es el mas sabio de todos los de su lugar^ 
Peter is the ivisest of all in his village; el es el menos 
eriidito de todos, he is the least erudite of all. 

OF CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS. 

Some adjectives are termed cardinal, on accoant of 
iheir expressing numbers; as, three, six, eight, tres, seis, 
ochoy 4'c. OtherSjj ordinal, because they denote order, 
such as, third, fourth, fifths tercero, cuarto, quinto. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



dos 

tres 

cuatro 

cinco 

seis 

siete 

ocho 

nueve 

diez 

once 

doce 

trece 

catorce 

quince 

diez y seis 

diez y siete 

diez y ocho 

diez y nueve 

veinte 

veinte y unoH 

veinte y dos 

treinta 

treinta y uno^ 

treinta y dos 

cuarenta 

cuarenta y uno* 

cincuenta 

mncuenta y uno^ 



Cardinal Numbers. 

one 

two 

three 

four 

five 

six 

seven 

eight 

nine 

ten 

eleven 

twelve 

thirteen 

fourteen 

fifteen 

sixteen 

seventeen 

eighteen 

nineteen 

twenty 

twenty-one 

twenty-two 

thirty 

thirty-orfe 

thirty-two 

forty 

forty-one 

fifty 

fifty-one 



♦fSome authors make the two numbers a single one, an^ write 
it thus: vmtxy,no, vtntidos^ ventures^ vintimatrOi cMcrenfiseis, &c. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



7S 



sesmta 

sesenta y un(y^ 

setenta 

setenfa y uno^ 

ochenta 

ochenta y uno* 

noventa 

noventa y iino* 

ciento 

eiento y uno^ 

docientos* 

trecientos* 

cuatrocientos^ 

quinientos* 

seiscientos* 

setecientos* 

ochocientos* 

novecientos^ 

mil 

dos mil 

veinte mil 

cien mil 

docientos'^ mil 

iin millon or cuento 

dos millones or cuento s 

tres millones or cuentos 

un cuento de cuentos 

dos cuentos de cuentos, i 



sixty 
sixty-one 
seventy 
seventy-one 
eighty 
eighty-one 
ninety 
ninety -one 
a hundred 
a hundred and one 
two hundred 
three hundred 
four hundred 
five hundred 
six hundred 
seven hundred 
eight hundred 
nine hundred 
a thousand 
two thousand 
twenty thousand 
a hundred thousand 
two hundred thousand 
a million 
two millions 
three millions 
a billion 
'C. two billions 



N. B. Every word in the cardinal numbers, which is 
marked with an asterisk, changes its last o into a when 
ever applied to a feminine noun. 

7 



?4 E 


TYMOLOGY. 

Numeration, 


Unidad 


units 


decena 


tens 


centena 


hundreds 


miliar 


thousands 


decena de millaf 


tens of thousands 


centena de miliar 


hundreds of thousands 


cuento 


millions 


decena de mento^ 8rc. 


tens of millions. 


Ordinal Numbers, 


Primero 


first 


segundo 


second 


tercero 


third 


cuarto 


fourth 


guinto 


fifth 


sesto 


sixth 


septimo 


seventh 


octavo 


eighth 


nono or noveno 


ninth 


decimo 


tenth 


undecimo 


eleventh 


duodecimo 


twelfth 


decimo tercio 


thirteenth 


decimo cuarto 


fourteenth 


decimo quinto 


fifteenth 


decimo sesto 


sixteenth 


decimo septimo 


seventeenth 


decimo octavo 


eighteenth 


decimo nono 


nineteenth 


vigesimo 


twentieth 


vigesimo primo 


twenty-first 


vigesimo segundo 


twenty-second 



ETYMOLOGY. 



70 



twenty-third 
thirteenth 
fortieth 
fiftieth 
sixtieth 
seventieth 
eightieth 
ninetieth 
hundredth 
two hundredth 
three hundredth 
four hundredth 
five hundredtli 
six hundredth 
seven hundredth 
eight hundredth 
nine hundredth 
thousandth 

All the ordinal numbers are made feminine, by change 
ing into a; as, primero, primera; decimo tercio, ded- 
ma tercia. 

Nouns denoting Quantity, 
the half una docena a dozen 

the third una veintena a score 
the fourth una centena a hundred 
a couple un miliar a thousand 

media docena half a dozen un cuento a million 

una decena half a score 



vigesimo tercio 

trigesimo 

cuadragesimo 

quincuagesimo 

secsagesimo 

septuagSsimo 

octogesimo 

nonagesimo 

centesimo 

docenfesimo 

trecentesiino 

CfKadragentesimo 

quingentesimo 

secsentSsimo 

septengentesimo 

octogentesimo 

nonagentesimo 

milesimo 



La mitad 
el tercio 
el cuarto 
un par 



OF PRONOUNS. 

A pronoun is a word placed instead of a noun, to pre- 
ent the too frequent repetition of the same word: asj 



re ETYMOLOGY. 

eljusto aborrece, el vicio, el le detesta; a righteous maKi 
hates vice, he detests it. 

There are six sorts of pronouns : namely, persondy 
possessive, relative, interrogative, demonstrative^ and 
indefinite. 

Of tlte Personal Pronouns. 

Personal pronouns admit of number, person, gender 
and case. 

The numbers of personal pronouns, like those of 
nouns, are two: the singular and the plural^ Yo, I; tu, 
thou^ el, he I ella, she^ ello, it, for the singular. Noso- 
tros, we I vosotros, je; ellos, thej, for the plural. 
Ello, it, has no plural. 

The persons of pronouns are three in each number, 

Yo, for the first person, 

tu, for the second, l Singular. 

el, ella, ello, for the third. 



Nosotros, for the first person, I 
vosotros, for the second, }• Plural. 

ellos, for the third. 



isin 

•}■ 



The pronouns of the first and second persons are used for the 
masculine and feminine, without changing their terminations. 
The feminine of the third person is formed by adding la to the 
masculine; as, el, ella; ello is the neuter. 

In the plural, the pronouns of the first, second and third per- 
sons, form the feminine by changing os into as; as, nosotros, noso- 
tras; vosotros, vosotras; ellos, ellas. 

Declension of the Personal Pronouns. 

To the personal pronouns belong, for the sake of distinction, 
two objective cases. One of these is never preceded by a pre- 
position, and the other always. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



77 



First Person. 
Singular, Plural 

Nom. Yo, I. 
1st Obj. me% me 
2d Obj. a mi, to me. 



Nom, Nosotros-as\j we. 

1st Obj. nos, us. 

2d Obj. a nosotros-as^ to us. 



Second Person. 
Singular. Plural. 



Nom. Tu. thou. 

1st Obj. te, thee. 

^d Obj. a ti, to thee. 



Nom. Vosotros-as, je. 

1st. Obj. OS, jou. 

2d Obj. a vosotros-as,to you.. 



Third Person — Masculine. 



Singular. 
Nom. El, he. 
1st Obj. le, him. 



Plural. 
Nom. Ellos, thej. 
1st Obj. los, les, them, to 

them. 
td Obj. a ellos, to them. 



2d Obj. d el, to him. 

Third Person — Feminine. 
Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Ella, she. Nom. Ellas, they. 

Ist Obj. la, le, her, to her. 1st Obj. las, les, them, to 

them. 
2d Obj. d ella, to her. 2d Obj. d ellas, to them. 

* The author is sensible that some individuals will not, proba- 
bly, approve of his having assigned two objective cases to th© 
personal pronouns. If it be considered, however, that this divi- 
sion tends, in no small degree, to the perspicuous elucidation of 
pronominal rules; all objections against it, will, it is hoped, be in- 
stantly removed. 

I JVosotras-asj vosotros-as, Sf-c. are used for contractions of noso'- 
tros, nosotrasj vosotros, vosotras, SfC. 
7* 



TS ETYMOLOGY. 

Third Person — Neuter. 

A'bm. Ello, it. 1 

1st Obj. lo, it. tno plural. 

2d Obj. a ello, to it. J 

There is another personal pronoun, called the reci- 
procal pronoun; which is common to both numbers, and 
to the three genders. It has only the two objective 
cases; as, 

1st Obj. se*, himself, herself, itself, themselves. 
2(/ Obj. d si, to himself, to herself, to itself, to them- 
selves. 

Of the Possessive Pronouns, 
The possessive pronouns indicate possession or pro- 
perty. They are: 

Mio, my, or mine, 1 

tuyo, thy, or thine, tfor the singular. 

suyo, his, its. J 

Nuestro^ our, or ours, 1 

vuestro, your, or yours, wor the pluraL 

siiyo, their or theirs. J 

They are declined thus: 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. 3Iio, my. Nom. MioSy my. 

Obj. Mio, my. Obj, Mios, my. 

* As this pronoun has various meanings, and presents to per- 
sons learning the Spanish language, difficulties, which are often 
found insurmountable, it deserved, we thought, our mature inves- 
tigation. This having been bestowed upon it, we made some ob- 
servations which are inserted in the Syntax on personal pronouns. 
They will, we hope, unravel the intricacies of this difficult part 
of grammar; and render them perfectly intelligible to the com- 
prehension of the student. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



79 



These pronouns change their final o into «, when they 
relate to feminine nouns. 

Of the Relative Pronouns. 

Relative pronouns are those which relate to some 
word or phrase going before, which is thence called the 
antecedent. They are: 

Singular. Plural, 

Quien, who, Quienes, who, 

Cual, } who, which, and Cuales^ 7 who, which and 
Que, 5 t\mt, Que, 3 that, 

Cuyo-a* \\\\ose or of which. Cuyos-as,'^ whose or of 

which. 

These pronouns are declined thus: 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Qiiien, who. Nom. Quienes, who. 

Ohj. a quien, to whom. Obj. d quienes, to whom. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Que, which. Nom, Que, which. 

Ohj. que, which. Obj. que, which. 

Of the Interrogative Pronouns. 

When the relative pronouns are used in asking a 
question, they are called Interrogatives; as, quien e$ 
vm?. who are you? cual de vosotros? which of you? 

Of the Demonstrative Pronouns. 

Demonstrative pronouns are those which express, or 
point out some person, or tiling. They are: 

"■ These are contractions for cmo, cuya, cuyos, cwyas. 



80 ETYMOLOGY, 

Singular, Plural, 

Mas. Fern. Neut. Mas. Fern. 

Este, esta, esto, this. £stos, estas, these. 

ese, esa, eso, ^^^^^^^ esos, esas, -^^^^^^ 

aquel^aquella, aquello, 5 aquellos,aquellas,$ 

These pronouns are declined thus: 
Masculine. 
Singular. Plural, 

Nom. JSste, this. Nom. Estes, these, 

Obj. este, this. Obj. estes, these^ 

Feminine. 

Singular, Plural, 

Nom. Esto, this. Nom, Estas, these. 

Obj. esta, this. Obj. estas, these. 

Of the Indejinite Pronouns, 
Indefinite pronouns are those which express indeter- 
minate or indefinite objects 5 such as these; 
uno, one. 

als^uien, ? , , 

° ' > some bod J, some one. 
alguno, J 

naaie, ^ nobody, no one^ not anybody, not any one, 

ninguno. j 

algo, something. 

cada, every. 

quinquiera, ^ whoever, whosoever, whichever, whicb- 

&Lialquiera, S soever. 

These pronouns are declined thus: 
Singular, 
Nom, Nadie, no body. 
Obj, a nadie, to no body. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SI 



OF VERBS. 

A verb denotes the existence, action, or passion of 
things; that is, being, doing, or suffering; as, el ecsiste, 
he exists; ella escribe, she writes; el es herido, he is 
woumled. 

The verb is divided into three different kinds; active, 
passive, and neuter. 

An active verb expresses an action; and it must ne- 
cessarily have an agent, and an object to which this ac- 
tion may be transmitted; as, el ama la verdad; he loves 
truth. El, is the agent; ama, the action of the agent; 
and verdad, the object to wliich the action was trans- 
mitted. 

A passive verb, affirms that its subject has been acted 
upon, or has suffered, or suffers; as, la casa estd acabada, 
the house is finished; sii padre estd encarcelado, his fa- 
ther is imprisoned. 

A neuter verb expresses the condition, or situation of 
its subject; a.s,fue, he was; moramos, we dwell; el vive, 
he lives. 

Active verbs have been divided into transitive and in- 
transitive. 

An active transitive verb, expresses an action, which 
its subject transmits to another object, called the objec- 
tive, or object of the verb; as, el virtuoso ama c Dios, 
a virtuous man loves God; el sillero pinto las sillas, the 
chair-maker painted the chairs. 

An active intransitive verb denotes an action by which 
the agent or subject alone can be effected, as, mis her- 
manos baildron, my sisters danced; el salto, he jumped. 

Almost all active transitive verbs may be changed, ia 
Spanish, into reflective verbs. 



82 ETYMOLOGY. 

A verb is called reflective^ when the agent is the in 
dividiial to whom the action of the verb is transmitted? 
as, el capitan se alabo^ the captain praised himself. 

Active transitive verbs are sometimes changed into 
transitive, by adding to them the objective case of some 
noun which is generally formed from them; as, hailar 
un baile, to dance a dance; vivir una huena vida^ to live 
«. good life. 

To verbs belong number, person, tense and mood. 
Of Number. 

Verbs, like nouns, require a singular and a plural 
number; as, el niho llora, the child cries; los ninos llo- 
ran, the children cry. 

Of Person, 
Verbs have three persons in each number. 
Singular, 
First person, Yo amo, I love. 
Second person. Tit amas, thou lovest. 
Third person, El, or ella ama, he or she loves. 

Plural, 
First person, Nosotros-as amamos, we love. 
Second person, Vosotros-as amais, ye love. 
Third person, Ellos-as aman, they love. 

Of Tenses. 

The being, doing, and suffering, expressed by a verb, 
may be limited to three tenses or different periods of 
time: past, or having taken place; present, or taking 
plsice; future, or being to take place. 

These three tenses or periods, are subdivided in the 
folio wino; manner; 



ETYMOLOGY. 8S 

Present, imperfect, perfect indefinite, perfect definite, 
pluperfect, future imperfect, future perfect.^ 

Of Moods. 

Mood expresses the . particular manner in which the 
being, doing, or suffering of verbs, is represented. The 
verbs have, in the Spanish language, four moods; infi- 
nitive, indicative, imperative, subjunctive. 

The infinitive, afl&rms in a general, unlimited and in- 
definitive manner, without any distinction of number or 
person; as, venir,to come; ir, to go; conceder, to grant; 
perdonar, to forgive. 

The indicative, affirms the execution of the action de- 
noted bj the verb, in a positive and unconditional man- 
ner; as, nosotros damos, we give; ellos vienen, they 
come. 

The imperative, orders or entreats the execution of 
the action; as, id vosotros, go ye; concedednos, grant us; 
perdoname, forgive me. 

The subjunctive, always speaks of the action as con- 
tingent; as, sifueremos mahana, if we happen to go to- 
morrow; si viniera aqui, were he to come here; aunque 
h conceda, tliough he may grant it. 

Of the Participle. 

A participle is a word derived from a verb, and, in 
its properties, it resembles both verbs and adjectives. 

A participle (so called from its participating of the 
nature of the verb from which it is derived) resembles 
its primitive, because it denotes being, action, or suf- 
fering; as, he ?>\^o pohre, I have been poor; tic has escri- 

* All these tenses are fully explained in the Syntax, to which 
tlie student is referred , 



84 ETYMOLOGY. 

to los nombres, thou hast written the names; se han im- 
preso varias obras, several works have been printed. 
And it has also the properties of an adjective, because 
it qualifies the noun to which it is applied with the va- 
riations of gender, number, and case; as, los nombres 
escritos, the written names; en las obras impresas, in 
the printed works. 

Spanish verbs have two participles, called the pre- 
sent and the past participles. The latter, from its be- 
ing used to form passive verbs, has obtained the name of 
the passive participle. 

All verbs have not a present participle, and in many 
verbs it retains only its adjective property. The pre- 
sent participle ends in ante for the first, and in iente, 
for the second or third conjugation. 

The only present participles which are used in the 
Spanish language are: obedietite, obedient; habiente, pos- 
sessing; teniente holding; participante, participating; 
amante, lover; semejante, alike; tocante, touching; con- 
cerniente, concerning; and perhaps a few others. 

Of the Gerund'.' 

The Spanish gerund is, in all respects, like the Eng- 
lish present participle. It is therefore a certain form 
of the verb, which, as it has been already observed, 
possesses the properties of verbs and adjectives. The 
gerund, like the English present participle, not having 
any determined time assigned to it, may refer to the 
past, nresent, or future; as, le vi perorando, I saw him 
speaking; practicando la virtud, sera feliz, practising 
virtue, he will be happy. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



OF CONJUGATION. 

The conjugation of a verb is the regular combination 
and arrangement of its persons, number, tenses, moods, 
and voices. 

In Spanish, all the verbs are limited to three conju- 
gations, which are distinguished thus: verbs ending in 
ar, belong to the first conjugation; as, llamar, to call: 
verbs in er, to the second; as, temer, to fear; and verbs 
in i?', to the third; as, escribir, to write. 

Verbs may be regular or irregular^ personal or itn- 
personal, perfect or defective. 

Irregular verbs ar» those which deviate from the re- 
gular form bj which all the others are conjugated. 

Impersonals are verbs which cannot be conjugated 
through all the persons. 

Defectives are such verbs as want some of the tenses. 

There are some verbs, which, from the nature of their 

service, have been styled auxiliary or aiding verbs: 

these are, haber, to have; tener, to have or to hold; ser. 

to be; estar^ to be. 

That the student may never be at a loss to know upon what 
vowel he is to lay the stress; and as it is of the utmost impor- 
tance that the verbs be accurately pronounced — we have thought 
proper to accent all the words, in the folloAving conjugations. It 
is, however, to be observed, that the accent should never be writ- 
ten but upon those words which are mentioned in orthography, 
from page 47 to page 49. 

Conjugation of the auxiliary verb, haber^ to have. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Haber, To have. 

Perfect. 
Haber habido, To have had. 



86 ETYMOLOGY, 

Gerund. 
Hahiendo, Having. 

Compound of the Gerund- 
Hahiendo hahido, Having had. 

Participle. 
Mahido, Had. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 





Present Tense — Singular. 


1 


Yoke, 


I have. 


2. 


Til has or Vmd.* ka, 


Thou hast, or j'ou have- 


3. 


El ha, 


He has. 
Plural. 


1. 


Jfosotros hemos, 


We have. 


2. 


Fosotros habeis, or Vmds 


. han, Ye have. 


S. 


Ellos han, 


They have. 
Imperfect. 


1. 


Yo habia, 


I had. 


2. 


Tu habias, 


Thou hadst. 


S, 


El habza, 


He had. 


1. 


M)sotros habtamos, 


We had. 


2. 


Vosotros habiais. 


Ye had. 


3. 


Ellos habian, 


They had. 



'^ The use of Tu and Vosotros, being entirely confined to menial 
servants, or very intimate friends, recourse is had to the pronouns 
Usted, or vuesamerced; your worship; and Ustedes, or vuesaraer cedes; 
your worships. These titles in writing are generally abbreviated, 
thus: — v.; Vm.; Vmd.; or V. M.; Vtra. Md.; for Usttd. Ustedes is 
contracted by adding an s to any of these abbreviations; as, Vs. 
Vms. &c. — Examples; sehor, Vmd. me hace grande honra; Sir, yoii, 
do me much honour; Senores, Vmds. usan demasiadas ceremonias; 
gentlemen, you use too many ceremonies. It scarcely seems ne- 
cessary to observe, that the verbs and pronouns always agree 
with V. and Vs. in the third person. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



-87 



Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. 

1. Yo hube, I had. 

2. Tii hubiste, Thou hadst. 

3. Elhubo, He had. 

1. JS'osotros hubtmos, We had. 

2. Vosotros hubistds, Ye had. 

3 Ellos htibieron, They had. 

Perfect Definite, 

1. Yo he habido, I have had. 

2. Tu has habido, Thou hast had. 

3. El ha habido, He has had. * 

1. J^osotros hemos habido j We have had. 

2. Vosotros habels habldoy Ye have had. 

3. Ellos han habido, They have had. 

Pluperfect. 

i. Yo hube, or habta, habido, 1 had had. 

2. Tu hubiste, or habias, habido, Thou hadst had. 

3. JSZ /i?/6o, or Aa6ia, habido, He had had. 

1. J^osotr OS hub linos, or hub lamos, We had had. 

habido, 

2. Vosotros hxibisteis, or habXais Ye had had. 

habido, 

3. £//os rmUeron, or habian, ha- They had had 







Futurer 


Imperfect. 


i. 


Fo habre, 




I shall or will have. 


2. 


Tu habrds, 




Thou shalt or wilt have 


3. 


El habrd, 




He shall or Avill have. 


1. 


Js'^osotros habremos, 




W^e shall or will have. 


2. 


Vosotros habreisj 




Ye shall or will have. 


3. 


Ellos babran, 




They shall or will have 



1. Yo habre habido, 

2. Tii habrds habido, 
2^ El habrd habido, 



Future Perfect. 

I sh&ll or will have had. 
Thou shalt or wilt have had. 
He shall have had. 



Si^ ETYMOLOGY. 



1. 


Jfosotros habremos habit 


loj We shall have had. 


2. 


Vosotros habreis habido, 


Ye shall have had. 


3. 


Ellos habrdn habido, 


They shall have had 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 


i 


Yo hdya, 


I may have. 


2. 


Tu hdyas, 


Thou mayest have. 


3. 


El hdya, 


He may have. 


1. 


J^'osotros haydmos, 


We may have. 


3 


Vosotros haydis. 


Ye may have. 


3 


Ellos hdyan, 


They may have. 



Imperfect. 
1 . Yo hubiera, habna, hubiese, I should, would, might have. 

'i. Tu hubieras, habrias, hubieses, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightsi 

have. 
3. El hubiera, habria, hubiese, He should, would, might have, 

1. J^osotros hiMeramos, habriamos, We should, would, might have. 

hubiesemos, 

2. Vosotros hubierais, habriais, hu- Ye should, would, might have. 

bieseis, 

3. Ellos hubieran. habrian, /lu&i- They should, would, might have 

esen, 

Perfect, 

1. Yo hdya habido, I may have had. 

2. Tu hdyas habido, Thou mayst have had. 

3. El hdya habido, He may have had. 

1. J^osotros haydmos habido, We may have had. 

2. Vosotros haydis habido. Ye may have had. 

3. Ellos hdyan habido, They may have had. 

Pluperfect. 

1. Yo hubiera, habria, hubiese ha- I should, would, might have had, 

btdo, 

2. Tu hubieras, habrias, hubieses Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightsi 

habido, have had. 

S. El hubiera, habria, hubiese ha- He should, would, might have 
bido, had. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



89 



1. J^Tosofros hubieramos, hahria- 

mos, hvbiesfiinos habidoy 

2, VosGlron aichierais, hubriais. 

hiihieseh kabido, 



We should, would, might have 

had. 
Ye should, would, might have 
had. 

Ellos hubieiun, habrlan, hubi- They should, would, might have 
esen habido, had. 



1 . Si yo hubiere, 

2. Si tu huhieres, 

3. -Si el hubiere, 
■1. Si nosotros hubieremos. 
2. Si vosotros hv^iereis, 
.3. Si ellos hubieren, 



Future Imperfect. 

If I should have. 
If thou shouldst have., 
If he should have. 
If we should have. 
If ye should have. 
If they should have. 



1. Si yo hubiere habido, 

2. Si tu huhieres habido, 

3. jSi el hubiere habido, 

1 . Si nosotros hub'ieremos habido, 

2. Si vosotros hubiereis habido, 

3. Si ellos hxibieren habido, 



Future Perfect. 

If I should have had. 
If thou shouldst haive had. 
If he should have had. 
If we should have had. 
If ye should have had. 
If they should have had. 



Conjugation of the auxiliaiy verb, tener, to have or to 
hold. 



Tener, 



Teniendo, 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

To have* 

Perfect. 

To have had. 

Gerund. 

Having. 



* To luive, used as an active verb, is translated tener,- and as au 
auxiliary, haber,- as, to have books, tener libros; to have written, 
haber escriio; we Aof/ spoken, habiaraos hablado, 
8* 



90 ETYMOLOGY. 

Compound of the Gerund. 

Habiendo temdo, Having had. 

Participle. 
Tenidoy Had. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

1. Yo tengo, I have. 

2. Tu tienes, or Vmd. tiene. Thou hast, or you have 

3. El tiene, He has. 

1. Jfosolros tenemos, We have. 

2. VosoirosteneiSjOr VmdsJienen,Ye have. 



3. 


£ZZos tienen, 


They have 
Imperfect. 


1. 


Yo tema^ 


I had. 


.2. 


Tu temasy 


Thou had St. 


3. 


El tenia, 


He had. 


1. 


Msotros tentamos^ 


We had. 


2. 


Vosotros temaiSf 


Ye had. 


3. 


Ellos teniariy 


They had. 




Perfect Indefinite^ or Preteri 


1. 


Yo tUVCy 


I had. 


2. 


Tu tuviste, 


Thou hadst. 


3. 


El tUVOy 


He had. 


3. 


Jfosotros hivimoSy 


We had. 


2. 


Vosotros tuvtsteis, 


Ye had. 


3. 


Ellos tuvieron, 


They had. 




Perfect Definite, 


L 


Yo he temdo, 


I have had. 


2. 


Tu has temdo. 


Thou hast had. 


3. 


El ha temdo. 


He has had. 


1. 


Jfosotros hemos tentdo. 


We have had. 


2. 


Vosotros habeis temdo. 


Ye have had. 


3, 


Ellos han tenido. 


They have had. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



9i 



Pluperfect. 

1. Yo hiibe, or hahi a tenido, I had had. 

2. Tu hubiste, or habias tenido, Thou hadst had- 

3. El hiibo, or hahia tenido, He had had. 

1. J^osotros hubimos, or habiamos We had had. 

tenido, 

2. Vosotros hubisteis, or habiais te-Ye had had- 

nido, 

3. Ellos hubieron^OT habian tenido, They had had. 







Future Imperfect. 


1. 

2. 
3. 
1. 
2. 
3. 


Fo tendre, 
Til tendrds, 
El tendrd, 
Msotros tendremos, 
Vosotros tendreis, 
Ellos tendrdn. 


I shall or will have. 
Thou shalt or wilt have> 
He shall or will have. 
We shall or will have. 
Ye shall or will have. 
They shall or will have. 

Future Fefect. 


1. 

2. 
3. 

2. 
3. 


Yo habre tenido, I shall or will have had. 
Tfi habrds tenido, Thou shalt or wilt have had 
El habrd temdc, He shall have had. 
J^osotros habremos tenido, We shall have had. 
Vosotros habreis tenido. Ye shall have had. 
Ellos habrdn tenido, They shall have had. 






Imperative. 


1. 
2. 
1. 


Ten tu, 
Tenga el, 
Tened vosotros, 
Tengan ellos, 


Have thou. 
Let him have. 
Have ye. 
Let them have. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 


{ 
3 


Yo tenga, 
Til tengas, 
El Tenga, 


I may have. 

Thou mayest have. 

He may have. 



92 ETYMOLOGY. 

1. J^osotros tengdmos, We may have. 

2. Vusotros tengdis, Ye may have. 

3. EUos Tengan, They may have. 

Imperfect. 

1. Yo tuviera, tendna, tuviese, I should, would, might have. 

2. Tu tuvieras, tendrias, tuvieses, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 

have. 

3. El tuviera, tendrta, tuviese, He should, would, might have. 

1. JSTosotros tuvieramos, fendr2:a- We should, would, might have. 

nios^ tuviesernos, 

2. Fosotros tuvierais, tendriais Ye should, would, might have. 

tuvl^^eis, 
S, Eiics tuvicranj tendrian, tuvi- They should, would, might have. 
esen, 

Perfect. 

1. Yo hdya temdo, I may have had. 

2. Til hd'ias tenido, Thou mavst have had. 

3. El haun. temdo, He may hdve bad. 

1. Jsro$6tr->s haydmos temdo, We may have had. 

2. Vosotros haydis temdo. Ye may have had. 

3. EUos hdyan temdo, They may have had. 

Pluperfect. 

1. Yo huhiera, habria, ^w&iese I should, would, might have had. 

temdo, 

2. Tu huUeras, habrias, hubieses Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 

temdo, have had. 

3. El huhiera, huhrla, hubiese te- He should, would, might have 

nido, had. 

1. J^osotros hubieramos, habria- We should, would, might have 

nws, hxKhissfinos temdo, had. 

2. Vosotros hubierais, hubriais, Ye should, would, might have 

hubiestis temdo, had. 

3. EUos hubieran, habrian, hubir They should, would, might have 

esen tenidOt had. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



93 



Future Imperfect, 


1. iSi yo tuviere, 


If I should have. 


2. Si tu tuvieres, 


If thou shouldst have. 


3. Si el tuviere, 


If he should have. 


i . Si nosotros tuvieremos, 


If we should have. 


2. Si vosotros tuviereis. 


If ye should have. 


3. Si ellos tuvieren, 


If they should have. 



Future Perfect. 

1. Siyo hubiere tenido, If I should have had. 

2. Si tu hubieres tenido, If thou shouldst have had. 

3. Si el hubiere tenido, If he should have had. 

1. Si nosotros hubieremos tenido, If we should have had. 

2. Si vosotros hubiereis tenido. If ye should have had. 

3. Si ellos hubieren tenido, If they should have had. 

Conjugation of the auxiliary verb ser, to be, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Ser,* To be. 

Perfect, 
Haber sido, To have been. 

Gerund. 

Siendo, Being. 

Compoutid of the Gerund. 

Habiendo sido, Having been. 

Participle. 
Sido, Been. 

* As a perfect acquaintance with the application of the verbs 
ser and estar, to be, is a matter of great diflSculty, but of absolute 
necessity, we have given a long dissertation upon them, which 
we thought proper to place in the Syntax. 



94 



ETYMOLOGY. 



IXDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



1. Yo sot, 

2. Th eres, o Vmd. es, 

3. El es, 

1. J^osotros somas, 

2. Vosotros sois, Vmds. son, 

3. EUos son, 



I am. 

Thou art, or you are. 

He is. 

We are. 

Ye are. 

They are. 



Imperfect. 



Yo era, 
Tn eras, 
El era, 

M)sotros eramos, 
Vosotros erais, 
EUos eran. 



1 was. 
Thon wast. 
He was. 
We were. 
Ye were. 
They were. 



Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. 
Yo fm, 
Tufuiste, 
Elfue, 

J^osotros fuimos, 
Vosotros fmsteis, 
Bllos fueron, 



I was. 
Thou wast. 
He was. 
We were. 
Ye were. 
They were. 



Perfect Definite. 

I have been. 
Thou hast been. 
He has been. 
We have been. 
Ye have been. 
They have been. 

Pluperfect. 

1. Yo hube, or habia sido, I had been. 

2. Tu hubiste, or hubtas sido, Thou hadst been> 

3. El huho, or habia sido, He had been. 



1. Yo he sido, 

2. Tm has sido, 

3. El ha sido, 

1. J^osotros hemos sido, 

2. Vosotros habeis sido, 

3. EUos han sido, 



ETYMOLOGY. 



95 



1. Msotros huMmos^ or habminos We had been. 

2. Vosotros hiibisteis, or habmis Ye had been. 

sido, 

3. Elios hubieron, or habtanstdo, They had been. 



Future Imperfect. 



1. Foscre, 


I shall or will be. 


2. Tw sams, 


Thou shalt or wilt be 


3. El sera, 


He shall or will be. 


1 . vYosofros seremos, 


We shall or will be. 


2. Vosotros sereis, 


Ye shall or will be. 


3. Ellcsserdn, 


They shall or will be. 



Future Perfect. 



1 . Yo habre sido, 
'2. Tu habrds stdo, 
S. El habrd sido, 

1. ^'osotros habremos stdo, 

2. Vosotros habreis sulo, 

3. Ellos habrdn sido. 



I shall or will have been. 
Thou shalt or wilt have been 
He shall or will have been. 
W^e shall or will have been. 
Ye shall or will have been. 
They shall or will have been. 



1 . Se lu, 

2. Sea el, 

1 . Sed vosotros, 
■2. Sean ellos, 



Imperative. 



Be thou. 
Let him be. 
Be ye. 
Let them be. 



1 . Yo sea, 

2. Tu seas, 

3. El sea, 

1 . J^''os6tros sedmos, 

2. Vosotros sedis, 

3. Ellos sean. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 



I may be. 
Thou mayst be. 
He may be. 
We may be. 
Ye may be. 
They niay be. 



96 ETYMOLOGY. 

Imperfect. 
1. Yofuera, sena^fnese, I should, would, might be. 

-2. Tujv^ras, serias,fueses, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 

be, 
3. Elfuera^ seria,fuese, He should, would, might be. 

1. Jsfosotros fueramas, senamos, We should, would, might be. 

fwsemos, 

2. Vosotrosfuerais, serials, fiieseis, Ye should, would, might be, 

S. Ellosfneran,senan,fuesen. They should^ would, might be. 

Perfect. 

1. Yo hdya sido, I may have been. 

2. TH hdyas sido, Thou mayst have been. 

3. El hdya sido, He may have been. 

1 . M'osotros haydmos sido, We may have been. 

2. Vosotros haydis sido, Ye may have been. 

3. Ellos hayan sido, They may have been. 

Pluperfect. 

1 . Yo hubiera,habria,hubiese sido, I should, Avould, might have been. 

2. Tu hubierais, habrias, hubieses Thou shouldst, wouidst, mightst 

sido, have been. 

3. Elhubiera,hubria,hubiesesido, He should, would, might have 

been. 

1, M)sotroshubieramos,habriamos, We should, would, might have 

hubiesemos sido, been. 

2. Vosotros hubierais, habriais,hu- Ye should, would, might have 

bieseis sido, been. 

-3. Ellos hubieran, habrian, hubi- They should, would, might have 
esen sido, been. 

Future Imperfect. 

1. Si yofuere, If I should be. 

2. Si tufueres, If thou shouldst be. 

3. Si elfuere. If he should be. 

1. Si nosotros fueremos. If we should be. 

2. Si vosotros fuereis, If ye should be. 

3. Si ellos fueren. If they should be. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



97 



Future Perfect. 



1. Si yo hubiere sido, 

2. Si tii hubieres sido, 

3. Si el hubiere sido, 

1 . Si nosotros hubieremos sido, 

2. Si vosotros hubiereis sido, 

3. Si ellos hubieren sido, 



If I should have been. 
If thou shouldst have been. 
If he should have been. 
If we should have been. 
If ye should have been. 
If they should have been. 



Conjugation of the auxiliary verb, estar, to be. 



Estdr, 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

To be. 



Perfect. 
Haber estddo, To have been. 

Gerund. 
Estdndo, • Being. 

Compound of the Gerund. 
Habiendo estado, Having been. 

Participle. 
Estddo, Been. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



1. Yo estoi, 

2. Tu estds, 

3. El estd, 

1 . J^'osotros estdmos, 

2. Vosotros estdis, 

3. Ellos estdn, 



1. Yoestdba, 

2. Tu estdbas, 

3. El estdba, 

1. Jfosotros estdbamos, 

2. Vosotros estdbais, 

3. Ellos estdban, 

9 



1 am. 

Thou art, or you are 

He is. 

We are. 

Ye are. 

They are. 



Imperfect. 



I was. 
Thou wast. 
He was. 
We were. 
Ye were. 
They were. 



98 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Perfect Indefinife. or Preterite 


Yo titilVt^ 


1 was. 


Til tstuti&te, 


Thou wast. 


El tstuto, 


He was. 


J^o^rdros estummos, 


We were. 


Vosotros tUutUttiSt 


Ye were. 


ElLos e&ttitieron, 


They were. 




Perfect Definite. 


Yo he esUldo, 


I have been. 


Til has tstruhy 


Thou ha«i been. 


El ha eitdflo, 


He has been. 


J^osolros liemo^ t$,lMo 


, We have been. 


Vosotros habeis estddo 


Ye have been. 


Elioh han e&tado, 


Tliey have been. 



Pluperfect, 

1. Yo hubft, or hahia cstfjdo^ I had been. 

2. Til htihute, or kafnas estado^ Thou hadst been. 

3. El huho, or hubia edddo, He had been. 

1. J^o&otros hubimoi, or hahiamos We had been. 

2. Vo&otroi hubUteiSy or htihiaii es- Ye had been. 

tadOf 

3. Eltos hvibieron^ OThabiantildclOy They had been. 



Future Imperfect. 



Yo tilare, 
T't'i t&tardSj 
El t&tard, 

JWosotros thlaremoSy 
VouAroi eslareis, 
. Elloi t&taran. 



Yo hahre csUido, 
Tii habras e&tddo, 
El habrd eatddo^ 



I shall or will be. 
Thou shall or wilt be. 
He shall or will be. 
We shall or wilJ be. 
Ye shall or will he. 
They shall o» will be. 

Future Perfect. 

I shall or will have been. 
Thou r»halt or wilt have been. 
He .shaJJ or will have been. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



99 



^Vosotrcs habremos estddo, 
Vosotrfii hahrsis estddo, 
Ellos hahrun esiddo. 



We shall or will have been. 
Ye shall r/r will have been, 
Thev shall or will have been. 



Imperative, 



Esid tu, 


Be thou. 


.. Esteet, 


Let bka be. 


1. Esiad voioiros. 


Be ye. 


2 E^t^n'^n,.^ 


Let them be 




SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present. 



L 


Yo este, 


I may be. 


2. 


Tu estes, 


Thou mayst be 


5. 


El este, 


He may be. 


1. 


w\ O5ofros titemos^ 


We may be. 


2. 


Vosotros esteis, 


\> may be. 


•3. 


EUo% iit^n, 


They may be. 



Imperfect. 
Yo estutiera, estarta, estutiese^ I should, would, might be. 
Tu estutieras, estartas, estuti- Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightsT 

e5M, be. 

El estuviera, estaria, esiui-iese, He should, would, might be. 
J^'osotroa, estutieramos, estaria- We should, would, might be. 

moSj estuvie semes, 
VoiiOiros (.rtutierais, estariais, Ye should, wo'ild. might be. 

Ell:' estutieran, e^arian estu- They shouid, would, might be. 



Perfect. 



i. i'o hriyi e.'.iddo, 

2. Tu hay as tatddo, 

3. El hdya estdda, 

1 . ^"os6tro$ haydmos estddo, 

2. Voiotroa haydis estddo, 

3. Ello^ hduan estddo. 



I may have been. 
Thou mayst have been 
He may have beea. 
We may have been. 
Ye may have been. 
They may have been. 



100 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Pluperfect, 



. Yo hubiera, habrla, hubiese 
estddo, 

. Tu hubieraSj hahrias. hubieses 
estddo, 

. El hubiera, hdbrta, habiese es- 
tddo, 

, Xosotros huhiSramos, habria- 
mos, hubiesemos estddo, 

. Vosotros hubierais, hahnaiSf 
hubieseis estddo, 
Ellas hubieran, habrian, hubi' 
esen estddo, 



I shouldjWould.might have beeia. 

Thou shouldst, wouldst, might 

have been. 
He should, would, might have 

been. 
We should, would, might have 

been. 
Ya should, would, might h&ve 

been. 
They should, would, might have 

been. 





Future . 


Imperfect. 


1. 


Si yo estuviere, 


If I should be. 


2, 


Si tu estuvieres, 


If thou shouldst be. 


3. 


Si el estuviere, 


If he should be. 


1. 


Si nosotros estuvieremos, 


If we should be. 


2. 


Si vosotros estuviereis, 


If ye should be.. 


3. 


Si ellos estuvieren, - 


If they should be. 




Future Perfect. 


1. 


Si yo kxibiere estddo, 


If I should have been. 


2. 


Si tu hubieres estddo, 


If thou shouldst have been. 


3. 


Si el hubiere estddo, 


If he should have been. 


1. 


Si nosotros Imhisremos estddo, 


If we should have been. 


'2. 


Si vosotros hubiereis estddo. 


If ye should have been. 


3. 


Si ellos hubieren estddo, 


If they should have been. 



OF REGULAR VERBS. 

Tlie Spanish verbs, as it has been said before, are 
divided into three conjugations^ the first ends in ar, 
the second in er, and the third in ir. 

The letters of which the verb is composed, not in- 
cluding the termination, are called radical letters, be- 
cause they never change; for instance, in am-f/r, to 
love; the radical letters are am; and the termination 
is ar. 



ETYMOLOGY. 101 

First conjugation in ar; as, hablar, to speak. 

The tenses of the verbs of the first conjugation, are 
formed from the infinitive, by changing the termina- 
tion a?', into the following letters, to form the 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 







Present Tense, 


0, 




■ habl-o, I speak. 


as, 




habl-as, Thou speakest . 


a, 


>as • 


habl-a, He speaks. 


dmos, 




habl-a/nos, We speak. 


ais, 




habl-ai5, Ye speak. 


an, J 




.hsihl-an, They speak. 


Imperfect, 


aba, 1 




" habl-afta, I did speak. 


abas, 




habl-a&as, Thou didst speak. 


aba, 


> a*! <i 


habl-dJa, He did speak. 


abamos. 


as 


ha.hl-di)amos. We did speak. 


dbais. 




hzhl-dbais. Ye did speak. 


aban, 




.habl-a6«n, They did speak. 


Preterite. 


<?5 




■ habl-e, I spoke. 


dste. 




hahl'dste. Thou spokest. 


0, 


• as < 


habl-5, He spoke. 


dmos. 


r "^ 


habl-amos, We spoke. 


dsteis, 




habl-osfeis, Ye spoke. 


dron. 




^habl-a)-o«, They spoke. 


Future. 


are, 




■ habl-cre, I shall or will speak. 


ards, 




habl-a? as, Thou shalt cr wilt spe%k 


ard, 


• as ■ 


habl-flra, He shall or will speak. 


arevws, 




habl-ar<??»os, We shall or will speak. 


areis, 




habl-arlis, Ye shall or will speak. 


nrdn, 




. habl-amn, They shall or will speak. 



9* 



102 



ETYMOLOGY. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



ad, 



] f habl-a, 


Speak thou. 


. habl-e, 


Let him speak. 


' haJol-dd, 


Speak ye. 


[^ habl-en, 


Let them speak. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



ura, 

ana, 

cise, 

dras, 

arias, 

uses, 

dra, 

aria, 

dse, 

dramas, 

ariamos. 

dsemos. 

drais, 

uriais, 

dseis, 

dran, 

arian, 

dsen. 



I 



■} 



'habl-e, 
habl-es, 
habl-e, 
hahl-emoSf 
habl-eis, 
habl-cji, 



I may speak. 
Thou mayest speak. 
He may speak. 
We may speak. 
Ye may speak. 
They may speak. 



Imperfect. 



iiabl- 
habl- 
habl- 

habl- 
habl- 
habl- 

habl- 
habl- 
habl- 



■ara, 

■aria, 

■dse, 

■dras, 

■arias, 

■dses, 

■dra, 
■aria, 
■dse, 



} 



I should, would, might speak. 



^Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 
r speak. 



He should, would, might speak. 




{-ariamos, > We should, would, might speak. 
i-dsemos, J 



Ye should, would, might speak. 



They should, would, might speak. 







ETYMOLOGY. 


Future, 


are, 




■ habl-are, I should speak. 


ares, 




habl-ares. Thou shouldst speak. 


are, 




habl-are, He should speak. 


dremos, 


>as - 


ha.hl-dremos, We should speak. 


areis, 




habl-areis, Ye should speak. 


aren, 




. habl-aren, They should speak. 



103 



Second conjugation in er; as, beber, to drink. 

The tenses of the verbs of the second conjugation, 
are formed from the infinitve, by changing the termi- 
nation er, into the following letters, to form the 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



cs, 

e, 

€7nos, 

eis, 

en, 



tamos, 

iais, 

tan. 



10, 

imos, 
zsteis^ 
ieron^ 



Present Tense, 


■ beb-o, 


I drink. 


beb-es, 


Thou drinkest. 


beb-e, 


He drinks. 


beb-mos, 


We drink. 


beb-eis, 


Ye drink. 


. beb-e7i, 


They drink. 


Imperfect. 


' beb-Ca, 


I did drink. 


beb-MS, 


Thou didst drink 


beb-ea, 


• He did drink. 


heb-tamos, 


We did drink. 


heh-lais, 


Ye did drink. 


.beb-Tan, 


They did drink. 


Preterite. 


'beb-?, 


I drank. 


beb-isie, 


Thou drankest. 


beb-io, 


He drank. 


beb-mos, 


We drank. 


beb-Mteis, 


Ye drank. 



»beb-ieron. They drank. 



104 




ETYMOLOGY, 




Future. 


ere, 




" beb-ere, 


I shall or will drink. 


eras, 




heh-erds, 


Thou shalt or wilt drink 


era, 


>as ■ 


beb-em, 


He shall or will drink. 


eremos, 


heb-eremos, We shall or will drink. 


ereis, 




beb-cms, 


Ye shall or will drink. 


erdn, 




L beb-emn, 


They shall or will drink. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



ed, 



-) (beb-e, 
I J beb-a, 
r^jbeb-erf, 
J \^ beb-cn, 



Drink thou. 
Let him drink. 
Drink ye. 
Let them drink. 



tern, 
tria, 

iese, 

ieras, 
ertas, 
ieses, 
zera, 
erta, 
ufe, 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



beb-a, 
beb- as, 
beb-a, 
beb-amo5, 
beb-ais, 
. beb-an, 



I may drink. 
Thou mayest drink, 
He may drink. 
We may drink. 
Ye may drink. 
They may drink. 



beb-iera, 
beb-ena, 
beb-iese, 
beb-ieras, 
as \ beb-erfas, 
beb-ieses, 

beb-iera, 
beb-erfo, 
beb-iese, 



Imperfect, 



might, could, would or should 
drink. 



f^Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst or 
C shouldst drink. 



} 



He might, could, would or should 
drink. 



i^ramos. 

eriamoSi 

iesemos, 

ierais, 

eriais, 

ieseis, 

ieran, 

erian, 

iesen. 



n 



ETYMOLOGY. 

heh'i^ramos. 



105 



heh-eriamos. 
heb-iesemos, 

heb-ierais, 
heh-eriais, 
beb-ieseis, 
heh-ieran, 
beb-cn«n, 
^beb-ilien, 






e might, could, would or should 
drink. 



Ye might, could, would or should 
drink. 



7 They might, could, would or 
C should drink, 



Future. 



isre, 




' beb-ilrc, 


I should drink. 


teres, 




beb-iere5, 


Thou shouldst drink 


iere, 


■ as « 


beb-wre, 


He should drink. 


ieremos, 


hobAeremos, 


We should drinks 


iereis, 




beb-wrew, 


Ye should drink. 


ureiXf 




. beb-imn, 


They should drink. 



Third conjugation in irj as, Subir, to walk up. 

The tenses of the verbs of the third conjugation, are 
formed from the infinitive, bj changing the termina- 
nation ir, into the following letters, to form the 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 







Present Tense. 


0> 
tmos, 


•as ^ 


'■ sub-o, 

sub-e5, 

stib-e, 

sub-mps, 

sub-«s, 
. sub-en. 


I walk up. 
Thou walkest up 
Kc walks up. 
We walk up. 
Ye walk up. 
They walk up 



106 



ETYMOLOGY. 

Imperfect. 



?c, 






-sub-ra, 


I walked up. 


las, 






sub-fas, 


Thou walkedst up. 


U, 




.s. 


sub-fa, 


He walked up. 


zamos, 




sub-famos, 


We walked up. 


?ais, 






sub-fais, 


Ye walked up. 


Un, 


J Lsub-fan, 


They walked up. 




Preterite. 


i, 


-^ fsvib-i, 


I did walk up. 


zste, 






sub-fsfe, 


Thou didst walk up. 


id. 






sub-io, 


He did walk up. 


imos. 




sub-mos, 


We did walk up. 


isteis, 




sub-Mfeis, 


Ye did walk up. 


ieron, 


,J Lsub-ieron, 


They did walk up. 




Future 


Indefinite. 


ire, 


•^ 


^sub-ire, 


I shall or will walk up. 


irds, 






sub-iras, 


Thou Shalt or wilt walk up 


ird, 




^as< 


sub-ire, 


He shall or will walk up. 


iremos, 




sub-ire??ios, 


We shall or will walk up. 


ireis, 






subireis. 


Ye shall or will walk up. 


irdn, 


- 




,sub-iran, 


They shall or will walk up. 




IMPERATIVE. 


6, 


-N /'Sub-c, 

>as<i ^"''-"' 
] sub-idj 


Walk thou up. 


a, 


Let him walk up. 


id, 


Walk ye up. 


an, 


^ 




^sub-an, 


Let us walk up. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



«, 




'sub-a, 


I may walk up. 


as, 




sub-as, 


Thou mayest walk up 


fl, 


>as< 


sub-a, 


He may walk up. 


; 6mos, 




sub-a/rtos, 


We may walk up. 


ais, 




sub-ais, 


Ye may walk up. 


an, J 




^sub-aw, 


They may walk up.' 



lera, 
iria, 
iese, 
ieras, 

Uses, 
iera, 
• iria, 
"tese, 
ieramos, 
iriamos, 
iesemos, 
lerais, 
iriais, 
ieseis, 
ieran, 
irtan, 
iesen. 



ETYMOLOGY. 

Imperfect. 



107 



)>as.^ 



"sub-iera, 

sub-irCa, 

sub-iese, 

suh-ieras, 

suh-irias, 

sub-iesfs, 

sub-iera, 
sub-ma, 
sub-iese, 
sub-ier amos, 
sub-tnamo.s, 
sub-iesemoi, 
suh-lerais. 
sub-irmis. 
sub- ieseis, 
sub-/e>*aTi, 
9ub-irTan, 
,^sub-iese?i, 



} 



I should, would, might walk up. 



^Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 
C walk up. 



He should, would, might walk up. 



We shouldjwould, might walk up- 



} 
} 

:, > Ye should, would, might walk up. 

^They should, would, might walk 
3 up. 



Future. 



iere, 

ieres, 

iere, 

ieremos, 

ierds, 

i^ren, 



Tsub-iere, 
sub-ieres, 



s< 



j sub- iere, 



sub-i'ere7nos, 
j sub-iJreis, 

\^SUb-i€7'€?l, 



I should walk up. 
Thou shouldst walk up. 
He should walk up. 
We should walk up. 
Ye shoulu valk up. 
They should walk up. 



FORMATION OF THE PARTICIPLE AND GERUND. 

The passive participle is formed from the infinitive, by changing 
its terminatian into ado, for the first conjug-ation, as. 
From am-ar, to love, is formed amadc, loved. 
From habl-«r, to speak, is formed hahlado, spoken, &c. 
The gcrwn^i of the first conjugaiioo is formed from the infini- 
tive also, by changing its termiriatioD into av/h; as, 

From am-ar, to love, is formed amand^\ loving. 
From habl-or, to speak, is formed hablando, speaking. 



108 ETYMOLOGY. 

The passive participle of the second and tlw'd conjugations, is 
formed from their infinitive, by changing its termination into 
ido; as, 

From beb-cr, to drink, bebido, drunk. 
From sub-ir, to walk up, subido, walked up. 
The gerund of the second and third conjugations, is also formed 
from their infinitive, by changing its termination into iendo; as, 
From beb-er, to drink, bebiendo, drinking. 
From sub-ir, to walk up, subiendo, vv^alking up. 

Observation, 

When the termination, in both numbers, of the third person ol 
the perfect indefinite, in the second or third conjugation, is pre- 
ceded by, a, f , or ii, the i is changed into y; as, caer, cayo, cayeron^ 
leer, leyo, leyeron; arguir, arguyo, arguyeron. The same change 
takes place in all the persons of the first and third imperfects of 
the subjunctive, in the future of the same mood, and in the ge- 
rund; as, cayere, cayeres, 8fC. cayese, cayeses, 8fC. cayendo. When 
the last of the radical letters is a u, and the i of the termination 
belongs to the same syllable, the i is retained; as, seguir^ sigxdo, 
siguiesen, 8fC, 

Some verbs require a change in their radical letters, in order 
j^hat the final consonant may retain in all the tenses, the harsh or 
soft pronunciation which it has before the infinitive: this altera- 
tion cannot occur, unless the radicals end in c, in g, in gu, or in 
qu, and the changes, which then take place, are as follows: — 
Examples. 



c into 


qu 


before e in 


I. 


buscar, busquemos. 


c 


z 




a or 0, 


II. in. 


veneer, venza, zurcir, zurzo. 


g 


gu 




e 


I. 


lllegar, leguen. 


g 


j 




a or 0, 


11. HI. 


coger, cojan, Jingir, finjo. 


gu 


g 




a or o, 


in. 


segutr, sigo, sigan. 


qu 


c 




a or 0, 


III. 


delinquir, delinco, delincamos. 



The first column shows in what manner the radicals must end, 
to require the alteration; the second, the letters substituted; the 
third, what letters must begin the termination to admit the 
change; and the fourth, the conjugations wherein these several 
deviations are found. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



109 



CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. 

ACTIVE. 

First Conjugation — Amar, to tove. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 
dinar, To love. 

Perfect. 
Haber amddo, To have loved. 

Gerund. 

Jmdndo, Loving. 

Compound of the Ge^'und. 
Habiendo amddo, Havina: loved. 



Ainddo, 



Participle. 

Loved. 



*iino,* 
Amas, 
Ama, 



dmdis, 
Aman, 



Aindba^ 

Amdbas, 

Amdba, 

Jiniabamos, 

Amdbais, 

xlmaban, 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



I love or do love. 

Thou lovest or dost love. 

He loves or does love. 

We love or do love. 

Ye or you love or do love. 

They love or do love. 



Imperfect. 



I did love. 
Thou didst love. 
He did love. 
We did love. 
Ye or you did love. 
They did love. 



* As in almost all cases the verbs are used without the personal 
pronouns, we have thought proper to omit them in the foliowiug con- 
jugations. See Syntax. 
10 



HO 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Jlnmstej 

AmdsteiSi 
Amdron. 



He amddoj 
Has amddo, 
Ha amddo J 
Hemos aniddo, 
Habeis a7nddo, 
Han mnddo, 



Perfect. 

I loved. 
Thou lovedaft 
He loved. 
We loved. 
Ye or you loved 
They loved. 

Perfect Definite. 

I have loved. 
Thou hast loved, 
lie has loved. 
We have loved. 
Ye or you have loved 
They have loved, 



Huhe or habia amddoj 
Huhiste or hctbias amddo, 
Huho or hahta amddo, 
Hubimos or habiaraos amddo ^ 
Hubt.teis or habiais amddo, 
Hubieron or habian amddo, 



Pluperfect, 

I had loved. 
Thou hadst loved. 
He had loved. 
We had loved. 
Ye or you had loved 
They had loved. 



iMmare, 

Amards^ 

Amard, 

zimaremos- 

Amareis, 

Amardn, 



Habre atnddo^ 
Hah'ds amddo., 
Habrd amddo, 
Habremos amddo, 
Habreis amddo, 
Habrdrb amddo, 



Future Imperfect, 

I shall or will love. 
Thou shalt or wilt love. 
He shall or will love. 
We shall or will love. 
Ye or you shall or will love 
They shall or will love. 

Future Perfect. 

I shall or will have loved. 
Thou shalt or wilt have loved 
He shall or will have loved. 
We shall or will have loved. 
Ye or you shall or will have loved. 
They shall or will have loved. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Ill 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Ame el, 
Amdd vosotro 
<.fnien ellos, 



-. hne^ 

Ames, 

Ame, 

Amemos, 

Ame is, 

Amen, 



Love thou or do thou love. 
Let him love. 

Love ye or you, or do you love. 
Let them love. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOODc 

Pi-csent. 

I may love. 
Thou mayst love. 
He may love. 
We may love. 
Ye or you may lov 
They may love. 



Imperfect. 



Amdra, amaria^ a»idse, 
Amarus, amarias, amdses, 



Amdra, amarla, amdse, 
Aindramos, amarlamos, anidsemos, 
Amdims amariais, amdseis. 



Amdran, mnarian, amdsen, 



I should, would, might love. 
Thou shouldst, wouldst, mights - 

love. 
He should, would, might love. 
We should, v%'ould, might love. 
Ye or you should, would, might 

love. 
They should, would, might love 



Perfect, 



Hdya amddo, 
Hdyas amddo, 
Hdya amddo. 
Hdyamos amddo, 
FIdyak amddo, 
Hdyan amddo, 



I may have loved. 
Thou mayst have loved 
He may have loved. 
We may have loved. 
Ye or you may have loved- 
They may have loved. 



Pluperfect. 



Hubiera, habr'ia, hubiese, araddo, I sliould, Avould, might have 

loved. 
Hi(bieras,habrias, hubiases, amddo, Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 

have loved. 
HMera, habrla. kuMese. c.mddo.. He should, would, might have 

loved. 



112 



Hubieramos, habriamoSj 

mos, amddo, 
Huhierais, habriais^ hubieseis, 

amddo, 
Huhierarif habnan, hubiesen, 

aniddo, 



ETYMOLOGY. 

, hubiese- 



We should, would, might have 

loved. 
Ye or you should, would, might 

have loved. 
They should, would, might have 

loved. 



Future Imperfect, 



Si amdre, 
Si amdres, 
Si amdre. 
Si amdremds. 
Si amdreiSi 
Si amdren, 



Si htibiere amddo, 
Si hxibieres amddo, 
Si hubiere amddo, 
Si hubieremos amddo ^ 
Si hubiereis amddo, 
Si hubieren amddo^ 



If I should love. 

If thou shouldst love. 

If he should love. 

If we should love. 

If ye or you should love 

If they should love. 



Future Perfect. 



If I should have loved. 

If thou shouldst have loved, 

If he should have loved. 

If we should have loved. 

If ye or you should have loved 

If they should have loved. 



Second Conjugation^-Yender, to sell 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 





Present Tense. 


Vender, 


To selL 




Perfect. 


Haber vendido, 


To have sold 




Gerund, 


Vendiendo, 


Selling. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



lis 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 





Present, 


fendoy 


I sell or do sell. 


Vendes, 


Thou sellest or dost sell. 


Vende, 


He sells or does sell. 


Vendemos, 


We sell or do sell. 


Vendeis, 


Ye or you sell or do sell. 


Venden, 


They sell or do sell. 




Imperfect. 


Vendia, 


I did sell. 


VendiaSf 


Thou didst sell. 


Vendia, 


He did sell. 


Vendtamos, 


We did sell. 


Vendiah^, 


Ye or you did sell. 


Vendian . 


They did seU. 




Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. 


Vendi, 


I sold. 


Vendiste, 


Thou soldst. 


Vendio, 


He sold. 


Vendtmos, 


We sold. 


Vendisteis. 


Ye or you sold 


Vendieron, 


They sold. 




Puture Imperfect. 


Vendere, 


I shall or will sell. 


Venderas, 


Thou shall or wilt sell. 


Venderd, 


He shall or will sell. 


Venderemos. 


We shall or wiU sell. 


Vendereis, 


Ye or you shall or will sell 


Vinderan, 


They shall or will sell. 




IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Ve^ide t>2, 


Sell thou or do thou sell. 


Venda el, 


Let him sell. 


Vended vosoti os 


Sell ye or you or do ye sell. 


Vendan ellos, 


Let them sell. 



i 



* We have thought proper to omit those tenses which are called 
compound. They are always formed by the several tenses of haber. 
to have, and the past participle of the verb which is to be conjugated: 
10* 



114 



ETYMOLOGY. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present, 



Vendu. 
Vendas. 
Venda, 
Venddmos. 



Vendan, 



I may sell. 
Thou mayst sell. 
He may sell. 
We may sell. 
Ye or you may sell. 
They may sell. 



Imperfect. 
Vendiera, venderta, vendiese, I should, would, might sell. 

Vendieras, venderias, vendieses^ Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 

sell. 
Vendiara, venderia, vendiese, He should, would, might sell. 

Vendieramos, venderiamos, vendi- We should, would, might sell. 

esemos, 
Vendierais, venderiais, vendieseis, Ye or you should, would, might 

sell. 
Vendieran, venderzan, vendiesen, They should, would, might sell. 

Future Imperfect. 

Si vendiere, If I should selL 

.Si vendieres, If thou shouldst sell. 

Si vendiere, If he should sell. 

Si vendieremos, If we should sell. 

Si vendiereis, If ye or you should sell. 

Si vendleren, If they should sell. 

Third Conjugation — Unir, to unite. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 



f/nir, 



{fakir unidc, 



Present Tense. 
To unite. 

Perfect. 

To have united. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



iU 



Uniendo. 



Gerund. 

Uniting. 



INDICATIVE MOOD- 



Present. 



Uno, 

lines, 

Une, 

Unimo 

Urns, 

Unen, 



Unta, 

UmaSf 

Unia, 

Uniamos, 

Umais, 

Ionian, 



Uni, 

Uniste, 

Unio, 

Unhnos, 

Unisteis, 

UniSron, 



Vnire, 

Unirds, 

Unird, 

Uniremos, 

Unireis, 

Unirdn, 



I unite 01' do unite. 

Thou unitest or dost unite. 

He unites m- does unite. 

We unite or do unite. 

Ye or you unite or do unite. 

They unite or do unite. 



Imperfect. 

I did unite. 
Thou didst unite. 
He did unite. 
We did unite. 
Ye or you did unite. 
They did unite. 

Perfect Indefinite^ or Preterite, 

I united. 
Thou unitedst. 
He united. 
We united. 
Ye or you united 
They united. 

Future Imperfect. 

I shall or will unite. 
Thou shalt or wilt unite- 
He shall or will unite. 
We shall or will unite. 
Ye or you shall or will unite. 
They shall or will unite. 



116 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Une tu, 
Una el, 
Unid vosotros, 
Unan ellos, 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



Unite thou or do thou unite. 
Let him unite. 

Unite ye w you or do ye unite 
Let them unite. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Una, 

Unas, 

Una, 

Undmos, 

Undis, 

Unan, 



Present. 



I may unite. 
Thou mayst unite. 
He may unite. 
We may unite. 
Ye or you may unite. 
They may unite. 



Imperfect. 



Uniera, uniHa, uniese, 
Unieras, untrms, unieses, 



I should, would, might unite. 

Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 

unite, 

Uniera, uniria, uniese, He should, Tvould, might unite. 

Unieramos, unirlamos, uniesemos, We should, would, might unite. 

Unierais, uniriais, unieseis, Ye or you should, would, might 

unite. 
Unieran, unirian, uniesen, They should, would,might unite. 



Future Imperfect. 



Si uniere, 
Si unieres, 
Si uniere, 
Si unieremos, 
Si uniereis, 
Si unieren, 



If I should unite. 

If thou shouldst unite. 

If he should unite. 

If we should unite. 

If ye or you should unite. 

If they should unite. 



ETYMOLOGY. 

(CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. 

vSer herido, to he wounded, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Ser herido, To be wounded. 

Pe)fect. 
Haber sido kendo, To have been wounded. 

Gerund, 

Siendo herido, Being wounded. 

Compound of the Gerund. 

MaMendo sido herido, Having been wounded. 

Participle. 
Herido, Been wounded. 



117 



rNDICATIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



Soi herido, 
Eres hei'ido, 
Es herido, 
Somos heridos 
Sois heridos, 
Son heridos, 



Era herido. 
Eras herido, 
Era herido, 
Eramos heridos, 
JErais heridos, 
Eran heridos, 



I am wounded. 
Thou art wounded. 
He is wounded. 
We are wounded. 
Ye or you are wounded. 
They are wounded. 



Imperfect. 



I was wounded. 
Thou wast wounded. 
He was wounded. 
We were wounded. 
Ye or you were wounded. 
T hey were wounded. 



118 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Perfect Indefinite^ or Preterite, 

Fui herido, I was wounded. 

F-mste herido, Thou wast wounded. 

Fus herido, He Avas wounded. 

F'uimos heridos, We were wounded. 

Fiusteis heridos, Ye or you were wounded. 

Fueron heridos, They were wounded. 



Sere herido, 
"Serds herido, 
Sera herido, 
Seremos heridos 
Sereis heridos, 

Serdn heridos, 



Se tu herido, 
Sea el herido, 
Sed vowtros heridos^ 
Sean ellos heridos, 



Future Imperfect. ■ 

I shall or will be wounded. 
Thou shalt or wilt be wounded. 
He shall or will be wounded. 
We shall or will be wounded. 
Ye or you shall or will be woun- 
ded. 
They shall or will be wounded. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Be thou wounded. 
Let him be wounded. 
Be ye oj* you wounded. 
Let them be wounded. 



Sea herido, 
Seas herido. 
Sea herido, 
Sedmos heridos, 
Sedis heridos, 
Sean heridos. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. 



I may be wounded. 
Thou mayst be wounded. 
He may be wounded. 
We may be wounded. 
Ye or you may be wounded. 
They may be wounded. 



Imperfect. 

I should, would, might be woun- 
ded. 

Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst, 
be wounded. 
Fuera, seria.fuese, herido, He should, would, might be 

wounded. 



Fuera, seria, fuese, herido, 
Fueras^ serias, fusses, herido, 



ETYMOLOGY. 



119 



Fiieramos, sertamos,fu=semos, he- We should, would, might he 

rirfcs, wounded. 

FuSro-is, ser7ai',fiieseisy heridos, Ye or you should, would, might 

he wounded. 
Fueran, senan, fussen, heridos, They should, would, might he 

wounded. 

Future Imperfect. 

Sifiiere herido, If J should he wounded. 

Sifusres herido, If thou shouldst he wounded. 

Sifuere herido, If he should he wounded. 

Si fiieremcs heridos, If we houJd he wounded. 

Sifusreis heridos, If ye or you should be wounded 

^ifueren heridos. If they should be wounded. 



CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE VERB. 

Alabdrse, to praise one^s self. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 
llabarse, To praise one's self. 

Perfect. 
Hah.h'se alabddo. To have praised one's sell 

Gerund. 
dlbandose, Praising one's self. 

Compound of the Gerund. 
Habisndose alabado, Having praised one's self. 

Participle. 



dlabddc, 



Yo me aldbo, 
Tu te alUbaff 
El se alaba^ 



Praised one's self. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

I praise myself. 
Thou praisest thyself. 
He praises himself. 



120 

J^ofiotros nos alabdmos, 
Vosotros OS fdabdis, 
Ellos se aldbdn, 



Me nlaMba, 
Te ahibdbas, 
Se a'abdha, 
JS/hf atabdbamos, 
Os alfthdbais, 
Se alabdban, 



ETYMOLOGY. 



We praise ourselves. 

Ye or you praise yourselves. 

They praise themselves. 



hnperfect. 



I did praise myself. 

Thou didst praise thyself. 

He did praise himself. 

We did praise ourselves. 

Ye or you did praise yourselves.. 

They did praise themselves. 



Perfect Indefinite, or Preterite. 



Me alabe, 
Te alabdste, 
Se alabo, 
J\'os alabdmos, 
Os alabdnlels, 
Se alabdron. 



I praised myself. 

Thou praisedst thyself. 

He praised himself. 

We praised ourselves. 

Ye or you praised yourselves. 

They praised themselves. 



Me alabare, 
Te alabards, 
Se alabard, 
JSTos alabaremos, 
Os alabareis, 
Se alabardn, 



Future Imperfect. 



I shall*praise myself. 
Thou shalt praise thyself. 
He shall praise himself. 
We shall praise ourselves. 
Ye or you shall praise yov)rselveg. 
They shall praise themselves. 



imp:erative mood. 



Aldbese el, 
Mabdos vosotros. 



Mdbense ellos.^ 



Praise thyself, or do thou praise 

thyself. 
Let him praise himself. 
Praise ye or you or do ye praifr 

yourselves. 
Let them praise themselves 



ETYMOLOGY. 



121 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present. 



Me alabe, 
Te aldbes, 
Se aldbe, 
J^os alabemos, 
Os alabeis, 
Se aldben, 



I may praise myself. 

Thou mayst praise thyself. 

He may praise himself. 

We may praise ourselves. 

Ye or you may praise yourselves. 

They may praise themselves. 



Imperfect 

Me alabdra, alabaria, alabds€f I should, would, might praise 

myself. 
Te alabdras, alabarias, alabdseSt Thou shouldst, wouldst, mightst 

praise thyself. 
.Se alabdra, alabaria, alahdse, He should, would, might praise 

himself. 
vYos alabdramos, alabariamos, ala- We should, would, might praise 

bdfiemos, ourselves. 

Os alabdrais, alabariais, alabdseis, Ye or you should, would, might 

praise yourselves. 
Se alabdran, alabarian, alabdsen. They should,would,might praise 

themselves. 

Future Imperfect. 

Si me alabdre, If I should praise myself. 

Si te alabdres, If thou shouldst praise thyself. 

Si se alabdre, If he should praise himself. 

Si nos alabdremos, If we should praise ourselves. ' 

Si OS alabdreis, If je ar you should praise your- 
selves. 

Si se alahdren. If they should praise themselves. 



11 



122 



ETYMOLOGY. 



The following are some of the most useful regular verbs, which 
will serve as examples for the student to exercise himself. 



1st CONJUGATION. 

Llorar, to weep. 
EstudiaVy to study. 
Soplar^ to blow. 
Silbar, to whistle. 
Escuchar, to listen. 
Mirar, to look. 
Pellizcar, to pinch. 
iSrroparse, to cover one's self. 
Desnudarse, to undress. 
Descansar, to repose. 
Retrogradar, to retrograde. 
Estornudar^ to sneeze. 
^Syunar, to fast. 
Jlhnorzar, to breakfast. 
Espavlla7', to snufF. 
Ridicularizar^ to ridicule. 
Gritar, to shout. 
Olvidarse, to forget. 
Saludar, to salute, 
Lisongear, to flatter. 
Perdonar, to pardon. 
Miviar, to alleviate. 
Bajar, to descend. 
Entrar, to enter. 
JEnviar, to send. 
Mejorar, to improve, 
aATaueg-ar, to navigate. 
Trabajar, to work. 
Estrechavj to render narrower. 
Dibujar, to draw. 
Danzar, to dance. 
Suplicar, to supplicate. 
Endi-rezar, to straighten. 
t^gugerear, to make holes. 
Ser accusado, to be accused. 
Ser h&llado, to be found. 



2d CONJUGATION. 

Recoger, to gather. 

Barrer, to sweep. 

Romper, to break. 

Coger, to catch. 

Deber, to owe. 

Someterse, to submit one's self. 

Jiprender, to learn. 

Leer, to read. 

Responder, to answer. 

Comer, to eat. 

Einprender, to undertake* 

Toser, to cough. 

Jltreverse, to dare. 

Creer, to believe. 

Ceder, to yield. 

Aniemr, to foresee. 

Correr, to run. 

Sorber, to swallow. 

Socorrer, to succour. 

Prometer, to promise. 

Egercer, to exercise. 

Temer, to fear. 

3d CONJUGATION. 

Escnbir, to write. 
Fmr, to live. 
Persistir, to persist. 
Desistir, to desist. 
Pulir, to polish. 
Incurrir, to incur. 
Infundir, to infuse 
Insistir, to insist. 
Disuadir, to dissuade, 
Parfir, to depart. 
Descubrir, to discover, 
Citrfirse, to be tanned. 



ETYMOLOGY. 123 

OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 

Irregular verbs are those v/hich deviate from the 
general rules of conjugation, given from page 101 to 
page 108. 

As the Spanish language abounds in this kind of Terbs, they 
claimed, we thought, a considerable portion of our attention. It 
is for this reason that we have spared no trouble or study in col- 
lecting all the irregular verbs which could possibly be found. We 
are happy to say, that our researches have not been unsuccessful. 
For, independently of the many verbs v/hich we have gathered 
from an attentive perusal of the latest edition of the Dictionary 
of the Spanish academy; others, not to be found in it, have been 
added to our number. We are, therefore, enabled to present to 
the public, all, or very nearly all, the anomalous verbs which the 
Spanish language now contains. 

On the arrangement of these verbs, wo also bestowed much of 
our attention. And we hope, that the advantages resulting from 
that which we have adopted, will prove it to be judicious. 

The Spanish language contains thirty-one different irregular 
verbs;* but, like these, many others are conjugated. We thought, 
that the best plan Ave could adopt, would be, to arrange systema- 
tically these thirty-one, presenting to the view their full conjuga' 
tion; and exhibiting, by italick characters, their irregular persons 
or tenses — then to place in alphabetic columns all the irregular 
verbs which we have collected, including the thirty-one; with re- 
ferences to the model after which they are to be conjugated. By 
this means, should a person find a verb and be doubtful whether 
it be regular or irregular, he possesses immediately, and without 
trouble, all that is necessary. For, should this verb not be found 
among the irregular, he must immediately take it for granted that 
it is regular, and accordingly conjugated after the regulations 
given from page 101 to page i08. 

The irregular verbs, most undoubtedly, constitute one of the 
greatest difficulties of the Spanish language; and when the mem- 
bers of the Spanish Academy said: "JVttesiraf lengua abunda en 

* Without including the auxiliary, which are also irregular. 
+ Gramatica de la lengua Castellana, preface, page xvi. 



124 ETYMOLOGY. 

verbos irregulares, que, aunque la hacen mas agradahle y armoniosa por 
la vanedad que permiten, tambien la hacen mas dificil, por lo que se 
apartan de los comunes en la conjugacion;* they were perfectly 
convinced of it. 

If, therefore, as we anxiously anticipate, our labours and re- 
searches in collecting and arranging the irregular verbs of the 
Spanish language, in the manner we have done, tend to render 
this part of grammar easy and intelligible, we shall consider all 
our toils fully successful and amply repaid. 

* Our language abounds in irregular verbs, which, by their variety, 
render it more agreeable and harmonious. Bat the great difference 
existing between them and the regular verbs, renders its acquisition 
TOuch more difficult. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



125 



> 
Pi 

o 

w 

ffl 



o 

•-s 

;z; 
o 



«*-< ~* 



a; 55€ 
rt O CD 



O 
H 

O 

o 






"I 



qs q; ^ 



21 1^ rQ r-Q 1-^ 

goocssoooo 



a \ci \ei a d <U *nS n \ni \nj 

oooooooooo 
oooowooooo 



3 -a r^ 



>>> ^ _5 S 



fsH •- ^ .ir 



^ O Ph 



p — I 
.5 'S 



o o c 

O O 5 

a a : 



>; -T3 TJ -a 
GO »: s- =- '- 



a i^ fH ^i 1 

dj \ss a \as V: 

F^ T3 IT3 r-3 q 

Jh I- ^H t- ! 

o o o o < 

o a o o < 

C3 rt C3 CS ( 



? ro T3 r^ -3 






SOOOssOOOO 
ec3rtc3«Brtrtrics 



S o o O 
S o o « 
e c3 rt rt 



s o o o o 
S o o o u 
e d rt rt cj 















fcp3 
5^ 



Oh »^ «H 






<u2 

Hi 



11^ 



ns 



ETYMOLOGY. 







^ 

^ 






bJD 

o 


o 


!5 


^ 


-M 




>j 




^ 


cT 


•C 


$e 


-^ 


^ 


53 


e 


&0 


cc 




§s 


g 


g 


<4i 


^ 


laj 


«.«.». 



c ^ rt 
S O Ph 



flea B § C £5 

.2» CD' OJ Ci .JS .S 0) 03 <U <» 



.2^ ' 



i ^a3 _ « 5 vS -5 S 
d \ci \!i rf ei © \nS eS \rt >eS 

Qj©®Q;«a5iU©©© 



SIS s 



c c s: a 
<o ii o oi 
;a< Pd Ph fOc 



J-i Si X f-l 

caeca 

© © 05 lU 0) 

a^p,PH$:^a< 



\flj 



) © 



1^ 



' sT I ^ « : 



'Snccggccaa 
.5S © © ® .^ .2^ © © © © 



COrOm^^ f^ i^ S~ <C S^ 

^ C3 \iTJ C3 53 Qi c^ rt rt rt 

scccgsccca 

'§, ft P, P,'a,'S, P, Oh ft Ph 




I 



ETYMOLOGY. 



i2r 







o.S-2 






f iS) 






'S ?o^ 






OJ QJ O 






S-l^ « 






g.^ hO 






•" «.2 






l!l 












•^ « "o 






J5^2 






ns *^ 






^i^l 


-^ 






"13 


.-; (D 


X S 


^ 


J4 ^ 








•2 JD '^ t. T3 .i£ ■ 









oiia 

^O -^3 -^3 T3 
E = S C 

c3 rt e cj 



« I- s- ^ S 

'O -rS ~ -!2 -5 



"55 '^ ^ 
^ ^ <52 



c ^ « 
^ O Ph 






5 ^ , 






M rC =, tH !« » 'C 'S 'S 

S c3 § 5 rt 



; -^3 -S ■§ 



O S CS s ;S 

T3 -a TS -s -3 

c s c a g 



I 



128 



ETYMOLOGY. 






Jill 

T3 n3 -~j T3 



'a ^T3 -§ ^ 



q q q 



5 O Ph 












TS 13 tS T3 ^ '^ 



'JS '^ -^ 'X5 



-ens "i 






ETYMOLOGY. 



129 






5 £^ fc.^ hJO bX) ^ Sf- bObTj bJO bp 



a, d ^ \0 _ •'^ rt \S o) O 

ri \n3 \«J a d p c3 d \n \ci 

e^ oB fci3 iX bJO hC bJO iiJO hC b.O £00 

333=3333333 

. r-5. ,— ,. r-). i-j. r-,. n-5 • ,-,• r->. --5- r-, 



o I s a 

£JD fcJ3 faj: bp 



en O C O O 

iilii 



53 ^ G 

i^O ^ ^iD 



^ 6 



.^ TJ S^ 
£ o (^ 



_S _3 _3 _3 _;S _§ _3 _3 _3 ^3^ 






! 3 3 3 ,S S.: 



S 3 3 3 



E, «« ?5 rt ea 
t? br, oj: bc fco 



^ ^ 



130 



ETYMOLOGY. 



o 
H 

o 

Q 
O 

o 



^ ^xJ 



IT I :§ 



<4i ^ (4:) 



(X) O 



O CLj 



tH « © 









5 ^ £ 



^11 

c^ 2 fl 



C ri 


a a a a 


. - 5 


ri cj © a> 


li:slii.2'SJ.§ 




oo"oo««ooc;o 


^ © ^ _© » 


2 S i^ Si^ iJ 


oj © "S "S "t 


3 •" © © © 


a,pwa<&i ; 


rt c3 rt rt- ! 




»3 tn M tn 


tn *S 'iS "^ '«^ 'S '3 


© xl;; \rt oi 




ooooo«oooo 


_« _© © _« i 


^ S^^^i^ 


"S ■© "S 4) "a 


i "S 03 © la 


p^&,ci.a,CLa,CL,p.o,Q, 


rtcSrioSaeirSriricj 


05 


ssss 


s c« i 


c. s s s s 


§ S 2^§ 
= cj a St: 


rt cS © © 


© \». \M <» 




0000 


« "0 ■© "o 


4) OJ © 


w _o © © _2 






© "ep © 


~ © © © © 


a, Oh Ci- Q, 


a.o-p.OHQ, 


C3 TO C3 <S 


« rt rt 03 c3 


.. 


cT cs oT 


• ^ .,^^<^j 


t< -r (« S-" 


ir c^ 'O S^ • 


^ •-, © ^H iT) <Y) 


© ._ ._ © 5j js .^ cw .^ ._ 


ooo©««oooo 



© 'S 



)©©©^^©©©© 

l<QMa,OH?5,?i,PHCl^CL|PH 



o .2 v2 S © § .2 



}©©©©©■«©©©© 
a,OHCuciHa,a,G<fXC^pH 




WIS ? 


1 


til 
III 




f^ 


t 


1^ 


to -.O .S 










' — - 


—v— 




111 










111 

*^ © fl 








> 
•«5 




















& 




5cS 2 




Q 




ft. 




s 





ETYMOLOGY. 



ISl 



44 ^ 



a a 















2 s g s =■ 
s ."- s « ^ 

« '§ ,S ^2 ^t 








>§ 






§ 




?^ 


•^ 


o 




c> 


"< 


^ 


J^t^ 



^ O Ph 



ri 



' g-| ir'« ^"^^ ^J ^ 






-SS rC iii -Si 



-I s 

Is 



•S o.^ 



s ° 






132 



ETYMOLOGY. 



P 






^ •? ^ 



C *0 



^ o Q^ 



d ^ 



c • c a s a 

. • o ^ . • a ci o a 

g c S '?s g si !- -r ao S 

<5^ s r ^ '" ' 



gsssisssss 



.2 w 


'S 'ra 'S '3 


"i i ,5 S o '1 }^ S :i M 


— -0'73'CT2-Ct3'C-OT3 


t.MM»^^^^^!M;^ 


ooooocoooo 


SSSS2SSSSS 


^ 


g o O o o 


XO05C! , ^SfiSS 


illl 


illll 


-o ^ -5 -p 


rpy-p'-^'-p 


i. I- — « 


i^ :.. -^ u U 


C i c o 


o o c c o 


S g S 2 


2 s s sa 




e.5 fe.«.2 



1—1 ^ be I 



soooggooco 
S222g§Sa2S 



;OCCS§COOO 

;S22gg2SSS 



S o o o 

§ 2 2 2 



Illl 



ETYMOLOGY. 



5 ^ p5 



a • c G c a 

• O ,5 . . rt c3 © <» 

4 S Sh ^nJ c» si ti ■ - (« iL, 

.^ a; 03 aj .g .« © Qj (1) fO 



11 11 

'O 'X3 -C "O 
u -— h S-i 

a to o o 



o o o o 

§ s s s a 

O rt CJ QJ © 

re ^ -O -5 'S 
O QJ O © (D 

p^ a, CI, e^ p^ 



"^ ^- 



c 


g 

^ 


-§ 


^ 






'^ 


^ 


"« 


5^ 


5v 


5x 


^ 


<i:> 


Oi 


a, Q, Q, 



^ O P^ 



\'i^ rt rt (U QJ 

.2^ 03 © G3 .?J .^ (U <a (U <u 



2.d>2 o ^ e.l i.2.2 

,?J O a 03 ,^ .^ 03 OJ O O 



E- S 






12 



134 



ETYMOLOGY. 






-I 



-^ -73 «.^ 



c . c e s5 a 



^ ^ 03 c3 03 cj cS ': 

O U U O O ' 



■ill I 



2 o 2 2 

§ s a s s 

g cS c3 © © 

S V4^ C ^O >© 





"B 


^ 


«r^ 




g 


cT 


IS- 

.2 o 


^"^ 


?>5 


^ 


^ 


^ 


J 


o 


o 


O 


^ o 


o3 


T3 


6 




•t^ 


fl 


*o 


4^=1 


c 






!t © 


^ 




rt 


15 


►^ 


O 


Ph 


II 



2 


>. 


© 


.=« 


■f 


>■ 


© 


?>-i 


>1 




ri 


d 




C3* 


ri 


rt 


ci 


© 


© 


« 


« 


w 


© 


« 


o 


© 



So\ »» 2 -^ >S 2 H •Sf' S? 2 ^ ^ 
o©o©oS©©«© 



.fci:.2 V-, © .^X5 ^ g 
§ rt rf rf § rt rf 
« © © © I o © © 



© © 

51 



ETYMOLOGY. 



135 



t^ 



c s C g- g i s i 






i « : 



o S o o 



1 


i 


1 


i i 


1 




^W y<- 



^ 


o 




B 


^ 










■xs 


o 


-TJ 


o 


G 


0) 


c 




a 




*3 




"cti 




"rt 




c 


-tj 


C 




c: 


c 


5 


o 


o 




o 


o 


bJD 








o 


p 


J 






1 


^ 






Cb 




4j 


^ 


-i^ 


•^ 




-^ 


<5 


-S 


« 


S 


s 


OOO 









1 1^ 'S^ =1 I. !„ i^ « t" i' 



q5 .2 ,2 i; (U 2 ^ •'^ <" ^ 
<^^rO a,-Q-0 ST-'S^ *§,■£, 







iS6 



ETYMOLOGY. 



s 


^ 


6^ 


'rt 


3 


3 


© 


■oS) 




^ 


c 


!3 
CO 


o 


"o 


o 




4 


^ 


c 


g 


4 


•^ 


^ 


^ 


c:) 




Q 


■=^ fis ^ 



i^^i.^ii 









TS "T! -^ •^ 

£ 2 ^ '^ 



r„ 2 O O 2 

o i s s I 

S 5~ ,^ .§5 ,*- 

a )^ C :^ ^'g 

-^3 -^ ITS -a -e 
o § o s S 

&, ?;, Ct* Si, ?!, 






13 -^ 






i "^ ^ -S T3 



E ^ ns ^ ;g 



f> 



ETYMOLOGY. 



1ST 





UJL 




"Bh 


'o 


O 




a 


a 


o 








3^ 


^ 










o 






^ 






g 


cT 




1^ 








'^ 


5J 


g 


^ 


CS 


o 


S 



a, ft^ fis 



i III I § i§ § ^ 

S4, ft, ?;, a, 5i, {;, 54, S;, a, 



M 8.! 



s S 



.2.2 



Qi ^^ 1^ '>^ Q^ (T*.^^ f^ ^^ \Q* 



o 2 






CO 2 s o o 

§ i i s s 
^12^ ■« :^ :^ 

s, ?;,»,«, a. 



3. 



I O PL, 



"" <^ s"' 



2 'g * ^ ^o *>c-« "^ .2^ -S 

lllfi i §1 11 

Si, a. a, S5, a, a, a. a, a, a, 



.s -I 



logs S S S ; 
s5,o- a, a, I a, a a ; 



S « « § 



12* 



138 



ETYMOLOGY. 



'5 


^ 


'% 


0) 


bJD 




^ 


n 




o 


"S 


03 






^ 




•^ 


^ 






o 


5. 


.■^ 


^ 










It 


it 




<u 


ii 


^ 




;s 


OO'O' 



> 


^ 


.Sr 










fl 


'o 


°2 


3 


'-Hj 




o 





1 .2 /r. 'p I i .1 -g 2 ;§ 

N « fD ''? I> •<" ? « &. g S 



; -2 •£ •: 



©So! 

Sv$2 Si 



' rt \S ^g \S iS 



s ? s ^ li 
g » I; t^ <» 

C C?i 0< O^ Cr> 



^ C g I:- I; I; -g t •? 



i .g 0^1 3 Is 3 .2^ 3 t 3 ".2 

O^ O^ &i &< Oh Oi Os ^ ^ Q» 



•11 J e .1:2 I: .sis 




ETYMOLOGY. 



13^ 



^^ 



eo ^' ^ 



C ? si . . ? c3 I 2 

.2 ';§ 'S s g _t -r 2 s 
■5 ^-1 |, |,"|-§ "I"'!' 



; -o 5 g,-5 ■! 



|,|-p s-l- 



Qj •(» •?* 

"Ci "C) <5 

53 s3 s* 

S^ CiQ Oq 



^ 



fH ^H -C 



O Pn 









g-ris rr 




UQ 



ETYMOLOGY. 






. j^ P ,§ S g S 5 ; 

I I I i III I i 



.2 "1 ;§ -i 'i 

8 e « g !3 53 



o § I S 



5- _J2 J. 5. 



^ S 53 
^ ^ ^ 



hS o P4 



1*^ 

eg 



glsrl 



'^^ I •§ 'I I r •^'' ^ 



I ^ ^ i3 5~ *; 



"rilp |i"lsi>l 



III 



I 



ETYMOLOGY. 



141 



111 



a; 

J2 




CD 


o 


"(D 


a; 


B 


^ 
^ 


^ 






cT 


?^. 


_<U 


'^ 


^2^ 


"5 


^ 


^t.^^ 



^ O Ph 



-2 '^ ;2 2 ^f^^^':^ 3 "^ ^ 



ii in is 2 

« d J3 "s 

> > > » 



2 § o o 

§ S I S S 

S c^ '?; o a> 

s \t ;;g r'£ \a3 



3 VO g B 8 S T £ S 

^ ^ 2 ^-^^;= 12 — ^ 






5S > S> ?* S> !»■ ^ 



lOrt, 5: I eel:©© 
^r:= 1= :2 ^:=: :2 ^ — 



^. « ^ I 2S « § 

(^^^s: (^ ^ f*; 



'14^ 



ETYMOLOGY. 



O 0) <u 

•^ 03 CO 
^ «t> Co 



O P^ 












s2 "^ 
<B -is 



2 s 



iti'^ 






' 1 \a3 *T! § r^' ■ 



s:S ^ 



§ ^'? i 



i © g .s « .s .s 



' £,l 



! s a 



inn 






f eo iT-i :2 S 



. f» S> ES > > 






CD _© 



o -^ 







ETYMOLOGY. 



14a 



•^ bc _: 









^ 


o 


o 


o 


x: S 


o 


-4-^ 


« 


o 


1: 










^ c§ 






s 


•a 


Si ^ 




1 


1 




c3 > 


g 


















3 


6 




j3 


O = 


^ 


_> 


^ 


]H^ 


:5Tfl 




."t^ 


p 


".S 


.2 2 




"^ 


o 




rt 5 






O 


P^ 


sg 

SB 



i.2>^.; 



I i§ 



, o o o o o ~ 

i c c G c a , 

o o o o o : 

u o o o u 



ttJ O W3 5 

o S o c 

'3 '3 ^3 "3 



5? ''^ .il ''Xf ^^ 

5£ ii c i^ 2 

o a O 5 S 






Si'S Srv'^ 5^ nrs ?^'~ : 



•=---£=: 



: c G = g . 
; o c c s ; 

I c o C^" « I 



I 



.S e S.i 



S o o o 
« o d o 



3 1^' 



§ 5\z § ?s 






I 



144 



ETYMOLOGY. 







.ii ^ o 






CJ c-a 






o- rt 3 






2 ^-^ 














.r^ 


I3| 


a 


a 


s ^^ 








rS 

Ou 


In 


t!i 


^ 




fs^ 


5 


^ 


s .« 




<y o c 


^ 




t^ c " 






S ^^ 


s 


s 






6 


<^ ^ S 






c -c S^ 






cj.ti; a 




o 


>% ^ ■" 






r-j [^ s^ 



,> -^ CI. 



^ O Ph 






i S 3 3 3 =S 



2 O O O 

§ i s a s 

N '3 'S 'o 'O 
S 3i 3 3^ 



3 3 3 3 S S ; 



&<! ' 



u 






ETYMOLOGY. 



145 






= .S s g 



o«^«o^"§~ 



5h ;-( 5. !h J. &. 



"^ ^ 'S ^ 'S -^ -^ 'S ^ -« 



ml 

- § I ■§) § 

^3 -5 -5 -a 
(U o S « 
^ '^ -^ '^ 



ijlil 



^ "^ 



$3 § S 


G 


-^ -ts "^ 


% 


scj Q:; ft:j 


rE5 , 

d o 




■^ :J3 




•^ rf 




© fcX) 




^ 3 


ive. 

d. 

iple 


11 


.t^ s « 


^^V. 


fl g -^ 


^ s 


tcJ 5r; ^ 


r3 2 


»5 O Ph 


S § 









i. t4 t. h 




13 



146 



ETYMOLOGY. 



^. ' 


bJD 




o 


a 




.^ 






^ 




-M 




03 




o 


<D 


'oj 


■^ 




C5 


C 


s 


1 


"S 


*SJ 


"^ 


S 


s 


?e 


^%^ 



^ 6 £ 



4 c ivSggi.si? 

) .i .2 \t .S i 1 b .^ i S 
g G '■§ c g H "fi fl *■§ '"i 

.S o .5 « ." .Si .§ © •§ .g 



2 3 II 3 -g lis 



•^•S 
"§ s 



•^ ^^ "5 '-H § -2^ '^ !2^ •« 



S3 bO 



*« cc *oa to 'oo 'w "S) VI *§ 'SS 



-■5 






1^ 



ETYMOLOGY. 



147 






s 


&. 


+: 


1Z 


<u 


&, 


q 


Ji 


S 


-»-> 


In 

4 


^ 


^ 


§S 


cT 


5^ 


•S^ 


^ 


i 




^ 


Sv 




^ 


^ 



i § ,t ^ I i t 'S I Is 



-lllilillll 

ooooog§o§;s 



S 5 S'2 



«5 S S fi g 

I :| .^ :| :| 

i 11 il 

"e -^ -a -^ -s 



^ ^ q 






O Ph 



: S S i 






) c3 "! 



V VJ JJ fc* « C ^ *- ^ QJ 

'ililiillll 

Soocs;sS03S 



I s s s 

«S ^ Lh Si 

;3 o o o 




£? ^ s; 



148 



ETYMOLOGY. 



S fi ^ 



a a. 



g .2 \|; .« s s ^ .^ 2 « 



.2 a ^ .'^ :2 -p ^E '.S <2 v's 



o 


2 


O 


O 


a 


S 


£ 


1 
















'^ 




Qi 


<D 


<u 


p. 


P.P.fl< I 






vS O PL, - 



<-v.2 >o S ••^ "^ l> =3 § ^ 

:s ® :h ^ :s :^ :s ^ :3 3 



Si,&,&,p^| Si,Si,OHS5,S: 






S' "I 



ETYMOLOGY. 



149 






S s - 



i|:|^g. fell J.I 
§ > g § ^ g 'g ^ -g -g 



•3 ^= ,g -§ "^ SjI^j -s )2^ :^ 9? 



o s ^ s 
si s^^ 

' c c -I "I 



s § g 



(D 



O 



^ o a< 



f; « =? £ ss fi S g J §• 



f GO .^ 5 .s s ^ ^ 

c» > 'cS cS S ^ 






boj -^ .§ .1 

fj § s> 'g 'g 



ili 



.^-■s 



•=1 



f^-gie 



^ e; 



4> 5 



13=- 



1-50 



ETYMOLOGY. 






N 


^^ 


fe-^ 








<U 


.-H o 


fee Sh 


M 


N N 




o 


^ ^ 


g| 






^0.. 




JS 


^:3 




!■ = 


1^ 


?^ 


.<u "^ 


•^ m 


So 


So !>. 


«« .-^ 


^ 


^ ^ 





j3 . C c C S 

•2 's -,3 .s "i v2 'i *§ 

■^ 's ';^ •» '^ ^Jo-^ -^ -J -^ 

C3c3rtrtc3ec3e3c3c3 



en o 05 ^ 

I O C O H 

cti £: ^ 



O o o o 



> — • Cl, 



^ c2 j 



e< » •- ^^ -^ ® hf,-« -^ ■; 
C3csrtc3c3ecic3c 



^ O O* ^2 









ETYMOLOGY. 



151 



&^f 



'S 'S "^ 









f M t: 'S 'p \e B e s .g §2 w 

.^ o ■°'^ ^ ^-C 6r bn i- feu iuD 



2 '^ tS .2 '^ .'^ S 'H "" ?^ 

''^ "c ^S 'c^ ^S '5 'e >v >E '2 vS 

<^ «^ .2~.S ® ^-'■j '^ 5 i!C bo 



« .?^ <u 






'O '^ "S "s 






§Sl§ § 
I ^g 1 1 ^g 

.bf.br J. be ba 
-tS'^ ^ ^ ^ 






^ I 



J2 



•SP ^^ ^ — 






^ ^ O .SP.^ .^ fcE <=C ^ 0J3 fcn ^ c w 




15^2 



ETYMOLOGY. 



m 


bC 




M 




-d 


a:> 




<D 




in 


m 


3 


m 


M 




S 


(U 


o 






-M 


3 


3 




■§ 




C 


Si 


^^ 


•e* 




•<?i 


^ 


!^ 


^ 


1 


^ 


^ 




g 


g 


1^ 


^ 


^ 


Q^ fiq cq 



« © 5yO © bf) br bo 0) be be 

na>rQrCrOrf5,Or«i^-©rC 









2 S o § 

III i i 



,0 ,0 r^ .« .^ 






! o 3 « g § I: -o 2 b 

. © be © .i; br be O bjD bo 



^^ ,o^^ , 



: I = I I 

5 ,0 rO ^ -« 



O P-i 



'-•3 i ^ 

be fcri O) be bo 

^ ,J» -O -O ,«5 






ETYMOLOGY. 



153 



—' a ci 



^.| '^.^ .^'^.^ ^.^ ^ ^ 



cc O ty^ 5 
C J- O S 

B 5 B ]t 
^o ^o 'o 'o 



O O'O 






1^ 






2 -S \nJ 

> 'o 'o 



..^ ^.^ ^ I. 

o o O o « 



I o o O < 



f 1 i- 

I'll 



154 



ETYMOLOGY. 



-S ;5 ;^ 2 ^-^'^ 2 :^ ;S 



^ "( e^ .2 '§ 3 



i Ij.^i; -i .^^ .'S 



g a g 3 s 

f .''S -fe }^ .^s 



»^ »^ 1*2 
^'S JS ^?^ 
Sq Cq C<j 



© .2 )2 -i 






^ O Ph 




ETYMOLOGY. 



155 



bO 


.= 




o 


o 


o 




bC 


bC 




^ 






o 






^ 




■^"^ 


t2^ 


1 









S 'I ^S \v g5"'W ^'S, 



14 



.- S 1 s 2 
v..- s g S a 



I ? s i 



S ^.3 S> » <:4^.i: ^ 



h5 O Ph 




165 



ETYMOLOGY. 



AN ALPHABETICAL LIST 

Of all the irregular verbs, in the Spanish language, with refe- 
rences to the example after which they are to be Conjugated. 

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONUGATION. 



Page. 
^Hcordar, to agree, 125 
Acrecenlar, to increase, 126 
Acertar, to guess, ib. 
Acordarse, to remember, 125 
Acostarse, to lie down, ib. 
,.idestrar, to make dexter- 
ous, 126 
Agorar, to divine, 125 
Mentar, to encourage, 126 
..4Z?-/iorzar, to breakfast, 125 
tMmolar, to whet, ib. 
Jlndar, to walk, 127 
Jl'pacentar, to feed cattle, 126 
Aporcar, to cover with earth, 125 
Aportur, to arrive at a point, ib. 
^3joo,sfar, to lay wages, ib. 
Aprobar, to approve, ib. 
Apretar^ to tighten, 126 
Arrendar^ to hire, ib. 
Asentar, to set down, ib. 
Aserrar, to saw, ib. 
Asestar, to take aim, ib. 
JJsoldar, to keep troops in 

pay, 125 

Jlsolar, to raze, ib. 
Jlsonar,io make sounds agree, ib. 

Mentar, to attempt, 126 



Page. 
126 

ib. 

ib. 
125 
126 



Aterrar, to terrify, 
Atestar, to cram,* 
Atravesar, to cross, 
JItronar, to thunder, 
Ave7itar, to fan, 
Avers onzarse, to be ashamed, 125 
Bregar, to contend, 126 

Calentar, to warm, ib. 

Cegar, to blind, ib. 

Cerrar, to shut, ib. 

Cimentar, to lay foundations, ib. 
Colar, to strain, ib. 

Colgm\ to hang up, ib. 

Comenzar, to commence, ib. 
Comprobar, to corroborate, 125 
Concertar, to agree, ib. 

Concordar, to agree, ib. 

Confesar, to confess, 129 

Consolar, to give consolation, 125 
Consonar^ to agree in tone, ib. 
Contar, to relate, . ib. 

Costar, to cost, ib. 

Dur, to give, 128 

Dtceniar,to make the first cut, ib. 
Ded'imp.tar,'<( the reverse of 

cimentar, 126 

Degollar, to behead, 125 



* Wlicp. it signifies to attest it is regular. 

t When tlie ver'f co.l^isi- of two radical e, the additional i is placed 
before the secoud: ys, deciiwento, decimz'enlas, &e. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



157 



Demostrar, to demonstrate, 
Denegar, to diffuse, 
Denostar, to revile, 
Den-engar, to break the back. 
Desacertar, to mistake, 
Desacordnr, to be discordant. 
Desalentar, to discourage, 
Desapretar, to loosen, 
Desaprobar, to disapprove, 
Desasosegar, to disturb, 
Desatentnr, to perplex, 
Descolgar, the reverse of 

Descollar, to be a neck taller, 
Desconcertar, to disarrange, 
Desconsolar, to afflict, 
Descontar, to discount, 
Desempedrar, to unpave, 
Desancerrar, to let loose, 
Desengrosar, to diminish in 

thickness, 
Desenteyrar, to take up a 

corpse, 
De^flocar, to ravel out, 
Desfogarse, to give vent to 

passion, 
Deshelar, to thaw, 
Desherrar, to unshoe horses, 
Desmembmr, to dismember, 
Desolar, to desolate, 
Desollar, to flay, 
Desovar, to spawn, 
Despedrar, to unpave, 
Desj)er7iar, to take off legs, 
Despertar, to awake, 
Desplegai'y to unfold, 



125 


Despoblar, to depopulate, 


125 


126 


Desterrar, to exile. 


126 


125 


Destrocar, to return things 




126 


bartered, 


125 


ib. 


Desvergonzarse, to grow im- 




125 


pudent, 


ib. 


126 


Dezmar, to tithe. 


126 


ib. 


Emendar, to amend, 


ib. 


125 


Empedrar, to pave, 


ib. 


126 


Empezar, to begin, 


ib. 


ib. 


Emporcar, to soil, 


125 




Enceimir, to lease, 


126 


125 


Encerrar, to shut up. 


ib. 


ib. 


Encomendar, to recommend 


ib. 


126 


Encontrar, to find. 


125 


125 


Encordar, to string musical 




ib. 


instruments, 


ib. 


126 


Enmibertar, to cover Avith 




ib. 


cloth, 


126 




Eng-rosaj-, to engross. 


125 


125 


Enrodar, to break on the 






wheel. 


ib. 


126 


Ensangi-entar, to stain with 




125 


blood, 


126 




Enterrar, to bury. 


ib. 


ib. 


E?Tar,* to err. 


ib. 


126 


Escalentar, to preserve the 




ib. 


heat, 


ib. 


ib. 


Escarmentar, to learn by ex- 




126 


perience, 


ib. 


ib. 


Esforzarse, to make efforts, 


125 


ib. 


Espresar, to express. 


126 


126 


jE5<ar, to be. 


97 


ib. 


Estercolar, to dung, 


126 


ib. 


Estregar, to scour, 


ib. 


ib. 


Jbrsar, to force, 


125 



* The irregular persons of this verb are written with a /',• as, yerro, 
\eiTas, yerra- 
14 



158 



ETYMOLOGY, 



Page. 
126 
ib. 

ib. 
ib. 
ib. 



Fregar, to scour, 

Frezar, to freeze, 

Gobernar, to govern, 

Helar, to freeze, 

Herrar, to shoe liorses, 

Hola;ar, to rest from labour, 125 

ib. 

126 

ib. 

ib. 

129 
126 

ib. 



Hollm:, to trample, 
Inftrnm-, to damn, 
Jnsertar, to insert, 
Invernar, to winter, 
Jugar, to play. 
Manifestar, to manifest, 
Mentar, to mention, 
Merendar, to take a luncheon, ib. 

Mostrar, to show, 125 

cVeg-ar, to deny, 126 

J^evar, to snoAV, ib. 

Pensar, to think, ib. 
Perniquebrar, to break legs, ib. 

Plegar, to plait, ib. 

Poblar, to people, 125 

ProbaTy to prove, ib. 

Quchrar, to break, 126 
Recomtndar, to recommend, ib. 

Recurdar, to remind, 125 

Recostar, to recline, ib. 

Reforzar, to reinforce, ib. 

JReg-a?*, to water, 126 

liegoldar, to belch, 125 
Reinendar, to mend clothes, 126 

j?eneg-ar, to abjure, ib. 

Renovar, to renew, 125 

Rephgar, to fall back,* 126 

Rejyrobar, to reprove, 125 

Requebrar^ to cajole, 126 



Page. 

Rescontrar, to balance in ac- 
counts, 125 

Resollar, to breathe, ib. 

Resonar, to resound, ib. 

Retemblar, to vibrate, 126 

Retentar, to threaten a re- 
lapse,! ib. 

Reventar, to burst, ib. 

Revolar, to fly again, 125 

RevolcarsBj to wallow, ib. 

Rodar, to move on wheels, ib. 

Rogar, to pray, ib. 

Segavj to reap corn, 126 

Sembrar, to saw, ib. 

Sentarse, to sit, ib. 

Serrar, to saw, ib. 

Soiar, to sole, 125 

Soldarj to solder, ib. 

Sonar, to sound, ib. 

Sonar, to dream, ib. 

Sosegarse, to become tran- 
quil, 126 

Soterrar, to bury, ib. 

Temblar, to tremble, ib. 

Tentar, to tempt, ib. 

Tostar, to toast, 125 

Trascolar, to percolate, ib. 

Trascordarse, to forget, ib 

Trasegar, to decant, 126 

Tj-asonar, to dream, 125 

Trocar, to barter, ib. 

Tronar, to thunder, ib. 

Tropezar, to stumble, 126 

Foiar, to fly, 125 

Volcar, to overset, ib.- 



* Speaking of the former position of an army. 
t Alluding to sickness. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



15,9 



IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION, 



^ibastecer, to furnish provi- 



Page. 



sions, 


130 


Morrecer, to hate, 


ib. 


Ahsolver, to absolve, 


132 


Mstraer, to abstract, 


140 


^caecer, to happen, 


130 


Jlcontecer, to come to pass, 


ib. 


^idolecer, to sicken. 


ib. 


ddormecerse, to grow drow- 




sy, 


ib. 


^Sgradecer, to thank. 


ib. 


dmanecer, to dawn, 


ib. 


^imortecerse, to be in a swoon 


, ib. 


Anochecer, to grow dark. 


ib. 


Anteponer, to prefer, 


137 


Antevir, to foresee, 


142 


Aparecer, to appear, 


130 


Apefecer, to long for. 


ib. 


Ascender, to ascend, 


133 


Atender, to attend, 


ib. 


»5ienerse, to stand tO; 


89 


Atraer, to attract, 


140 


Bermegecer, to become red, 


130 


Cafeer, to contain, 


135 


C«er, to fall. 


134 


Canecer, to become gray,* 


130 


Carecer, to be deprived of. 


ib. 


Cemer, to sift, 


133 


Cocer, to cook, 


132 


Compadecerse, to justify. 


130 


Comparecer, to come before 


ib. 


Complacer, to give pleasure, 


ib. 


Co?npoji£r, to compose, 


137 



Page. 
CondescendeVf to conde- 
scend, 133 
Condoler, to condole, 132 
Conmover, to excite com- 
motions, ib. 
Conocer, to be acquainted, 130 
Contender, to contend, 133 
Contener, to contain, 89 
Contrahacer, to counterfeit, 131 
Contraer, to contract, 140 
Convalecer, to be convales- 
cent, 130 
Crecer, to grow, ib. 
Decaer, to decay, 134 
Defender, to defend, 133 
Demoler, to demolish, 132 
Deponer, to depose, 137 
Desabastecer, not to supply, 130 
Desadomiecer, to rouse from 

sleep, ib. 

Desaparecer, to disappear, ib. 
Desatender, to neglect, 133 

Desatraer, to disjoin, 140 

Descaecer, to droop, 130 

Descender, to descend, 133 

Descomponer, to discompose, 137 
Desconocer, to disown, 130 

Desentenderse, to feign igno- 
rance, 133 
Desentorpecer, to free from 

numbness, 130 

Desenvolver, to unroll, 132 

Desfallecer, to pine, 130 



* In allusion to the hair. 



I 



160 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Page. 
Desjiaquecerse, to become 

emaciated, 130 

Desguarnecer, to take off 

trimming, ib. 

Deshacer, to undo, 131 

Desobedecer, to disobey, 130 

Desplacer, to displease, ib. 

Destorcer, to untwist, 132 

Desvanecerse, to vanish away, 130 
Detener, to detain, 89 

Detraer, to vilify, 140 

Devolver, to restore, 132 

Disolver, to dissolve, ib. 

Disponer, to dispose, 137 

Distraer, to distract, 140 

Doler, to ache, 132 

Embebecerse, to be struck 

with amazement, ISO 

Embravecerse, to become fu- 
rious, ib. 
Embrutecerse, to become 

brutal, ib. 

Emplumecer, to become 

fledged, ib. 

Empobrecer, to empoverish, ib. 
Encabdlecer, to be getting a 

nice head of hair, ib. 

JEyicalvecer, to become bald, ib. 
Encallecer, to render callous, ib. 
Encanecer, same as canecer, ib. 
Encarecer, to become dearer, ib. 
Encender, to light, 133 

Encrudecerse, to become raw, 130 
Encruelecer, to instigate to 

cruelties, ib. 

Er' dentecer, to cut the teeth, ib. 
Endurecer, to harden, ib. 

Enflaquecer, to grow lean, ib, 



Page. 

Enfarecerse, to become fu- 
rious, 130 

Engrandeeer, to aggrandize, ib. 

Enloquecer, to become mad, ib. 

Enmocecer, to become youn- 
ger in appearance, ib. 

Enmohecerse,to grow mouldy, ib. 

Enmudecer, to become dumb, ib. 

Enegrecer, to blacken, ib. - 

Enoblecer, to ennoble, ib. 

Enrarecer, to rarify, ib. 

Enriquecer, to enrich, ib- 

Ensoberbecerse, to become 
haughty, ib. 

Entallecer, to sprout, ib. 

Entender, to understand, 133 

Enternecer^ to soften, 130 

Entomecer, to swell, ib. 

Entontecerse, to become silly, ib. 

Entorpecerse, to become less 
active, ib. 

Entretener, to entertain, 89 

Entristecerse, to become sad, 130 

Entullecer, to become crip- 
pled, ib. 

Entumecer, same as entome- 
cer^ to swell, ib. 

Envegecer, to grow old, ib. 

Enverdecer, to grow green, ib. 

Envolver, to wrap, 132 

Eqidvaler, to be equivalent, 141 

Escarnecer, to scoff, 130 

Esclarecer, to light, ib. 

Escocer, to smart, ib. 

Espavorecer, to frighten, ib. 

Establecer, to establish, ib. 

Estremecerse, to shudder, ib. 

Esponer, to expose, 137 



ETYMOLOGY. 



161 





Page. 




Page. 


Estmderj to extend, 


133 


PerdeVj to lose. 


133 


Estraer^ to extract, 


140 


Perecer, to perish. 


130 


Fallecer, to die, 


130 


Pertenecer, to belong, 


ib. 


Favorecer, to favour, 


ib. 


Poder, to be able, 


13$ 


Fenecer, to terminate, 


ib. 


Poner, to place, 


137 


Fortalecer, to fortify, 


ib. 


Preponer, to place before, 


ib. 


Guarnecer^ to garnish. 


ib. 


Presuponer, to presuppose. 


ib. 


Haber, to have. 


85 


Prevalecer, to prevail. 


130 


Hacer, to make, 


131 


Prever, to foresee, 


142 


Heder, to stink. 


133 


Proponer, to propose, 


137 


Hender, to cleave. 


ib. 


Promovevy to promote. 


132 


Humedecer, to moisten, 


130 


Qtterer, to like. 


138 


hnponer, to impose, 


137 


Recaer, to relapse, 


134 


Indisponer, to indispose. 


ib. 


Recocer, to boil over again, 


132 


Llover, to rain. 


132 


Reconocer, to acknowledge. 


130 


Magi-ecer, to become thin, 


130 


Reconvalecer, same as conta- 




Jtfanfener, to maintain, 


89 


Zfcer, to be convalescent, 


ib. 


Mecer, to swing. 


130 


Recrecer, to grow again, 


ib. 


Merecer, to merit, 


ib. 


Reflorecer, to blossom again 


ib. 


Mohecerse, to grow mouldy, ib. 


Rehacer, to do over again, 


131 


v¥o?er, to grind, 


132 


Remanecer, to remain, 


130 


Mollecer, to grow soft, 


130 


Remecer, to rock, 


ib. 


Morder, to bite, 


132 


Remorder, to bite repeatedly 


132 


Movei; to move. 


ib. 


Remover, to remove, 


ib. 


J^acer, to be born. 


130 


Renacer, to be born again. 


130 


iNep-ecer, to grow black, 


ib. 


Rcponer, to replace. 


137 


Obedecer, to obey, 


ib. 


Resolver, to resolve, 


132 


Obsciirecer, to darken, 


ib. 


Restablecer, to re-establish, 


130 


Obtener, to obtain, 


89 


Retener, to retain, 


89 


Ofrecer, to offer. 


130 


Retorcer, to twist, 


132 


0/er,* to smell, 


ib. 


Retraer, to retract, 


140 


Oponer, to oppose. 


137 


Retrotaer, to bring back, 


ib. 


Pacer, to graze. 


130 


fieiJer, to review. 


142 


Padecer, to suffer, 


ib. 


Reverdecer, to grow green 




Parecer, to seem, 


ib. 


again, 


130 



* The irregular pei-sons of this verb are written with an h; as, h7ielc^ 
*iue!as, huela. 
14* 



162 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Reverter, to overflow, 
Revolver, to revolve, 
Saber, to know, 
Satiafacer, to satisfy, 
Ser, to be, 

Sobreponer, to place over, 
Soler, to be wont, 
Solver, to decide, 
Sostener, to sustain, 
Substraer, to substract, 
jSwjjouftr, to suppose, 
Tender, to tend, 



Page. 
133 


Tener, to hold, 


Paffe. 
89 


132 
139 
131 


Torcer, to twist, 
Traer, to bring, 
Transcender, to transcend, 


133 
140 
133 


93 
137 
132 

ib. 


Trascender, to penetrate, 
Transponer, to transpose, 
Trasponer, to remove, 
Fa?er, to be worth, 


ib. 
137 
ib. 
141 


89 


Ver, to see, 


142 


140 


Verier, to shed. 


133 


137 


Volver, to return, 


132 


133 







IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



Mherir, to adhere, 


146 


Mquerir,* to acquire, 


lb. 


Mvertir, to advert, 


ib. 


^9percebir, to provide, 


148 


Argiiir, to argue, 


143 


.Qrrecirse, to become numb 




with cold, 


148 


Arrepentirse, to repent, 


146 


Jisentir, to assent, 


ib. 


Jlterirse, to be benumbed 




with cold. 


ib. 


Asirf to seize, 


150 


Mibuir, to attribute. 


143 


^©enirse, to agree, 


149 


Bendecir, to bless, 


152 


Cehir, to gird, 


148 


Colegir, to collect, 


ib. 


Comerfirse,to grow moderate 


, ib. 


Competir, to contend, 


ib. 



Page. 

Concehir, to conceive, 148 

Concluir, to conclude, 143 

Condticir, to conduce, 145 

Conferir, to confer, 146 

Conseguir, to obtain, 148 

Consentir, to consent, 146 

Constituir, to constitute, 143 

Constrenir, to constrain, 148 

Conslndr^ to construe, 143 

Contradecir, to contradict, 151 

Contravenir, to oppose, 149 

Contribuir, to contribute, 143 

Controvertir, to controvert, 146 



Corregir, to correct, 
Decir, to say, 
Deducir, to infer, 
Deferir, to defer, 
Derretir, to melt, 
Desavenir, to disagree, 



148 
151 
146 
146 

148 
149 



♦This verb takes an e after the ?, in the same tenses that perder 
takes an i before the e, as, adquiero, &c. see perder,- 



ETYMOLOGY. 



163 



Bescenir, to ungird, 
Descomedirse, to grow rude, 
Desconsentii\ to dissent, 
Deservir not to perform one' 

duty to the sovereign, 
Desdecirse, to retract, 
Desleir, to dilute, 
Deslucir, to tarnish, 
Desmentir, to gi^e the lie, 
Despedir, to dismiss, 
Destenir, to discolour, 
Destruir, to destroy, 
Diferir, to differ, 
Digerir, to digest, 
Disminim*, to diminish, 
Diatribuir, to distribute, 
Divertir, to divert, 
Dormir, to sleep, 
Elegir, to elect, 
Embestir, to assail, 
Etigreirse, to become haugh- 
ty, 
Eniucir, to white-wash, 
Entreiucir, to glimmer, 
Entreoir, to hear indistinct- 

ly, 

E7it'es/ir-, to invest, 
Ergttir,* to hold up the head, 
Estrehir, to produce astrin- 

gency, 
Esciuir, to exclude, 
Espedir, to expedite, 
Fiwir, to flow, 
Freir, to fry, 



Page. 




Page, 


148 


Gemir, to groan, 


148 


, ib. 


Herir, to wound, 


146 


146 


Hervir, to boil, 


ib. 


's 


Huir, to flee, 


143 


ib 


Imbuir, to imbue. 


ib. 


161 


Impedir, to impede. 


148 


148 


Inadvertir, to be inattentive 


, 146 


144 


Incluir, to include, 


143 


146 


Inducir, to induce. 


145 


148 


InfeHr, to infer, 


146 


ib. 


Instihdr, to institute, 


143 


143 


Instruir, to instruct. 


ib. 


146 


Intervenir, to intervene, 


149 


ib. 


Introducir, to introduce. 


145 


143 


Invertir, to invert, 


146 


ib. 


Investir, to invest. 


148 


146 


Ingerir, to graft, 


146 


147 


/r, to go, 


155 


148 


Lucir, to shine. 


144 


ib. 


Luir, to wear by friction, 


143 




Maldecir, to curse, 


152 


ib. 


Medir, to measure, 


148 


144 


Mentir, to lie, 


146 


ib. 


Morir, to die, 


147 




JV/t«r,t to milk, 


143 


153 


Obstruir, to obstruct, 


ib. 


148 


Olr, to hear. 


353 


,146 


Pedir, to ask. 


148 




Perseguir, to persecute. 


ib. 


148 


Pervertir, to pervert, 


146 


143 


Predecir, to predict, 


ISl 


148 


Preferir, to prefer, 


146 


143 


Preseniir, to have a presen- 




148 


timent. 


ib. 



* All the iiTcgular persons of this verb are written wth an h; as, 
hiergo, Merga, &c, 
+ A term peculiar to the province oi Arragon. 



|; ' 1.64 


ETYMOLOGY. 






Page. 




Page. 


Prevenir, to prevent, 


149 


Retribuir, to compensate, 


143 


Producir, to produce, 


145 


Revenivy to recover, 


149 


Proferh\ to utter, 
Proseguir, to prosecute. 


146 


Revestir, to revest. 


148 


148 


Salir, to go out. 


154 


Prostituir, to prostitute. 


143 


Seducir, to seduce, 


145 


1 Provsnir, to originate, 


149 


Seg-wir, to follow, 


148 


j Recluir, to cloister, 


143 


Sentir, to feel. 


146 


[! Reducir, to reduce, 


145 


Servir, to serve, 


148 


Referir, to refer, 


146 


Sobresalir, to surpass, 


154 


Regivyto rule, 


148 


Sobrevenir, to happen, 


149 


Reir, to laugh, 


ib. 


Sonreirse, to smile, 


148 


Relucir, to shine, 


144 


Sw6sfi«wir, to substitute, 


143 


JJendir, to yield. 


148 


Sugerir, to suggest, 


146 


Benir, to quarrel. 


ib. 


Tcwir, to dye. 


148 


Repetir, to repeat, 


ib. 


Traducir, to translate, 


145 


Requerir, to require, 


146 


Femr, to come, 


149 


Resentirse, to resent, 


ib. 


Vestir, to clothe, 


148 


.Resfiiwir, to restore. 


143 


Zaherir, to upbraid, 


146 


Retenir, to dye again, 


148 







N. B. The verbs not to be found in the preceding list, are 
regular, and for their conjugation, the student is referred from 
page 101, to 108. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS, 

Or Verbs, which are conjugated in the Third Person 
Singular of each Tense only. 



Nevar. 



INFINITIVE. 



Present, nevar, to snow. 

Gerund, nevando, snowing. 

Participle, nevado, snowed. 





ETYMOLOGY, 




INDICATIVEi 


Present, 


nieva^ 


it snows. 


Imperfect, 


7ievaba, 


it did snow. 


Perfect Indef. 


7ievc, 


it snowed. 


Future Imp. 


nevard, 


it will snow. 


IMPERATIVE, 


nieve, 


let it snow. 




SUBJUNCTIVE. 


Present, 


7iieve, 


it may snow. 




r nevara, 


it should snow. 


Imperfect, 


< 7ievaria, 


it would snow. 




( 7ievase, 


it might snow. 


Future, 


si 7ievare, 


if it should snow 




Tron 


ar. 


"• 


IXFIXITIVE. 


Present, 


tronar, 


to thunder. 


Gerund, 


t7'onando, 


thundering. 


Participle, 


tronado^ 


thundered. 




INDICATIVE. 


Present, 


truena^ 


it thunders. 


Imperfect, 


tronaba. 


it did thunder. 


Perfect Indef. 


tro7i6, 


it thundered. 


Future Imp, 


tronard, 


it will thunder. 



3 65 



IMPERATIVE. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present, aunque^^c.tniene, though,&:c.it may thunder. 

C tronara^ it should thunder. 
Imperfect, < troyiaricu it would thunder, 

C tronase, it might thunder. 
Future Imp. si tronare, if it should thunder. 



166 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Amanecer. 



INFINITIVE. 



Present, 
Gerund, 



amanecer, 
amaneciendo, 



Participle, amanecido, 



to grow light, 
growing light, 
grown light. 



INDICATIVE 

Present, ainanece, it grows light. 

Imperfect, amanecia, 
Perfect Indef. amanecio, 
Future Imp. amanecerd. 



IMPERATIVE, amanezca^ 



it did grow light. 

it grew light. 

it will grow light. 

let it grow light. 



Present. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 

aunque, ^x. 



amanezca, 
' amanedera, 
I amaneceria, 
( amaneciese, 
Future Imp. si amaneciere, 



Imperfect, 



although, &c. it may gro\t^ 

light, 
it should grow light, 
it would grow light, 
it might grow light, 
if it should grow light. 

Observation. 
These last two verbs are sometimes used with all the persons, 
and in these cases they may be considered as neuter-passive 
verbs, denoting merely the situation or condition of their subject 
at the time; as, anochecimos en el campo, night closed in upon us 
whilst we were in the country; or, we were in the country ■v^hen 
it grew dark; amanecimos en Londres, the day broke upon us when 
we were in London; or, we were in London when it grew light; 
amanecio el campo de batalla cubierto de heridos, the wounded were 
aeen, covering the field of battle, at break of day. In some 
phrases, amanecer may be properly translated, to awake, or to 
arise; and anochecer, to go to sleep, or to lie down; as, anochect 
hueno, y amaneci malo, I went to sleep well, and I awoke ill; mi 
padre anochecio, pero no amanecio^ my father lay down, but he rosft 



ETYMOLOGY. 



167 



Present, 
Gerund, 
Participle, 

Present, 
Imperfect, 
Perfect Indef. 
Future Imp. 

IMPERATIVE. 



Haber. 

INFINITIVE. 

habiendo, there being. 
habido, been. 



INDICATIVE. 

hai^ there is, or there are. 

habia, there was, or there were 

hubo, there was, or there were. 

habrd, there will be. 

haya, let there be. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present, aiinque, 4'C. haya, though, &c. there may be. 

c hwhiera, there should be. 

Imperfect, < habria, . there would be. 

C huhiese, there might be. 

Future Imp. si huhiere, if there should be. 

Example: — There is an author who says, hai un aufar 
que dice; there are philosophers who deny it, hai JHo- 
sofos que lo niegan; there have been men who have be- 
lieved it, ha habido hombres que lo han creido. 



Hacer. 

INFINITIVE. 

hacer, to be. 

haciendo, being. 

hecho, been. 

INDICATIVE. 

hace, it is. 

hacia, it was. 



Present, 
Gerund, 
Participle^ 

Present, 
Imperfect, 

^ This tense caunot be construed in English without circumlo^ 
cutioB, 



168 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Perfect Indef. hizo, 
Future Imp. hara, 

IMPERATIVE, has^a. 



it was. 
it will be. 

let it be. 



SUBJUNCTIVE. 



Present, aunque^fycJiaga, 
c hicfercf, 

Imperfect, ^ haria, 
( hiciese, 

Future Imp. si hiceere, 



though. &c. it may be- 
it should be. 
it would be. 
it might be. 
if it should be. 



N. B. This verb is used with nouns of number, in 
chronological calculations^* as, is it ten years since his 
father died.^ ^hace diez anos que morio sii padre? it 
will be ten years to-morrow, manana hard diez anos. 
It is also employed to express the state of the weather; 
as, it is cold, hacefrio; though it may be warm to-mor- 
row, aunque haga calor manana; it has been very windy 
to-day, ha hecho mucho viento hoi. 



The following are the remainder of the impersonal 
verbs: 



Helar, 

Llover, 

JSscarchar^ 

Granizar, 

jLloviznar, 



to freeze, 
to rain, 
to freeze, 
to hail, 
to drizzle, 



like 7ievar, 
like morder. 

regular. 



JRelampaguear, to lighten, -^ 

* The impersonal haber is sometimes found used in this kind of 
calculations; as, it loas fifteen months since he had retired 'to the 
country, se habia retirado at campo quince meses habia. 



ETYMOLOGY. 169 

Observation. 
There are several personal verbs which are frequently conju- 
gated ioipersonally — example: From this instant I receive this 
young man, it suffices that thou present him to me, desde luego 
recibo a fste mozo, basta que tu me le presentes. The verb ser is also 
conjugated impersonally, and very frequently employed with the 
noun menester, 8fC. or with the adjective preciso, necesario, to de- 
note necessity; as, it must be granted, es menester concederlo; to 
melt wax, it must be warmed, para derretir la cera es preciso calen- 
tarla. When the second verb has its subjects expressed or under- 
stood in English, the same verb is put in the subjunctive with 
que; as, it will be requisite for us to see him, or it will be requi- 
site that we should see him, sem ntcesano que le veamos. The 
same construction takes place when the verb must has its subject 
expressed; 3.8, we must go, es preciso que vayamos. N. B. When 
to be (used impersonally) is followed by a noun or pronoun, the 
verb ser must agree with the said noun or pronoun in number and 
person; as, it is I who wrote, yo soi quien escribi; it is riches I 
hate, son las riquezas la que aborrezco. 

DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

The follomng verbs are found used in the tenses and 
persons noticed in the annexed examples only : 
Podrir. 

iNFiNiT. Present, podrir^ to rot. 

Participle, podrido, rotten. 

iMPERAT. 2d person plural, podrid, rot ye. 
suBjuNC. Imp. 3d pers. sing, podriria, he would rot 

iNFiNiT. Placer, 'to please.- 

INDICATIVE. 

Present, Sd person sing, place, it pleases. 

Imperfect, placia, it did please. 

Perfect Indef. ■ plugo, it pleased. 

15 



iro ETYMOLOGY. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present 3d person sing. plegue^^ it may please. 

T r . C plu2'iera,^ it would please. 

Imperiect, < ... 

C- plugiese,-^ it might please. 

Future Imp. plugiere,* it should please. 

*The Spanish Academy observes that these persons 
are used in the following expressions only: plegue, or 
plugiera, or plugiese a Bios, would to Godj and si me 
j)lugiere, if it should please me. 

Yacer, to lie dead. 
No part of this verb is used except the third persons 
of the present indicative, yace and yacen^ which are 
generally inscribed on tombstones. 

INFINITIVE. Soler, to be wont 

INDICATIVE. Present, swe/o, I am wont 

sueles, thou art wont. 

suele, he is wont. 

solemos, we are wont. 

soleis ye are wont. 

suele?!, they are wont. 

Imperfect, solia, I was wont. 

solias, thou wast wont. 

solia, he was wont. 

solzamos, we were wont. 

soliais, ye were wont. 

solian, they were wont. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



171 



A LIST OF VERBS, 

Having the Participle irregularly formed. 



Infinitive. 

Ahrir 

absolver 

ahitar 

anteponer 

antever 

hendecir 

compeler 

aomponer 

concluir 

confundir 

eontradecir 

Qontrahacer 

convencer 

fonvertir 

cuhrir 

decir 

deponer 



Meaning. Irreg Particip. 

to open abierto 

to absolve absuelto 

Cto overload ? ^,^.^^ 

c the stomach j 
to prefer antepiiesto 

to foresee antevisto 
to bless hendito 

to compel compulso 
to compose compiiesto 
to conclude conduso 
to confound confuso 
to contradict contradicho 
to counterfeit contrahecho 
to convince convicto 



to convert 

to cover 

to say 

to depose 

descomponer to discompose des compiiesto 
descubrir to discover descuhierto 
desdecirse to retract 
desenvolver to unroll 
deshacer to undo 
despertar to awake 
disolver to dissolve 
disponer to dispose 
e/e^ir to elect 

encubrir to conceal 
envolver to wrap 



converso 
ciibierto 
dicho 
depuesfo 



desdicho 

desenvuelto 

deshecho 

despierto 

disuelto 

dispuesto 

electa 

encubireto 

envuelto 



Reg. Particip- 



ahitado 



bendecido 
compelido 

concluido 
confundido 



convencido 
Gonvertido 



despertado 



elegido 



17^ 


ETYMOLOGY. 




Infinitive. 


Meaning. 


Irreg. Particip. 


Reg. Particip- 


enjugar, 


to drj 


enjuto 


enjugado 


escribivy 
escluir 


to write 
to exclude 


escrito 
escluso 




escluido 


espeler 


to expel 


espulso 


espelido 


esponer 


to expose 


espuesto 






espresar 


to express 


espreso 


espresado 


estinguir 


to extinguish estincto 


estinguido 


Jijar 


to fix 


fijo 


fijado 


freir 


to fry 


frito 


freido 


hctcev 


to make 


hpchn 




hartar 


to satiate 


1 VK^i^l L\J 

harto 


hartado 


importer 


to impose 


impuesto 






imprimir 


to print 


impreso 




""^ 


incluir 


to include 


incluso 


includio 


incurrir 


to incur 


ineurso 


incurrido 


indisponer 


to indispose indispuesto 






insertar 


to insert 


inserto 


insertado 


invertir 


to invert 


inverso 


invertido 


ingerir 


to graft 


ingerto* 


ingerido 


juntar 


to join 


junto 


juntado 


tnaldedr 


to curse 


maldito 


maldecido 


masiifestar 


to manifest 


manifesto 


manifestado 


mar chit ar 


to fade 


marchito 


marchitado 


morir 


to die 


muerto 





omitir 


to omit 


omiso 


omitido 


oponer 


to oppose 


opuesto 


, ' 


oprimir 


to oppress 


opreso"^' 


cprimido 


perfeccionar 


to perfect 


perfe do 


perfeccionado 


V\r\Vi £>Y* 


to place 


puesto 




pu/ttr 




predecir 


to predict 


predicho 






prender 


to seize 


preso^' 


prendido 


preponer 


to place fii*st prepuesto 





Infinitive. 

prescribir 

presuponer 

prever 

proponer 

proscribir 

proveer 

recluir 

rehacer 

reponer 

resolver 

rever 

revolver 

romper 

satisfacer 

sobreponer 

soltar 

suponer 

suprimir 

trasponer 

ver 

volver 



ETYMOLOGY. 

Meaning. Irreg. Particip. 

to prescribe Frescrito'^ 
to presuppose joreswpi^es^o 
to foresee previsto ^ 
to propose propuesto 
to proscribe proscrito 
to provide provisto* 
to shut up recluso 
to do over again rehecho 
to replace repuesto 



to resolve 
to review 
to revolve 
to break 
to satisfy 



resuelto 

revisto 

revuelto 

roto^ 

safisfecho 



to place over sobrepuesto 

to let go suelto 

to suppose supuesto 

to suppress supreso* 

to transpose traspuesto 

to see visto 

to return vuelto 



173 

Reg. Particip. 
prescribido 



proveido 
recluido 



rompido 



soltado 



suprimido 



Observation on the foregoing Verbs which have two 
Participles, 

The irregular participles, except those which are marked thus,* 
are used like adjectives, and never to form the compound tenses 
of verbs; as, el esta despierto, sin que le hayan despertado, he is 
awaked, without any person having aicaked him; el suelo estd enjuto 
por que el sol le ha enjugado, the floor is dry because the sun has 
dried it. Preso, prescrito, provisto, and roto, are oftener used to 
form the compound tenses of prender, prescribi, proveer, and. roTrt- 
per, than their own regular participles. 
15* 



174 ETYMOLOGY. 

Properties of some Participles^ 

The following participles have an active significatio% 
and are used also as verbal adjectives: 

^gradecido, thanked, and thankful. 

Atrevido^ dared, and bold. 

Callado, unmentioned, and reserved. 

Cansado, tired, and tiresome. 

Coinedido, mused, and gentle. 

Desesperado, despaired, and despairing. 

Disimulado^ dissembled, and crafty. * 

Entendido^ understood, and intelligent. 

Esforzado, encouraged, and resolute. 

Fingido, feigned, and hypocritical. 

Leido, read, and learned. 

Medido^ measured, and unassuming. 

Mirado, looked at, and circumspect. 

Moderado, moderated, and moderate. 

Ocasionado, caused, and provoking. 

Osarfo, dared, and bold. 

Parado, stopped, and idle. 

PartidOf divided, and munificent. 

Pausado, paused, and quiet. 

Porjfiado, contented, and pertinacious. 

Preciado, valued, and precious. 

Presumido^ presumed, and arrogant* 

Pecatado, concealed, and cautious* 

Sabido^ known, and clever. 

Sentido, felt, and sensible. 

Sufrido, suffered, and patient. 

Transcendido^ transcended, and acute. 

Y^ido, availed, and mighty, and confident- 



ETYMOLOGY, 



fr& 



Tffe participles of cenar, comer, and hablar, when preceded by 
the adverb bien or mal, belong to this kind; as, un hombre bien 
hablado, a well-spoken man; un muchacomal cenadOf a boy that has 
not supped well. 

Examples. 
HI estd cansado de trabajar, he is tired of workings 
el vio claramente que yo estaba cansado de oirle, pero 
8in embargo el cajisado prosiguio., he clearly saw, that 
I was tired of hearing him, but still the tiresome went 
on; nosotros le hemos callado el secreto, porque sabemos 
que no es hombre callado, we have concealed the secret 
from him, because we know that he is not a reserved 
man. 

ON THE ANCIENT AND MODERN TERMINATIONS OF VERBS. 

The terminations of Spanish verbs, have, like the 
language itself, undergone various changes, and im- 
provements. These were not effected until the works 
of the greatest authors, had already made their appear- 
ance. The difference between the ancient and modern 
terminations is not, however, so great, as to render the 
meaning of them, in all instances, obscure to the stu- 
dent; for this may, very often, be gathered from the 
context of the sentence. Nor can it be said, that it 
presents to him no difficulties. For, he being accus- 
tomed to read and say amabais, to denote, ye loved; 
and finding amabades^ although he may guess at its 
meaning, he, very often, conscious of his deficiency, 
will not trust to his own judgment. And as the object 
of his doubt cannot be found in any book of reference, 
he is left in a state of uncertainty. The new editions 
of the greatest authors, have also been printed accord- 
ing to their original; and, therefore, a knowledge of 



176 



ETYMOLOGY. 



the various modifications and additions in the tenses of 
verbs, is rendered necessary to the learner. 

The modern terminations of verbs, are, according to 
our opinion, far superior to the ancient. In the Spanish 
language, the sound of the combination of two or three 
vowels, in which the i is included, is always melodious 
and sonorous 5 and this is the case in the newly adopted 
terminations. 

As it has been the object of the author to make this 
grammar as useful as study and research would enable 
him, he has endeavoured to present to the view of the 
learner, the ancient and modern terminations of those 
tenses of verbs, which have undergone any variation, 
in a manner, he indulges the hope, attainable, in a 
glance, by any common capacity. 

VARIATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 

It is only the second person plural of all the tenses, 
of regular verbs, which have undergone any variation. 
This will be seen in the following columns. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. 



Ancient terminations. 


Modern terminations 


Amades^ 


ye love, 


Amais, 


Amdbades, 


ye did love 


Amabais. 


Amdsfedes 


ye loved. 


Amdsteis. 


Amaredes, 


ye will love. 


Amarew. 


Amides, 


ye may love, 


Ameis. 


Amaredes, 


ye should love. 


Amdrais, 


Amariades, 


ye would love, 


Amariais, 


Amdsedes, 


ye might love. 


Amaseis, 


Amdredes, 


ye should love, 


Amdreis. 





ETYMOLOGY. 






SECOND CONGUGATION. 


Yendedes^ 


ye sell, 


Vendees. 


Vendiades, 


ye did sell, 


Vendz«f5. 


Vendistedes, 


ye sold. 


YerAisteis. 


Yenderedes, 


ye will sell, 


YendereiSi 


Yendades, 


ye may sell, 


Yendais. 


Yendierades, 


ye should sell. 


Yendierais. 


Yenderiades, 


ye would sell. 


Yendenais. 


Yendiesedes, 


ye might sell. 


Yendieseis. 


YGiidieredes, 


ye should sell. 


Yendiereis. 




THIRD CONGUGATION. 


\Jmde§, 


ye unite, 


Unis. 


IJniades, 


ye did unite, 


Vniais, 


XJnistedes, 


ye united. 


Vniesteis. 


VnMde9, 


ye will unite, 


\Jnireis» 


XJnades, 


ye may unite, 


Vnais, 


VnieradeSf 


ye should unite. 


Vnierais. 


XJniriades, 


ye would unite. 


XJniriais. 


Uniesedes, 


ye might unite, 


Vniesis. 


Vnieredes, 


ye should unite. 


IJniereis* 



177 



VARIATION OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 

The irregular verbs follow, in their variations, the 
regular; as. 

Ancient use. Modern use. 

Bodes, ye are, Sois. 

Hahedes, ye have, Kaheis, 

Aceviades^ ye heat the mark, Acertais^ &c. 

Exceptions, 
Those verbs, the first person of the indicative of 
which, terminated formerly i» o, at present, terminates. 
in oii as. 



178 ETYMOLOGY. 

So, I am, Soi. 

Do, I give, Doi, 

Vo, I go, You 

Some of the persons of those irregular verbs, which, 
at present, terminate in igo, and iga, formerly termi- 
nated in yo, ya$ and those in go and ga, in o and a; as. 



Ca?/o, 


I fall, 


Cadgo. 


Cai/«, 


I may fall^ 


C&iga, 


Oyo, 


I hear, 


Oi^o. 


Trayo, 


I bring. 


Traigo. 


Tvaya, 


I may bring, 


Traiga. 


Valo, 


I am worth. 


Val^o. 


Val«, 


I may be worth, 


Yalga. 



Those which before had an o, in their radical letter»%. 
have at present a u^ as. 



Cobrio, 


he covered. 


Cwbrio, 


Copo, 


he was contained. 


Ct^po. 


Ovo, 


he had, 


Hi^bo.* 


Morio, 


he died, 


Mwrio. 


Dormio, 


he slept, 


Dt^rmio. 


Poso, 


he placed. 


Pt^so. 


Sopo, 


he knew, 


Swpo, 


OF V^RBS, U 


SED INTERROGATIVELY 


OR NEGAT 



In asking questions, the verb is always placed before 
its nominative or subject j as, 
(i Amo yo9 Do\ I love? 

^Amas^^w.^ Dost ikow love? 

* The verb, haher, to have, is now written with an h. 
t When the English auxiliary verb, to do, is used to ask a ques'^' 
tion, or to express a negation, it is never translated in Spanish. 



ETYMOLOGY- 179 

^ Amo €t? Did he love? 

^ Amareis vosotros? Shall you love? 

2 Vendra mi padre? Will mj father come? 

A Seran ellos felices?^ Will they he happy? 

When the verb is negatively used, the negative ad- 
verb no, not, must always precede the verbj as, 
Ellos no saldrdn, They will not go out. 

Su- abuelo no estaba alii. Her grand-father was not 

there. 
No era vmd el que me in- Was it 7iof you, who invited 

vito? me? 

No ayunan ellas hoi? Do they not fast to-day? 

OF ADVERBS. 

Adverbs serve to modify the signification of verbs; 
as, lee Men, he reads well: es tarde, it is late. 

Adverbs are divided into simple and compound; com- 
pound adverbs are those which are compounded of ad- 
jectives, or other adverbs, by the addition of a word or 
syllable; as, felizmente happily, from feliz, happy; fa- 
cihnente, easily, from facil, easy; and simple adverbs 
are those from which the compounds are formed; as, 
cerca, near; dentro, within. 

The adverbs are divided into nine classes; viz — ad- 
verbs of place, time, manner, quantity, comparison, or- 
der, affirmation, negation, and doubt. . 

* Sometimes, to render the expression more elegant, the verb 
is placed before the nominative, in sentences where a question is 
not asked; as, Vivla enlonces su padre, his father was then aliye; 
Vino ely sits secuaces, he and his followers came. 



180 



ETYMOLOGY. 



Donde, where. 
Monde? whither? 
£qui, here. 
Mil, there. 
t^Ua, yonder. 
For aqui, this way. 
Hasta aqui^ hitherto. 
Fuera^ abroad. 
Lejos^ far. 
Cerca, near. 
Aparte, aside. 
Arriba^ above. 
Sohre, over. 
Encima, upon. 
Bajo^ underneath. 

Cuando? when? 
Entonces. then. 



Of 



Of 



Hoi, to ^ay. 

•%er, yesterday. 

Cada dia, every day. 

Ayer manana, yesterday 
morning. 

£yer tarde, yesterday ev- 
ening. 

Mnoche, last night. 

Manana^ to-morrow. 

Despues de manana, after 
to-morrow. 

Manana a la noche, to- 
morrow night. 



Place. 

Ahajo, under. 

De bajo, from below. 

De adelqnte, from before. 

De atras, from behind. 

Cerca, night. 

Fn alguna parte, some- 
where. 

Enninguna jo«r^e, no where 

En cualquiera parte, any 
where. 

En alguna otra parte, some- 
where else. 

En otra parte, elsewhere. 

En ninguna otra parte, no 

where else. 
Time. 

El atro dia, the other day. 

La semana pasader, last 
week. 

Ultimamente, lately. 

Za, already. 

«^wn, still. 

Lu^go, presently. 

Prontamente, quickly. 

Brevemente., shortly. 

Tarde, late. 

Temprano, early. 

Presto, soon. 

Con tiempo, betimes. 

Antiguamente, formerly. 

En tiempo atras, heretofore. 

En lo sucesivo, hereafter. 



Jihora,rio\v. 
Siempre, ever, always 
JVunca, never. 
Pocas veces, seldom. 
^menudo, often. 



ETYMOLOGY. 181 

Writes, before. 

Despites, after. 

JDesde, since. 

Mucho tiempo ha, long ago. 

Hasta, until. 



Mgunas veces, sometimes. Contimiamente, continual 
De cuando en cuando, now Ij. 
and then. 



Bien, well. 
Mai, badlj. 
Jisif thus. 
Despacio, slowly. 
Mo, loudly. 
Eecio, strongly. 

Mucho, much. 
Demasiado, too much. 
itf«5, more. 
Poco, little. 



Of Manner t 

Apriesa, hastily. 
Bajo, lowly. 
Presto, quickly. 
Fuertemente, strongly^ and 
all those ending in mente. 

Of Quantity. 

Cuasi, almost. 
Bastante, enough, 
Harto, sufficiently. 
Totalmente, wholly. 



Of Comparison. 
Mas que, more than. Antes mas, rather more. 

Menos, less. Peor, worse. 

Mejor, better. Mui, very. 

JDelmismomodo, likewise. Con mucho, by far. 
Of Order. 



Primero, first. 
Sobre todo, above all. 
En primer Jugar, in the 

first place. 
En segundo lugar, in the 

second place. 
16 



De spues, after. 
A montones, in heaps. 
Confiisamente, confusedly. 
Sin distincion, indiscrimin- 
ately. 



182 ETYMOLOGY. 

Of Affirmation. 
Si, yes. Ciertamente, surely. 

^^un, even. De todos modos, by all 

Sin duda, without doubt. means. 

Of Negation. 
No, no. De ningim modo, by no 

Ni, nor. means. 

Tampoco, neither. Be ninguna suerte, in no 

wise* 

Of Doubt. 
Acaso, perhaps. Frobablemente, probably. 

£penas, scarce. Es dudoso, His doubtful. 

A COLLECTION OF ADVERBS, 

Requiring de before the nouns which come after them. 

Acerca de; as, acerca de lo que me dijo, concerning 

what he told me. 
A cuhierto de; as, d cubierfo de la lluvia, under shelter 

of the rain. 
Ademas de; as, ademas de lo que oi, besides what I 

heard. 
M lado de; as, ponga vmd. esto al lado de ella, place 

this along side of her. 
Antes de; as, antes del sermon, before the sermon. 
A pesar de; as, d pesar de el, in spite of him. 
Cerca de; as, cerca de casa, near home. 
Debajo de; as, debajo de la silla, under the chair. 
Delante de; as, delante del rei, before the king. 
Dentro de; as, dentro de la iglesia, within,, or inside of 
the church. 



ETYMOLOGY. 



183 



Despues de; as, despues de comer, after dinner. 
Detras de; as, defras de la pared, behind the wall. 
Encima de; as, enchna del drbol, above the tree. 
Enf rente de; as, enfrente del capitolio, opposite the 

capitol. 
Fiiera de; sls, fuera del puerto, outside of, or without 

the harbour. 

Lejos de; asj lejos de ml pais, far from m j country. 
Mas am de; as, mas acd de la bolsa, on this side of the 

exchange. 
Mas alia de; as, mas alia del parque, beyond the park. 

Adverbs requiring a after them: — 
Conforme a; as, conforme d las leyes de los Estados 

Unidos, according to the laws of the United States. 
Junto d; as, junto a la iglesia, close to the church. 
Tocante d; as, tocante d las reglas se observard, ^c. 

concerning the rules, it will be observed.* 

Adverbial Phrases. 



A lo hondo, to the bottom. 
A tiro de bala, at one's breast. 
A cuestas, on one's back. 
Mndar d gatas, to go on all fours. 

— d la coz CO git a, on one foot. 

d mas no poder, with all speed. 

d la sordina, slily. 

d escondidas, by stealth. 

de puntillas, on tiptoe. 

* There are, no doubt, more words of this kmd. It is hoped, 
however, that this collection will be found sufficient for learners, 
as they are those which are mostly used, and by means of which, 
the rest may be easily acquired. 



184 ETYMOLOGY. 

»5 scdtos y corcovos, by fits and starts. 

r.^ Gjos cerradosy headlong. 

.5 tientas, groping along. 

.5 tuerto y derecho. ~) , r 
^ , J, ... > at random. 
»^ oulto y sin tino, ) 

^^ solas^ in private (conversation.) 

Caer nieve a grandes copos, to snow in great flaked. 

De tropel, pellmell. 

De un golpe, at one stroke. 

De repente, suddenly. 

De rodillas, on one's knees. 

De lance, second hand. 

De imptroviso, unexpectedly. 

En derechura, strait. 

En el ultimo apuro, at bay. 

En iropel, in a crowd. 

En un abrir y serrar de ojos, in a twinkling of ail eye. 

Llover a cantaros, to rain as fast as it can pour. 

a chorros, in streams. 

OF PREPOSITIONS. 

Prepositions show the relation that one word has with 
another^ as, el fue de Bcdtimore, a Boston, he went 
from Baltimore to Boston. 

The following are the prepositions, which the Spanish 
Academy has deemed such:- — 
.^5 to. ^«ci«, towards. 

t6inte, before. Hasta, till. 

Con, with. Para, for. 

Contra, against. For, by or for. 

De, of or from. Segiin, according to* 

Desde, from. Sin^ without. 

£!n, in. Sobre, upon. 

Entre, between. Tras., behind. 



ETYMOLOGY. 185 

^^ntes de, and despues de, when they are used before a verb in the 
infinitive, retain the de, but when they are to precede any other 
mood, then the de, is changed into que; antes de almorzar, before 
breakfast; antes que almorcemos, before we breakfast. 

English prepositions^ with their correspondent ones in 
Spanish. 

Jihout^ for within, is rendered en; as, he is ahout the 

church, estd en la iglesia. 
Jlhout^ for through, por; as, he went dancing ahout town^ 

el iba bailando por la ciudad. 
About, for on, sobre; as, a treatise about the Spanish 

idioms, tratado sobre los idiotismos Espanoles. 
After, despues de; as, after three o'clock, despues de 

las tres. 
After, for according to, a, or segunj as, after the 

American fashion, a la moda Americana; after his 

manner of writing, segun su modo de escribir. 
At, d; at the window, a la ventana; seated at the 

threshold of the door, sentado al umhral de la 

puerta; at nine o'clock, a las nueve. 
At, for in, en; at home, en casa; at Paris j en Paris. 
Before, as opposite to after, antes de; as, he shall arrive 

before next week, llegard kutes de la setnana que 

viene. 
Before, as opposite to behind, de lante de; as, he worked 

all the time before his father, el trabaj6 todo el 

tiempo delante de su padre. 
By, for in, de; as, by day, de dia; by night, de noche. 
By, for close to, junto a; as, the Baltimore bank is by 

my house, el banco de Baltimore estd junto a rrri 

casa. 
16^ 



186 ETYMOLOGY. 

. ■*" 

For^ para; as, this flower is for her, esta flor es para 
ella; I bought yesterday, cloth for my son, ayer 
campre pano para 7ni hijo; it cannot be denied that 
for a man like him, such an expression was unbe» 
coming, no se puede 7iegar, que para un hombre 
como e/, semejante espresion no le estaba Men. 

Tor^ meaning, for the sake of, por^ as, he died for hi-s 
country, murio por sii patria. 

For, in behalf of, por^ as he betted for his brother, et 
, aposto por su hermano. 

For, on account of, por; as, he died for our sins, rnurio 
por nuestros pecados. 

For, during, por; as, I shall stay here for three weeks? 
estarS aqui por tres seinayias. 

For, in the room of, por; as, he came for his father, 
vino el por su padre. 

For, in exchange for, por; as, I'll give you my book for 
your watch, le dare mi libro por su muestra; I shall 
sell my furniture for twenty dollars, vendere mis 
muebles por veinte pesos. 

For, meaning to fetch, por; as, he goes for bread, and 
I went for wine, el va por pan, y yofui por vina. 

From, de; as, I come from France, vengo de Francia. 

From, speaking of distances, is translated by desde; as, 
there are thirty-six miles/rom Baltimore to Wash- 
ington, hai treinta y seis millas desde Baltimore a 
Washington. 

.fn, after superlatives, is rendered by de; as, the sun is 
the brightest planet in the universe, es el sol el 
planeta mas brillante del universo. 

In, or into, en or por; as, in the Spring, en la prima^ 
vera; in the evening, por la tarde; put your paper^ 
into the drawer, pon tus papeles en el cajon* 



ETYMOLOGY. 



187 



Into, followed by a verb of motion, to enter excepted, 
is rendered by a; as, go into the hall, and as you 
come, enter into the dining room to see whether 
dinner is on the table, ve a la sala, y cuando viiel- 
vas entra en el comedor, a ver si la comida estd en 
la mesa. 

On, or upon^ sohre; as, on, or upon the table, sohre la 
7nesa. 

On, after the verbs to live, to subsist, ^'c. is rendered by 
fZe; as, he feeds on bread, se alimenta de pan. 

On, when found before the days of the week, or of the 
month, is never translated in Spanish^ as, he ar- 
rived there on the twelfth of January, and he will 
come back on Tuesday, the twenty-eighth, el llego 
alii el doce de Enero, y volverd el martes veinte 
y ocho. 

Over, encima de; as, over the door, encima de lapuerta. 

Through, por; as, I passed through Market-street, 
pase por la calle del Mercado. 

Through, denoting the reason why an action was per- 
formed, is rendered by de; as, they surrendered 
through hungci, se entregaron de hambre. 

Till, or until, hasta; he will not set off* for New-York, 
till nest week, no quiere salir para Nueva-York 
hasta la semana que viene. 

To, d; as, I delivered the letter to my father, entregue 
la carta a mi padre. 

To, is rendered en, when preceded by from, in phrases 
like the following: — from door to door, de puerta 
en puerta; from house to house, de casa en casa. 

Towards, hdcia; as, towards Madrid, hacia Madrid. 

Under, debajo de, or bajo; as, under the chair, debajo de 
la sillaj under the table, bajo la mesa. 



188 ETYMOLOGT. 

Withi con; as, with the knife, con el cuckillo; with 

mildness, con dulzura. 
Within^ dentro de; as, he is within the well, el estd 

dentro delpozo, 
Without, sin; as, he was walking through the streets 

without Sihait, se paseabapor las calks sin sombrero. 
PRthoutf when meaning opposite to within, is translated\ 

hjfuera de; as, at ten o'clock in the morning, we 

were without the harbour, a las diez de la mahana 

estdbamos fuera del puerto. 

OF CONJUNCTIONS. 

A Conjunction connects words and sentences together^ 
as, thou and he are happy because jou are good, tu y 
pi soisfelices porque sois buenos. 

The Spanish conjunctions are divided into eight kinds, 
viz: — conjunctive, disjunctive, conditional, causal, con* 
tinuative, comparative, adversative, and objective. 

r2/,*and5 ^ 
Conjunctive, <. ni, nor^ >-as, yovi d el, j d ella, \ saw 



r2/,*and5 ^ 
live, <. ni, nor^ >-as, 
(. que, that; J 



him and her; ni reir ni llorar puedo, I can neither 
laugh nor weep; los hombres dicen que no apetecen, 
riquezas, men say that they do not long for riches. 
Disjunctive, 6 1 or, either; as, vendrd el padre 6 el hijo, 
either the father or the son will come. 

* When the word following this conjunction y, begins with an i, 
®r /li, the conjunction y is changed into e; Escocia e Jrlanda, Scot- 
land and Ireland; padre e hijo, father and son. 

t This is changed into, w, when the word that follows it, begins 
with an o/ as, skU u ocAo, seven or eight. 



ETYMOLOGY. 189 

r si, if; I 

Conditional < como, as; > si aspiras d 

C con ted que provided that; J 
ser docto, estudia, if thou dost aspire to be learned, 
study. 

(Smml, ^P"' ?«^' ''««"^«! I as, no fui alU porque 

Lpues, pues qiie^ %\nct',^ 

estaba enfermo, I did not go there, because I was 
sick; pues me lo mandas, lo hare, since thou biddest 
me, I shall do it. 

Continuative, ^i^^^*' ^^^^' ^ as, (Zt>o pues ot^e 

Lpuesto que, since; 3 

salio de aquel peligro, I say then that he came out 

of that danger; puesto que te favorecen, muestrate 

agradecido, since they faVour you, show yourself 

thankful. 

rcomOf as; "j 
Comparative, < asi, so; Vas,/no coma elyelo, as 

Last como, as; J 
cold as ice; asi como lo digo asi lo aprendi, as I say 
it so I learned it 

Adversative, \ ^^^*' ■^*^^' ^, ' > as, quisiera ir, mas mi 
C aunque, ihoM^h; j 

enfermedad no me lo permite, I should like to go, 

hut my sickness does not allow me. 

Dhjective, j^«^'« ^^^^' ^^^^^ «^ ^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^t'? as, se ^o 
C djin de que, to the end that; 3 

escribo, para que lo publique en las gacetas, I write 

it to you, that you may publish it in the gazettes. 

Of Simple and^Compound Conjunctions. 

Simple Conjunctions are those which consist of one 
word; as, coino^pero; and Compound Conjunctions are 



190 ETYMOLOGY. 

those which are formed of more than one word^ diSjpara 
que, that^ d Jin de que, to the end that. 

OF INTERJECTIONS. 

An interjection is a part of speech, which expresses 
the passions or emotions of the mind of the person who 
speaks; as, O hombre! caan mudable eresJ man! how 
changeable thou art! 

The words which are to be considered in the Spanish 
language as interjections, are the following: — ah, ai, ce, 
ehito, chiton, ca, ete,fu, ha, he, ho, hola, a, pu, ta, tate, 
ah, 6; expressing grief, joy, indignation, and admiration, 
thej may be said to correspond with the English hey ! 
^h! Oh! ho! hah! 

Ce, ete, ha, he, hola, are used to call the attention, 
and consequently correspond with hem, lo, hip, holla, 
in English: hola, is also used to express wonder, and 
he, to demand a repetition of something that has been 
said to us, and which we did not exactly understand; 
he, sometimes is expressed in English, by the word 
what! chito, chiton, are similar to hush, mum; ea, serves 
to encourage; fu, is the same as pshaw! pu, as, foh! ta 
and tate, are employed to stop; as, halt, hold! 



PART III. 



SYNTAX. 



Syntax, is the proper arrangement of the parts of 
speech, in order to form correct sentences. 

A sentence is an assemblage of words, forming a com- 
plete sense. 

Syntax consists of two parts. Concord and Govern- 
ment. 

Concord is the agreement which one w^ord has with 
another, in gender, number, case, or person. 

In Spanish, there are four kinds of concords, viz:— 
1st, between the article and noun 5 as, el monte, the 
mount; las montanas^ the mountains: 2d, between the 
noun and the adjective; as, soldado valeroso, a valiant 
soldier; tropas valerosas, valiant troops: 3d, between 
the antecedent and the relative; as, la carta que yo le 
escribz, y la cual vmd, no qiiiso recibir, the letter I wrote 
to you, and which you did not wish to receive: 4th, be- 
tween the subject and the verb; as, yo escribo, I write; 
ellos saltan, they leap. 

Government is that power which one word has over 
another, in directing its mood, tense, or case; as, te- 
amare, I shall love thee. Here, amwre is an active 
transitive verb, governing the pronoun in the objective 
case. 



192 ETYMOLOGY.' 

The different kinds of words of whicli the Spanish language is 
composed, being shown and defined, as many rules, notes, and ob- 
ser ations, as are required to produce a correct agreement, and 
right arrangement in a sentence, will now be laid down. But as 
theory alone cannot perfect us in any art or science whatever, it 
would be impossible that rules alone could enable us to form a 
correct sentence. Persuad d of this truth, the author has not 
only illustrated the rules, notes, and observations by a great many 
examples, but he has also placed under every one of them, a 
course of practical exercise, which, together with the rules, will, 
it is hoped, teach at once, both how to speak and write the Spanish 
language with accuracy and precision. 

^n explanation of some marks used in the course of the 
exercises. 

This horizontal line, which is to be found un- 
der some English words, implies that they are spelled 
in the same manner in Spanish, with this exception, 
that a soft t, must be changed into c, and that the s is 
never to be doubled. 

When a parenthesis ( ) encloses two or more words, 
the words above or below, are equivalent to the whole 
enclosure. 

Words having this mark t underneath, are not to be 
translated in Spanish. 

• These figures, 1, 2, 3, &c. which are to be found at 
the end of English words, show in what order they must 
be placed in Spanishr 



SYNTAX. 193 

AGREEMENT OF THE ARTICLE * 

RULE I. 

The article must agree with the noun in gender^ 
number and case^ as, "El libro de la iglesia contiene 
las vidas de todos los santos,^^ the book of the church 
contains the lives of all the saints. 

JVbie 1. Of the and to the, when applied to the nouns which in 
Spanish are masculine singular, are always translated del and al, 
ivhich are contractions of de el and a el. See page 68. 

J^ote 2. Feminine nouns beginning with a, or ha, accentedf on 
the first syllable, take the masculine article when they are in the 
singular, but never when they are in the plural number; as, "El 
aguila es la reina de las aves," the eagle is the king of birds. 

EXERCISES. . 

The sun is brilliant. The ox ploughed the land. 

sol es brillante. buei ard tierra.i 

The sailors§ bent the sails. The bee stung the 

marinero amarraron vela aheja pico 

girl. The • nightingale sings delightfully. 

muchacha, ruisenor cania delidosamente. 

The writing master made an excellent pen. 
(maestro de escribir) hizo una escelente pluma. 
The zephyrs were delightful. The clouds covered the 
cejiros eran deliciosos. nwnbe ciibriati 

* See the Etymology of the article in pages 67, 68. 
t By accented it is here meant, when a stress is laid over the a or 
ha, whether it bears the orthographical accent or not. 

I For a perfect knowledge of the gender of nouns, the student is 
referred to pages 68, 59, &c. particularly to page 59, rule 2. 

§ For the formation of the plural of nouns, we refer the student 
to pages 64, and 65. 
17 



194 SYNTAX. 

the sun, aiid the (lay was enveloped in the darkness ©f 
sol y dia estaba envuelto obscuridad 

night. She stood motionless admiring the beau- 
noche. ella estaba (sin movimiento) admirando henno- 
ties of the fields. The Spanish language is called the 
sura campo. Espahola Ungua se llama 

language of the Gods. He sent the culprit to the king. 
Dios. el embio reo rei. 

His virtue raised' him^ to the high station which he now 
Su virtud levanto le alia situacion que el ahora 

occupies. (Thej lifted up) their eyes to the heavenly' 
ocupa. levantdron los ojos celestiales 

regions. ^ The eagle flew through the liquid air. The 
region. dguila void por liquido aire. 

bird sang on the tree. The mistress reprimanded the 
ave canto en drbol. ama reprehendio 

servant. The hunger of the besieged made* them^ sur- 
criado hambre sitiados Mzo les ren- 

render. 
dir. 

USE OF THE ARTICLE. 

RULE II. 

Nouns taken in a general sense, or used in their most 
unlimited acceptation, are always preceded by the ar- 
ticle^* as, "Z« industria de los Americanos esmuclia^'' 

*We have, in the course of our instruction, perceived that 
some persons have been led into great mistakes for the want of a 
proper knowledge of this rule. To obviate this as much as pos- 
sible, we shall make the following observations, which, we trust, 
will render it perfectly intelligible. 

When we speak of '■'■noun'' Utktn in a general sense,^^ or, "vsed in 
their most unlimited acceptation,'''' we mean that we speak of the 



SYNTAX. 



195 



the industry of the Americans is gi-eat. *'Z« virtud 
debe ser amada, y el vicio aborrecido^^^ virtue ought to 
be loved, and vice hated. 



EXERCISES. 

Justice is the mistress and queen of virtue. The 

justicia es senora reina virtud, 

corruption of the heart is often the corruption 
corrupcion corazon es amenudo 

ivhole of an object, or a class of objects, without reference to any 
of its parts. Thus, for instance, if we say, "the earth is round," 
we have relation to no particular part of this object; we only say, 
that as a whole it is round. Did we not refer to the whole planet, 
it would be impossible to say it was round; for, some parts are 
square, others angular, &c. Again, if we say, "men are bad," 
we mean, that men, taken as a body, are bad, because the aggre- 
gate of their goodness is more than counterbalanced by that of 
their wickedness. 

Speaking of the sun as a whole, we say, "the sun is bright;" in 
the same manner, "the north wind is cold;" "vice is hateful;" 
"knowledge and wisdom are the support of liberty;" "cloth is 
used for men's garments;" "wheat in America is abundant;" "it 
came from heaven," &c. 

It is necessary to observe, that a whole, is, sometimes, divided 
into parts, and any one of these parts, may be taken as a whole. 
We observed, for instance, that in saying, "men are bad," men 
constituted a whole. Now, we also say, that this ichole^ or any 
other whole, may be divided into many classes, each constituting 
a whole. For example, if we say, "good men are rare, but bad 
men abundant," we divide men into two classes, each of which 
constitutes a whole. After the same manner, we say, "learned 
men;" "wise men;" "shrewd men;" "bad land;" "good land," 
&c. In all these instances, therefore, it is plain, that, according 
to the above rule, the article must be employed in Spanish. 

On the other hand, many of the preceding sentences might have 
been taken in a limited sense. Had we said, "we shall not have 
sun to-day," we should have had no relation to the whole body of 



♦.il 



196 SYNTAX. 

of the mind. Printers make use of moveable = 
alma impresor se sirven movibles 

characters.^ Death is a single moment between 
caracter muerte es un solo momento entre 

time and eternity. Pride and vanity are often 
iiempo eternidad orgullo vanidad son amenudo 

the cause of the misfortunes incident to human^ life. * 

causa desgracia incidentes humana vida 

Interest, glory and ambition, are commonly the motives 

interes gloria son comunmente motivos 

of the actions of men. The death of the Saviour of 

hombre muerte Salvador 

the human* race^ was announced to the world by the 

humano generofuS anunciada mundo por 

darkness which covered the face of the earth. 
obscuridad que cubria faz tierra. 

the sun, but to that part turned towards us only; and, therefore, 
the article in Spanish would not hare been employed. In one of 
the above exercises, we say, "printers make use of moveable 
characters." The word printers, in this sentence, is taken in a 
general sense; because all printers are here supposed to constitute 
a body, and we have reference to the whole of this body; taking, 
at the same time, for granted, that some of them may use other 
characters than those which are moveable; in the same manner 
as when speaking of the earth, we said that some parts of it were 
angular, &c. But the noun characters is, in this sentence, taken 
jn a limited sense, and it cannot be used in any other. For, the 
meaning is, and must be, that printers make use of some of those 
characters, which constitute the whole. It being obvious, that 
the whole of the moveable characters in existence are not, nor 
Ihey cannot, be used at once; and we must, therefore, necessarily 
have reference to that part of the whole which printers use. 



SYNTAX. 197 

RULE IIL 

The article is prefixed to names of empires, king- 
doms, countries, provinces, mountains, rivers, winds, 
and seasons; but if the empires, kingdoms, countries, or 
provinces, be preceded bj a preposition, or bear the 
name of their capitals, the article is not used; for exam- 
ple, '' La Alemania, j la Inglaterra tienen gran corner- 
do con Estados Unidos;" Germany and England have 
great commerce with the United States. ^'El clima de 
Francia aprueba a muchos;^^ the climate of France 
agrees with many. 

J^ote 1. China, Brazil, Japan, Ferrol, Havana, and Coruna: — all 
those nations considered very remote:— and all personified places, 
take always the article, whether they be preceded or not by a 
preposition ; or whether the capitals bear or not the name of the 
kingdoms, provinces, &,c. as, "Ei vino de la China;" he came from 
China. 'Los naturales de la Persia son hei-mosos;''^ the natives of 
Persia are beautiful. ^'Los ojos de la Europa estan sobre mi, dijo 
Bonaparte a Escniquiz;'''' the eyes of Europe are upon me, said 
Bonaparte to Escoiquiz. 

EXERCISES. 

France and Italy abound in vineyards. The United 

Francia Italia abundan vina Estados 

States are as populous as Spain. The world is 

Unidos son tan populosos como Espaha mundo (estd 

divided into four* parts; viz: Europe, Asia, Africa, 

dividido) en parte (a saber) Europa = 

and America. Tagus, Duero, Ebro, and Guadalquivir, 

Tajo 

are the four largest^ rivers* that water Spain. North 
son may ores rio que riegan Norte 

*For the cardinal or ordinal numbers, see pages 12, ^Sj &c, 

17* 



198 SYNTAX. 

South, East and West are the four principaP points^ of 
Sud Este Oeste son cardinales punto 

tlie compass. The trade* winds ^ always blow from 

agiija generales viento siempre soplan de 

East to West. America (is bounded on the North by) 

conjina por el Norte con 

the Frozen* Ocean % on the West, by the Pacific, on 

Holado Oceano por con Pacijico por 

the South, by the Southern, and on the East, by the 

con meridional por con 

Atlantic. Winter, Spring Summer, and Autumn 
Atlantwo Invierno Primavera Verano Otono 

are the four seasons of the year. The king of Portugal 
son estacion cmo rei — 

(set off) for Brazil in the Fall of eighteen hundred* 

salio para en Otono 

and seven, and left Rio Janeiro for Europe, in the 

dejo — para 

Spring of eighteen hundred and twenty-one. Parnas- 
primavera de Parna- 

sus, Pindus, and Helicon, are the favourite* mountains^ 

so Pindo son predilectos monte 

of the poets. Dot you* intend* to stay long in 

poeta t vmd. intentar (estar mucho tiempo) 
Prussia? England defended Spain against the attacks 
Prusia Inglaterra defendio contra ataque 

*In Spanish, we must express the thousand, when the quantity 
mentioned, exceeds it; as, mil y ciento, eleven hundred; mil seis 
dentos, sixteen hundred. The number above should, therefore, be 
translated by mil ocho dentos y siete. 

t The verb to do, when used to ask a question, or to express d 
BegatioHj is never translated in Spanish. 



SYNTAX, 



1§9 



of France. The eyes of the United^ States^ watched the 

Francia ojo unidos estados observaban 

movements of England. The Emperor of Austria 

movimienfo Inglaterra emperador — - 

(setoff) from Russia in the spring, and spent the 
partio de primavera 



summer in Turkey. Naples is a delightfuP country. ^ 
verano Turquia Napoles es tin delicioso pais 
Havana is a very^ unhealthy^ town ^ for foreigners. 

— es un mux {mal sano) pais para estrangero 

A great quantity of rum formerly ^ came^ from 
t gran caniidad ron ayitiguamente venia de 

Brazil to Baltimore, but now this article (is supplied) 

pe7'0 ahora este articulo se suple 

by New England. The best and the handsomest 
por neuva mejores t (mas hermosos) , 

silk pocket handkerchiefs (are imported) from 

(panuelos de faltriquera de seda) se importan de 

China. 

RULE IV. 

The definitive article, or the preposition por, is to 
be placed before nouns of measure, weight, bulk, and 
number, when they are preceded by the price; as, 
^'Compro la historia de Roma a tres pesos el tomo, or 
por tomo," he bought the history of Rome at three dol- 
lars a volume. ^'El azafran se ven.de a diez y seis pesos 
la libra, or por libra," saffron sells at sixteen dollars a 
pound. 

EXERCISES. 

Good' Madeira^ wine' sells at five dollars a gallon, 
bueno Madera [vino de){se vended) peso galon 



9M - SYNTAX. 

wheat at (a dollar and fifty cents) a bushel, and ilour 
t7igo a peso y medio fanega harina 

at seven dollars a barrel. Superfine' cloth ^ can be 
barril super jino pano (sepuede 
bought in Baltimore, at ten dollars a yard, and the 
comprar) « vai^a 

best Canton* crape' at fifteen dollars and (thirty- 

mejor (corespon de) a 

seven and a half cents*) a piece. He took lessons (on 

tres reales pieza t tomo leccion de 

dancing) (at the rate) of ten dollars a week. (Cut me) 
danza a razon semana corteme 

three yards of cloth at twenty-five cents a yard, and 

vara pano vava y 

* In New Spain, the money is counted by ^iesos, reales^ and 
medio reales; thus: a peso, dollar, is divided into cuatro pesetas 
megic anas, four quarters of a dollar; every /jescia into dos reales, 
two rials; and every rial into dos mcdios, two halves. Copper 
coin, or lower than a medio, is not known there. The South 
American coin, is precisely equivalent to the North American, 
counting in this manner: six and a quarter cents, unmedio; twelve 
and a half cents, un real; twenty-five cents, una peseta, or dos 
reales, (the latter is much more used than the former;) fifty cents, 
or half a dollar, either cuatro reales, or medio peso; fifty-six and a 
quarter cents, cuatro reales y medio, 8fC In old Spain, although 
almost every province divides the effective coins into different 
imaginary ones, yet, in keeping accounts, or in writings, the 
money which they generally use, is the foil.' wing real coins: 
pesos, or duros, reales vellon and maravedis, dividing fhena thus: — 
a duro, dollar, is divided into twenty reu'e^ rcllon, and a 7-eal vellon 
into thirt\-four maravedis. In conversation, they sometimes, divide 
the money in the above manner; and some others, into duros, 
pesetas, cuarins, and orhavos, thus: dwo, dollar, is divided int<» five 
pe'ictns, five Twenty centH pieces: every peseta, into thirty-four 
cmrtos, and every cuarto, into two ocfiavoS' 



SYNTAX. 



201 



three at fifty. He paid his journeymen sixty dollars 

t joagd a sus trabajador 
a month. They have imported seals, and selP them^ 
ones t han importado sello venden los 
at thirty dollars a pair. 
par, 

RULE V. 

The article is generally repeated in Spanish before 
nouns that follow each other in quick succession^ as, 
•'La fe^ la esparanza y la caridad.^^ faith, hope, and 
charity. 

J^ote 1. When todo-a-os-as, all, follows the noun enumerated, 
and makes an aggregate of them all, the article is generally 
omitted; as, ^* Franceses, Portugueses, Ingleses, y Africanos, todos 
son hombres,^^ French, Portuguese, English, and Africans, are all 
men. 

EXERCISES. 

Temperance, modesty, and prudence, are virtues 
templanza modestia prudencia son virtud 

essential to the character of an accomplished youth. 
esencial car deter (joven bien edueado.) 

Thus fell the Roman* empire', and involved in its 
asi cayo JRomano imperio envohio sus 

ruins, the arts and sciences. (No body) (is ignorant of) 
ruiiia arte ciencia. nadie ignora 

the prudence, wisdom, and valour of Washington. 

prudencia, sahiduria valor 

Women, children, (old men) flocks, huts, houses, 
miiger nine anciano rebaho cabana casa 

palaces, (all were swallowed up) by the waves of 
palacio todo fue smnergido per ola 

the sea. 



.^OS SYNTAX. 



The article is placed before the days of the week, 
and before numerals, denoting either the day of the 
month, or the hour of the day; as, ^'El martes^^^ Tues- 
day. *'El domingo,^^ Sunday. '''•El cvatro de Julio, a 
las once de la manana,^^ the fourth of July, at eleven 
o'clock in the morning. '''•Son las dos menos cuarto^'^ 
it is a quarter before two. '''Son las ciiatro y diez 
minutos,^^ it is ten minutes after four. 

J^ote 1. The article is never placed before the dates; and 
instead of ordinal, we use cardinal numbers, except in the first 
day of the month; as, ^^M'ahon, 23 de Enero, de 1822," Mahon, 
23d January, 1822. ^^Baltimore, !« de Julio de 1824;" Baltimore, 
-Tuly 1st, 1824. 

EXERCISES. 

On the twenty-third of March, (at thirty minutes 
t Marzo a las tres 

after three o'clock) in the afternoon, (it will be sold) 
2/* treinta minutos de tarde se venderd 

at auction. On the twenty -eighth of February, the 
en almoneda. Febrero 

sun rises in Baltimore, at thirty-four^ minutes^ before* 

sol sale ' — — menos 

seven % and (it sets) at thirty -four ^ minutes' after five. * 

se pone y 

They entered happily into Barcelona, at about 

t entrdron felizmente en {d cosa de) 

half^ after* three ^ in the afternoon. Sunday is a day 
media y de tarde domingo es un dia 

* Literally, at the three and thirty minutes. All other sentences 
of this kind, must be translated in the same manner. 



SYNTAX. 203 

which we (ought to) consecrate to our Lord. He went 
que t debemos consagrar a nuestro Senor t fue 
thither on Saturday, and he (will return) on Thursday, 

alli t Sdbado t volverd t jueves 

or Friday. Should you come this way next^ 

viernes. si vmd.pasarepor aqui {que viene) 

Monday^ or Tuesday^ (call in) to (see me) Dantzic. 
Tunes mdrtes entre a verme Dandque 

first September, one thousand, seven hundred and 

Seiiembre 
twenty-one. New- York, seventh of December, eighteen 

Nueva Diciembre 

hundred and sixteen. (It is with great pleasure that 

con mucho gusto 
I reply) to your favours of the first and tenth of 
contesto a sus apreciada 
March. 
Marzo. 

RULE VII. 

The article is placed before Senor-a-ito4ta, and be- 
fore their plurals, when they are used in the third per- 
son, but never in the second 5 as, ^^El Senor Montejo,^^ 
Mr. Montejo. ''La Sehora Gimenez dijo;^^ Mrs. Gime- 
nez said. 

It is to be observed, that Senor-a-ito-ita^ may be fol- 
lowed by Don or Dona^ when the baptismal name of the 
person spoken of, is mentioned j as, "^/ Senor Don 
Juan Soler,'^ Mr. John Soler. 

JVbfe 1. Don and Dona, are never preceded by the article; they 
have no plural; and cannot be used but before baptismal names; 
asj ''Don Jmn,'' Mr. John. *'Dona Teresa,'^ Mrs. Theresa. "L<w 



204 •• SYNTAX. 

Senores Don Pedro Vdldes y Don Benito Mdreos,^^ Messieurs Peter 
Valdes and Benedict Marcos. 

J^ote 2. Nouns denoting the dignity,* profession, &c. of per- 
sons, (San. saint excepted,) must be preceded by the article; as, 
'^Soi el capitan Salvatierra,'''' I am captain Salvatierra. "Saw Pedro^^^ 
Saint Peter. 

EXERCISES. 

He received from Messieurs Garcia and company, 

t recibio de Senores - compania 

by order of Mr. Velazques, two hundred dollars. Mr. 

por orden — — Senor 

Alvarez, (said he to mej (as he was going out) you may 

— "- niedijo al salir (vmd.puede) 

rest assured that I (sliall not pay) Mr. Torbellino. 

estar seguro que t no pagare a 

Madam, said Mr. Raphe! to his mother, don't you 
Sehora dijo Senor Rafael a su madre {no se acuer- 
remember to have seen this face.^ One of my slaves 
da vmd. de) haher visto esta cara uno de mis esclavo 
{said to me,) sir, (look to yourself.) The words of a 

me dijo senor tnire por si. palahra un 

veteran^ soldier^ to Marshal Ney, induced^ him^ to 

veterano soldado a Mariscal indugSron le a 

(seek, for) the comforts of religion. Father Feijoo 

huscar consuelo padre 

wrote on every subject. King Ferdinand is 

escribio en (todo genero de materias. ) rei Fernando es 

*The dignity or profession of men, v/hen they have acquired a 
great degree of well merited honour or glory, in some elevated 
situation, is sometimes not expressed, and the article is then plac- 
ed immediately before the surname of the person; thus, it is saiu 
in Spanish, ''El Washington'"' ''El Cid.'" "El Taso.''' "El Petrarcay'' 
&c. meaning. El general, elheroe, 6 el gran Washington, the general, 
the hero, or the great Washington. El autor Taso, Tasso the 
author, &c. 



SYNTAX. . £05 

the son of Charles the Fourth. Father Isla translated 

t de Carlos t tradujo 

(a great many) French^ works. * Doctor Rush dis- 
rauchas Francesa obra. (dis- 

tinguished* himselP in the yellow' fever ^ which prevailed 
tinguio se en amarilla Jiebre que reino 

in Philadelphia in the year one thousand seven hundred 
en Filadelfia en mo t 

and ninety -three: his panegyric was written by 

su panegirico fue escrito por 

Doctor Ramsay. General Harrison forced the 

hizo {d las 

British* and Indians to retire^ from before 
Britanicos) {d los Indios) t salir de (delante del) 
fort Meigs. 
fuerte 

OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE. 
RULE VIII. 

The article is not placed before those nouns, which, 
contrary to the preceding rules, are taken in a limited^ 
definite^ or partitive sense. When a noun is taken in 
this sense, the words some or any might be supplied 
without injuring the meaning; as, "Maryland produces 
excellent flour ^^^ that is, some excellent flour; El Mary- 
land produce harina escelente. "Has not chemistry 
made rapid advances?^^ that is, any or some rapid ad- 
vances; ^No ha hecho la quimica rapidos adelantami- 
entos? 

J^ote 1. Some, may be translated by als:uno-a, in the singular, 
and by algunos-as, unos-as, in the plural; as, ^^Tiene algun credito,^'' 
he has some credit. "Le hizo unas promesas," he made him sow.e 
promises. 
18 



iS06 SYNTAX. 

J^ote 2. Some before a singular noun, which means something 
to eat, or drink, is generally expressed by un poco de; as, ^^Trdi- 
game un poco de agua,^'' bring me some water. 

J^ote 3. tiny, interrogatively used, before a singular noun, which 
expresses something to eat, or drink, is generally suppressed en- 
tirely; as, '■^iHalvino en la botella?'''' is there any wine in the bottle? 
Should any precede any other kind of nouns, it may be either sup- 
pressed entirely, or expressed like some; as, '■^ ^Tiene vmd. algunos 
libros,^'' or, tiene vmd. libros? have you any books? 

EXERCISES. 

(Independently of) gold, silver, quick-silver, lead 

ademas de oro plata azogue plomo 

and copper, Mexico produces: sugar, cotton, pepper, 

cobre Megico produce azucar algodon pim{e7ita 

cocoa, wheat, and ;^a great many) other commodities, 

cacao trigo muchas otras comodidad 

for the comfort of man. The world abounds in snares, 

para ausilio mundo abmida en lazo 

difficulties, and dangers. (There are) authors in 

dificultad peligro hai alitor 

whose writings we discover more rhetoric than elo- 

cuyos escrito t descubrimos inas retorica que elo- 

quence. Without reckoning'^ some rials that I 

cuencia sin contar real que t 

had received from my uncle. I had some idea 

habia recibido de mi tio t tenia — 

last week of going to France. (Has he bought) 

(la semana pasada) de ir Francia ha com})rado 

any chairs? Is there any cider in the bottles.^ (Has 

silla hai sidra en botella ha 

*It is a general rule, without any exception, that when the 
English present participle is preceded by a preposition, it must 
always be translated in Spanish by the infinitive. 



SYNTAX. 20r 

the post brought) any gazettes? It (has not brought) 
trido el correo gaceta t no ha traido 

either gazettes or journals. (Have you seen) any water 

ni ni diario ha visto vmd. agua 

in that pitcher? The Doctor attributed his indisposition 

aquel jarro attribuyo su 

to some (roast meat) which (he had eaten.) (It is 
a asado que t habia comido es 

requisite) to rub the bruises with some vinegar. 
menester t frotar cardenal con vinagre 

RULE IX. 

The article is never placed before proper names of 
persons, places,^ or months; as, ^'El se llama Pedro," he 
is called Peter. "Londres es una ciudad magnijica.^^ 
London is a magnificent city. ''Julio es un mes mui 
caluroso,^^ July is a very warm month. 

Mte 1. The surname of a person distinguished for his learning 
good qualities, &c. may be placed in the plural, preceded by the 
correspondent article, when we wish to convey to the mind, in a 
more energetic manner, the exalted opinion we entertain of him; 
as, ^^Los Granadas, y los Cervantes hacen un honor imortal a la lite- 
rature Espanola,'''' Granada and Cervantes (i. e. the Granadas and 
the Cervantes) reflect eternal honour on Spanish literature. 

J^ote 2. The article is not placed before casa, house; when used 
to signify home, it is then preceded by a preposition; as, void 
casa, I go home. 

J^ote 3. Nouns adverbially used, take no article; as, de corazon, 
heartily; con ahinco, eagerly. 

EXERCISES. 

Shakespeare and Milton (are said to be) the two 

se dice que son 

* Except those places which are already mentioned in rule iii, 
page 197, 



£08 SYNTAX. 

greatest poets that England ever produced. New- 
mayores poeta que jamas produjo Nueva- 

York, Philadelphia, and Baltimore, are three famous 

York Filadelfia son famosa 

cities. In July and August, the springs of Bedford and 

en Julio Agosto fuente 

Saratoga are much frequented. December, January, 

son mui frucuentadas Diciemhre Enero 

and February, are three very^ severe^ months,' in the 

Fehrero son , mui sever os mes en 
Northern^ States^ of America. The Augustines, 

Septentrionales estado ^.^ugustino 

the Chrysostomes, and the Basils, showed how 
Crisostomo Basilio [hicieron ver) como 

human^ eloquence' (could be made) subservient to the 
humana elocuencia podia ser servicial 

preaching of revealed^ truths. ^ (No body) (ought to) 
predicaciones reveladas verdad nadie debe 

excite commotions in the house of those who live 
escitar comnocion casa los que viven 

peacefully. He took the disconsolate orphan 
(con tranquilidad) llevo desconsolado huerfano 

to the house of his father, and there he treated* him* 
d casa su padre alii t trato le 

with the tenderness of an affectionate* parent.' (It is 
con ternura carihosa madre vale 

better) (to be loved) with respect than with tenderness. 
mas ser amado con respect o que ternura 

(We ought to) suffer with patience, the inconveniences 

debemos sufrir paciencia incomodidad 

of this life. (It is not) a great merit to read with 

tsta vida no es t gran merito t leer 



SYNTAX. 200 

propriety, but a great defect (to do it) incorrectly. 
propiedad pero t gran defecto leer incorrectamente. 

RULE X. 

The article never precedes nouns in apposition^* as, 
"La ciudad de Washington, capital de los Estados 
Unidos, asiento del gobierno, y residencia del Presi- 
dente;^'^ the City of Washington, the capital of the 
United States, the ^-"^tt of government, and the residence 
of the President. ^Salamanca recinto de Sabios;^^ Sa- 
lamanca, the retreat of wise men. ^^Londres, santuario 
de las artes y de las ciencias,^^ London, the sanctuary of 
the arts and sciences. 

JVbfe 1. The article is never placed before a noun exhibiting a 
degree of consanguinity, or kindred; as, ^'■Alejandro era hijo de 
Felipe,''^ Alexander was the son of Philip. 

EXERCISES. 

Hope, the balm of life, sooths* us' under 
Esperanza bdlsamo vida suaviza nos en 
every misfortune. Paul, the apostle of the Gentiles, 
todo infortimio, Pablo apostol __- 
was eminent for his zeal and knowledge. Religion 
era eminente por su celo sabiduria. 

* Nouns used in apposition, are those Avhich immediately follow 
the one by which they are qualified. Thus, for instance; "An- 
napolis, the capital of the state of Maryland." Capital is cer- 
tainly a noun which immediately folloAvs and qualifies Annapolis. 
Capital, is said, therefore, to be used in apposition. Again, say- 
ing, "Bonaparte, the slave of ambition, and the victim of his own 
talents;" we shall observe, that slave and victim are also used in 
apposition, because they immediately follow and qualify Bona- 
parte. 

18* 



210 SYNTAX. 

the support of adversity, adorns prosperity. God. 

apoyo adversiad adorna prosperidad. Dios 
the source of all greatness, and the spring of all 

origen toda grandeza manantial 

goodness, (will reward*) us^ (according to) our 
bondad premiara . nos segun nuestros 

merits. I am Telemachus, the son of Ulysses, king 

Tiierito. t soi Telemaco hijo rei 

of Ithaca. The Jupiter of the Heathens, was the son 

Itaca Pagano era hijo 

of Saturn, and the father of the Gods. 
Saturno padre. 

RULE XL 
The article is never placed in Spanish, before the 
numeral adjective, which expresses the title of sove- 
reigns, popes, &c. ; as, **Jorge cuarto es el present e rei 
de Inglaterra;^^ George the fourth is the present king 
of England. ''^El papa^ Pio septimo, era un buenhom- 
bre;'^ Pope Fius the seventh was a good man. 

J^ote 1. The article is also omitted before the titles* of books, 
chapters, paragraphs, &c. •when they are neither the nominative, 
nor the objective case of a verb expressed, or when they are 
governed by a preposition; as, "Gramatica de la lengua Espanola,^^ 
a srammar of the Spanish language. '■^Capitulo once;" chapter 
the eleventh. ^^Parrafo veinte;" paragraph the twentieth. And "La 
gramatica espahola se divide en cuatro partes;''^ the Spanish grammar 
is divided into four parts. ^^Vimos el cap itulo once," we saw 
chapter the eleventh. "£n el parrafo veinte^ hai lo si^uiente,'''' in 
paragraph the twentieth, is the following. 

* If the title of a book, refer to a particular individual, the arti- 
cle may, or may not, be employed; as, ^'■Vida de Washington,''^ or 
"La vida de Washington;'^ fAe life of Washington. ".^yenfMrw," 
or, "Las aventuras de Gil Bias;'''' the adventures of Gil Bias. It 
would be improper, however, to use the article, if all thi life, or 
all the adventuresy were not understood-. 



SYNTAX. 211 

EXERCISES. 

Charles the second, son of Philip the fourth, left his 

Carlos Felipe dejo su 

kingdom to Philip the fifth. William the third, 

reino a Cruillermo 

married Princess Marv, daugliter of James the 

[se caso con) princesa Maria Jiija Jaime 

second, and (grand-daughter) of Charles the first. 

7iieta Carlos 

The life of Cervantes is found (at the) beginning 

vida se halla al principio 

of his best work, entitled: "The life of Don Quijote." 

sii mejor ohra intitulada 

The grammar written by Levizac, is an excellent 

grumdtica compicesta por es una escelente 

production. I remember to have read a book (the 

{me acuerdo de haber leido) un libra 

title of which) was: "The road to heaven.*' In Don 

cuyo titido era camino del cielo, en 

Quijote, volume the third, chapter the xxxii. ; Cervintes 

. tomo capitulo 

makes a beautiful parallel between an injury and an 
hace un hermoso paralelo entre un agravio una 
affront. Mr. Capmany has written an excellent work, 

afrenta. ha escrito una escelente obra 

on the philosophy of eloquence, entitled: '*The 
sobre la Jilosoffa de elocuencia intitulada 
philosophy of eloquence." 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 

The peace of society depends on justice; the 
paz sociedad depends {de la)justicia 



212 SYNTAX. 

happiness of individuals, (on the) safe enjoyment 
feliddad individiio del pacifico goce 

of all their possessions. Ignorance is the mother of 
todas sus posesion Ignorancia es madre 

admiration, error, and superstition/ Truth is the bond 

verdades vinculo 

of union, and the basis of human^ happiness^' without 

base humana sin 

it (there is no,) confidence in friendship, (and no) 
ella no hai confianza en amistad ni 

security in promises. The ambassador received, by the 
seguridad promesa embajador recibio par 

courier of the queen, the letters from the minister of 
correo reina carta de ininistro 

the king, to the emperor of the East. Abraham saw 

rei* emperador oriente. ■ vio 

the ram entangled by the horns, among the brambles 

earner enredado par asta entre abrojo 

on the mount. The anchorites in the deserts, are 
en monte, anacoreta desierto estan 

free from the effects of the vexations of the world. The 
libres de efecto vecsacion mundo 

love of the subjects, and the efforts of the nations, are 
amor vasallo esfuerzo • ■ son 

the succours of the kings of the earth, in the 

socorro rei'^ tierra 

disturbances of the state. The Israelites whom Moses 

disturbio estado. Israelitas que Moises 

delivered from the bondage of the king of the Egyptians, 

saco de servidumbre Egipcio 

were six hundred thousand, without counting the 
fueron sin contar 

* To form the plural of nouns ending in i, see page 65- 



SYNTAX. £1-S 

(old men,) the women, and the children. Peace, 
ancianos muger nino. paz 

©f all worldly blessings, is the most valuable. 

[detodaslasfelicidadesmundanas) es mas apreciable, 

(Are not) discourse, manhood, learning, gentleness, 
no es disciirso vinlidad conocimiento suavidad 

virtue, and liberality, the spice and salt that 
liberalidad especia sal que 

season a man? 

sazonan al hombre 

USE OF THE NEUTER ARTICLE LO.^ 

RULE XII. 

Zo, is placed before those adjectives used as substan- 
tives, to which we can prefix that which, or what; as, 
*'Lo bueno,'^ the good, or that which, or what is good. 
*'Focos pueden prever lo futuro;" few can foresee ?^e 
future. "aSc deleita en lo rojo^" he delights in the red, 
i. e. in what is red. 

M>te 1. Adjectives which admit to be prefixed to them, those 
ivho are, take the plural of the indefioite article, agreeing with 
the noun understood; as, ^^Los ricos,'''' the rich, that is, those who 
are rich. "Los potentes y los grandes, pocas veces piensan, que su 
potestad y pod^r, puede perecer^'''' the powerful and the p-eat, seldom 
think, that their power and greatness, can perish. 

EXERCISES. 

Youth has* not^ foresight of the future, experience 
juventud tiene prevision futuro esperiencia 

of the past, nor moderation to conduct itself in the 
pasado ni para conducirse t 

* See Etymology, pages 61 and 70. 



J 



214 SYNTAX. 

present. She dearly loved (to talk) of the 
presente. (le gustaba muchisimo) hahlar 
marvellous. In some parts of the country, also, 
maravilloso. algunos parages pais tambien 

the dead (are carried) to the grave with the singing 

muerto se llevan a sepidtura con canto 

of psalms and hymns. The just, and the virtuous 

salmo e^ himno, jitsto virtuoso 

(will be rewarded. ) As the idle are useless to 
se recompensardn. {asi coma) perezoso son inutil 
society, so the unbelieving are pernicious to men. 
sociedad {asi tambien) incredido sons perniciosos 
The dead (shall rise again) on the (day of judgment.) 

muerto resucitaran t dia deljuicio. 

What is strong and good, (ought to be) preferred to 

fuerte bueno se debe preferir 

what is handsome and bad An upright* mind* 

hermoso malo un recto entendimiento 

(will never be at a loss) to discern what is just and 

nunca dejard de t discemir justo 

irue. 
verdadero. 

OF THE INDEFINITE ENGLISH ARTICLE A 

S^n equivalent to the Spanish adjective uno-a-os-as. 

The indefinite article is suppressed in Spanish, in the 
following instances : 

Note 1. When a verb is placed between two nouns, 
one of which denotes the country, dignity, profession, 
employment, &c. of the other 5 as, "I am a Spaniard," 
soi Espahol. "The duke is a colonel," el duque es 
coronel 

* See the two notes at the bottom of page 188 



SYNTAX. 



ns 



2. When nouns are used in apposition; as, "Balti- 
more, a city of the United States," Baltimore ciudad 
de los Esfados Unidos. 

3. When this article means some, and precedes a 
singular noun; as, "I had an inclination," i. e. "some 
inclination of seeing him," tenia gana de verle. "She 
has a memory," ella tiene memoria, 

4. In the title page of a book; as, "A new grammar," 
grama fica nueva. "A selection of speeches," seleccion 
de razonamientos. 

5. Before the words cie7i or ciento, a hundred; ?m7, a 
thousand; but never before mil/on, million; as, "Cien 
cabaUos los emhistieron^^^ they were attacked by a hun- 
dred horses. "Mil soldados fueron los que tomaron el 
castillo,^^ it ivas a thousand soldiers that took the castle. 
^'Mucho mal, y Men pueden hacer un miiloii de hom- 
bres,^^ much harm and much good may be done by a 
million of men. 

6. Half, medio-a, is never preceded, nor followed by 
the article in Spanish; as, "Three dozen and a half," 
tres docenas y media. "Half a dollar," medio peso, 

7. The article is generally omitted in Spanish, before 
the integer which precedes the half, if it contain but 
one unit; as, ^'A pound and a half," libra y media. 

3. The indefinite is never translated in ejaculations, 
nor when placed between the substantive and adjective; 
as, "What a pity!" ;que Idstima! "So fine a day," tan 
hermoso dia. 

9. The phrases, to have, or to make a beginning, to 
put, or to have an end, to have a care, and the like, lose 
the indefinite, when they are to be rendered in Spanish; 
as, "We put an end to the supper before he came." 
d^'mos fin a la cejia, antes que veniese^ 



216 SYNTAX* 

10. In all other cases in which the article is used in 
English, it is also used in Spanish. 

EXERCISES. 

[Note 1 .) West, a native of America, was a great 

natural era gran 

painter. Vieira, a Spanish^ orator,^ was entirely 

pint or. — espanol orador era enteramente 
master of the affections of his audience. Benjamin 

dueho afectos sus oyentes 

Franklin, a native of the United^ States,^ was a 

natural Unidos Estados era 

consummate^ philosopher,^ and an ardent* lover* of 
consumado JiUsofo ardiente amante 

his country. 
su jmtria, 

{Note 2. ) Before you is the Po, a river broader 

[delante de) vosotros esta — rio {mas ancho) 

and more rapid than the Rhone. Behold Rome, a 

mas rapido que Rodano. ved Roma 

city in which the greatest liberty, (as well as) the 
dudad [en la cual) mayor libertad como tambien 
greatest tyranny has existed. France, a beautiful 
mayor tirania ha ecsistido Francia harmoso 
country in Europe, abounds in (every thing.) 
pais de Europa abunda en todo, 

[Note S») All poets have taken an opportunity to 

{todos los poetas) han tornado ocasion de 

give long' descriptions^ of the night. I had a mind to 

dar largas — noche. t tenia gana de 

ask her if she had an idea of (going out.) He had 
pedir le si t t^nia — de salir t tenia 



SYNTAX, 



217 



at first an objection to say the truth, but at 

alprincipio reparo en decir venladpero (por 
last he owned- it. ^ 
ultimo) t confeso la. 

{^Note 4.) An introduction to the Greek^ language. ^ 

^ griegci lengua. 

A treatise on Arithmetic. A sketch of the manners 

tratado de aritmetica. hosquejo costumbres 

of all nations. A dictionary of the (Spanish and 

todas diccionario lenguas 

English languages.) 
espanola e inglesa. 

[Note 3. ) Baltimore has near a hundred thousand 
tlene {cercade) 
inhabitants. A hundred altars in her temple smoke. 

habitanfe. cien sit templo huinemt. 

Four times twenty -five make a hundred. (They say) 

veces liacen ciento, 

that a thousand* men ^ perished^ in that 
que perecieron aquella 

possesses more than a million of dollars. 
posee mas de millon 

[Note 6.) His wife is very short; she 

su esposa es mui baja t (solamente tiene) 
three feet and a half high. We travelled eight days 

pie medio {dealto.) t viajdmos dia 

and a half. 

{Note 7.) It is a year and a half since his mother 
hace ana que su madre 

died, and left^ him^ a million and a half a year. He 
murio dejo le cihOf t 



se dice 
battle. He 
batalla. t 



is only 



19 



218 -SYNTAX. 

purchased half a dozen of copies. Do '^^ not sell more 
compro docena egemplar. t vendamas 

than half a pound. 
de libra. 

{Note ^.) What a day of affliction for that unhap- 

que aflkcion por aquel desgra- 

pv father! What a blessing from heaven! W^hat a 

ciado que bendicion de cielo que 

man you are ! A famous idea ! What a fine supper 

hombre vmd. es fariosa que escelente cena 

I had (last night) on bread and cheese. We never saw 
t ture a noche de jjan queso. t nunca vimos 

so brave a captain, such a destructive infantry, or 
tan valiente capitan tal destructiva infanteria 6 
so complete a defeat. At last after having 

tan completa derrota. (por ultimo) (despues de haberse) 
beaten each other, they put an end to the quarrel. 
apaleado) (elunoalotro) i pusieronjin a riha. 

{Note 9.) (All things) have had a beginning, and 
todo ha tenido principio 

they (will have) an end. (And why) do you^ make^ a 
todo tendrd Jin y porque vmd. hace 

noise .^ 
ruido 

(Note 10.) Calypso saw a rudder and a mast, the 

vio timon mastil 

remnants of a vessel (which had just been wrecked.) 

restos navio que acababa de naufragar 

A good^ man' never can be miserable, nor a 
bueno nunca (puede ser) desdichado ni 

* The verb to do, is never translated in Spanish, when it is used 
to ask a question, or to express a negation. See the second note 
at the bottom of page 178. 



SYNTAX. 



219 



wicked* man' happj. 
malo dichoso. 

his soldiers. 
sus soldado. 



A good general is beloved bj 
buen es amado de 



USE OF THE NOUN.* 
RULE XIII. 
The Spanish language has not the possessive case^ 
therefore, a king's palace, must be rendered by, el 
palacio de un rei, the palace of a king; man's nature, 
by, la naturcdeza del hombre, the nature of man; and 
in the same manner, must all other sentences of this 
kind, be translated. 

JVofe 1. When two nouns come together in English, the first 
serving as an adjective for the second; their order is reversed in 
Spanish, and between them, the preposition de, [of,] is placed; 
as, "El camino de Londres es hermoso;''^ the London road (i. e.) the 
road of London) is beautiful. '^Las obras de agua de Filadelfia 
son magnificas;^'' the icater xoorks of Philadelphia are magnificent. 

vYote 2. The phrases, **A book of my brother's," "A soldier of 
the king's," &c. are always translated thus: One of the books of 
my brother, uno de los libros de mi hermano. One of the soldiers 
of the king, uno de los soldados del rei, &c. 

M)te 3. In English, sonietimes, by means of the sign, ('s) the 
words house, palace, store, &c. are understood. In Spanish, they 
must always be expressed; as, "He went to the physician's;" that 
is, he went to the house of the physician; fue a casa del medico. 
"He comes from his sister's;" that is, his sister's residence; viene 
de la residencia de su hermana. 



EXERCISES. 

I have seen the king's apartments, and the queen'r 



t he visto 



rei cuarto 
* See Etymology, page 36. 



.320 SYNTAX. 

picture. The chancellor's son's wife, is the prime'' 
retrato, chanciller hJjo esposa es primer 

minister's eldest^ sister.^ (There are) many silk- 
ministro mayor hermana. . hai rauchos seda 

worms in Italy. Diana's anger was the cause of 

giiscmos Italia.- colera fue causa 

Acteon's death, and Helen's beauty, of Troy's 
— — muerte Helena hermosura Troya 

destruction. Battles were more bloody before the 

— - — - Batalla eran mas sangrientas antes de 

invention of fire arms. Man's sensuaP pleasures^ 

f'^^go arma. sensuales placer 

are enemies to* reason and to virtue. In Market 
son eneinigo de razon virtud. tnercado 

street, (there is) a sign v/hich says ''Door to Wealth." 
calle hai tablilla que dice piierfa riqueza. 

1 am a friend to diligent^ scholars^ ^ and an enemy to , 

soi ainigo diligenies discipulos enemigo 

(those who are idle. ) Sesostris was seated on an ivory 

las holgazanes. — — — estaba sentado en marjil 
throne with a golden sceptre in his hand. The second 
trono oro cetro la mano. 

chapter treats of the frights he ■ had on the road t© 
capitulo trata sustos quetitbo en camino de 

Penafiori and the ninth, of the journey of Scipio to 

■ — — viage Sipion 

Madrid, and his return to Segovia. A soldier of the 

»__ — — su vuelta soldado 

king's was shot (for having committed) 

rei (fue pasado par las annas) por haber hecho 

* This preposition, when used as above to denote possession, is 
always translated in Spanish by de. 



SYNTAX. 221 

treason. We walked in the queen's garden, and then 
traicion, t nospaseamos reina jardin despues 

went to see a garden of the emperor's. Go to the 
fztimos a ver etnperador. ve 

surgeon's. He went into the first notary's. (Going 
cirujano t fue en primer notario. al 

out) of the (pastry cook's) I met Fabricius. 

salir pastelero {me encontre con) Fahricio.. 

"^He took refuge; at the governor's. 
se refugio en gobernador. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

Adjectives, in the Spanish language, are divided into two 
classes; the first, is called adjectives of one termination; and the 
second, adjectives of two terminations. Adjectives of one ter- 
mination, are those which only change from singular to plural, 
without any regard to gender. Adjectives of two terminations, 
are those which change from singular to plural, and from mascu- 
line to feminine. 

Adjectives of two terminations are only those derived from 
nations in general; and those ending in cm, on, o. These alone, 
therefore, receive some addition, or undergo some change, when 
ihey relate to a feminine noun. All the rest are adjectives of 
one termination. 

Those adjectives which terminate in an, or on, or which are 
derived from nations in general, take an a to form tlieir feminine 
gender; as, aragan, a lazy man; aragana, a lazy woman:- -sopZon, 
a male informer; soplona, a female informer: — f ranees, French, 
f masculine;) francesa, French (Jeminine.) 

Adjectives which terminate in o, change this o into a; as, hueno, 
good (masculine,; biiena, good (feminine;) harmonioso, harmoniosa, 
harmonious; Americano, Americana, American. 

It should also be observed, that when articles of commerce are 
to be qualified by the adjective derived from the nation in which 
the articles were manufactured or raised — instead of this adjec- 
tive, the nation itself, with the preposition rfe, [of,] is used. Thus, 
19- 



^:22 SYNTAX. 

for instance; instead of saying, "English cloth," in Spanish it is 
said, Cloth of England, ^-Paho de Inglaterra.'''' Spanish wine. 
'■'■Vino de Espaho. 

When the employment of a person is to be qualified by the 
same kind of adjectives, it may be expressed either as above, or 
with the adjective, and it may therefore be said, either, ^^ Consul 
Ruso,''^ or '■^Consul de Rusia,^'' Russian Consul. ^'■Capitan Espanol,'' 
or, "■Capitan de Espaha,'''' Spanish Captain. It seems that the word 
rei, king, would form an exception to this rule; for it always is 
qualified by the preposition de, and the name of the country, but 
never by the adjective. We may say, "£Z rei de Inglaterra.'''' but 
never, "eZ rei Ingles,-'' the English king. 

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 



Adjectives agree in gender, number, and case, with 
the substantives to which they belong; as, ^'Uste es el 
sigh de invenciones estupendas," this is the age of 
wonderful inventions. ''^Los efectos de los grandes 
descubrimientos de Colon son incalculabies," the ef- 
fects of the great discoveries of Columbus, are incalcu- 
lable. ''•Lihro malo^'' bad book. ^^Obra buena^^^ good 
work. '^Bien escrito,^^ well written. 

J^ote 1. Two or more nouns in the singular, require an adjec- 
tive in the plural. If the nouns vary in gender, the adjective 
must be in the masculine; as, "Mercurio y Jupiter son planetas 
magnijicos,'''' Mercury and Jupiter are magnificent planets. ^^La 
p^'udencia y eljuicio, son necesarios, a todo hombre^^'' prudence and 
judgment, are necessary to every man. 

J^'ote 2. An adjective prefixed to two or more singular nouns, 
agrees with that which immediately follows it. An adjective 
preceding or following two or more plural nouns, agrees with the 
one nearest to it; as, "£Z estupendo valor y prudencia de Wash- 
ington, hicieron mucho hacia la gloriosa emancipacion de los Estados 
f7mrfcs,"lhe loonderful prudence and judgment of W^ashington, tend- 



SYNTAX. 



223 



ed much to the glorious emancipation of the United States. 
"£/ posee efectos y tierras preciosas," or "E^ posee preciosos 
cfectos y tierras," he possesses precious effects and lands. 

J^i^ote 3. An adjective never agrees with a title, but with the 
person who bears it; as, "Su ulteza estd indispuesto,'''' if applied to 
a man, and ^HmUspiiesta,^'' if to a woman, his or her highness is in- 
disposed. ^'■Estd vmd. bueno," are you well, sir, "Estd vmd. bue- 
na," are you well, madam. 

J\'ote 4. J^ada, nothing, although^eminine, always requires its 
adjective in the masculine; as, "Nada es bueno para <?/," nothing 
is good for him. 



EXERCISES. 



The mistress was cunning and still the maid 
ama era socarron {sin embargo) criada 
idle. Life everlasting is desirable. The death of 

holgazan vida eterna es deseahle. 
the (righteous man) is a happy' death. ^ He studies 
justo es feliz miierte. estudia 

with incredible application. The English' language' is 
Qon increible aplicacion. Ingles lengua es 

extremely' expressive. ' Italian' music ' is soft and 
(en estremo) espresivo. Italiano miisica es suave 
harmonious. The ship's cargo* consisted of Asiatic 
harmonioso. navio cargazon consisfia Asia 

wines, .Spanisht hides, Holland cheese, and Russia linen. 
vino cuero Olanda queso JRusia tela . 

The Spanish' consul,' who was anxiously expected, 

— '■ que era anciosamente esperado 

arrived at this place on the tenth of May, one thousand 
llego en esfa plaza t 

"'See rule 19, page 219, and observation, page 221, 
'^ Spanish, hEspahol; and Spain, Espam. 



224 SYNTAX. 

eight hundred and twenty -two. A sublime* style ^ doe5^ 

eslilo t 

not consist in a diction loaded with useless^ epithets, ' 

consiste — cargado de ocioso epiteto 

pompous^ phrases,^ and (high-sounding^) words. The 
pomposo frase altisonante palahra, 

dictionary and grammar which my brother has bought 
diccionario gramatica que mi ha comprado 

are very good. Health and power are uncertain and 
son mui bue?io S'alud poder soyi incierfo 

perishable; but glory and virtue are certain, solid, and 
perecedero pero gloria virtud son cierto solido 
durable. The knowledge of political frauds and 

conomaiento politico fraiide 

coBnivances is necessary (to him that) governs.. The 
conivencia as necesario al que gohierna 

deluded philosopher (had recourse) to ridiculous 
enganado Jilosofo recurria a ridiculo 

arguments and objections. Then the widows saw^ 
arguynento ohgecion entonces viiidavieron 

themselves^ abandoned, and the orphans. found ^ them- 

se abandonado Jmerfano hallaron se 

selves^ unprotected; the Romans being then no more 
desemperado Romano siendo entonces no 7nas 
than the shadow of themselves. Is her highness at 
que sombra {de si mismos) estd su alteza en 

home? yes, sir, but she is unwell. His holiness 
casa si senorpero t estd indispuesto su santidad 
enjoys a perfect health, (notwithstanding his old age.) 
goza de perfecta salud sin embargo de ser viejo 
His excellency (has been pleased) to appoint his 
su escelencia se sirvio t nombrar a su 

lordship commodore. Nothing is so impetuous 

sehoria [gefe de escuadra) Nada es tan impetuosa 



SYNTAX. 2^3 

as the desire of self-love, nor so secret as its 
oomo deseo de amorpropio ni tan secreto como sus 
designs. Nothing is more natural to man than the 

designios es mas que 

love of life and the fear of death. 
mnor temor 

OBSERVATION. 

If two or more adjectives ai-e to qualify a plural noun, they do 
not agree with it in number; as, ^^Intrnduccion a las lenguas, ale- 
mana, sacsona, y grieg-a," an introduction to the German, Saxon, 
and Greek languages. In this sentence the qualifying adjectives, 
alemana, sacsona, y griega, are in the singular number, although 
lenguas, the substantive to which they belong, is in the plural. 
Should the adjectives be in the plural the meaning would be 
quite different. Thus, for instance, suppose a person wishes to 
describe three houses; a white, a red, and a green one; he should 
say: ^^Descripcion de las casas, blanca, roja, y verde.'''' For, it the 
number of the adjectives be <;hanged, and he says: Descripcion de 
las casus, blancas, rojas, y verdes; the meaning would be, that 
there were more houses than one of each color. Should he alter 
the number of the substantive, and express himself thus; Des- 
cripcion de la casa, blanca, roja y verde; his meaning would then be 
that there was but one house, in which the three colors, white^ 
red, and green, were blended, 

EXERCISES. 

The arrival of the Spanish^ and English* ministers^ 

llegada Espahol e Ingles ministro 

plenipotentiary^ gave rise to many rumours. The 

plenipofenciario did origen mucho rumor. 

Frenclr and Spanish' nations, have' seldom^ 

francesa _ {rara vez) 

perfect peace and harmony. The dictionary of 
perfecto paz harrnonio. diccionario 



Mi 



.226 SYNTAX, 

the English and Latin languages, which he wrote. 
lengua que el compuso 

is excellent. 
e-s escelente. 

POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 

RULE XV. 

Adjectives, or adjectified participles, must be placed 
after the nouns to which they relate; as, '•^Soldaclo 
valiente,^^ valiant soldier. ''Papeles escritos,^^ written 
papers. * 

Mte 1. In the three following instances, the adjectives are 
generally prefixed to the substantives: — 

1st. When they denote the inherent quality, custom, habit, &c. 
of an object; as, "La blanca nieve,^^ the vv^hite snow. "J5JZ duro 
Mdrmol^''^ the hard marble. ^'Los relichantes caballos,^'' the neigh- 
ing horses. 

2d. When they are used to designate a particular person, as, 
"^El ambicioso Bonaparte,''^ the ambitious Bonaparte. *^El valiente 
Greene,''^ the valiant Greene. "El prodigioso JVeivlun,^^ the pro- 
digious Newton. 

3d. When they are accented on the antepenult; as, '•'■Hermosisi- 
mo nino,^'' most handsome child. "Bdrbaro tratamiento,^^ barbarous 
treatment. ^^Dichosiswia vida,'''' most happy life. 

JVote 2. Adjectives, having a verb either immediately before or 
after them, may either precede or fellow the substantive; as, 
"Dios es poderosisimo,'''' or, '■^poderosisimo es Dios,''^ God is most pow- 
erful. '^Muchosson los contrarios,'''' or, ^Hos contraries son muchos,^'' 
the opponents are many. 

*The above rule is not universal. We find sometimes the par- 
ticiple placed before the substantive, by authors of every descrip- 
tion. Indeed in lofty and elevated compositions we find the ad- 
jective more frequently placed before, than after the substantive. 
We believe that the three instances mentionjed above, are those in 
which the adjective will be mostly found prefixed to the noun. 



SYNTAX. £2r 

»Vo/e 3. Cie't'to, certain, when it means evident, or sure, is placed 
after the substantive; when it does not, it is put before it; as, 
^^Rtlacion cierto,^'' a true account. '^Cierto dia,''' a certain day. 

JVoie 4. Mucho, much, znd poco, little, are always placed before 
the noun; as, JV/wc/tos /iomftres," hiany men. ^^Poca wrfurf," little 
virtue. 

EXERCISES. 

A generous and virtuous man, is a good membei 

generoso virtuoso es buen tniemhro 

of society. Nothing but vain,^ and foolish* pursuits* 

sociedad nada sino vano malvado etnpena 
delights some persons. A* concise history, may 

{contenta d) alguna persona. breve historia puede 

sometimes^ be (of more advantage) than a more 

{algunas veces) ser mas ventajosa que una mas 
diffused one. 
estendido. t 

(Note 1.) The mild zephyi's more powerful than the 
dulce cejiro mas poderoso que 
burning beams of the sun, preserved a grateful cool- 
ardiente rayo conservaban grato . fres- 

ness. The tame oxen and the timid sheep, quitted 

cura manso buei timido oveja abandonaran 

the abundant pastures. A (very happy) death is 
abundante pasto. dichosisfino es 

the fruit of a (very pious) life. Mount Vernon was the 

fruto piadosishno Monte era 

birth-place of the immortal Washington. The expe- 

origen imortal expe- 

rienced pilot perceived (from afar,) the towering 
rimentado piloto percibio delejos ernpinado 

summits of the mountains of Leucata. 
cima monte. 



S28 SYNTAX. 

[Note 2.) Ambition augments the many troubles, and 

(tiimenta muclia pena 

lessens the few pleasures, which (are found) in the 
disminuye poco placer que se kalian 
wr- id. The goddess and the njmphs, held their eyes 
mundo. diosa niafa tenian los ojo 

fixed on the joung Telemachus, so interesting (to them) 
fijo sobre joven Telemaco tan inter esante les 
was his history. The pleasures of life are very few. 
era su placer son mui poco. 

How well founded were her suspicions! The General 
cuan hien fundado eran su sospecha - ' 

was not much experienced. When the laws are many., 
era 7nui esperimentado. cuando lei son 
they occasion confusion. 
t causan 

{^Notes 3 & 4.) Many people begin to take the 
7nucho gente empiezan a tomar 
resolution to live righteously, when they are near 

de vivir religiosamente cuando t estan para 

dying. Those things are certain among men, which 
morir. aquellas cosas son entre que 

cannot be denied without obstinacy and foUj* 

{no se pueden negar) sin porjia e ignorancia 

(How ugly soever a fashion may be,) (there will always 

porfea que sea una moda siempre 

be certain people who) will follow* it. ^ 
habrd cierto gente que seguird la. 



SYNTAX. 229 

ACCIDENTS OF ADJECTIVES. 

RULE XVI. 

The adjectives bueno^ good^ malo, bad; primero, 
first; tercero, third; postrero, last; irno, a, one; alguno^ 
some; ninguno, none, no; when they are prefixed 
(which they generally are) to the noun, lose the o in 
the singular, but never in the plural; as, ^'Un buen 
alitor,^'' a good author. ^'El primer mes,^^ the first 
month." 

JSTote 1. Santo, meaning Saint, loses its last syllable when it is 
prefixed (which it always is) to the name of the person; as, "Sau 
Juan,^^ Saint John. '■'San Francisco,^'' Saint Francis. Except be- 
fore Toribio, Tome, Tomas, and Domingo; as, ''Santo Dmni'igo,^'' 
St. Domingo.* 

JVbfe 2. Ciento, when it is immediately followed by a noun, 
loses its last termination; as, '^Cien hombres,''^ a hundred mtn. 
"Ciento y tres capitulos,^^ a hundred and three chapters. 

Mte 3. Ch-ande, placed before a substantive, generally loses its 
last syllable in the two following instances: 1st, When the sub- 
stantive by which grande is followed, begins with a consonant; 
as, "gran temor,^'' a great fear. "Grande inclinacion,^'' a great in- 
clination. 2d, When gj-ande being applied to rational ( r irra- 
tional creatures, does not convey an idea of size, but of quality; 
as, "Ch-an hombre,'''' a great man; that is, a man excellent for h.v' 
good qualities. "Grande hombre,'''' a big man. 

EXERCISES. 

In this vale of tears, we cannot expect any 

valle Idgrima {no podemos) esperar ninguno 

other thing, but troubles and afilictions, since this is 

otra cosa sino pena ajlkdon pues esta es 

* N. B. Santa, the feminine of Santo, never loses its termination; 

as, '^ Santa Maria,^^ St. Mary. 

20 



^SO SYNTAX, 

the only inheritance, Avhich our first parent left" 

solo herencia que nuestro prim ero padre dejo 

us. ^ Rasselas was confined in a private^ palace,' 

710S. — estaba detenido una oculto pcdacio 

with the other sons and daughters of Abyssinian 
con demas hijo hija (los prmcipes 

royalty. For thy journey, I (shall give)^ thee^ some 
de Abisinia. ) por tu viqge t dare te 

money. A good government, is a great blessing. 
dinero. bueno gobierno es grande dicha. 

Vile creature, (wilt thou break off) thy depraved life, 
vil criatura dejards tu depravado vida 

and pursue (a good one) that thy last day, (may 
seguirds una de buena paraque tupostrero dia no 
not be) full of misery? Saint Paul repented of his 
este lleno miseria Santo Pablo se arrepintio su 
sin. My father was baptized in the parish of 
pecado mi padre fue bautisado parroquia 

Saint Patrick, and my mother in that of Saint Anne, 
Santo Patricio mi madre la Santo Ana 

but they were married in the church of Saint Dominick, 
pero t fiieron casado iglesia Domingo 

in the parish of Saint Thomas. I went to his house 
parroquia Tomas. fui su casa 

more than one hundred times, and I never could' find^ 
mas de i vez t nunca pude hallar 

him ^ at home. They lost a hundred companies, and 
le en ella t perdieron compahia 

every company, (was composed) of a hundred and 
cada se componia 

twenty -five men. They manifested a great desire to go 
t manifestdron deseo de ir 



SYNTAX. 



2S1 



(with me.) Judas, one of the twelve^xame, and with 

commigo — uno vino con 

him a great multitude with swords and clubs. Great 

el muUitud espada pcdo 

rejoicing was in heaven. He is a great man, 
alegria habia cielo aquel es hombre 

who, like Washington, after having won the 

quien como {despues de haber ganado) 

sovereignty, gave^ it* to the people. The success of 

sober ania did la a comunidad acierto 

the enterprise was entirely* owing' (to their) not 
empresa se enteramente debio al no 

having made any delay. 

haber hecho ninguno tardanza. 

OBSERVATION. 

The adjectives alguno, some; and ninguno, none, or no; must 
always be placed before the substantive. Jilguno is sometimes 
placed after the noun, but its meaning then, is like that of nin- 
guno. J^inguno, therefore, placed before the noun, is like alguno 
placed after it. If we wish to convey the idea, that a person has 
no reason to do a thing, we may say, either, "'JS^o tiene ninguna 
razon para hacerlo,'''' or 'vVo tiene razon algunapara hacerlo.'''' Again; 
"there is no person more anxious to learn than he is;" J^inguna 
persona hai, que tenga lantus ganas de aprender como el, or, "Ao hai 
persona alguna que ienga,^^ &c. 

When the adjective tercero, third, is placed before the noun, it 
may, or it may not, retain its final o. We, therefore, say, either, 
"£Z tercer,''^ or "eZ tercero dia,'''' the third day. 



EXERCISES. 

Youth is apt to think that they do not run 

{los jovenes suelan pensar) que t t corren 

any risk in this world so full of snares and 

ninguno nesgo esfe niundo tan lie no de lazos 



232 SYNTAX. 

charms. There is* no affliction (with which we 
atractivos. hai [ninguno ajiiccion) que nos 
are visited) that may not be improved to our 
visita (que no podamos mejorarla para sernos 
advantage. If we lay no restraint upon 

ventajosa) si t [no pojiemos) ninguno constrehimiento d 
our lusts, no control upon our appetites and 

nuestros deseos sugecion d apetitos 

passions, they will hurry^ us* into guilt and misery. 
IKision t precipitardiinos en delito mheria 

ThomaSi^Jefferson, the third president of the United 

Tomas — presidente 

States, resides at Monticello, in the state of Virginia-. 
Vive en • estado 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 

Fortune is nevert more deceitful than when she 

fortuna es nunca mas engaiioso que cuando t 
seems most^ to favour. ^ The diseases of the 

{parece que) mas t favorece enfermedad 

soul, are the most dangerous: we should endeavour 
alma son mas pUgroso debemo esforzarnos 

to cure them. The proud tulip, the elegant 
d curar las ostentoso tulipon elegante 

narcissus, and the beauteous hyacinth of the well^ 
narciso hello jacinto Men 

arranged^ garden,^ have* not* (so many) charms, as 
compuesto jardm tienen no tantos hechizo como 
the sweet (litth^, flowers) that modestly raise 

Undo Jlorecilla que (con airemodesto)levanfan 

* If the sentence be2:ins by ninguno, the negation no cannot be 
used; but no is absolutely necessary if the sentence begins by a 
Yerl/; as, '.AO; hai niaguna ajiiccion, or, Mingima afliccion hai.'''' 

t An adverb of ne^'ation, is always placed before the verb, 



SYNTAX. 2SS 

iheir heads amid their native fields. 

las cabeza {en medio de) sus nativo campo 

Perseverance in laudable pursuits, (will reward) all 

Perseverancia empeno recompensard todos 

our toils, and produce advantages (beyond our 

nuestros desvelo produdra ventajas inccdcu- 

calculation.) How great and numberless are the^ 
lables cucin inumerable son 

works of Godl How pleasing their combination. 

obra JDios agradable su 

It is a defect in the English language, tliat (there are) 
t es defecto que no hai 

(at present) no certain rules for its orthography, or 
por ahora t cierto reglaparasu ortografia 
pronunciation. O (most wise) and (most po^yerflll) 

sapientisimo poderosisimo 

Lord! father of liglit and mercy, inspire our* 
Senor padre litz misericordia infunde nuestro 

hearts^ with^ an ardent desire of (loving thee.) 
€orazo?i en ardiente deseo amarte 

(There are) few men who are satisfied with their 
hai pocos que esten satisfecho de su 

condition. Many are the miseries of this life. So 

miicho miseria est a tan 

sanguinary have been die battles in Nev/ Spain^ 
sanguinario han sido hatalla Nueva Espana 

that they cannot (be looked at) without horror. The 

que t ^nopueden mirarse sin 

precepts of a good hope, have often 

precepto bueno esperanza [se hanpresentado 

recurrred in the time of need. Ingratitude and 
(nuchas veces) tiempo necesidad ingratltud 



20* 



234 SYNTAX. 

self-love are improper and hateful to aii v 

[amorpropio son ir-vproprio aborrecible cualquier 
class of people. Nothing is so grateful to God, a^ 
clase gente. Nada es tan grato como 

(to be) always satisfied, with what he does. 

estar siempre sat isf echo de lo que t hace, 
Man's life is full of troubles. Sovereigns 

est a lleno trabajo sober ana 

seldom read the truth, unless when they read 
[rara vez, leen verdad sine cuando t leen 

the maxims of the Gospel, or the axioms of Euclid. 

mdcsima Evangelio acsioma ■ 

Charles the Fourth's abdication, took place before 

Carlos {tuvo efecto) delante de 

the eyes of France. Hypocrites are objects of God's 

ojo Francia hipocrita son obgeto 

hatred, and men's indignation. Behold him 

odio ' — (aqui teneis d aquel) 

who has been your shield in war| and in peace. 

que ha sido vuestro escudo guerra 

the honour, and the glory of the Roman nation. 

honra gloria Romana 

We experienced the same terror that we had 

t esperimentamos mismo t habiamos 

inspired at Camila's. Diligence, industry, and proper 

inspirado diligencia industria propio 

improvement of time, are material* duties' of 
mejoramiento son importante obligacion 

youth. Haughtiness, presumption, and deceit, 
jovenes altivez presundon engano 

comii only eat and sleep with riches. The road 

'deordi:iario)comen duermeiv riquezas, camino 



SYNTAX. 235 

to' Croydon, is very bad in winter. Charles the 

I es mui malo invierno 'Carlos 

Second, the son of Philip the Fourth, the grand-son of 

hijo Felipe nieto 

Philin the Second, left his kingdom to Philip the ^i 

dejo reino 

Fifth. On the eighteenth* of February, one thousand 

Febrero 
four hundred and seventy-eight, the duke of Clarence, 
{diez y ocho) diiqiie Clarencia 

brother to king Edward the Fourth, was drowned in 

Eduardo fue ahogado 

a butt of (Malmsey wine.) Seiiora Leonarda, said one 

casco Malvesia dijo uno 

of the horsemen, 109k at this (young man. ) (Ever since) 

caballero mire a este mozo despues de 

his death, Seiiora Leonarda had served the nectar to 

su muerte habia servido d 

those men. 
eiquello. 

OF COMPARISON.t 



The words used in the Spanish language to denote 
comparison, are: tan^ as, or so; mas, more; menos, less. 
Tan, always precedes como, as; and mas, or menoSy 
always precedes, que, than. Examples; ''El es tan 
rico como e//cf," he is as rich as she. "No tiene mas 
ni menos edad que su tio,''' he has neither more nor less 
age than his uncle. 

* See rule vi, page 202, and On^ page 187. 
t See Etymology, page 71. 



236 



SYNTAX. 



J^ote 1. So much, or as much, is always transfated by lanio, or 
tanta;* and, so many, or, as many, is always translated hjtantos, or 
tantas; as, "Los hombres no piensan tanto como deben,^'' men do not 
think so much as they should. ^'■Bonaparte tenia tanta ambicion como 
Mejandro,^'' Bonaparte had as much ambition as Alexander. '■^Los 
antiguos no poseian tantas ventajas como los modernos,''^ the ancients 
did not possess so many advantages as the moderns. ^^ Produce este 
siglo tautos hombres grandes, como cualquierotro,''' this age produces 
as many great men as any other. 

JVbfe 2. Mas precedes de, [of,] instead of que, [than,] when it is 
to be placed before lo que, [that which, or whatf,] and when it is 
placed before a noun, deuotmg quantity or number; \ as, '■'Su 
madre era masjoven de lo que el pensaba,'''' his mother w^as youngfj* 
than what) he thought. '■-Poseen mas de diez mil pesos,''"' they 
possess more than ten thousand dollars. 

The following are words expressive of comparison in them- 
selves; and are consequently termed irregular comparatives. They 
may, however, be regularly formed; but in this manner, the first 
six are seldom, and the two last, never used. 



Regular. 


Irregular. 




mas hue no, 


mejor, 


better. 


mas malo, 


peor. 


worse. 


mas grande. 


mayor, 


greater. 


mas pequeno, 


menor, 


less. 


mas alto. 


superior. 


higher. 


mas bajo. 


inferior. 


lower. 


mas mucho, 


mas, 


more. 


mas poco. 


msnos, 


less. 



EXERCISES. 

The lazy§ sleep more than the industrious, but 
holgazanes diiermen diligente pero 

* When so much or, as much, is before an adjective, it is trans- 
lated by tan; as, "He is as much,''"' or "he is not so much protected 
as she," el es tan, 5 el no es, tan protegido como ella. 

fin this kind of sentences, that lohich, or lohat, is, in English, 
often understood; but it must always be expressed in Spanish. 

I Whenever no, [not,] precedes the verb, the r/ite is retained 
as, "No tengo mas que diiz casas," I have not more than ten houses. 

§ See rule xi, note 1, page 213. 



SYNTAX. £37 

they do not work so much. The advantages of 

t t trabajan ventaja de 

learning, are more lasting than those of arms. 

letras son duradero las arma 

Nothing is pleasanter to the mind, than the light of 

7iada es agradable espiritu luz 

truth. (It is better) (to be) poor than ignorant, 
verdad vale vnas ser pobre ignorante 

because science is more precious than riches. 
porque ciencia es precioso riqueza 

Temperance, more than medicines, is the (proper 
templanza medicina es ' propio 

means) (of curing) many diseases. If experience 
medio de curar mucho enfermedad esperienda 

does not make* us' wiser, at least it makes^ us' 

t hacer nos sabio {dlo'menos)i nos 

more circumspect. Crime sometimes is as much 

circwnspecto crimen (d veces) es 
protected as innocence. Wheat in America, is as 

protegido mnocencia trigo es 

cheap as in Odessa. Wisdom and modesty, are as 
barato Odesa sabiduria modestia son 

valuable, as pride and folly are contemptible. If 
apreciable orgullo locura son despredable 

men were not^ so ambitious, (^they would not have) so 

fueren no ambidoso no tendrian 

many enemies. Nothing is so much worth the time 
[nada es de) valor al tiempo 

and attention of (young persons,) as (the acquisition) 

atendon joven el adqiiirir 

of knowledge and virtue. The love for our 

t conodmiento amor de niiestro 

* Recollect that negations precede verbs,. 



^38 SYNTAX. 

neighbour, is as necessary in society for the happiness 
procsimo es necessario sociedad felicidad 

of life, as in Christianity, for eternal felicity. (There 
vida en cristiandad por eterna felicidad no 

is no*) rest so sweet as that which is bought) 
hai reposo dulce el que [se compra) 

by labour. Some men are not more than what 

{con el trabajo) alguno son {lo que) 

they appear^ but others, appear more than what they 

t parecen otros t 

are. Those who have more than what they want 
S071 los que tienen t necesitan 

are not happier, than those who have not more than 
son feliz tienen 

what they want. (No body) (ought to) undertake more 

nadie debe emprender 

than what he is sure he can accomplish. The 

t (estd seguro que) t puede desempenar 
prisoners that (were made by) king Philip the Fifth, 
prisionero que hizo Felipe 

in his victory over Staremberg, were more than five 

su victoria sobre fueron 

thousand. Doctor Johnson did not take more than 

t gasto 

six evenings to write an excellent tale, called 

tarde en escribir novela llamado 

Rasselas. The hatred of the vicious, (will do^) you' less 

odio vicioso hard le 

harm than their conversation. The celebrated Addison, 

dano su celebre — • 

was not less wise than modest. 
era sabio modesto. 

*■ See observation, page 231. 



SYNTAX. 239 

RULE XVIII. 

The English definite article the^ before a word used 
to denote comparison, is rendered bj cuanto-a-os-as, 
before the first comparative, and tanto-a-os-as, before 
the second; as, ''Cuanto mas vivimos tanto mas apren- 
demos,^^ the more we live the 7nore we learn. *'Cuan- 
tos menos somos, tantas mas ventajas poseemos,^^ the' 
fewer we are, the more advantages we possess. 

JsTote 1. Jls, is used in English after so, in a manner not used in 
Spanish. For instance, it is said, "He was so industrious as to rise 
at five o'clock every morning," whereas in Spanish this sentence 
would have been expressed thus: he was so industrious, that he 
rose at five o'clock, &c. Era tan diligente que se levantaba a las 
cinco todas las mananas. 

J^ote 2. So as, is rendered de modo que, followed by a subjunc- 
tive; as, '■^Cuanto hngas hazlo de modo que guste a Dios,''^ whatever 
thing you may do, do it so as to please God. 

Acfe 3. Instead of como, cuan is sometimes used after tan, and 
ciianto after tanto; as, "£s tan sabio, cuan /iwmiWe," he is as wise 
as humble. "Tanto llueve, cuanto nieve,^'' it rains as much as it 
snows. 

M)te 4. cual, [which,] is very often used instead of como in 
poetical and lofty compositions; as, "Cual ciervo corre,''^ he runs 
as a stag. 

EXERCISES. 

The more we observe the works of nature, the 
t ohservamos obras naturcdeza 
more we find to admire. The more a person 
t hallamos que admirar persona 

contrives (to become) great, if it be not bj becoming 
procura hacerse grande si t es par honesto 
mean, the less effect will his* contrivances^ have.* 
medio efecto siis invencion tendrdn. 



MO SYNTAX. 

(Note 1.) The world is so full of temptations, as to 

miindoes lleno tentacion t 

require our constant vigilance. The resistance of 

requiere nuestra constante vigilancia resistencia 

the Americans was so vigorous as (to put them) to a 

Americano era vigoroso los puso en 

precipitate flight. 
precipitado fuga. 

(Note 2.) We ought to perform our actions, so as 

t debemos hacer nuestras > 

(to be) consistent with the rules of morality. 
sean conforme d regla moralidad. 

[Note 3.) Bad men are as dangerous as hateful* 
son peligroso aborrecihle 

Every seed is capable of producing as many fruits 
cada simiente es capaz prodiicir 

as the plant by which it (was yielded.) 
de que t ncicio. 
(Note 4.) He leaps as a sprightly* kid. ^ 
salta despejado cabrito. 

OF SUPERLATIVES. 

RULE XIX. 

Superlatives, which in English are made with very, 
or most^ are formed in Spanish by prefixing mid, to the 
adjective, or by aftixing to it the termination isimo; as, 
very clever, mui hdbil, or habilisimo; very easy, mui 
fdcil, or facilisimo. 

J^ote 1. If the adjective end in a vowel, it is suppressed, as, 
corto, short; cortisimo very short; alegre, cheerful; alegrzsimo, very 
cheerful; triste, sad; tristmmo, very sad; famoso, famous; fame-' 
nsimo, very famous. 



SYNTAX. 



241 



Adjectives which change their final termination before they 
admit the termination tsimo: 

CO into qu, as, rico riquisimo. 

go gUf largo larguisimo. 

ble bit, afable afabilisirao. 

z c, feliz feJicisimo. 

Superlatives in isimo, irregularly formed: 



bonisimo, 
Jortishno, 
novisimo. 



very good, from 
very strong, 
very new. 



sapienttsimo, very wise, 
sacratlsimo, very sacred, 
fidelisimo, very faithful. 
Irregular superlatives: 

From bueno, 
malo, 
grande, 



bueno, 
fuerte, 
nuevo, 
sabio, 
sacro, 



pequeno, 

alto, 

bajo, 



optimo, 

pesimo, 

mdcsimo, 

mminio, 

supremo, 

znfimo, 



strong. 

new. 

wise. 

sacred. 

faithful. 

best. 

worst. 

greatest. 

least. 

highest. 

lowest. 



All these form a superlative in Isimo, according to the rules 
already given; as, mallsimo, poquisimo, bagisimo, &c. 

A'ofe 2. The above positives admit also a regular superlative 
with mui; as, mui grande, very great; mui pequeho, very small. 
The superlative of mucho, is always muchtsimo. 



EXERCISES. 

The Mississippi is a very* large^ river^' it ranks 

es mui grande t (puede 

among the most magnificent in the world. The 

competir con) mas m^agm'fico de 
soil of the United States is extremely fertile, 
terreno es estremadamenfe fertil 

and very suitable for every kind of cultivation. 

apropiado para toda especie 

Manadnock, and Ossipee, are very high mountains. 

son montana 

21 



'3,i9, SYNTAX. 

The climate of Maryland, is very agreeable, and its 

dima — — es agradable su 

commerce very considerable. Men's passions are very 

comercio — kombre son 

strong. America, although young, possesses very^ 
fuerte - — — ■ — aunque joven posee 
magnificent^ institutions, ^ Bodily exercise, is very 

magmjico — — — (el egercicio de cuerpo) es 

necessary to those who are constantly occupied in 

d los que estan constantemente ocupado 
mental pursuits. Reading loud, strengthens the 
hit electual t area {el leer) alto esfuerza 

lungs very much, 
pulmones 

RULE XX. 
English superlatives ending in est, or formed by 
mos^j* are rendered, in Spanish, by prefixing the defi- 
nite article to the comparative, as, ''''El mas sabio,^' 
the wisest. "Za mas ingrata^^^ the most ungrateful. 

JVote 1. Most, when followed by a singular noun, is translated, 
la mayor parte. If the noun be in the plural, most, may also be 
translated mas, with the corresponding article; as, most of the 
navy, la mayor parte de la marina; most of the soldiers, la mayor 
parte, or los mas, de los soldados; most causes, la mayor parte, or, 
las mas de las causae. 

JsTote 2. The preposition in, after the English superlative, is 
translated de in Spanish; as, the best house mi the street, la mejor 
casa, de la calk. 

* It must be observed that this is only effected when the super- 
lative is used to compare; as, "Of all vices, lying is the worst,'''' de 
todos los vicios, el peor, or, mas malo es mentir. "Rome was the 
most splendid city in the world," Roma fue la ciudad mas hermosa 
del munde. For in saying most excellent sir, it should be translated, 
escelentisimo senor. He is a most amiable man, es un hombre mui 
fimaUe, 



SYNTAX. 24S 

J^ote S. Substantives, adjectively used, admit the degrees of 
comparison; as, mas caballero que vuid., he is more of a gentleman 
ihan you. 



EXERCISES. 

Wisdom is the most precious of all gifts. Of all 
sahiduria es predoso todo don 

ibe passions, avarice is the most difficult to overcome, 

— avariciaes dificil de veneer 

because we find no remedy against it. The reign 
porque hallamos reniedio contra ella reinado 
of Louis the Fourteenth, king of France, was the 

Luzs rei Francia era 

longest, and one of the most glwious of the French 
glorioso Frances 

monarchy. The opinions of the most* enlightened^ 

monarquia ilustrado 

understandings,^^ are sometimes errors, and the most 

entendimiento son 

prudent actions, pass sometimes for faults. Most of 

prudenie — pasan d veces yerro 

the Americans are endowed with bright talents. ^lost 

son dot ado de briUante talento 
of AVashington's men, when hostilities began in 
sol dados cimndo hostilidad empezdron 
America, were destitute of all (the necessaries) to 
estahan falto de todo Jo necesario (para 
irupport the severities of winter, and notwithstanding, 
aguantar) ris^or invierno sin embargo 

how nobly (did they fight,) and how patiently 
man noblemenfe pehdron pacientementc 

* whenever tiierc is a comparative before the adjective, the 
iub'tantive n"a1ifipd mu<:t necessarily precede. 



244 SYNTAX. 

(did they bear) every privation. The most popuioub 

sufriSron todo privacion popidosa 

city in America, is New-York. Rome produced some 

produjo 
of the wisest men in the world. (There are' some men 

sabio mundo hai alguno 

who are more childish than children themselves. 
que son niho mismo 

OF ADJECTIVES 

WHICH REqUIRE SOME PREPOSITION. 

RULE XXI. 

When an adjective is placed between two substan- 
tives, and expresses the quality of the second, it is 
generally followed by de^ [of,] in cases like the follow- 
ing: ^'Uii muchacho duro de entendimiento,^^ a boy duU 
of comprehension. '^'Un homhre bajo de cuerpo,'''^ a 
man loiv in stature, &c. 

Js^oU 1. Adjectives are also followed by de, [of,] when they ex- 
press the quality produced by the substantive which they qualify; 
as, "£fta estd palida de miedo.'''' she is -pale with fear. "£^ estd 
abochornado de la pregunta,''^ he is hurt at the question. Should 
the quality be produced by an infinitive, the adjective would also 
be folloAved by de, [of;] as, '■'Estaban cansados de escribir,^'' they 
were tired of writing. 

EXERCISES. 

If men v/ere humble and meek of heart, (there 
fuesen ynanso humilde corazon ha- 

would be) more peace in society. His coat ami, 
hria pciz sociedad sti casaca 

vest made^ him* appear long in the body, and short 
chcdeco hacian le parecer largo cuerpo corto 



SYNTAX. £45 

ill the legs. Nothing less than the patience of Job, 

pierna nada menos paciencia 

(is requisite) to teach those who are hard of iinder- 
es necesario para ensehar a los que son duro enten- 
standing. Men remain astonished at the wisdom of 
dimiento (se quedan) admirado sabidurfa 

others, Avhen they might (possess it. ) If (any person) 
otro cuando podrian poseerla nadie 

abuses* you^ with unbecoming words, (do not fall into 
ahusa le indecente palabra no se encolarice 

a passion,) but (show yourself) hurt at the expres- 
vmd. pero muestrese resentido espres- 

sions. (Few people) are satisfied with theii* condition 

sion pocos estan satisfecho de su — 

Men act, not only as if they were afraid of 

ohran no solamente como t fuesen temeroso 

being virtuous, but ashamed of (appearing so. ) 
ser virtuso mas avergonzado parecerlo 

RULE XXII. 

Adjectives expressive of number, require the prepo- 
sition de, [of,] when they precede a noun of dimension. 
In this case the English verb to be, is translated by 
tener; as, "*S\< casa tiene, cincuenta pies de alto, 3/ cien- 
to y viente de largo,^^ his house h fifty feet high, and a 
hundred and twenty long. 

J^ote 1. By, is translated rfe, in Spanish, when it is used to ex- 
press the difference in the measure; as, "Jtfi casa es mas alta que la 
tuya de doce pies,^'' my house is higher than yours by twelve feet. 
"«Soi mas alto que tu de seis pulgadas,^^ I am taller than you by sis 
inches. 



21* 



9A6 SYNTAX. 

EXERCISES, 

London " bridge, is nine hundred feet in length, t'ort\ 
Londres puente tiene pie de largo 

in height, and seventy -three in width. Noah built an 
alto anc/w. Noe hizo un 

ark of three hundred cubits in length, fifty in breadth. 
area codo ancho 

and thirty in height. The famous mine of Potosi, is 

alto famoso niina tiene 

more thant five hundred feet in depth. The walls 

pie profimdidad murulla 

of Babylon, were two hundred feet high, and fifty 

Babilonia tenian alto 

broad. Maryland is longer than Vermont by forty-six 

ancho — es largo 

miles, and wider by forty. The son is taller than the 
milla ancho hijo es alto 

father by more than six inches. 
padre pulgada 

RULE XXIII. 

Adjectives denoting proximity are followed by c, and 
those denoting distance by de; as "-Cercano a lamu- 
er^e," approaching death. ''Distante de su patria,^^ - 
far /rom his country.:]: 

* See rule xiii. note 1, page 219. 

t See rule xvii. note 2, page 236. 

I There are undoubtedly, many other adjectives preceded by 
certain prepositions, but as they are generally alike in both lan- 
guages, the author considers it useless to say anything concerning 
them. 



SYNTAX. 247 

Mte 1. Adjectives denoting fitness or unfitness, are immediately 
followed by para; as, "£Z es apto para eZ empleo,^'' he is fit /or the 
employment. '■^Las mmizanas, por San Juan, empiezan a ser buenas 
para comer,'''' apples begin to be fit to be eaten by St. John's day. 

EXERCISES. 

He feared tliat a monarchy so contiguous to that of 
temio que monarquia vecina a la 

Asturias, (would be) a source of many wars. Some- 

seria manantial 

times w^e become slaves, wishing to avoid the evils 

{nos hacemos) esclavo deseando t evitar mal 

annexed to war. He thought, as he was so far 

anejo guerra. penso {que como estaba) lejos 

from Madrid, and close to Bayonne, (he might just as 

junto Bayona tanto le valdria 

well) continue his journey to this place. He 

que prosiguiese el viage hasta esta plaza aquel 

is fit for a captain, who is fit for a soldier. One 

es propio t capitan que es t soldado t 

hundred good men are not enough to repair the 

son suficiente remediar 

evil committed by ten bad. The protection of the 

dano ocasionado por 

arts and sciences, is indispensable to the prosperity of 

es . prosperidad 

a kingdom. The ox is not so adequate as the horse 
rei7io buei es apto caballo 

to carry burdens, 
Uevar carga 






2A^ S-YNTAX. 

OF PRONOUNS. 

The pronouns in the Spanish language constitute the most dil- 
ficult, but the most useful and essential part of its grammar. A 
person well versed in the pronouns and in the verbs, may be said 
to have acquired two thirds of this language. Convinced of the 
utility of the pronouns; and of the necessity that they should be 
intelligibly and systematically arranged; the author has devoted 
to this object, much of his time and study. And he will ooiisider 
himself happy, if the advantages resulting from his labours, 
evince, that they have not been unsuccessful. 

At the same time that the author will candidly and freely ac- 
knowledge, that in the composition of this w^ork, he has, in some 
places, availed himself of the labours of the Spanish Academy, 
Huerta, Fernandez, Del Pino, McHenry, Josse, and Murray, he 
has always considered it improper, unjust, and ungrateful, to 
speak against the writings and systems of others. He is per. 
fectly convinced that he who has done all he could, is entitled to 
our applause. And it belongs to the wise critic, and to the pub- 
lic in general, to expose his errors or his deficiencies, that he 
may improve by their advice — but not to his rival, who must 
always speak with some degree of partiality. 

Without making any reference, therefore, to the plan which 
other grammarians have followed in the pronouns, the author has 
endeavoured to form that which, he thought, would be more in- 
telligible, and more conducive to aid the student in acquiring a 
theoretical, as well as practical knowledge of the Spanish lan- 
guage. 

His guides in the formation of this plan, hare been regularity 
and perspicuity; and he has, therefore, interspersed many observa- 
tions between the rules, to illustrate in a clear manner, what 
must have, otherwise, been obscure. The exercises are, it is 
presumed, such as will serve, not only to inculcate strongly the 
rules to which they belong, but even to render them more intel- 
ligible to the student. In fact the whole has been laid down in a 
manner, which, the author hopes, will merit the approbation of 
the public. 



SYNTAX. M^ 

OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

The personal pronouns are:* Fo, I; Tii^ thou; El, he; 
Ella, she; Ello, it, for the singular: Nosotros-as, we; 
Vosotros-as, je or you; Ellos-as, they, for the plural. 

OBSERVATION. 

The pronoun nosotros, is sometimes expressed by nos. This 
only happens when a whole body of persons make any declara- 
tion, or issue any document whatever, in which cases they de- 
clare who they are; as, -^We, the representatives of the United 
States," nos, los representayites de los Estados Unidos. " We, the de- 
legates appointed by the Senate," nos, los delegados noinbrados por 
el Senado. 

Vos, was formerly used instead of vosotros. At present, this 
pronoun is only employed in speaking of the Divinity, and all 
heavenly beings; and when speaking of persons Avho are placed 
in very elevated situations; as, ";0 Dios! vos que liichteis los cielos 
ylatierra, ayudadtne ;''"' O God! you who made the heavens and 
the earth, help me. "Vos senor sois un buen rei," you, sire, are a 
good king. ^^Por cuanto vos Don Juan Gimenez habeis egecutado,^^ 
for as much as you, Don John Gimenez, have executed. 

Vmd>^ is a pi'onoun of very frequent use in the Spanish lan- 
guage, and it should, therefore, be well understood. In a note 
at the bottom of page 86, the nature of this part of speech has 
been explained. We shall, however, observe, in addition to what 
has been said, concerning this word; that, like all other personal 
pronouns, it possesses two objective cases; and it might be de- 
clined thus: 

Singular. Plural, 



Nom. vind., your worship.! vmds., your worships. 

1st Obj. le, your worship. les, los, your worships. 

2d Obj. d vmd., to your worship, d vmds., to jour worships. 

The use of these two objective cases, is precisely the same, 
and applied in the same manner, as the two objective cases of 
any other pronoun. When any observations will, therefore, be 
made concerning the first or second objective cases of the pro- 
nouns, those of vmd. shall also be included. 

* See pages 76, 77, and 78. 

t Vmd. or vnuh. is commonly translated by yoi^. 



'250 SYNTAX. 

POSITION OF THE NOMINATIVE. 
RULE XXIV. 

The subject, or nominative case, precedes the verb,* 
except in imperative, and interrogative sentences, and 
when quotations are made; as, ^'Tiino ims," thou 
shalt not go. *'E1 ha llegado,''^ he has arrived. " Venga 
ella," let her come. ''S^ct comido vmd. ya?^^ have 
you dined already.^ ^'I^studia hijo mio, me decia el d 
mt,^^ study my son, said he to me. 

* It has been said above, that the nominative precedes the 
verb; but it must, by no means, be considered an unexception- 
able rule. That the placing of the nominative before the verb, 
whether it be a pronoun or a noun, is a rule which has been given 
by all grammarians who have written on the Spanish language, 
we must confess; but we must also acknowledge, that it is in our 
power to prove by the most eminent Spanish writers, both in, 
prose and verse, that the nominative is much more frequently 
found after, than before, the verb. This, it appears to us, is a 
peculiarity of the Spanish language; and it adds, Ave must own, not 
a little to its majesty. 

Definite rules to guide the student in the placing of the nomi- 
native before or after the verb, cannot be given. We shall, how- 
ever, observe, that in the course of our reading, we have per- 
ceived that those authors fond of a nervous, sound, or laconic 
style, place, very often, the nominative before the verb, except 
in the cases mentioned in the rule given above. And that those 
remarkable for their eloquent, poetical, majestic, or lively com- 
positions, almost invariably, place the verb before the nominative. 
From this, it may, therefore, be concluded, that the student can 
place the verb before the nominative in his elevated and energetic 
sentences; and after the nominative, in his common, or sound 
compositions. 

This observation we think proper to make, that the student 
may not be surprised, when reading the Spanish Classics, he 
will find so many examples absolutely opposite to the 24th rule, 
(i}f this grammar. 



SYNTAX. 251 

AHe 1. As the verbs themselves are, in Spanish, expressive of 
the pronouns they are never used except in the three following 
instances: 1st. To distinguish persons; as, "El y ella no se ai;ienen," 
he and she do not agree. 2d. To render the diction more sonorous; 
as, Yo soi el sehor hi Dxo.'''' I am the Lord thy God. 3d. When 
a pronoun is to precede a relative; as, "El que tanto estndiaba, 
murio de pesar,'''' he that studied so much, died with anguish. 

EXERCISES. 

I do not mistake, when I say to you, that with a 
t (no tne engaho) cumido digo a vind. que 
little attention, you y^will make) great progress in 
{'poco de) atencion t hara progreso 

your studies. Let them appear before my 

sus estudio t ellos comparezcan {delante de) mi 
face, and then (I shall declare)^ (to them)' my 
cara entonces dedarare les mi 

intention. May you imitate the virtues of your 

(ojald que vmd. imite) sics 

ancestors. Thou shouldst love thy neighbour as 
antepasado debes amar (a tu) procsiino 

sincerely as thou lovest thyself. If men 

sinceramente {te araas) [d ti mismo) 

fulfil the duties annexed to their situation. 

{cumplen con) obligacion anejo d su estado 
they certainly (will be) loved by every body. They 

cieriamente serdn amado de [todo el mundo) 
think (they shall be heard) (for their much 

(piensanque) serdn oidos por lo iniucho que 

speaking.) If we injure others (we must expect) 
habkm [injuriamos d) otros debemos esperar 

retaliation. Either thou or I am greatly mistaken, 

6 tu 6 estamos mui enganado 

in our judgment. She, he, and I (will come) 
nuestro juicio vendremos 



25i2 SYNTAX. 

to-morrow, to (paj you) a visit. (As soon as) 

manana a hacerle visita luego que 

(he had said)* (to them)' I am he, they (went 

dijo les soi t retro- 

backward,) and fell to the ground. (I am) the king, 

cedieron cay iron en t tierra soi rei 

and you must obey my commands. Thou who 

vmd. debe obedecerniis mundato que 

hast suffered death for our salvation, thou who 

has padecido muerte por nuestra que 

art always waiting for our change of conduct, 
esfas siempre esperando t nuestra mudanza conducfa 
(help us) in subduing our passions. Oh! human 
ayudanos suhyugar nuestras pasion humano 

life, exclaimed she, how replete art thou with 
vida esclamo cuan Reno estas de 

capricious adventures. Do you^ read,i or sing, said 
caprichoso aventura t vmd, lee canta dijo 

Caesar, (on noticing) the irregularity of tone in 
Cesar al oir irregularidad tone de 

somebody, who read before him. Those affectionate 

alguno que leia [delante de) el aquellos carihoso, 
parents (were overwhelmed with joy) at the filial 

padres estaban Renos de alegria {al ver) 

sensibility of their two sons. Never, perhaps, (^shall I 
sensibilidad sus mmea quizd vere 
see) so terrible a sight. 
t vista 

POSITION OF THE OBJECTIVE CASES. 

OBSERVATION. 

The student should bear in mind, that the personal pronouns in 
the Spanish language contain two objective cases; the full declen- 



SYNTAX. 25S 

sioM of which, will be found in Etymology, pages 76, 77, and 78. 
For, if he do not, he will commit numberless, mistakes, Avhich, d, 
little attention and study, might have easily prevented. 

The position of the objective cases is not difficult; it only re- 
quires that the student be very familiar with the declensions. 
The objective case is placed, either immediately after, or before 
the verb; and for its true and correct application, easy and deci- 
sive rules are given in the following pages. 

POSITION OF THE 1st OBJECTIVE CASE. 
RULE xxy. 

The first objective case is placed before the tenses of 
the verb, except in the infinitive, imperative, and ge- 
rund; in which cases it is placed after. In the first 
instance, the pronoun is separated frocn the verbj and 
in the second, it is joined to it, forming as it were, one 
word; as, ^'El le escribio,'^'^ he wrote to him. "Me 
dicen,^^ thej saj to me. ^'Ellos te escribirian si tu 
quisieras,^^ they would write to thee, if thou wert will- 
ing.* '^Fengo por verle,^^ I come to see you. ^'Mi- 
rdndola, se niuriu,^^ looking at her he died. ^'Venzd- 
molos^^'' let us conquer them. 

Kole 1. When a verb governs another in the infinitive, the ob- 
jective case may be placed, either before the first, or after the 
second, verb; as, "Te pwdteras asenfa?*," or, '■^Pudieras asentartSy^'* 
thou mightest sit down. '■'■Voi a hablarle,''^ or "Le vol a hablar" 
I am going to speak to him. 

* Sometimes, when the sentence begins by a verb, the pronoun 
is placed after it, in what tense soever the verb may be. This is 
accomplished to give more strength and energy to the phrase; as, 
"Pronunciaronle su sentencia,'''' they pronounced his sentence to 
him. "jDejarasme ■perecerV wilt thou let me perish? The author 
again observes, that this construction can only take place, when 
the phrase or sentence begins by a verb* 
22 



254 SYNTAX. 

J^ote 2. When the imperative is followed by nos, or os, it loses 
its final letter; as, ^^Detengdinonos,^^ and not detengamos-noSf let us 
stop. "iSmfaos," and not sentad-o^, sit ye down. 

EXERCISES. 

War is so great an evil, that nothing ean justify 

es mal nada puede justificar 

it, but necessity. Nothing can render us so unhappy, 

sino necesidad puede hacer infeliz 

as to envy our neighbour's happiness. (Let us conquer 

envidiar nuestro procsimo felicidad venzamolos 

them,) said a General to his soldiers, for (they will 

dijo sus soldado pues se 

destroy themselves; if they lose us. God is always 
han de perder si pierden Dios estd 
showing us marks of the desire he has of our amend- 
mostrando senal deseo que tiene nuestra emni- 

ment, but we do not regard them. (No 

enda (pero nosotros no hacemos cabal de ellos) 
man) can feel the pleasures emanating from 
nadie puede per cibir placer {que emcman) 

virtue, but by practising it. Incontinence, the mother 
virtud sino con practicar Incontinencia madre 

of all vices, exposes us to the greatest dangers, renders 

vicio espone d mayor peligro hace 

us miserable, and at last hurries us into destruc- 

^ [por ultimo) precipita d ■ — 

tion. Politeness teaches us to compassionate the 

urhanidad enseha conipadecernos de 

weakness of some, to bear patiently the caprices 

Jlaqueza algi.nos a sufrir {con paciencia) capricho 

and extravagancies of others, and to lead them all 

estravagancia otros {hacer que se conven- 



SYNTAX. 255 

to reason, by insinuating means. It delights me. 

za7i de la razon) agradable medio t deleita 
and pleases me extremely, to see the daily 
gitsta estremadamente t ver diario 

advancement which America makes to perfection. 
adelantamientos que — — hace hdcia 
The (ambitious man) is a slave (to himself.) Covet- 
ambicioso es de si mismo ava- 

ousness solicits him, gluttony incites him, incon- 
ruia solicit a gula incita incon- 

tinence agitates him, but he, although reluc- 
linencia abrasa pero aimque repug- 

tantly, obeys the (despotic passion which) controls 
nante obedece la pasion que despotica domina 

him. 

{Note 1.) Death alone could (have been able) 
muerte solarnente podia kaber 

(to separate) them, so great was their friendship. 

separado era su amistad 

I cannot put you at my right hand, (will God say) 
{no puedo) poner a mi derecho mano dird Bios 
to those who might have loved him and (did not do it. ) 
a los que podian haber amado le no lo hicieron 

(Note 2.) Accustom yourselves to imitate the actions 

acostumbrad os d iinitar 

of the virtuous. (Let us address) ourselves to the 

virtuoso dirigimos nos 

President and he (will pardon) us. Dress yourselves 
presidente perdonard vestid os 

with rapidity, and (let us wash) ourselves without 
C071 rapidez y lavemos sin 



r2D6 SYNTAX. 

delay. (Let us flatter) ourselves that we can 
diladon lisongeemos nos que podemos 

do a thing when it is done. 
hacer cosa ciiando estd hecho. 

POSITION OF THE 2nd OBJECTIVE CASE. 

RULE XXVI. 

The second objective case is always to be placed 
after a preposition; as, ''El lo hiza para el," he did it 
for him. "A etlos los matdron,^^ they killed them. 
^'Conjio de vmd." I depend on you. 

JiOte 1. When, in English, two objective cases occur in a sen- 
tence, one of which is governed by the preposition to, and the 
other by a verb, the one governed by the preposition, is, in Spa- 
Tiish, placed first; as, "He said it to thee,^^* el te lo dijo. "We 
brought him to ye," os le llevmnos. 

Should the verb goveri) a reflective pronoun, the pronoun 
would then be placed first; as, "He declared ^imse// grateful to 
me," el se me decldro reeonocido. "1 presented myself to him," yo 
me presents a el. 

EXERCISES. 

(It is better) to cultivate any talents we 

vale mas cultivar cualesquiera talentos [que 

may have, than to complain of them. Who can 

tengamos) quejarnos quien podrd 

hide himself from thee, O Lord! If virtuous and 

esconderse de Sehor virtuoso 

learned men, are the best companions, why (should 
erudite son compahero porque no. 

we not associate) with them.^ 
nos asociamos 

* When the preposition to governs the English objective case, 
the preposition to, and the case itself, are translated by the first 
objective in Spanish. See the two next rules. 



SYNTAX. 257 

[Note 1.) Thou (hast conducted thyself) honourably, 
te has conducido con honor 

and if thou ask thy liberty, they (will grant) it to thee. 

pides tu libertad concederdn 

When I demand something reasonable, they always 

pidio algo razonable 

give it to me. Her image presented itself (to them) 
dan su imdgen presentaha se les, 

without ceasing. He addressed himself (to thee.) 
sin cesar dirigio te 

USE OF THE 1st OBJECTIVE CASE. 
RULE XXVII. 

1st AND 2d PERSONS. 

When, in English, the verb or preposition to, express- 
ed or understood, governs the objective case of the 
first or second person, in Spanish, the first objective 
case is used, and placed according to rule xxvi., page 
Q56; as, '^jEUos me habldron,^^ they spoke to me. '^Los 
dos ladrones te robaron,^^ the two thieves robbed thee. 
^'En la nihez mi padre me consolaba, y mi madre me 
acariciaba,^- in my childhood, my father consoled me, 
and my mother caressed me. '^DigaXo, que no venga,^^ 
tell him not to come. 

3d PERSON. 

If the objective case of the third person, be governed, 
in English, by the verb, it is, in Spanish, translated by, 
le. los, for the masculine, and, la, las, for the feminine 
gender. If the objective case be governed by the pre- 
position to, expressed or understood, it is rendered by 
le, les, for both genders; as, "Los vimos,^^ we saw Mem, 
(masculine.) *'Las encontrdmos,^'' \NQ.m.Qithem, (femj- 



258 SYNTAX. 

nine.) ^'Ite prendieron,^^ they took him, ^'JjSl edu- 
cdron mui bien,^^ thej educated her very well. "Le 
dijo,^^ he said to her, "Le dijo,^"^^ he said to him. 
**Les hablaron,^^ they spoke to them, (masculine.) 
*'Les habldron,^^ they spoke to them, (feminine.) 

EXERCISES. 

(Every thing) we possess, we have it from God — 
todo lo que poseemos redhimos lo de Dios 

this should induce us to love him. We may play 
esto debe inducir a amar podemos jugar 

to give us pleasure, but not to give us pain. 
paradar gusto pero dar pena 

After the battle, they conducted me to the field, 
(despiies de) batcdla condugeron a campo 

(that I might see) the effects of war. The enemy, 

para que viese ffecto enamige 

said he, will pursue us, (will overtake) us, 

dijo (seguird el alcance) alcanzard 

and (we shall be) their^ victims,* (if we do not 
seremos (de el) victijna si no hacem,os 
face) them. Moses with his rod touched 

caixi le Moises con su vara toco 

the water of the river and changed it into blood. 
agiia rio convirtio en sangre 

How is it possible that a man can pass a day, without 
como es t posible que puedepasar dia sin 

thinking on his Creator, without giving him thanks, 
pensar en su criador sin dar gracia 

without worshipping him? Generosity unites many 

sin adorar generosidad une 

'* By the context of the sentence, it can be easily gathered 
Avhether the pronoun relates to a masculine or feminine person. 



SYNTAX. 259 

virtues, and gives them a heroical energy. The wicked 
virtud da heroico energia malo 

majji some-* times,* receive^ favours ^^ but they often 
pueden alguna vez recihir pero amenudo 

are the means by which the Almighty tries 
son medio s (por los cucdes) Todo poderoso prueba 

them, convicts them, and punishes them. Those who 
sentenda castiga los que 

have committed any bad actions, endeavour to forget 

han cometido {se esfuerzan) a olvidar 

them in vainj because their consciences always put 
en vano por que su conciencia siemprepone 
them before their minds. Men call nature* 
(delante de) su alma llaman naturaleza 

unjust,^ because she has not granted them what they 
injusto ha concedido lo que 

desire. 
desean. 

USE OF THE 2d OBJECTIVE CASE. 
RULE XXVIII. 
After a preposition, the second objective case is uni- 
versally used;* ''Viene por mi," he comes for me. 
'' Contra ellos no hai poder,'^^ there is no power against 
them. '*Sm ti, 7iada seriamos,^^ without thee, we would 
not be any thing. 

J^ote 1. The second objective case is also placed after compa- 
ratives; as, "Le esthnan mas que a ellos," they love him, better 
than thenu ^'■Jl el le creen mas que a mi," they believe him, better 
than me. 

* Except in those cases in which the preposition to governs, in 
English, the objective case. See rule xxvii., page 257. 



^260 SYNTAX. 

^^"016 2. When the second objective cases wi?, ti, si, are preceded 
by the preposition con, Avith; they take go; forming all three par- 
ticles, a single word; as, ''■Vinieron ellos conmigo," they came 
unth me. '■'■ Marchdron consigo," they went away i!)Uh him. 

EXERCISES. 

If we subdued our passions, instead of (being 

subyugdsemos nuestras {en lugar de) dejar- 

carried away) by them, (we would be) happier. Who 
nos llevar de seriamos feliz qiden 

can go against the dictates of heaven? who can 
puede ir contra dictador cielo qidenpuede 

deride them? As for me, I believe all that 

[hurlarse de^ . {en cuanto a) creo {todo lo que) 

tends to make a man good. 
tiende a hacer el 

[Note 1.) Although they have more talents than 
aiinque tmgan talentos 

we 5 notwithstanding, we (have been) (much more) 

sin embargo tenemos mejor 

successful than they. They know not so much as we. 

ecsito saben 

He is more learned than she: but she is much more 

es erudito es 

polite than he. 
urbano 

{Note 2.) Some persons speak to themselves w^hen 
persona hablan con si 
they are alone. Let not the wicked keep 

estcm solo, {no permitas que) malo tengan 

correspondence with thee, for they always try to 
trato con H pues procuran t 

blind us. 
cegar 



SYNTAX. £61 



OBSERVATION ON THE TWO OBJECTIVE CASES. 

From the be2:inriing of the rules on the pronouns we have been 
very careful to inculcate on the student's mind, that, in Spanish, 
two objective cases exist. 

The rules which precede this observation, will, we indulge a 
hope, be found sufficient to prevent his ever being at a loss to 
know how to place, use, or apply them with precision in a sen- 
tence. It becomes now our duty to observe, that to render the dic- 
tion more perspicuous and energetic, both the objective eases are 
often used in Spanish. 

The second objective case can never be preceded by the pre- 
position a, unless it be accompanied by the first. It would, 
therefore, be very improper to say a ml quieren, they like me; a 
el aman, they love him; a ti dechnos, we say to thee; and, to ren- 
der these sentences correct, it would be absolutely necessary to 
add the first objective case; as, a mi me quieren, they like me; d 
el LE aman, they love him; a ti te decimos, we say to thee.* As 
the first objective case is always expressive of the second with 
the preposition a; it is impossible to use them both, unless the 
second be preceded by this preposition. Should Ave say el le 
digeron, it would, not only be ungrammatical, but it could not be 
understood; and the only reason would be, because the preposi- 
tion a was not placed before the pronoun el; and say "a el le 
digey'on,''^ they said to him. 

It is also to be observed, that one of these two objective cases, 
cannot be placed, indiscriminately, either before or after the 
other, but that the second, is always guided by the position of the 
first. The first objective case, as it has been observed in Syntax, 
rule XXV, page 253, is always placed before the verb in all its tenses, 

* It sometimes occurs, that the verb being understood, the first 
objective case is not used; thus, for instance, "a mi me quieren^ 
y a.ii 110,''' they like me and not thee. It is very plain that in the 
second member of this sentence, the words te quieren, after the 
negative no, are understood. In this sentence, "Le han condena- 
do a morir, pero lanaturaleza a ellos," they have condemned him to 
die, but nature them; the Avords les ha condenado after naturaleza. 
3 re also understood, 



262, SYNTAX. 

except the infinitive, imperative, and gerund, in which three cases 
it is universally placed after. 

When the first objective, is placed before the verb, the second, 
must be either before the first, or after the verb, in this manner: 
"A el le asadndron,''^ or, Le asasindron a el, they assassinated 
him." "A mi me llevdron al canipo,'''' or ^^.Rl campo me llevdron, a 
pi," they carried me to the country, "A nosotros nos dan bar- 
haraa leyes,''^ or '^Bdrbaras leyesnos dan a nosotros," they give us bar- 
barous laws. "A ti te ecsamindron &ien," or ^^Bien te ecsamindron 
si ti," they examined thee well. "El se ama a si," or "A si se ama 
e/," he loves himself.* 

It frequently happens that a sentence begins by the preposition 
a governing a substantive in the objective case, and then an addi- 
tional pronoun in the same case, is almost always placed before 
the verb. 

Father Isla, speaking of the manner in which king Alphonsus 
rewarded three French princes, v/ho had seconded him in his 
military enterprises, says: "M conde de Tolosa le toco Dona Elvi- 
ra,'''' &c., to the count of Tolosa Donna Elvira was given. The 
same author, in another place, says: ^'Era Jtlfonso, d quien des- 
pues se LE did el nombre de bravo, un principe niarcial, intrepido.'''' &c. 
Alphonsus, to whom loas afterwards given the name of brave, 
was a martial, intrepid king, &c. Many instances of this kind 
might easily be produced, from the Spanish classics. 

When the first objective case is placed after the verb, the 
second must follow the first, and it cannot be placed in any other 
part of the sentence; thus, '■'■Mirdndole se cayo,'''' looking at him, he 
fell down. "Dile a ella, que venga,'''' tell her to come. '■^Decirme 
a mi esto, es locura,'''' it is folly to say this to me. The student must 
not suppose, that the additional objective case in the preceding 
examples, has had any tendency to render them more grammati- 
cally correct. The only advantage which results from this man- 
ner of construction, is, as we have before observed, that as the 
objectives refer, more expressively, to their nominatives, the sen- 
tence seems to acquire new force and energy. 

*If the nominative be expressed in Spanish, it always will be 
better to place the second objective case after the verb; as, "£//« 
me dice a mi;" is much better than to say, Ella a mi me dice, she 
tells me. 



SYNTAX. 263 

EXERCISES. 

Although she did not respect him, as much as he re- 

Aunque t respetaba res- 

spected her, they still lived happilj. They said to 
petaba {sin eTnbargo) vivian felizmente digeron 

him that a general (had been killed. ) (No body) said she 

fue miierto nadie dijo 

to him can deny that Julius Caesar was a great man, 

puede negar que Jidio Cesar fue 
that the Romans owed to him much of their glory. 
que Romano debian mucho su gloria 

Him we must defend, said a soldier, speaking of his 
(a el) debemos defender dijo soldado hablando su 
king. It seems to us that we always have time 
rei t parece que siempre tetiemos tieinpo 

enough to become good. Thee, O Lord, (shall 
bastante para hacernos biieno {a ti) t Sehor 
I praise.) From^ France they tell* me, ^ that all 

alabare de Francia dicen que todo 

remains tranquil. (They robbed') iiis father^ of 
queda tranquilo robdron [a su padre) t 

all he had. They give Milton the epithet of 

(todo lo que) tenia dan d renombre 

divine. They distinguished Lope de Vega Carpio from 

divino distinguieron d de 

the other poets, by calling him the prodigy of nature. 

demas poeta con llamar prodigio naturaleza 

OBSERVATION OX Se. 

The pledge which was made in Etymology, page 73, concern- 
ing an explanation of the reciprocal pronoun se, will now be re- 
deemed. A good knowledi^e of this part of speech, is, according 
to our opinion, so useful and necessary, that a want of it, might 



264 ^ SYNTAX. 

seriously retard the progress of the student. It is for this reason, 
that we have given to this subject a few separate remarks 

The reciprocal pronoun se, has, in the Spanish language, three 
distinct meanings, and it is, therefore, employed, for three dif- 
ferent purposes. 

( 1. ) The first tense in which we find this pronoun used, is, to 
denote itself, himself, herself, themselves and each other. In this 
meaning, it is always employed to conjugate the third person sin- 
gular, and the third person plural, of all the tenses of a reflec- 
tive verb,* for example: "Se mostro,^'' it showed itself '■'■Por su 
urbcmidad, se hizo querer de todos sus conocidos,'''' by his politeness, he 
made himself beloved by all his acquaintances. '■'■Ella se mostro 
resuelta,''^ she showed herself resolute. '■'■Ellos se entretuvieron, 
they amused themselves. ^'■Ellasnunca se amardn,''^ they will never 
love themselves, or each other. 

( 2. ) The second use of this pronoun, is in the conjugation of 
the third person singular, and the third person plural, of all the 
tenses of a passive verb. Instead,. therefore, of using the auxi- 
liary to be, and the participle of the verb agreeing with its nomi- 
native; the pronoun se, and the proper tense itself, are employed 
for the same purpose 

It is when this part of speech is used in this tense, that it offers 
many difficulties, if it be not well understood. The student is 
apt to translate, on all occasions, because it can be done in a few, 
se by himself, herself, themselves, or itself. This erroneous impres- 
sion, which is very common, makes him translate "El castillo se 
asalto,''^ by, the castle assaulted itself, which is an absolute impos- 
sibility. And, unless he translate it by the verb to be, and the 
participle, thus: the castle was assaulted, the true meaning cannot 
be apparent. This sentence "Se T)i6 a Alfonso el nombre de sabio,''^ 
■would perplex any person, accustomed to translate se by the re- 
flective pronouns; when, the moment he translates "se" by the 
verb to be, as it should be rendered, he immediately perceives the 
true meaning, which is: To Alphonsus was given the name of 
wise. 

This pronoun, therefore, used in this sense, before the tense of 
€1 verb corresponds exactly to the same tense conjugated passive- 

*See Etymology, pages 119, 120, and 1,21. 



SYNTAX. 265 

ly; that is, with the verb to be, and the participle of the verb. 
Thus for instance, "La citidad se* quemo,'''' the city was burnt; is 
the same as, la ciudad fue quemada. '^La gramdtica se estudia para 
aprender un idioma 6ie?i," grammar is learned to acquire a Ian 
guage well; is the same as, la gramdtica es estudiada, para apren- 
der nn idioma Men. "Se da [or es dado] castigo dlos delincuentes,'''' 
punishment is inflicted on the guilty. ^'■Js^'o siempre se observan 
[or son observadas,] todas las buenas leyes,'''' all 'good laws are not 
always observed. "No se hubiera esparcido [or, hubiera sido espar- 
cida,] la noticia, si se hubiesen tornado [or, hubiesen sido tomadas,} 
buenas medidas,'''' the news itwiild not hare been spread, if opportune 
measures had been taken. "Se dice; [seldom or ever, es dicho,] que 
ha llegado,'''' it is said that he has arrived. 

(3. ) The third and last sense in which we find this pronoun se 
used, is, to denote to it, to him, to her, to you,j or to them; whenever 
this preposition and pronoun are preceded by another pronoun in 
the third person. For example, "Thou boughtst a book, and sentst 
it to him,'''' conipraste un libro y se le mandaste. "I brought it to 
ihem,^'' se lo trage. "They said it to her,'''' se lo digeron. "The com- 
mittee addressed it to you,'''' la junta se lo dirigio. 

If the pronoun se alone, were not deemed sufficient to express 
the particular pronoun in the degree of energy and perspicuity 
desired, recourse would then be had to the use of the two objective 
cases, thus; "comp'asfe un libro y se le mandaste a el;" "se lo trage 5 
ellos;" "se lo digeron a ella;" 'Ha junta se lo dirigio a vmd." 

N. B. Se,l is a first objective case, and as such, its position in 
the sentence is according to rule xxv. page 253. Examples: "£Z se 
encolerizo,-'' he grew angry. ^^LevdntcsE vmd,'''' rise (you.) "La 
villa se void,'''' the town was blown up. " VuelesE la villa," let the 
town be blown up. "El se lo dio,''"' he gave it to him. "DandosELO," 
giving it to him. 

* This manner of conjugating the third person singular or plu- 
ral of a passive verb, is much more used than the other. 

t Meaning, your icorship, or vmd; see page 86, and observation, 
page 249. 

I It must be observed that this word is also a part of the verb to 
be, and to know; for example: "Fo se," I know. "Se tu,^^ be 
thou. In these cases it is generally accented. 
23 



■266 ^YlsTAX, 

EXERCISES. 

(1.) Men often injure themselves for the want of 
amenudo injurian se por falta 
prudence. Although man can govern himself, he 
prudencia aunqiie homere puede gohernar se 
seldom does it. Kings often ruin themselves, bj 
rara vez hace lo {muchas veces) ruinan se t 

endeavouring to usurp (too much) power. She loves 
prociirando t usurpar demasiado poder ama 

herself better than she (does others.) They can^ never ^ 
mas t d otros podran nunca 

like each other, their animosity is too inveterate. 
querer su animosidades demasiado inveter ado 

By his own exertions Bonaparte placed himself to the 

por sus propio esfuerzos levant 6 

highest post of a nation. 

mayor puesto 

( 2. ) (Young men) are often mistaken, when they 
Los jovenes (muchos veces) engahan 
believe (to be) their friends those who profess it. If 
creen que son sus amigo los que profesan lo 
books, were more studied than read, (there would be) 
I'lbro estudiasen (seleen) habria 
more knowledge among men. If men were not ''carried 
conocimiento enfre si llevasen 

away,) by the impulse of their imagination | many^ 
por impidso su 



perplexities, vexations and disappointments would be 
disgustos vejacion frustracion 

'spared.^ Of all modern nations, England has been kept 
aliorrarian moderno Inglaterra guardado 



SYNTAX. 267 

in a state of tranquility, prosperity and magnificence, 
estado tranquilidad prosperidad magnificencia 
the longest. Man* (without any reason^) is dejected: 
{jpor mas tiempo) sin razon abate 

without any reason he is elated. 
(el hombre) eleva 
( 3. ) When you were (in need;) the government 
cuando esiaba menesteroso gobierno 

granted him a pension, and he immediately transferred 

concedio imediatamenie transfiric 

it to you,* could (there be) a greater act of generosity: 
pudo haber. rasgo generosidad 

When God demands our heart how can we 
pide nuestro carazon como podemos 
refuse it to himr If the privileges (had been) granted 
negar privilegio fiieron concedidos 

to you; why did they not also* grant* them to 
d porque t tambien concedieron 

them.^t The king gave him the command of his armies. 
dio mando siis egercito 

but he gave it to him for a very short time? Reading 
pero did por poeo tiempo leyendn 

it to her she shed tears. 
derramo Idgrima 

OBSERVATION OX U AXD lo. 

U will now be observed, that in Etymology, page 7S, lo is the 
tirst objective case of the neuter pronoun Ello; and in page 7'7, 
that le is the first objective, of the personal pronoun El. Not- 
withstanding the wide difference which must necessarily exist 

*The student should bear in mind .that se is the 1st objective 
case of vmd, as well as of el. See page 249, parapraph com- 
mencing by vmd. 

fThe repetition of a ellos^ independently of the se would be ne- 
•cessary in tJiis place. See the second paragraph of ( 3. ) page 2Qb. 



.'268 SYNTAX. 

between these two pronouns; the greatest part of authors in the 
Spanish language, have indiscriminately used these two parts of 
■speech. The authority, indeed, of a Cervantes, a Granada, an 
Ma, or an OlavideSy would, most undoubtedly, sanction the pro- 
miscuous use of le or lo, were it not that the members of the 
Spanish Academy, are most strenuously opposed to this gram- 
matical transgression. In their grammar. Etymology, page 64, 
they observe: Y* respecto de los autores que le han usado, [lo, por le] 
como Granada, Cervantes y otros, se ha de deeir, 6 que hai falta de 
correcion en las impresiones de sus obras, o que fueron poco ecsactos en 
cl nso de estas terminaciones, 6 que por cuidar alguna vez con demasla 
del nUmero armonioso de la oracion, sacrificdron las reglas de la gramdti- 
ca, a la delicadeza del oido. This warning, however, has not had the 
•'effect which the Academy anticipated. For, among the generali- 
ty of Spanish writers, the number of those who have taken advan- 
tage of it, is very inconsiderable. The author of this grammar, 
nevertheless, concurs, in this respect, with their opinion, and he 
would advise the student to adhere to it. He has, for some time, 
thought differently, but after a very elaborate research, and ma- 
nure reflection, he is inclined to believe that the Academicians are 
perfectly correct. 

Lo, will, therefore, be used only in reference to a noun to which 
we cannot ascribe either the masculine or feminine gender; for 
'^.xample : " Yo he comprado un libro y te le mandare manana.'''' ^^JSTo, 
ivrometame que tu me le traerds hoi.''' ".Si, te lo prometo,'*'' I have 
bought a book, and I shall send it to thee to-morrow. No, prb- 
rnise me that thou wilt bring ii to me to-day. Yes, I promise it 
fo thee. It will be observed, that in the two first sentences le is 
ased, because the noun to which this pronoun refers, belongs to 
'he masculine gender. But in the last sentence lo is employed, 

■ And with regard to those authors who have used it; [meaning 
ihe pronoun lo, instead of Ze,] such as Granada, Cervantes, and 
others, it must be observed, that the editions of their works have 
not been corrected with a sufficient degree of accuracy; or that 
they wanted precision in the use of these pronouns, or that they 
sometimes paid too much attention to the harmony of the sen- 
tence, and thereby sacrificed the rules of grammar to the deli- 
cacy of the ear. 



SYNTAX. 269 

this pronoun referring not to the book, but to the action of bring- 
ing it to-day; to which, it is plain, no gender can be ascribed. 
Again, if I say, "I saw it," meaning an army, or any other mas- 
culine substantive, it must be translated, Yo le vt. But if in 
saying "I saw it," it is not my intention to mean this or that par- 
ticular object, but a whole transaction, or event, &c.-, then it 
would become necessary to say *'Yo lo ■ui." And thus it must be 
in all other similar cases. 

EXERCISES. 

The armies were, on the twentieth of March, com- 
ej^an Marzo en- 

pletely routed: who said it to you?* Nobody, 
teramente derrotado qiiien dijo nadie 

P witnessed^ it myself, ^t Nothing can (be compared) with 
vi mismo. nada puede compararse con 

the excellent advice of ''love thy enemies;" notwith- 
escelente consejo de ama a tus enemigo sin em- 
standing (few men) do it. An envious man (may 
bargo pocos hacen envidioso puede 

be persuaded) that another person has merit, but 
estar persuadido que otro persona tiene merito pero 
he (will very seldom) (acknowledge) it. Our vanity 
rara vez confesard nuestra vanidad 

renders us insupportable 5 and although we know it; 

hace insuportable aunque sabemos 

we seldom endeavour (to suppress) it. The Athenians 

rara vez procuramos suprimir Ateniense 

understand what is good, but the X«acedemonians 

entienden lo que es pero Lacedemonio 

* This to you, is translated by se; see the second and third pa- 
ragraphs, in page 265. 

t A reciprocal pronoun is always placed, in Spanish, iramedi- 
atelj after the nominative. 

23* 



270 SYNTAX. 

practise it. He never wept for his troubles, 5e- 
practican nunca llora sus trahajo 

cause he considered it beneath him. I saw the army 
j)orque considera [indigno de) vi 

preparing itself^ I saw it rushing on the enemy, 
preparar se vi balancearse hdcia enemigo 

but after having seen all, I could* scarcely^ 

(pero despues de haberlo* visto) todo pude apSnas 
believe^ it. 
rreer 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.t 

OBSERVATION. 

These pronouns are used to show, distinguish, and qualify, the 
possession, or property, of persons or things. As these parts of 
grammar participate both of the nature of adjectives and pro- 
nouns, they have been called by the late English grammarians, 
possessive adjective pronouns. The author is, by no means, averse 
to this term; on the contrary, he thinks it the most proper and 
correct. But he deems it necessary to make this observation, to 
remove all possible confusion, when these parts of speech will 
in some cases, be called possessive pronouns, and, in some others-, 
possessive adjectives. 

AGREEMENT AND USE OF POSSESSIVE 
PRONOUNS. 

RULE XXIX. 

The possessive pronouns agree in gender, numbei*' 
and case, with the substantive to which they relate; 

* Whenever all refers to a whole occurrence, or concatenation 
of circumstances, lo must also be used. 

i The possessive pronouns are: nm-a, my or mine; tuyo-a, thy 
or thine; — suyo-a, its, his, hers, their, or theirs; — nuestro-a, our, 
ouYSx~vv.esfro-a, your, or yourg. See page 78. 



8YNTAX. 2ri 

and, in general, they are placed before it,* as, nuestra 
casa^ our house, \\\Q?>iYQ jardin, your garden, vuestros 
padres^ your parents^ sii* madre^ your mother. 

J^ote 1. Mio, tuyo, suyo, lose, when they precede the noun, their 
last syllable. For example: ''Mi padre (and not mio^adre,) no 
llegard hoi,'''' my father will not arrive to-day. "Mis tios (and not 
mios tios,) han salido,'''' my uncles have gone out. "Tu conduda 
(and not fwya,} es ;)itra," i% conduct is perfect. "Tus miras son 
grandes,'''' thy views are great. "Su amor propio le ciega, y sus 
pasiones le arrastran,^'' his self-love blinds him, and his passions 
bias him. 

Mio, [my, or mine,] is, in addresses, always placed after the 
noun to which it refers; as, ^'0 padre mio," O my father. ^'Her- 
7;iano mio sebuen muchacho,'''' my brother, be a good boy. 

J^ote 2. When the possessive pronouns are equivalent to the 
possessive case of the English adjective pronouns, mine, thine, 
his, hers, its, ours, yours, theirs, they are preceded by the definite 
article,! and agree with the noun which they represent; as, "Tu 
hermcma y la mia son mid modestas,''^ thy sister and mine are very 
modest. "<Sit ingenio y el suyo, son sublimes,^'' your genius and 
hers are sublime. 

* Vmd., and vmds., must always be considered as pronouns of 
the third, although they be always applied to the second person ; 
suyo, and not vuestro, are, therefore, their representatives. "Le 
recomiendo de no gastar su dinero,'''' I advise you, not to spend your 
money. 

t The article is omitted, if a verb, expressive of possession, 
precede the pronoun. It must be recollected, that the pronoun 
always agrees with the property, not with the possessor; thus, fop 
instance: ''Esta casa es suya," this house is his. Suya, must be 
employed, whether the house belong to a person of the masculine 
or of the feminine gender. The context of the sentence, is gene- 
rally a sufficient mark of distinction. Should, however, the sen- 
tence be considered ambiguous; de el, or de ella; de ellos, or de ellas, 
may be properly added: as, "£sfe campo es suyo de ella; y aquellas 
fadrerias suyas de ellos," this field is his; and those lawns are theirs-.' 



£rs . SYNTAX. 

J^ote 3. When mine^ thine, his, ^c. are preceded by of, the pre- 
position, as well as the additional article, are omitted, and the 
possessive pronoun is then placed after the noun; as, "A corres- 
pondent of ours, affirms the independence of Mexico," im corres- 
ponsal nuestro, afirma la independencia de Mexico. "One of his 
buildings was set on fire last night," un edificio suyo, fue incen- 
diado anoche. 

EXERCISES. 

Our virtues are frequently no more than dis- 

virtud sonfrecuentemente dis- 

guised vices. I exhort jou gentlemen to continue. 

frazcido ecsorto {a vmds) sehores a continar 

your literary labours^, and your love to virtue. 

liter ario estudio amor a 

(Can ye) abandon your wives, your children, your king, 
podeis abandonar esposo 7iino rei 

your country? It seems that the first man, lost sight 
patria t parece que (perdio de 

of the laws of nature | hence sprang our errors, 

vista) lei naturaleza de aqui nacieron 

our crimes, our enmities, our wars. (No one) 

crimen malevolencia guerra nadie 

thinks to scrutinize our origin, nor the occurrences 
piensa en escudrihar origen ni circunstancia 

of our life as long as we do not endeavour to 
vida (en tanto que) t procuramos f 

become superior to our companions. The sun and the 

hacernos — • companero sol 

moon (will lose) their light, and the dead (will come 
hma perderan luz muerto sal- 

out) of their sepulchres. Jupiter performs its revolution 

dran sepulcro — da vuelta 

round the sun, attended by its satellites. 

(al rededor de) sol acompanado de satelite 



SYNTAX. 275 

{Note 1 .) They divided my garments among themj 
repartieron vestido entre si 
and upon my vesture they cast lots. (Let us lay 
sobre vestidura echdron suerte dejemonos 

aside) flattery, my friends, for (it is) one of the 
de adulacion pues es uno de 

worst diseases of the mind. Thy old age (will be) 
peor enfermedad cdma vegez sera. 

agreeable to thee, my son, if thou improve both in 
agradable . hijo adelcmtas asi en 

virtue and wisdom, while thou art young. 
como sabiduria mientras eres joven 
(Note 2.) When the Romans knew the utility of the 
supieron utilidad 
Spanish sword, they abandoned theirs. Historians 
Espahol espada abandondron historiador 

relate that our manners differ from theirs. 
rejieren que costiunbre diferencian de 

(As soon as) that robber had finished his history, 

luego que aquel ladro?i t acabo historia 

another began his, saying, the histories which you 

otro comenzo diciendo que 

(have just heard,) are not so curious as mine. The 

acabais de oir son curioso 

Floridas (used to be) theirs, but now tliey are ours. 

ercm ahora son 

This (country seat,) and that most beautiful* orchard, 
esta quinta aquel hermoso vergel 

are her's, but yonder shadowy grove is his. 
son pero aquella frondoso cvrboleda es 

* Most beautiful, not being preceded by an article, does not com- 
pare, and, therefore, it must be translated by mui or simo, that is, 
mui heiinoso, or hermosisimo. See superlatives, rule xix. page 340, 
and note (*) page 242, 



£74 SYNTAX. 

Newton could say that the discovery of attract ou 

— podia decir que desciibrimiente atraccion 

was his. 
era 

(Note S.) When Caesar determined (to pass over) 
Cesar deterniino pasar 

into the island of Britain, he despatched Volsenius, 
a isla Bretaha despacho Volsenio 

a lieutenant of his, to cruize on the British coasts. 
teniente para cruzar en {costas de Breteha) 

O thou, whose words are capable of softening these 
cuyas palahra son capaz ahlandar estos 

flinty hearts of ours, teach that son of 

empedernecido corazon ensenar (d aquel) hijo 

mine, to respect his elders. 
a respetar mayor 

OBSERVATION. 

It has been observed, that the possessive pronouns are used to 
denote possession, or property. They are, therefore, frequently 
employed in reference to some of the parts belonging to the hu- 
man frame. When this occurs, we find some cases in which the 
indefinite article, must be substituted in place of these pronouns. 
This change becomes necessary for this reason, tliat the construc- 
tion of the Spanish sentences, is of such a nature, as to render 
the parts of the human body with which the English possessive 
adjective agrees, so apparent, that the indefinite article is suf- 
ficient to distinguish them. The article will be used: 

(1st.) When any part of the human body is injured, changed, 
or acted upon,* in any manner whatsoever, by the individual to 
whom the part itself belongs; as, "£Zme did la mano,'''' he gave me 

* In these cases, the Spanish verb is reflective, except in those 
instances in which the verb describes an action, that is very ap- 
parently applied to the part of the person to whom it belongs; 
for instance: it is said in Spanish, '•'■Volvieron las espaldas,'''' they 
turned iftetr backs; and "se qwmaron los dedos,^'' they burnt their 



SYNTAX. 275 

his hand. ''■Hincdron las rodiUas,'''' they bent their knees. *'£i 
se roinpio el brazo, he broke his arm. "£//</ se qwma los ojos esitt- 
diando,^' she burns /jer eyes studying. "-Ellns volverdn la cara, paro 
?iorer d su general,'''' they will turn f/jeir face, that they may not 
see their general. 

(2d.) When the part of the body with which the English adjec- 
tive agrees, is not the subject of the verb; and when the part of 
the body acts upon the person to whom it belongs. In this latter 
case, the person is represented by the corresponding persona} 
pronoun; for example: ^^Con Idgrimas en los ojos imploraba stiper- 
</oH," with tears in my eyes I entreated his pardon "La cubeza 
le duele,'''' his head aches. ^'■El pulso le iiembla,'''' his pulse trembles. 
•El corazon le bate,'''' her heart bea»s. 

(3d.) When the part of thebody has been injured, changed or 
acted upon by a third person; in this case, the person to whom 
the part belongs, must also be represented by the corresponding 
personal pronoun in the first objective case; as, "El me lavo las 
manos,'''' he washed my hands, [that is, he washed the hands to me.] 
■^Echele el freno en e\ pescuezo,^^ I threw the bridle on her neck. 
^^Su padre les euro la cnbeza,^^ their father cured their head. The 
pronouns, me, le, and les, distinguish, in a very perspicuous man- 
ner, the parts of the body designated by the English possessive 
lidjective.* 

(4lh.) The article is also used instead of the pronoun, in all 
those cases in which we have reference to certain objects which 
Lire necessarily included with the common appertenances of a per- 
son; if the person himself, be otherwise sufficiently denoted in 

fingers. In the first instance, the verb is not reflective, it being 
taken for granted that they did not turn the backs of any other 
persons, but theirs. In the second, however, it is not so. Were 
not the verb quemar reflective, we would be at a loss to know to 
whom the fingers they burnt did belong. 

* The possessive pronoun is used in Spanish, in the cases in 
which the article might render the sentence ambiguous; for in- 
stance: 'Tie/ies a complacerte en la obra de tus manosV dost thou 
come to take pleasure in the work of thy hands? Had the article 
been used in place of ihe pronoun, the person to whom the hands 
belonged would have been unknown. 



276' SYNTAX. 

the sentence; as, ^^Elme dijo que me quitase la casaca,''^ he request- 
ed me to take off my coat. '■'•Eche prontamente la la bolsa en el 
suelo, sino le mato,'''' throw down your purse quickly on the ground, 
otherwise I will kill you. 

It is to be observed, that for the same reason which vmd. is 
used instead of tic, and vmds. instead of vosotros, [see the bottom 
of page 86,] in addressing persons, your is not translated vuestro, 
nor yours, el vuestro;* bi.t the indefinite article, or the possessive 
pronoun referring to the third person, is placed before; and the 
words de vmd., de vmds., are placed after the noun; for instance: 
^'Estos son los," or, sus '■'■prados de vmd.," these are your lawns. 
'^^quellos, senores, son los,'''' or, sus "enemig-os de vmds.," those 
gentlemen are your enemies. ^^Sehor, mi conduta y la de vmd. son 
mui diferentes,'''' sir, my conduct and yours, are very different. In 
familiar discourse, when a question is asked, the words de vmd.., 
and de vmds., are frequently suppressed; in this case the pronoun 
alone can be used; as, ^^Senora, icuanto tiempo hace que sus hijos 
estan en el colegJoV Madam, how long is it, since your sons have 
been in the college? i^'Ban llegado sus generosV have your 
goods arrived ? 

EXERCISES. 

(1st.) (As soon as) (he lifted up) his eyes to heaven 
luego que levanto ojo cielo 

he repented of his wickedness. By force of study 
(se arrepintio) maldad a fuerza estudio 

he impaired his health. Some of the Brahmen 
(se ha) dan ado salud Bracmanes 

have their^ hands^ tied^ behind their backs and 
(sehacen) mano atar detras de espaldas 

break their joints by carrying them violently 
(serompen) coyunturas \ pasando {con violencia) 

over their heads. The said gentleman, wore at 
sobre cabeza tal caballero traia a 

* Except when we speak of great personages; as, ^^Inutil sera, 
senor todo vuestro poder,'''' all your power will be useless. 



SYNTAX. 277 

tiis side, a long sword. (As soon as) I extricated a 
lado largo chafarote luego que desembarace 
little my head, I said to him. Each put a pistol to my 
poco cabeza dige puso pistola 

breast. 
pecho 

(2d.) He sleeps with his eyes open. He walked 

duerme con ojos abierto {se paseaba) 

through the streets with a ridiculous turban on his 

por miles ridiculo turbante 

head. The moment a person hears good news his 
cabeza [al momento en que) oye noticia 

eyes generally sparkle with joy. His hands 
ojos [por lo regular) brillan de alegria mano 

shake. His feet pain him. 
liemblan duelen 

(3d.) Gracchus divided the treasures of Attains, but it 
Graco repartio tesoros Atalo pero 

cost him his life- The Philistines took Sampson, and 
costo vida Filisteos tomdron Samson 

(put out) his eyes. The general caught him and 

sacdron ojo cogio 

ordered his* ears^ (to be cut off. ^ ) Saying this she 
{le hizo) oreja cortar diciendo esto 

(to.ok off) from her finger the ring and put it in my 

saco dedo sortija puso en 

hand. David killed Goliah and (cut off) his head. 
mano {mato d) Golia corto cabeza 

(4tli.) After having received the insult (took up) 
{^Despues que hubo) recibido insulto tomo 

his hat and (went away.) Take thy jacket (said he 

sombrero marcho toma chaqueta le 

24 



2^8 SYNTAX. 

to him) in an angry tone. (He put on) his coat in 
dijo de airado tono se ponia casaca de 

a very curious manner. 
curioso modo. 

OBSERVATION, 

Your highness knows well that the result of 
alteza sabe Men que result ado 

these factions (will be) fatal to your interests, 

estas ' sera a interes 

Gentlemen, your prodigality and mine, have ruined 
Cabcdleros prodigalidad han arruinado 

his family. Madam, how (do you expect) (to have) 

familia Sehora como puede esperar tener 
your children obedient, if you are so indulgent. 
hijos obedient es si es indidgente 

Sir, I am your servant. I never (would trust on) 
Seiior soi criado nunca mefiaria de 

your promises, for you never fulfil them. His 

promesas piies cumple 

servants and yours are in prison. 
criado estan cartel 

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.* 

OBSERVATION. 

The relative pronouns are, in the Spanish language; qxdtn. 
who; — cwc/, — gtte, — who, which, or that; — cxv^o, — whose, or of 
Vfhich. 

Quitn^ changes from singular to plural only — quimts. 

dial, changes, also, from singular to plural only — cuales. This 
pronoun is, however, always preceded by the article, agreeing 
with the substantive to which the pronoun relates; as, el cual; la 
cual; lo cual; los cuales; las cuales. 

Qiie, whether it refer to a singular, or a plural; a masculine or 
a feminine noun, it never changes. 

* See the nature and declension of these pronouns, Etymology^ 
page 79. 



SYNTAX. - £79 

Cuyo, like an adjective of two terminations, changes from sin- 
>;ular to plural, and from masculine to feminine; as, cuyo, cut/ft. 
:uyos, cuyas. 

AGREEMENT AND RELATION OF RELA- 
TIVES. 

RULE XXX. 

Quien^^ relates to persons only, and agrees witl 
ihem. 

Cual and qiie^ refer to persons and things, and agree 
^vith them. 

Cuyo, relates also to persons and to things; but i< 
agrees with the noyn which immediately follows it. 

EXAMPLES. 

"El papa es quien lo dicey ^ the pope is he who says 
it. '^El general a quien vmd. teme,^'^ the general whom 
you fear. '^El soldado que vino y por el cual mande 
d parte,^^ the soldier who came, and by ivhom I sent 
the despatch. '^La nacion cuyo gobierno es sabio, e^ 
feliz^l^ the nation whose government is wise, is happy : 
**Las calles cuyas casas son hennosas, son agradables,^' 
the streets, whose, or the houses ofivhich are handsome, 
are agreeable. 

EXERCISES. 

It is he who made man, and v.lio (will reward) him. 

t es hizo recompensard 

and we are the sinners whom he calls, and for whom he 

somos pecador llama por 

suffered. Self love is the first that exists, and 
sufrio {amor propio) es primer o que ecsiste 

*\Vhen quien is governed by a verb, it is always preceded by c; 
as, "£^ hombre a quien vimos,'''' the man lohom we saw. ^^Los so^^ 
dados a quienes conquistamos.''' the soldier? whom we conquered. 



280 SYNTAX. 

the last that dies, in the heart of man. The- 

ultimo que muere corazon 

man that fears God, and that fears only him, is 

que teme a Dios que teme solo a 

truly free. Nero caused the^ christians (to be 

verdaderamente libre Neron hizo cristiano 

accused of^j setting Rome on fire^ 

acusar a {de haber incendiado a) Roma t t 

which* (he ordered to be done*) himself. ' The God 

hizo hacer el mismo 

of armies whose cause we defend, (will protect) us. 

egercito causa defendemos profegerd 

Socrates was instructed in eloquence by a woman whose 

— fue instruido elocuencia por 

name was Aspasia. The Magi and Chaldeans, the 

nombre era Mageo Caldeo 

chief of whom was Zoroaster, t employed their studies 

cabo era empledron estudio 

iipon magic and astrology. Minos, whose wisdon? 

a mdgica astrologia sabiduria 

and laws had been so much revered, obtained the 

lei han sido reverenciado obtuvo 

appellation of the favorite of the gods. 
renombre favorito 

USE OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
RULE XXXI. 

fVIio, having in English its antecedent, is, in Spa- 
nish, generally translated que; and whom, in almost all 

* When which does not refer to a certain word, but to a whole 
•sentence, or circumstance, it is translated in Spanish by lo cual. 

t When 0/ ivhom, or of tvhich, is used in English in place of 
whose; that preposition and pronoun cannot, in Spanish, be trans- 
lated by any other than cayo-a, os-as- 



SYNTAX. 281 

dases a quien; as, "x\ master who teaches well, is be- 
loved by his students," el maestro que ensena hien es 
amado de sus discipuJos, "The gentleman to tvhom 
you introduced me is very polite," el caballero a quien 
V7nd. me introdujo, es mui urbano. 

Mote 1. When ichoin, is not preceded by a preposition, it may 
be translated que; as, "£^ homhre que vimos,''^ the man whom we 
saw. 

JS'oie 2. That^ or ii^hlch, is translated que. That which or what; 
la que; as, "The conversation that we heard," la conversacion que 
oimos. '■^That ichich,''^ or to/wf "is proper in one, is improper in 
another," lo que es propio en uno, es impropio en otro. 

J^ote 3. When lohat^ has reference to no word; but is used as a 
substantive, meaning ichat thing, it is always translated que; as for 
instance, "I know not what [what thing] to do," no se que hacer, 
'■^JVhat, did he doV ;que ftizo?" 

EXERCISES. 

The most unfortunate of men, is a king who believes 

degraciado es cree 

that his happiness consists in making other s^ 

consiste en hacer (a otros) 

miserable. Apollo killed the Cyclops, who had forged 

^^polo mats a Ciclope habianforjado^ 

the (thunder-bolts) of Jupiter. One ought to think and 

rayo {una debe) t pensar 

observe (a long time,) (before he) chooses the friend 
observar muchotiempo antes de elegir amigo 

to whom he intends to give his confidence. It is a 

intenta t dar su conjianza t e* 
difficult,^ but meritorious tiling^ to love those by 

dificil pero meritorio cosa t amar a aquellos por 
whom -we have been wronged. It is necessary that 
hemos sido injuriado t es necesario 
24* 



::8:i SYNTAX. 

(we should take care) to whom and of whom we speak, 
tengamos cuidado hablamos 

to be circumspect. The king whom we serve is 
para ser circunspecto. servimos es 

generous, and he will reward us, if we deserve it. 
generoso recotipensard merecemos 

What some like, others dislike. We should 
(« algunos gusia a otros disgusta) debetnos 

always do that which our heart tells us is 
slempre hacer nuestro carazon dice (que 

right. Wlien a man (looks at) the state of 

estd bien hecho) cuando observa estado 

things, he knows not* what (to say.) He who does not'' 
cosa sabe decir . el que t 

know what (to do) in his youth, less (will he 
sabe hacer su juventud menos sabni 

know) it, in his (old age.) 
su vegez 

RULE XXXII. 
Cual may generally be used after que or qiiieti have 
been employed; as, *'Za casa que vmd. construyo 1/ la 
cual yo compre, ha caido»^^ the house which you built, 
and which I bought, has fallen. ^'Las miugeres a 
quienes vmd. via, y a las cuales die mi recado, estan 
aqui^'' the women whom you saw, and to whom you 
delivered my message, are here now. Cual may, gene- 
rally, be employed when more than one relative is used 
in reference to a substantive or sentence 5 and when any 
preposition except to, precedes the noun. 

EXERCISES. 

The God to whom we pray, and whom we worship^ 
Dios rogamos adoramos 

* See page 118, of verbs, used interrogatively or negatively. 



SYNTAX. 283 

(will give) us eternal glory. The anxieties, labours, 
dard eierno gloria ansia trahajo 

and perplexities which we undergo, and which some- 
confusion sufrimos algunas 

times we cannot avoid, teach us the necessity 
veces {no podemos) evitar (hacen ver) necesidad 

of virtue and judgment. Cervantes, Lope de Vega, 

virtud jidcio • — 

Calderon de la Barca, and Francisco de Quevedo, are 

S071 

authors whom I read incessantly, wliom I cannot 
alitor leo incesantamcnte (no piiedo) 

sufficiently admire, and of whom Spain (should be 
siificientemente admirar Espana dehe vana- 

proud) The many precipices which are before 

gloriarse precipicio estdn {delante de) 

us, and into which we (so frequently) fall, are so 
en tantas veces son otras 

many admonitions for our good conduct. The time 

tanias) conduta 

w^hich . we take (in forming) plans for our fu- 
pasamos formando plan para fu- 

ture conduct^ or which we employ in the sad 
condiicta empleamos triste 

recollection of past events, is, generally, time 
inemoria pasado caso es generalmente tiempo 

lost. 
per dido 

RULE XXXIII. 

The relative, must, in Spanish, be always expressed^ 
although, it is, in English, sometimes implied: for ex- 
ample ; "'La carta que vmd. escri^fo," the letter [tvhicli] 
you wrote. "Z(?5 eventos que hemes visto en este sigld^ 



284 SYNTAX. 

son increiblcs,^^ the events, [whic/i] we have seen in 
this age, are incredible. 

Mte 1. A preposition, is, ia Spanish, always placed before 
the relative pronoun, which it governs: for instance; if we 
translated literally "the man I spoke to," it would not be under- 
stood. It would be necessary to include the relative, and place 
the pronoun before it; thus, "The man to whom I spoke," el hom- 
bre a quien yo kahle. Tlie house I live in; "the house in ivhich I 
live," la casa en que mro. The persons I am with; — "The per- 
sons with xvhoml am"— /as personas con quienes estoi. 

EXERCISES. 

Method and regularity in the things we cDmmit 

m$todo regidaridad cosa aprendenws 

to memory, are necessary, (in order to make them take) 
de memoria son necesario para que tomen 

more effectual possession of the mind and 

eficiente — eyitendimiento 

abide there long. Those lessons we 

{queden imprimidas en el mucho tiempo) las leccion 
learn by experience, (although dearly bought,) are 

aprendemos esperiencia aimque caras son 

the best. The advice a person asks, is to receive 
consejo persona pide es para recibir 
approbation. 
aprobacion 

{Note 1.) Moses was the instrument God 
Moises era instrumento 

(made use of) to deliver the Israelites. If the wiles 

se sirvio para librar a Israelita estratagema 

a general has recourse to, be successful, they 
= tiene recurso (tienen buen acierto) 



SYNTAX. 285- 

(are considered*) mighty efforts of human genius. 

se consideran grande esfuerzo humano ingenio 

The temptations we daily fall into, (ought to) 

tentadon diariamente caemos en deben 
convince us of the dangers the world we live 

£onvencer peligro mimdo vivimos 

in, is surrounded with. 
estd redeado de 

RULE XXXIV. 
When, in English, a personal pronoun in the third 
person is before the relative li^ho, or that; the personal 
pronoun, is, in Spanish, rendered by the corresponding 
article, and the relative by que; thus: 
He who, El que. 
She that. La que. 
They or those who, Los or las que. 

EXAMPLES. 

•■^El que es agradable de natural^ tiene unhuen don,'"' 
he who is agreeable by nature, has a good gift. "La 
que pasa su tiempo en el estudio, es mas util, que las 
que le pasan en ninerzas,^^ she ivho spends her time 
in study, is more useful than those who spend it in 
trifles. 

EXERCISES. 

Those who complain of the pains they suffer, 

[se quejan) trabajo sufren 

torget those they have occasioned. They 

[se olvidan de) los han Dcasionado 

wlio till the fields, says Olivia, are not the slaves 

cultivan campo dice son esclavo 

of us who dwell in the cities, but our parents, since 

habitamos ciudad sino padre (pues que) 

■^Seepage 264, note (2.) 



r286 SYNTAX. 

the J support us. He who does not know what (to 

muntienen t sabea que 

apply himself to) during his youth, (will not know) 
aplicarse durante su juventud no sabrd 

what (to do) in his (old age.) Those who praise us. 

hacer su vegez cdaban 

wish our favour; those who correct us, our good. 
desean favor corrigen Men 

He who is always occupied, has^ always^ time. 

esta siempre ocupado tiene tiempo 

She who has beauty, should also endeavour (to 

tiene hermosura debe tambien procurar a te- 
have) knowledge. They that (know themselves,) 
ner conocimiento se conocen 

have more knowledge, than two thirds of 
tienen conocimiento (terceras partes) 

mankind. 
(genero hicmano.) 

INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.* 

By interrogative pronouns, it is understood, the rela- 
tive pronouns, when used to ask a question. 
RULE XXXV. 

In questions, ivho, is invariably translated by quien; 
which, by cual^ — and what, by que. 

J^ote 1. Cuyo, [whose,] in asking a question, is very frequently 
rendered by de quien [of whom;] as, "(jDe quien [cuyo] es este 
fradoV' whose is this lawn? "^-De quien [cnyas] son aquellas iellas 
manzanasV' whose are those fine apples. 

J^ote 2. If a preposition govern the interrogative pronoun, the 
answer must be preceded by the same preposition: as, "dDe que 
mundV* "de calentura,^^ of what did she die? a fever. "^-Contra 
quien 'pdearonV' "contra Pedro,'''' against whom did they fight? 
Peter. 

* See page 79. 



»YNTAX. 287 

EXERCISES. 

Who is that man that (would not relieve) the poor 

es aquel no socorreria pobre 

(being able to do it. ) Which of the commandments 

pudiendo mandamiento 

(have we not sinned) against.* Who is man, but 

no hemos pecado contra es sino 

an image of God, placed on this world by him 

iindgeti Dios puesto este mundo 

(that he might worship him) and afterwards enjoy 
para que le ado rase despues gozase 

the blessings of heaven. 

felicidad cielo 

{Note J . ) Whose fault (will it be) if a man (is to 

culpa sera ha de 

be deprived of seeing) the face of God in the next 

estar privado de ver cara otro 

world .^ If Adam and Eve were the parents of 

Mam Evafueron padre 

mankind, whose sons are we? Oh beautiful and 

[genero himiano) lujo — hermoso 

charming meadows, whose thousand kinds of 
encantador prado mil especie 

vegetables refresh the air, whose silver streams 

refrescan aire plateado arroyo 

glide through the vales ! under whose 

{d paso lento van por medio de) valle bajo 

protection (are ye?) 
' estais 

{Note 2.) Whom are we continually offending? 
estamos continuamente ofendiendo 

* The student must always be careful to place the preposition 
before the relative which it governs. See page 284; rule xxxiii- 
note 1. 



288 SYNTAX. 

God. Whom did* the Israelites murmur against? 
t Israelita murmuraban contra 

Moses. What was the law written on? two tables. 
Moises estaba lei escrito en tdbla 

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, t 

OBSERVATION. 

Demonstrative pronouns, demonstrate or show some person or 
thing. In the Spanish language they are, 

For the masculine: este, this; ese, that; aquel, that. 

For the feminine: esta^ this; esa^ that; aquella, that. 

For the plural: masculine, estos; esos; aquellos. 
feminine, estas; esas;^ aquellas. 

The demonstrative pronoun, like the article, has the neuter 
gender. It refers, precisely, to the same kind of words or sen- 
tences as the neuter pronoun lo — see observation, p. 267, 268, 269. 

The neuter demonstrative pronouns are: esto, this; eso, that; 
fiquello, that. 

AGREEMENT AND USE OF DEMONSTRATIVE 
PRONOUNS. 
RULE XXXVI. 

The demonstrative pronouns, like adjectives, agree 
with the noun which thej demonstrate, show, or point 
out, in gender, number and ca«e. 

Este^-aX &c. may be translated by this and ese-a, &c. 
aquel-la^ &c. by that; as, "Fo admiro muchisimo esta 
obra^^^ I admire this work very much. "Dame ese libra 
que esta en la mesa,^^ give me that book, which lies on 
the table. "Dale aquella cartera,^^ give him that let- 
ter-case. 

* See page 179. 

t See pages 79, 80. 

I Wken the demonstrative este, and ese, precede the adjective 
otro, [other] the adjective and pronoun art both joined, and form a 
single word: as, este, estotro; esta^ estotra; ese, esotro; estos,estotros,kc. 



8YNTAX. 289 

EXERCISES. 

This is a most useful* exercise to lead boys into a 
util egercicio infundir a ninos t 
complete and thorough knowledge of what they are 
completo perfecto coyiocimiento estan 

doing. Are these, thoughts, Telemachus ! worthy 
haciendo son pensamiento Telemaco digno 

of the son of Ulysses? (There is) a very great inequality! 
hijo hai desigualdad 

among men as to their internal endowments, 
enfre (en cuant a) interior prenda 

and their external conditions in this life. Those evils 

esterior vida mat 

of which thou complainest, are caused by those pleasures 

quejas son causado placer 

to which (tliou didst give thyself up.) That is to what 

te entregaste 
I never sliall consent. Tliat is a property which most:|: 

consentire propiedad 

men have or which they may attain. That poverty 
tiene?! pueden obtener pobreza 

of thine, and those misfortunes of his, proceeded from 

dasgracia procedieron 

ihe same cause. 
inismo causa 

"^Most, now, is not used to compare; it must, therefore, be 
translated by mid, or adding the termination isimo, to the adjec- 
tive 'ltd. See rule xs., and its reference, page 242, reference *. 

t See note 3, page 223. 

I See how most is translated in cases like the above, page 242, 
uote 1. 

25 



;.29() SYNTAX. 

OBSERVATION. 

As that, cannot be indiscriminately translated by est, or aqueL 
it is necessary to state, that este, denotes proximity; ese, moderate 
distance; and agiteZ, remoteness: as, este libra, this book (here): 
ese libro, that book (there); aquel libra, that book (yonder.) 

When these pronouns relate to time, este denotes time present; 
ese time past; and aquel time still further removed from the pre- 
sent: as, "JSsfe hombre que ves, ese hombre que has vista hoi, y aqueJ 
hombre que vimos las semana pasada, son paritntes mios,'''' this man 
whom you see, that man whom you have seen to-day, and the ane 
whom you saw last week, are relations of mine. 

RULE XXXYII. 
AVhen, in English, the personal pronouns he, she, they 
or those, being in the nominative or objective case, pre- 
cede a relative pronoun governed bj a verb* or prepo- 
sition, the personal pronouns are, in Spanish, rendered 
by the corresponding demonstratives; and the English 
relative, invariably, by quien; Examples; ''He ivhom 
we worship, is eternal," aquel a quien adoramos es- 
eterno. ''They'''' [or those] "of whom we spoke, have 
arrived," aquellos de quienes habldmos han llegado. 
"She whom you taught dancing, is her cousin," aquella 
a quien V7nd. enseho a bailar, es su hermana. ''He im- 
mediately banished those against whom, any complaint 
was made;" el al momento desterraba at aquellos con- 

* Whenever the English relative is governed by a verb, the 
personal pronoun may also be translated by the corresponding 
article. When this takes place, que is used instead of quien; as, 
"iie lohom we worship," may be rendered by "Aquel a quien 
adoramos,'''' or El que adoramos. "The tyrant punishes those whom 
he fears," by "£Z tirano castiga a aquellos a quienes teme," or El 
tirano castiga a las que teme. 

f The proposition d, must always be placed before the article, 
or the demonstrative, when the English personal pronoun, for 
which they have been translated, is governed by a verb. 



SYNTAX. £91. 

tra qiiienes se hacia la menor que] a. "1 am endeavour- 
ing to find out Imn by whom we were robbed," procuro 
encontrar a aquel por quien fuimos robados. "The 
tyrant is, at all times, ready to punish those whom he 
fears," el tircmo en todos tiempos estd pronto para cas~ 
tigar a aquellos a quienes teme. ""We are only suspi- 
cious of him in lohoin nobody reposes any confidence;" 
solo sospechamos a aquel en quien nadie pone confianza. 

cVofe 1. When the English pronouns, /le, s/ie, f/iey, or t/wse, are 
In the objective case, governed by a verb or a preposition, and 
precede a relative pronoun* in the nominative case; they may, 
m Spanish, be either translated by the corresponding indefinite 
article, or demonstrative pronoun: for instance: -'We ought to 
reward him ivho labours for our country," debemos recomjyensar al 
que [or a aquel que,} trahaja por la patria. "We must love them 
'.cho hate us," debemos amar a los que [or a aquellos que,] nos abor- 
recen. "Say to those [feminine] %cho have spread this rumour, that 
it is false," Ji a las que [or a aquellas que,] han esparcido ete rumor 
que es falsa. "We inform those who wish to attend the lectures, 
&c." a los que [or a aquellos que,] desean atender las lecturas se lesf 
hace seber, <^*c. 

EXERCISES. 

He whom (every body) fears, must fear (every body.) 
todos temen debe temer a todos 
Those whom adversity has not tested, have seen the 

adversidad ha probado han visfo 
world but on one side. Those with whom (no body) 
mundo solo de un^ lado nadie 

* In this case, the relative pronoun must always be rendered 
by que. 

t For a perfect knowledge of this manner of construction, the 
student is referred to .observation, page 261, and particularly to 
the third and fourth paragraphs of page 262. 



^29£ SYNTAX. 

of good character associates, have some deficienc\ 

cardcter (tiene trato) tiene alguna falta 
or vice. She whom (every body) admires, must pos- 
vicio nadie admira debe po- 

sess something more than exterior excellencies. They 
seer algo esterior escelenria 

by whom we have been visited this morning, are very 

hemos sido visitado manana son 
accomplished gentlemen. He against whom they had 
pulido caballero contra tenian 

so many prejudices, has (proved to be) a man of 

preocupacion ha tnostrado son 

integrity: and those on whom they placed unbounded 

Men en pusieron ilimitada 

confidence, have been traitors. We like^ better^ 

conjianza han sido traidor deseamos (mas Men) 

(to see) those on whom we confer benefits, than those 

ver a conferhnos favor 

from whom vv^e receive them. 
de recibimos 

(Note 1.) Men like those who like men. 
quieren quieren a 

(Suavity of manners) towards those whom we 

un modo suave hacia 

consider our inferiors, is the only manner 

consideramos es unico medio 

of drawing the distinction. It too frequently 
hacer distincion [sucede con demasiadu 

happens that those who wallow in pleasures, 
frecuencia) (se ensenegan) placer 

forget them who cannot supply their absolute 
■se olvidan de [no pueden) suplir absoluta 



SYNTAX. 293 

necessities. (Should we not call) an enemy to* tlie 
menester no llamariamos de 

republic, him who (should violate) the laws? (Should 
republica violas e lei no 

we not call) a friend to humanity him who (should 
llamaricmios amigo hv.manidad se 

sympathize with) the sufferings of men. and relieve 
compadeciese de trabajo socorriese 

their necessities? Politeness, (independently of) 

miseria urbanidad ademcts de 

(its pleasing) (every body,) renders him- who practises 
gustar a todos hace practlcQ 

it, (pleased with himself J) 
estar satisfecho en si 

RULE XXXVIII. 
The latter is generally translated este, and the former 
ese, or aquel in the corresponding gender and number: 
as, "Virtue and vice produce different effects; the for- 
mer, makes men happy, the latter, makes them misera- 
ble," la virtud y el vicio, producen efectos dlferentes; 
esa or aquella, hace felices a los hombres, este los hace 
desdichados. 

Jfote 1. When that^ being followed by of or which, refers to a 
noun already mentioned, it is rendered by the Sparash article in 
the corresponding number and gender; as, "In his house and in 
that of the earl," en su casa y en la del conde. "I extracted it from 
this book, and that which I bought," lo estrone de este libro y del 
que compre. 

J^ote 2. That is, when used in the sense of namely, is translated 
esto es, as, '-He made us alight at an inn, which is at the entrance 
of the village, that is, a little out of it," hlzoi.os apear enun mesont 
que esid a la tnirada del lu%ar, eslo es, un pocofuera de el, 

* See page 220, reference *, 



£94 SYNTAX. 

EXERCISES. 

As was bis life, so was his death, he edified, a?^ 
como file vida asi fue miierte edijico 

much in the latter, as he had edified in the former. 

habia edijicado 
The Greek and Latin languages are both very elegant. 
griego latin idioma son elegante 

but the former surpasses the latter in richness, and 
jjero sob resale d riqueza 

copiousness. Sophocles and ^^schylus were great 
copiosidad Sofodes EsquUes eran grandes 

tragic poets, the latter was distinguished by a rich 
trdgico poeta era distinguido rico 

fancy, and the former by a profound judgment. 
fantasia pro/undo juicio 

{iVote 1.) The object of elegance is to please; that 
oh get elegancia es t agradar 
of eloquence is to persuade. This palace, and that 

etociiencia es t persuadir palacio 

which I showed you,* are the king's. t 
ensene son 

{Note 2. ) The first thing which I did was to leave 

hice fue t dejav 
the mule at discretion, that is, (to go) at the pace 

fiiida d quefuese d paso 

she liked. Man always ought to have in view 

{que quisiera.) debe t iener en mira 

*See vmd., page 249. 

t See how the possessive case is translated in Spanish: rule 
xiii., page 219, 



SYNTAX. 295 

he is an accountable being, that is, he must die and 

es responsable ser debe morir 

answer for his actions in the day of judgment. 
(respond er por) t dia del juicio 

INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

The indefinite pronouns are: imoi-os; alguien; al- 
guno^-os; ncidie; ninguno\-os; rtmcho\-os; algo', nada; 
todoi-os; ambos;! entrambos;^ varios;\ cada; tal-es; 
otro\-os; qidnquiera; ciudquiera; ciicdesqidera. 

The manner in which the above pronouns are con- 
strued in English, will be shown in the following rules: 

(1.) One^ is rendered by uno; as, "One does not know 
what to think," no sabe uno que pensar. 

(2. ) Somebody^ some one, any body, any one, are ren- 
dered by alginen or by alguno, in the singular^ as, 
•'Has any body said it.^ ^lo ha dicho alguien.'^ ''Some 
one may have said it," sd^uno picede haberle dicho, 

J^ote 1. When any body or any one means any body whatever, 
we translate it in the same manner as xihoever. 

J^ote 2. Some one or any one being followed by of, must never 
De translated alguien, but alguno; as, "Alguno de ellos,^^ some one of 
them. 

(3.) Nobody, no man, no one, not any body, not any 
one, is construed nadie, or ningimo in the singular; as, 
"He fears nobody, ^^ a nadie feme. "I see no one,^^ a 
ninguno veo. 

(4.) Something, any thing, is algo; as, "Hast thou 
any thing to say to me?" ^tienes algo que decirmeP 
"I had something to tell thee," tenia algo que contarte, 

t When these pronouns refer to a feminine noun, they change, 
like adjectives, their terminations into a, or as. 

In the arrangement of the indefinite pronouns, we have follow- 
ed Mr. McHenry. 



296 SYNTAX. 

Kote 1. In their plural, they must be literally translated; aS; 
"^^ algunas eosas que me digustdron,''^ I saw some things which dis- 
gusted me. 

(5.) Nothing, 7iot any thing, is translated na</«:,' as, 
'^Not any thing he said convinced her," nada de lo que 
dijo la convencio. "His entreaties availed nothing,^' 
nada import dron sus suplicas. 

J\''ote 1. Algo and nada^ when used as substantives, admit a noun 
after them preceded by de; as, ^^iHai algo de nuevo?^'' is there any 
thing new? "Su hermano de vmd. tiene algo de poeta,'''' your brother 
is something of a poet. 

(6.) So7i2e, or any, is rendered by alguno in both 
numbers, or bv unosi as, "I want books, have you any?"^^ 
me faltan libros iJiene vmd. algunos? "Do you know 
any of these ladies?" ^Conoce vmd. d algunas de estas 
senoras? "I know som^," conozco d unas. 

(7.) No)ie, not any, by ninguno; examples: ''Ninguna 
de estas senoras es la hija casada,^^ none of these ladies, 
is the married daughter. "^^ ninguno le occurrio que 
podia ser aquella una Jiccion,^^ it did not occur to any 
that the whole might be a fiction. 

(8.) Whoever, ivhosoever, whichever, or whichsoever, 
are translated quienquiera que, or cualquiera que, in 
both numbers^ as, '' Whoever thou mayest be," quien-- 
quiera que seas. '^Whoever may come," cualquiera 
que venga. "To ivhomsoever you meet," a cualquiera 
que vmd. encuentre. 

J\fote 1. Cualquiera very frequently loses the last vowel in both 
numbers, but this never happens, except Avhen it is followed by 
some noun with which it a2:rees; as, cualquier hombre, cualquier 
cosa, cuaksquier medios, cualesquier causas. 

(9. ) Whatever, or whatsoever, must be expressed by 
cualquier cosa que; as, '^Whatever I say," cualquier 



i 



SYNTAX. 297' 

cosa que digo. "TVhatsoever thou mayest see," ciial- 
quier cosa que veas. 

J^ole 1. Whatever, when used in the sense of all which, is gene- 
rally expressed by todo lo que\ as, "He did whatever they bade 
him," hizo todo lo que le manddron- 

(10.) Another, other, others, is rendered by otro in 
both numbers^ as, "Send me another^ mdndarne otro. 
^'These books are dear, but I have others cheaper," es- 
tos libros so?i caros, pero tengo otros mas baratos. 

J^ote 1. When the possessive case of these pronouns, is very 
vaguely used; that is, when it ia employed as in opposition to one^s 
own only, it is then resolved into the Spanish adjective ageno: as, 
•'JVb codicies los bienes agenos," do not covet another''s wealth. 
■"Me ecsortdron d que no tomase lo ageno contra la voluntad de m 
dueno,'''' they exhorted me not to take the property of another, 
against the will of its owner. 

(11.) Each other is translated imo otro; and one ano- 
ther, linos otros; with or without the article, and with 
the corresponding preposition placed between them: as, 
of each other, el uno del otro, or imo de otro. "The 
husband and wife love each other; but the sons and 
daughters, hate one another, '^'^ el marido y la muger se 
aman uno a otro; pero los hijos y las hijas se aborrecen 
los linos a los otros. 

(12.) Both is dmbos, and several is varios; as, "Have 
you any opportunities?*' ^tiene vmd. ocasiones? "Yes, 
I have several,^'' si, tengo varias. '^Neither of them 
has written, because both are ill," ni el uno ni el otro 
ha escrito, porque ambos estan malos. 

J^ote 1. Both may be also rendered uno y otro; as, "Uno y otro 
me gustan,'''' 1 like them both. 

{\S.) 3Iuch, is construed i^fwc/io, and many, muchos; 
as, "Hast thou any money?" ^tienes dinero? "I have 



298 SYNTAX. 

not wuch,^^ no tengo mucho. ''Yoii tliink I have no 
troubles, but I have many^^^ piensa vmd. que no tengo 
pesadumbres pero tengo muchas. 

(14.) Each^ when alone, is cada cual^ or cadauiio; as, 
•'I have bought six books, each in a different language," 
he comprado seis libros, cada uno en tin idioma dife- 
rente. *'They will be rewarded, each according to his 
merit," sermi premiados, cada cual segun su merito, 

(15.) Each, or every, if, when joined to a noun, they 
be synonymous, are expressed by cada; as, *'The 
daily bread, denotes the bread of e«cAday," el pan cuo- 
tidiano, quiere decir el pan de cada dia. ''He accom- 
panied every interrogatory with a very low bow," cada 
pregunta la acompahaba con una profunda reverencia. 

(16.; Every, when not used in the same sense of each, 
is translated by the plural of todo in both numbers 5 as, 
''Every one lighted his candle, and each retired to his 
room," encendieron todos siis velas y cada uno se re- 
tiro a su cuarto, ''I examined every one^'' ecsamine 
a cada uno de por si hasta que los hube ecsaminacU d 
todos. "He gave them every thing he had," les did 
todo lo que tenia. 

(17.) Ml is translated todo in both numbers^ as, "^// 
that glitters is not gold," todo lo que brillu iio es oro. 
"I invited many, but they did not all come," convide d 
mucho s, pero no vinieron todos.* . 

* Should the student, while occupied in writing; the exercises 
on the above pronouns, think the rules too numerous to be re- 
membered; he may, by referring to them, avoid any difficulty, 
which, from this circumstance, may arise. As the construction 
of each English indefinite pronoun, has been separately explain- 
ed; and in the Exercises, these parts of speech have been printed 
in Italic characters as in the Rules, the research cannot be at- 
tended with much difficulty. 



SYNTAX. ^299 

EXERCISES. 

One ought not to be judge and plaintift* in the 

dehe ser juez demandador 

same cause. -No one is free from death. Fickle 

mismo es libre muerte variable 

minds begin many things and finish yione. Who- 

genio empiezan cosa no acaban 

soever despises the poor, is despicable. One sows 

desprecia a pobrees despreciable siembra 

the seed, another gathers the fruit. Men ought 

semilla coge fruto deben 

to love one another. Many (deceive themselves,) 

amarse d se engahan 

wishing to deceive others. The world is a stage, 

queriendo t enganar a mundo es teairo 

in which every one plavs his part. All men, said 

represent a pap el dijo 

he, wish to (appropriate to tliemselves) the wealth of 

desean t apropiarse bien 

another. Consider, man, that after thy death all 

considera despues de muerte 

thy hopes (will have vanished,} not even one (will 
esperanza desvanecerdn ni aun que- 

remain) to thee. Among authors (there are) some, who 
dara entre hai 

copy literally from one another, and others, who 
copian literalmente 

make theirs the thoughts of others. Solomon was 
hacen pensamiento Salomon era 

the most fortunate, and Job the most unfortunate of 
feliz ' — - infeliz 



300 SYNTAX. 

men: yet both declare that all is vanity. 

sin embargo dedaran es vanidad 

Every thing God has created proclaims his omnipotence. 

ha creado prodama omnipotenda 

How terrible death (will be) to any one who has 

man miierte sera. d (se haya 

neglected his salvation. To receive from no one 

descuidado de) ___ no redbir 

is inhumanity; from many, meanness; and from all, 

es inhumanidad vileza 

greediness. If idleness is the mother of every 

avarida holgazaneria es madre 

vice, laziness is the enemy of every virtue. Nothing 
vicio indolendaes enemigo 

protects us against the persecutions of malignity; 
protege contra 



nothing shelters us from the darts of envy. 

[nos pone d cuhierto) garra envidia 

Every body complains of the badness of his memo- 

{se quejan) imperfecdon 

vj, but nobody of his judgment. He who likes no- 

juido quiere d 

body, is much more unhappy than he whom nobody 

es infeliz 

likes. Whatever ignominy we (may have) incurred, 
quiere ignominia que hayamos inciirrido 

it is almost always in our power to retrieve it. 
t estd cuasi siempre poder el borrar 

How can we expect that another (should keep) our 
como podemos esperar guarde 

secret, when it is more than we can do ourselves. 
secreto t es podemos hacer 

No man can (answer for) his courage v/ho has* never* 
jmede asegurar valor ha (nunca se) 



SYNTAX. sot 

been in danger. Whoever commits an injustice, 
ha visto) peligro " cornets injusticia 

exposes himself to receive another. Of all* foibles 
{se espone) a t recibir flaqueza 

that which least becomes a man, is vanity. Who- 

menos {cae hien a) es 

soever (shall persevere) until the end (shall be saved.)! 

perseverare hasfa Jin se salvard 
Whatever measures the murderer (may take) to flee 
medida asesino tome para huir 

from himself, crime always will accompany him. 

si mismo delito siempre acompahard 
The dead (will be raised,) and every one (will appear) 

muerto resucitardn parecerd 

before the judge, who (will reward) each (according to^" 

ante juez premiard segun 

his works. 
obra 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES OF ALL THE PROXOUXS. 

The Spanish waiters inform us, that the number 

escritor informan numero 

of those who perished on the side of the Arabs, 

jierecieron de parte Arabe 

amounted to one hundred and tvrenty-five thousand, 

sidjio d 
while they assure us, that (there were not) 

[y al mismo tiempo) aseguran no hubo 

*All, before a plural noun, requires the article in Spanish; as, 
"Of a/i passions," de todas las pasiones. 

t This, and all similar expressions, may be translated by the 
verb sevj or by the reciprocal pronoun se. See page 264, note (2.) 
26 - 



30a SYNTAX. 

more than twentj-five Christians slain. The exercise 

cristiano 7nuerto uso 

of reason, appears as little in some sportsmen, as in 

razon parece poco algunos cazador 
the beasts which thej sometimes hunt, and by which 

hestia algunas veces cazan 

they are sometimes hunted. Take handsful of ashes 
son cazado toma pun ado ceniza 

of the furnace, and (let Moses sprinkle them) towards 
homo espdrcelos Moises hdcia 

heaven (in the sight) of Pharaoh; and (they shall become) 
cielo a la vista Faraon se convertirdn en 

small dust. The fair sex, whose task is not 
menudo polvo hermoso secso tarea es 

to mingle in the labours of public life, have their 
t mezdarse negocio publico vida tienen 

own part assigned them to act. Humility is 

propio parte sen alado t {para desempenar) humildad es 
one of the most amiable* virtues that we can possess. 
amable virtud podemos poseer 

None more impatiently^ suffer^ injuries, than they 

(con mas impaciencia) sufre agravio 
who are most forward in doing them. Flattery, the 

esian pronto hacer adulacion 

nature of whicht is to deceive and betray, (should 
propriedad es t enganar vender se 

be avoided) as the poisonous adder. It is remarkable 
debe evitar ponzonoso vibora t es notable 

that he is continually endeavouring to serve us, 

esta continuamente esforzdndose en servir 
notwithstanding our ingratitude. Adorable Father of 

a pesar dc ingi atitud 

* See rule xx., page 242, f See note f, page 280. 



SYNTAX. 303 ' 

nature! Avho does not here perceive and admire 
lUiturahza {Jiai aqui que 7io perciva) admire 

thy wisdom. I am the Lord thj God, who teaches 
sahiduria sol Senor ensena 

thee to profit, and who leads thee, bv the way 

d aprovecharfe conduce sendee 

thou shouldst go. Religion raises men above them- 

debes ir {hace a) (mcis de lo 

selves: irreligion (sinks them beneath the brutes:) 
que son) ireligion los hace menos que los hrutos 
this binds them down to a poor pitiable speck 
heclui t a (pobre y lastimoso) pedazo 

of perishable earth, that opens to them* a prospect 
perecedero tierra ahre perspectiva 

to the skies. (More rain falls) in the first' two^ 

(a las alias regiones) mas Ilueve primero 

summer* months, ^ than in the first two winter 

(del verano) mes {del invierno) 

ones,; but it makes a greater shov/ in the earth, in the 

t hace mayor vista tierra 

latter, than in the former, because there is a much 

t ft (es rnucho 
slower" evaporation.^ He who directs the thunder, 

menos rdpida) . dirige trueno 

is the friend and all-consoling hope of the 

es ami go [la esperanza mas consoladora) 
Christian. The works of - nature, ever superior to 

cristiano ohra naturaleza siempre d 

those of art, are- particularly so^ from their admi- 

arte son particularmente lo por 

rable variety, which always aifords new subjects of 

variedad siempre ofrece espectdculo 

"^ For the construction of to them, "jee 3d person, page 237, 



304 - SYNTAX. 

worxder and pleasure. We can^ neither^ attribute 
maravilla gusto podemos ni atribuir 

sensibility to plants, nor deny it to them,* with 
sensibilidad planta ni negar 
certainty. What can equal the perfec- 

certidumbre (que es lo que sepuede igucdr con) 

tion of the works of God, and who can describe the 

obra puede describir 

infinite power which is displayed in them. Read the 
infinito poder se demuestra lee 

accounts of those vast treasures of knowledge which 
reladon vasto tesoro erudicion 

some of the dead have possessed, and some of the 

muerto han poseido 
living do possess. Vv^hen (it v/as said)t to Anaxagoras: 
vivo t poseen cuando se dijo a Anajagoras 
"The Athenians have condemned you J to die;" (he 

Jlteniense han condenado os a morir 
said again) "and nature them."§ Cato said, "the 
respondi6 naturaleza a Caton dijo 

way to keep good acts in memory, is to refresh 
modo de guardar ohra memoria es t refrescar 

them with new.'^ A gamester, tliell greater master 
con niievo jugador mas hdbil 

he is in his art, the worse man he is. He** sleeps well 
es arte pear t t es duerme bieu 

* See (3,) page 265, and rule xxv., page 253. 
t See (2,) page 264. 

I See Fos, page 249. The objective case of ros, is os. 
§ See note * page 261, 

II See rule xviii., page 239. 

** He, or she, used in the above manner, is translated by tkt 
•lemonstrative pronoun. See rule xxxiv., page 285. 



SYNTAX. 305 

who does not feel that he sleeps ill. O! what a mige- 

t siente dnerme mal — 

rable thing it is to be hurt bj (such a one) of whom 

cosa es [ser injuriadd) uno 

it is in vain (to complain.) Those who want friends 
es vano quejarse necesitan amigo 

to whom to open their griefs, are cannibals, of their 

.t abrir pesar son canibal 

own hearts. All that which is past is as a dream; and 

t corazon todo espasadoes sueno 

he that hopes or depends upon time coming, (dreams 
espera se Jia de venidero suefia 

awaking.) 
despierto 

OF VERBS. 

OBSERVATION. 

It was already observed, in Part III, Syntax, page 191, that, one 
of the concords of the Spanish language was between the Subject 
and the Verb. Now, we say, that this concord or agreement is 
of number and person. Thus, for instance, if the person of a 
verb be first, the verb itself must be first, if second, second, &c. 
The same will take place with regard to the number. If a no- 
minative be in the singular it will require its verb also in the sm- 
gular, and if in the plural, the plural. See Etymology, pages 
SI, 82. 

TENSES OF VERBS.* 

PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE. 
RULE XXXIX. 
This tense denotes present, or actual existence, that 
is, it represents an action or event as taking place at 

*See the division of moods and tenses in Etymology, pages 
«2, 83. 

26* 



S06 SYNTAX. 

the time in which it is mentioned^ as "Yo aprendo,-^ 
I learn. '^Tu estadias,^^ thou studiest. "Ella yiene,'' 
she comes. '^Vmd. canta,^^ you sing. ''Ellas esfan 
perdidos,^^ they are lost. 

(J^ote 1.) The present tense likewise expresses a character, 
disposition, custom, quality, &c. at present existing; as, "iiZe is an 
able man,'''' es hombre de habilidad* '^Los Espanoles duermeu des- 
pues de comer,'''' the Spaniards sleep after dinner. "He is an irras- 
cible man,^'' es hombre irrascible. 

{Jfote 2.) The present, as well as any other tense, may, like in 
jEnglish, be formed with the gerund and the verb to be; as, "£/Zos 
p.stdn durmiendo,'''' they are sleeping. '^Msotros estamos llorando,'" 
we are weeping. 

(Mote 3.) The present is used to express an action which is in a 
state of progression, or which is continued with occasional inter- 
missions; as, "£i escribe una novela,'''' he is writing a novel. 'To- 
sotros haceis fortuna,'''' you are making a fortune. "Va al campo 
fodos las veranos, he goes to the country every s^ummei^. 

(Mte 4.) In animated historical narrations, this tense is some- 
times substituted for the imperfect tense; as, '■'■Puesta en armas la 
guarnicion opone trinchera sobre trinchera,''^ the garrison being un- 
der arms he puts entrenchment over entrenchment. '^Salido de 
aquel aprieto, se echa en otro,''^ having come out of that conflict, 
he throws himself into another. 

{Xote 3.) Sometimes the present is used to denote a future ac- 
tion; as, "/Si salgo esta semawa," if I go out this week. <'St el viene 
?ncnatta," if he comes to-morrow. 

EXERCISES. 

I am ill,"^ and she is well. They write! fre- 
es tor malo estarfueno escribir fre- 
quentlyj and read- seldom. * Some men (express 
cuentemente leer {rara vez) espre- 

* Ser and Estar, as well as haber and tener are considered as help- 
ing verbs. See the conjugation of them from page 85, to page 100. 

t The regular verbs are divided into three conjugations; the 1st 
ending in ar, the 2d in er, and the 3d ir. See from page 101, to 
page 108, 



SYNTAX. SOr 

themselves)^ with elegance, and others murder! their 
sarse con elegancia otris degollar 

language. The horses neigh, and the lions roar. 
klioma cabcdlo relinchar leon rugir 

{Notel.) The Anchorites live in th^e deserts. They 
Anacoreta vivir desierto t 
say that the Spaniards are grave, the French lively, 

DEciR Espahol ser Frances vivo 

and the English majestic. Captain± Torbellino 

Ingles magestuoso Capitan 

wants a footman, he is a choleric, fantastic, and 
necesitar lacayo ser colenco fantdstico 

brutal man, scolds incessantly, (swears at,) kicks, and 

grunir sin cesar jurar jjatear 

{is apt)§ (to maim,) his domestics. 
s-oLER estropear d criado 

[Note 2. ) They are selling!! every thing^ they have. 
estar vender tetier 

* This is a reflective verb- See the definition of this kind of 
verbs in page 82; and their conjugation, from page 119, to 121. 

jThe irregular verbs will be found printed in Italic charac- 
rERs, For their conjugations the student is referred to irregular 
verbs, from page 156, to page 164, and to the models after which 
they are conjugated. 

J Nouns denoting the dignity, profession, &c. take the article. 
See page 204, note 2. 

§ To he apt, or to be icont, soler. See the conjugation of this 
verb, page 170. 

II The gerund of verbs is formed by adding either ando or iendo 
to the radical letters of the Infinitive. See pages 107, and 108. 

If For a translation of any indefinite pronoun, the student is re^ 
ferred to pages 295, 296, 297 and 298. 



308 SYNTAX. 

Some erudite men are translating the Latin Classics. 
erudito estar traducir Latino cldsicos 

Men are speaking of war, and desire peace. 
estar hablar guerra desear paz 
(Note 3. ) He (walks out) every morning. They 
SALiR man ana 

study six hours every day. He may say with truth 
tstudiar hora dia (puede decir) con verdad 

that he secures the rice in his pot to every man in 

asegurar arroz en la olla de 
India. He is now on a great eminence, he can* 

estar ahora en alta eminencia poder 

never* exceed what he does (this day.) 
nunca esceder hacer hoi 

(Note 4.) He enters the territory of the peaceable 
entrar territorio apacible 

inhabitants^ he fights and conquers^ takes an 
habitante; pelear conquistar tomar una 

immense booty which he divides among his soldiers, 
imensidad de) botin dividir entire soldado 

and returns home to enjoy a vain and useless triumph. 
voLVER casa gozar vano inutil triimfo 
(Being stopped) by the first guard, he insists on seeing 

detenido primero guardia insistir en ver 

the monarch, they run to obtain his permission, and 

monarca correrpara obtener — 

return in order to conduct him to his presence. 
voL\iLB. {d Jin de) conducir d presencia 

(Noted.) I depart next* week^ for France. 

partir [que viene) semana para Francia 

I (shall,) (go away] the moment he comes. If he does 

iRSE al momento que llegar si 
Bot fight to-morrow, we are safe. 
pelear mahana estar salvado 



SYNTAX. 309 

IMPERFECT OF THE INDICATIVE. 

RULE XL. 
The imperfect tense denotes a former, but progressive 
state of existence I that is, it represents an action or 
event which was continued, and though progressively 
going on at a certain period, as far as we know, 
remains unfinished^ as, ''Iban a caballo, cuando los en- 
Gontramos,'''^ thej were riding when we met them. "El 
estaba malo entonces^^^ he was sick then. 

M)tel. Former customs or habits, as well as the character, 
disposition, or occupation of individuals no longer living, or 
belonging to persons now alive, but who no longer possess the 
character, disposition, &c. spoken of, are expressed by the imper- 
fect; as, ^^Las Senoras alemanas llevaban escofias que parecian torres,^* 
the German ladies wore (used to xoear) caps in the form of towers. 
"Ssneca razonaba y moralizaba 6ien," Seneca reasoned and mo- 
ralized well. "Su padre era teniente coronel, cuando mwno," 
his father was lieutenant colonel when he died. '*£n su mocedad 
era modesto, en sujuventud determinado, y en su vegez es sabio,^^ in 
his infancy he icas modest, in his youth resolute, and in his old 
age he is wise. 

EXERCISES. 

Orpheus with his lute, stopped the course of rivers, 

Orfeo con laud parar curso rio 

r aimed the tempests of heaven, and attracted the 

ahnar tempestad cielo atraer 

wild beasts) of the forest. Seated on his left, 

Jiej-a Jloresta sentados d la izquierda 

they admired the beauties of creation. The Avinds 

admirar hellezas viento 

blew gently, and the heavens presented a magni- 
soplar {con suavidad) cielo presentar magnU 



.310 ~ SYNTAX. 

ticent prospect. The temple was decorated* with 
jico perspectiva templo estar decor ar de 

every kind of precious jewels. 
especie precioso cdhaja 

{Note 1.) They came formerly very often. The 
VExiR d7-ites amemido 

ancients (used to be)t on couches at table. His 
antiguos tenderse sobre leclws a mesa 
grand-mother was very beautiful in her youth. 

abuela ser hennoso mocedad 
Demosthenes was eloquent, and Longinus sublime. 
Demostenes ser elocuente Longino 

PERFECT INDEFINITE. 

RULE XLI. 

This tense denotes former, but not progressive state 
of existence, that is, it represents an action or event as 
passed and finished^ as, '•'Llego ayer,^'^ he arrived yes- 
terday. "Ze hahle mioche,^^ I spoke to him last night. 

A^ofe 1. This tense is also used if the conjunctions cxtando, when: 
luego que, as soon as; dcspues que, after, &c. precede the verb; as, 
^Huego que llego,'''' as soon as he arrived. "C«a)i(/o rino," when 
he came. 

EXERCISES. 

They (behaved themselves) (at that period,) very 

comportarse entonces [con 

properly. The king did not pardon him. 

muchapropiedad) rei perdonar 

They (were found)* dead in the streets. A storm 

hallarse muerto calk torrente 

^Participles are formed by adding ado or ido to the radical let- 
ters of the infinitive. See pages 107 and 108. 

f The se added to the infinitive of reflective verbs, means one'?? 
self. See page 119. 

* Translate this by the pronoun se. See (2) page 264. 



8YNTAX. 



311 



of universal fire blasted everj field, consumed 

fuego abrasar cainpo consumir 

every house, destroyed every temple. Those who 

casa destruir femplo 

(were able) to evade this tempest fled to . the 

poDER t evifar tempestacl huir 

walled cities. When at last, he saw that (there 
murallado ciiidad por ultimo ver no 

was no) remedy, he confessed the truth. As soon 
hcd)ia remedio confesar verdad 

as they perceived him, they retired. 
percibir retirarse 

OBSERVATION*. 

The precediDg rules might, no doubt, be thought sufficient to 
obtain a perfect knowledge of the use of the Imperfect and P'>-tte' 
rite tenses. As, however, their distinction is, in some instances, 
so nice, that it even perplexes persons well versed in the gram- 
matical construction of various languages, we have considered it 
necessary to make the following observations; which, we hope, 
Aviil render these two tenses no longer a matter of difficulty. 

The Imperfect, denotes an action which was progressively going 
on at a certain period, of which the present time makes a part; 
leaving the mind in doubt, whether the action is still going on, or 
whether it was finally completed before the present time. For 
example; if we say, "he had no prospect to enter into the world;" 
we leave the mind at a loss to know whether he afterwards had, 
or had not prospect; or if he did, or did not enter into the world. 
This sentence should, therefore, be rendered by the Imperfect, 
thus: ' 'ningun prospecto tema. el de entrar en el mundo.''^ Ag^in, if 
we say, "he entertained his friends in a manner suitable to his situ- 
ation," we only convey the idea, that he lo as in the Aaiif of enter- 
taining his friends, &c. at a certain time, of which the present 
makes a part, without saying whether he continued this conduct 
or whether he put an end to it; and should, therefore, be trans- 
lated by the imperfect; as, "hospedaba, a sus aminos de un modo 
que sue sUuacionpedia. 



31-52 SYNTAX. 

The Perfect Indefinite or Preterite, on the other hand, denotes 
an action which was begun and comph;tely finished, before the 
present moment; therefore, this present moment, makes no part 
of the time in which the action was commeuced, continued, or 
finished. If we, then say, *'//ie Romans vanquished,'''' the meaning 
which we convey in these expressions, is, that the act of van- 
quishing was begun, and it remained entirely finished, at some 
period before the present time; it must, thtrefore, be rendered 
in Spanish by the Preterite, thus: '■Hos Romanos conquistaron." In 
this same mauner, the following examples; "After this he lifted 
up his head;" ''At this time the sound of music proclaimed the 
hour of repast;" "The old man went away sufficiently discontent- 
ed;" should be translated by the Preterite. For, the '■'■lifted up,''* 
^'procl aimed,'''' and "■went away,'''' express actions performed, with- 
out leaving the mind in any state of doubt, whether they were, 
or were not, continued; since they have been completely finished 
at a certain period before the present time. 

It is necessary to observe, that, in many instances, the render- 
ing of a sentence by the Imperfect, or Preterite, depends entirely 
on the meaning we wish to convey; thus, for instance, if one 
said, "The valley supplied its inhabitants;" meaning that the val- 
ley was, at a certain period, continually supplying its inhabitants, 
and that, for aught we know, it still continues to supply them; 
thus leaving the mind in a state of uncertainty, whether the sup- 
ply was continued or discontinued, or whether it is now termi- 
nated or not, he ought to translate it by the Imperfect; as, '■'■El 
valle suplia a sus hahitantes''^ But if in saying "The valley supplied 
its inhabitants," is meant to convey the idea, that the valley sup- 
plied them at one time, but now on account of the occurrence of 
some 'circumstances, it does not supply them any longer, the sen- 
tence must necessarily be rendered by the Preterite; as, "£i 
valle suplio a sus habitantes.''^ In this latter case, however, the 
sentence seems to be imperfect, and very often the expression, 
"6Mt now it is not so,^^ or any other equivalent, is supplied In this 
same manner the sentences, "He loved her;" "The sides of the 
mountains were covered with trees;" "The banks of the brooks 
, Avere diversified with floAvers;" "Every h]ast shook spices from the 
rocks; and every month dropped fruits upon the ground," can be 
translated by the Imperfect or Preterite. But we may always 



SYNTAX. 3 IS 

take for granted, that if no other words follow mis kind of sen- 
tences, expressing, in a positive manner, that the circumstances 
expressed in them, no longer exist, they must be rendered by the 
Imperfect. 

The Imperfect is, sometimes, very strongly marked m English. 
This is, Avhen the action is expressed by the verb to he and the 
present participle; thus, "He was going to Rome;" "He was form- 
ing a conspiracy against his country." In which cases, it is abun- 
dantly plain, that whether the action oi going or cons'piring is con- 
tinued, or was terminated, is totally unknown. It is, therefore', 
an unexceptionable rule, that when in English the action is ex- 
pressed in the above manner, it must always be translated in 
Spanish, by the Imperfect. 

When an action takes place whilst another was going on, the 
Preterite must also be used, for this reason, that this subsequent 
action is commenced, and concluded at once; for example, "Fo 
escrihia cuando llego,'''' I was writing when he arrived. It is clear 
that as soon as he arrived the action of arriving was ended. 

EXERCISES. 

Whilst the authors of all these evils were 

mimtras que alitor todo inal esta 

(gazing on) this menacing meteor which blackened 

mirando amenazante iiieteoro obscurecer 

all their horizon, it suddenl}^ burst, and 

horizonie {de repente) reveniar 

(poured down) (the whole of; its contents upon t!ie 

echar todo contenido en 

plains of the Carnatic. That great orator whom* 
ilanuras Carndtico orador 

you so muclit admired, preached yesterday the most 

admirar predicar ayer 
pathetic semionj I ever heard. The woods, says 
patetico — ^— jamas oir decir 

* See rule xxxi. page 280. 

t See note 1. page 236. 

\ See page 243, note * 

2r 



514 SYNTAX, 

Galatea, were before my companions. What wat 
ser antes companera ser 

it but the desire of glory that induced Csesar to pass 
t sino deseo gloria inducir Cesar apasar 

the Rubicon^ When we ' arrived at that place, we 

cuando llegar en lugar 

thought (we had been transported to) a terrestrial 
creer habiamos sido transportados a terrenal 

paradise. We were surrounded on all sides by 
paraiso estar circundado (de todos lados) por 

lofty mountains. Our attention was attracted by the 
alto montaha atendon estar atraer 

most exquisite scenery^ the birds in melancholy 
esqiiisito selvas ave inelancdlico 

harmony, sang the departure of the dayj and we 
harmonia cantar retirada dia 

full of delight and pleasure, insensibly 

lleno deleite placer insensiblemente 

(fell asleep)* at the^ sweet murmur of the river 
dormirse dulce murmuro rio 

which (glided at) our feet. 
pasar por 

PERFECT DEFiNITE. 

RULE XLII. 

This tense is used to denote an action which has been 
performed, or continued, during a certain space of time 
of which the present makes a partj as, "Yo he acabado 
mis ocupaciones por hoi,'''' I have finished my occupa- 
tions for to-day. "Za he querido desde que la i;i," I 
have liked her ever since I saw her. "Hemos visto 
muchas rnaravillas en este siglo,^^ we have seen many 
wonders in this age. 

* When an infinitive will be found under an enclosure, the infini- 
tive must be put in the tense above, or contained in the enclosure. 



.SYNTAX» 315 

CYote L This tense must be used to express the former actions 
oi individuals now living, if no particular time be mentioned; as, 

'Ha escrito varios obras escelentes,''^ he has ^yritten various excel- 
tent Avorks. If we said that it was in his youth he wrote these 
works, the chain which links the time when the works were writ- 
ten, with the present period, would be cut oft', and therefore 
the Preterite should be used; as, "Escribio v arias obras escelentes, 

n sii mocedad,'''' he lorote various excellent works in his youth. 

This is the principal distinction between the Preterite and Per- 
fect Definite. Both denote an action that has taken place; but 
the action expressed by the latter must necessarily be connected 
with the present time. The Preterite, however, may be used ou 
all occasions, provided there be a certainty that the action i* 
terminated. We may, therefore, say, "Ze vi, or le he visto hoi,"' 
I saw, or have seen, him to-day. "Le hable, or he hablado esto 
semana,''^ I spoke, or have spoken, with him this v/cek. '-Le vi. 
and not le he visto hace un mimito,'''' I saw him a minute ago. 

J>J*ote 2. The English Perfect Definite, is sometimes translated 
in Spanish, by the Present Indicative; thus, "It has been raining- 
for these two hours," it is two hours that (since) it rains, hace 
dos haras que llueve, o estd lloviendo. "I have been in London for 
these two years," it is two years that (since) I am in London. 
hace dos ahos que estoi en Londres. If the sentence be negative, the 
Perfect Indefinite is then used in Spanish; as, "Hace cualro ahof 
que no le he visto,^^ I have not seen him for the last four years. 
If the action be entirely terminated, we use the Preterite; asj 
*^hace dos anos que su j^adre murio,'''' his father has been dead these 
two years. 

EXERCISES. 

We have petitioned— we have remonstrated — we 
haber peticionar representar 

have supplicated — we have prostrated ourselves 

suplicar prostarse 

before tlie throne, and have implored its interposition. 

delante dc trono implorar 

Our petitions have been slighted^ our remon- 
— ^ — - ser menospreciar repre- 



3l(x SYNTAX. 

strances have produced additional violence and 
sentadon producir mas violencia 

insult, and v/e have been spurned from the foot of 
insidto ser echar pie 

the throne* Philosophers have made great disco- 
fiUsdfo haber hacer descubri- 

veries in the present age. God has imprinted in the 
mientos presente siglo estmnpar 

heart of man the love of liberty. 
corazon amor libertad 

(Note 1.) We have escaped many dangers through 
escapar peligro en 

life. He has done (a great deal of) good. I have 
vida hacer mucho bien 

travelled (very much) this year. 
viajar muchisimo ano 

{Note % ) (It is) now four years since he has 
hace cuatro que 

been with the army. He has been in the United 
estar con egercito hacer 

States for these five years. He has been gone for 

ana marchar 

the last ten months. They have not come to see 

meS VENIR d VER 

aie for three days, 
dia 

PLUPERFECT. 

RULE XLIII. 

This tense denotes an action which was concluded 
before another took place; that is, prior to some other 
lime specified in the sentence; as, "Ya habia leido d 

^ See page 188, notes * and f. 






SYNTAX. 317 

iibro cuando le compre,^'' I had already read the book 
when I bought it. "Habia acabado tni carta antes que 
el llego^'^^ I had finished my letter, before he arrived. 

J^oU 1 . The Pluperfect is translated by the Imperfect when- 
ever the first action is described as still going on at the time 
when the second took place; as, habla dos horas que yo estaba 
escriUendo cuando llego mi padre, I had been writing two hours 
when my father arrived: in which example, the verb being in 
the Imperfect tense, denotes that I Avas actually employed in 
writing at the time of my father's arrival. 

Mjte 2. It will be observed, that the Pluperfect is either the 
compound with the Imperfect or with the Preterite. The com- 
pound with the Preterite or as it may be called, Preterfect, is 
never used, but after the %vords despues que, after; asi que, as soon 
as; luego que, immediately after; cuando, when; no bien, no sooner 
than, &c. Examples: "cuando las hube oido a, todos, me marche,^^ 
when I had heard them all, I went away; '*«o bien lo hube dicho, 
cuando todo el pueblo esclamo;" &c. I had no sooner said it^ 
than all exclaimed, &c. 

EXERCISES, 

The clouds had almost disappeared when it 

7nibe liaber cuasl desaparecer cuando t 

began to rain. The sun had' already^ risen, ^ and 

EMPEZAR Hover sol haber levantarse 

the birds had' already^ saluted^ a new day, 

ave haber saludar el mievo 

when we departed. He had been ill before. 
cuando partir. estar malo antes 

{Note 1.) I had been waiting an hour, when the 
haber esperar 
messenger arrived. We had then been there 
mensagero llegar hacer entonces estar 

six days. 

(Note 2.) (No sooner) had he appeared, when every 
apenas parecer 



318 SYNTAX. 

one (knelt down.) When I had heard them all, iriv 

arrodiltarse huher oir (a todos) 

mind was more confused. As soon as silence 

etendimiento estar confuso silencio 

had been'^ restored, he began his speech. 
haber ser resiituir comenzar harengu 

FUTURE IMPERFECT. 

RULE XLIV. 

This future denotes an action which is yet to take 
place; as, ''•El sol saldra man ana,^^ the sun will rise 
to-morrow. ^'Corneremos a las tres,^^ we shall dine at 
three. 

EXERCISES. 

They will be there in time. What terms shall 
estar alii a tiempo palabra 

we find which (have not been) already exhausted? 

encontrar no se hay an ya usar 

Shall we resort to entreaty and humble supplication r 

SERviRSE de ruego humilde 

Shall we try argument.^ Besides we shall not 

PRO BAR argumento (ademas de eso) 
fight our battles alone. 
pelear hatalla solos 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

RULE XLY. 

This tense represents an action that is yet to take 

place, but will have taken place before or at the time 

>vhen another shall take place j as, '^Habre comido d 

hi una,p I shall have dined at one o'clock. "Yo h 

^ See note (2.) page 264. 



SYNTAX. 319~ 

habre escrito antes de ese dla,^^ I shall ha\e written to 
him before that day. 

^'bte 1. This English future, is, in some instances, rendered by 
the present tense in Spanish, when the completion of the first 
action, &c. seems to take place at the very point of time which 
is mentioned in the sentence; as, to-morrow I shall have lived in 
London two years, mahana hard dos aho:^ que yo vivo en Londres: 
that is the completion of my two years actual residence in Lon- 
don, will take place to-morrow; el aho que viene hard ciiico ahos 
que estan casados, nest year they icill have been married five years. 

J^ute 2. The Spaniards employ sometimes the future imperfect 
instead of the present, and the future perfect instead of the perfect 
definite, when they affirm something, either as present or past, of 
which they are not quite certain; as, ahora vendra de cenar, donde. 
el, y el que le guia, se habran emborrachado, he comes now (per- 
haps) from supping, where he, and the one that conducts him, 
have (probably) got drunk. Had the person who made the asser- 
tion been quite certain, he would have expressed himself thus; 
ahora viene de cenar donde el y el que le guia se han emborrachado. 

J^ote 3. The same construction takes place in asking a ques- 
tion, when the mind is, as it were, persuaded that the interroga- 
tory is almost unnecessary. Thus; Gil Bias, conceiving his situ- 
ation to be one of the most unhappy, puts the question with the 
future instead of the present; as, ;0 Cielo! esclame! ; habra siftta- 
cion mas infeliz que la mia? Oh Heaven! I exclaimed, is fAere a 
condition more wretched than mine? 

EXERCISES. 

Even when I shall have studied as much as he, I 
(tun estudiar 

shall not know so much. Shall we have finished, 
SABER haber acabar 

before he arrives.^ Shall we not have seen him. 

{antes que) llegue ver 

when he goes.^ 
{se vaya) 



320 SYNTAX. 

{Note 1.) They shall have been married three years 
ser casar anos 

to-morrow. Next week we shall have lived 

manana (la semana que viene) vivir 

together six months^ 
junto mes 

{Note 2.) He has perhaps been deceived. They 
haber ser enganar 

have no doubt (fallen in company with him) to- 
ENCONTRARSE cti su companici {esta 
night. We saw him coming from that place, 

noche) ver venir de lugar 

where he has probably spent (the whole) day. 
donde pasar todo el 

{Note 3.) How can (there be) a more wretched 
como poDER haber misera 

condition than mine? (Is there) a man who (will 

HABER 

doubt) it? 
dude 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
RULE XLVI. 

This mood is used to express commanding, exhort- 
ing, entreating, or permitting; as, ''confiesalo,^^ con- 
fess it. ''Se bueno^^^ be good. ''Concedame este 
favor,^^ grant me this favour. '^Ilazlo,^^ do it. 

(J^Tote i -) It is necessary to observe, that this tense cannot be 
used with a verb vs^hich is preceded by a negative, but that, in 
such cases, the present subjunctive is employed; as, no lo digas, 
do not say it; no vayais, go ye not. The second person in both 
numbers is the only one wherein this deviation is conspicuous. 
For, the third person of both numbers, as well as the first person 
plural, are alike in both tenses. In fact, the Spanish Academj:, 



SYNTAX. '321 

justly considering the latter as inconsistent in an imperatiye 
mood, have uniformly rejected it in their grammar. 

As, in this respect, we have followed the Academy, it is neces- 
sary to observe, that, the first person plural of the imperative, 
must always be translated, in Spanish, by the first person plural 
of the subjunctive present. 

{JsTote 2.) The future of the indicative, is sometimes used for 
this tense ; as, qxden hubiere hallado un manojo de Haves acudira al 
cotn-eo, whoever has found a bunch of keys, let him apply at the 
Post-office. 

EXERCISES. 

Bid them to come. Let us conquer them. Go 

DEciR (que vengcm) vencer 

away. Be cautious. Permit me to say. Grant 
marchar tener caucion permitir t decir conceder 
him that pension. Acknowledge thy crime. The 

confesar crimen 

war is inevitable, and let* it come! I repeat it, let ii 

guerra es venir" ' repetir 

come I 

{Note 1.) Trust it not, sir, it will prove a snare 
creer senor ser lazo 

to your foot. Sufter not yourselves (to be betrayed) 
para pie permitir t que os vendati 

with a kiss. Do not go late. 
con beso ir tai'd& 

(Note 2.) Those persons who (are solicitous) (to ac- 
individuo deseen 

quire a knowledge of) the Hebrew language, Mdll apply 

aprender hebreo idioma acudir 

ixi D street. He that is in favour of this measure, 
d la calle de D sea en favor medida 

will go to the general meeting. 
IR reunion 

""Let, as a sign of the imperative, may be translated by qu£ 



322 SYNTAX. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

OBSERVATION. 

The tenses of the indicative, correspond to those ot the sub- 
junctive. The only difference betAveen them is this, that the 
tenses of the indicative denote positive and certain actions or 
events; and those of the subjunctive, uncertain and doubtful. 
For example; aunque estaha alia, though he was there. In this 
sentence the act of his being there is expressed as certain, and 
therefore the verb is in the indicative. If we say, however, 
aunque estuviese alii, though he should be there; we now speak in a 
doubtful and uncertain manner with regard to his being there. 
For this reason the tense has been put in the subjunctive. 

There exists an erroneous impression concerning conjunctions 
and the subjunctive mood. It is generally supposed that a con- 
junction requires the subjunctive mood, merely because this con- 
junction is placed before a verb. It is not this conjunction that 
has any influence over the verb — but our meaning. Hence it is 
that the student should not be carried away with the idea, that 
any verb is placed in the subjunctive, because the conjunction 
which precedes, requires it. If I say, '■^Jiunque vitne hoi no le vtre^^ 
though he comes to-day I shall not see him, I speak of his arrival 
as certain, yet the conjunction forms no objection whatever, to 
the verb being placed in the indioative. Should my intention be 
to express his arrival as doubtful, then, the verb must necessarily 
l)e placed in the subjunctive; thus, ^-Jtunque viniese hoi no le vena," 
though he should come to-day I would not see him. There are a 
few conjunctive expressions, which, as they express doubt in 
themselves, if they be used at all, they require the subjunctive. 
They are, dado que, granted, con tal que, provided, &c. Of these 
we shall speak in their proper place. 

PRESENT. 

RULE XLVII. 
This tense represents an action doubtful or contin- 
gent that is to take place; as, '•^Aunque venga,^^ though 
he may come. Aunque vaya alii, though he may go there. 
As, in the present of this mood, futurity is expressed, 
we may use the future instead of the present, in all 



SYNTAX. 32S 

cases, except when the conjunction si, if, is used. We 
might have said with equal piopnetj, aunque viniere^ 
and aunque fuere alii. 

EXERCISES. 

Though the dogs niaj bark, they will not awake me. 
perro ladrar despertar 

Whether he come or not, I shall go. That he may 

que VENIR no m (para que) 

maintain the post, I have made many sacrifices. 
MAXTENER puesfo Iiabcr sacrl/icio 

IMPERFECT. 

RULE XLVllI. 
This tense represents a contingent action as going on 
now, or as having to go on some time hence^ as, '''Aun- 
que yo la amara ahora^"^^ though I should love her now. 
''Quisiera que viniese,^- I wish he would come. 

J^ote 1. It will have been observed in the conjugation of verbs 
in etymology, that in Spanish there are three imperfects. The 
one ending in ra, as amara, the other in ria, as amana, and the 
other in se, as amase. We there gave an English equivalent, to 
every one of these imperfects. It must not be supposed from 
this, that would is always equivalent to ra, might to ria, or should 
to se, for every one of these imperfects might be so used as to re- 
quire all these auxiliaries in turn. 

These imperfects are used in the following manner: 

Jiff, may be used for either ria, or se; as, "Si yo amara,'''' if I 
should love. " Fo amara," l would love. 

(2.) Ria is used to denote wish or condition; ^'quisiera ir alli,^^ 
I should like to go there. "£i seria rico,'''' he would be rich. 

(3.) Se, is used whenever any conditional conjunction, or any 
verb of command precedes the subjunctive; as, "sitjo fuesevmd. yo 
iric," if 1 were you I would go. " Yo Le dige que viniese,'' I commanded 
him to go. These three rules would, we believe, be sufficient to 



3£4 SYNTAX. 

guide the student in every instance. For, how many rules soevfci 
we may give, these three will always be those by which the stu- 
dent will be directed. As the three imperfects of the subjunctive 
are considered among the greatest difficulties of the Spanish lan- 
guage; we give the follov/ing observations and rules, which, with 
very little variation, we copy from Mr. M'Henry — to every one 
of which the author has annexed corresponding exercises. 

The Spanish Academy remarks, concerning the terminations 
ra, ria, and se, that the first may, in most instances, be substituted 
for either of the others. We shall therefore confine our observa- 
tions chiefly to the second and third terminations, believing that 
the remark of the Academy sufficiently denotes the extensiveness 
of the first. At the same time, we shall also warn the student, 
that in the subsequent examples, the termination ra must always 
be deemed implied, unless the necessity for its rejection should 
be pointedly noticed. 

Of the termination ra, ria, and se. 
Ofra. 
This termination is generally used in ejaculations; as, 
rqitien lo hubiera pensado! who would have thought it! 
;dichosa yo si el esceso de mi dolor me hubiera qiiitade 
la vida! happy me if the excess of my grief had^iaken 
away my life! ;que de penas y tormentos me hubiera 
ahorradol how many afflictions and torments it would 
have spared me ! 

Of ria and se. 

1. If the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive 
be preceded in English by a conjunction, se should be 
employed; as, although he might come^ aunque viniese; 
unless he would have not come, amenos que no hubiese 
venidos provided he would come, con tal que viniese; if 
he would come, si el viniese. 

2. When instead of expressing the conjunction if 
in English, the order is inverted, the same termination 



1 



SYNTAX. 325 

iiiust be used; as, ivere we to practise (or if we were to 
practise) virtue, si nosotros practicasemos la virfud; 
had she (or if she had) ivritten Sfc. si ella hubiese es- 
crito, &:c. 

3. As much as, or as many as, preceding the subjunc- 
tive in English, requires the termination se likewise; 
as, I gave you money to buy as many as we might loant, 
le di a vm. diner o para comprar cuantos necesitasemos; 
I gave them leave to eat as much as they ivoidd, les di 
Jicencia para comer cuanto quisiesen. 

4. If any of the preterites of the indicative precedes 
the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunctive in Eng- 
lish, with the sign anight, the termination se must be 
used; but if tlie sign be icoidd, we must use the termi- 
nation na; as, I wrote to him immediately, in order 
that he might arrive in time; and he answered that he 

voidd set out last niglit, le escribi i?nediat anient e para 
que llegase a tiempo, y me respondio que partiria anoche. 
N. B. In this sentence rla could not be changed 
to ra. 

5. When the imperfect or pluperfect of the subjunc- 
tive is not preceded by any conditional conjunction, the 
termination ria should be employed; as, I would go, but 
I am afraid, yo iria, pero tengo rniedo; we would pay 
our debts, but we have no money, pagariamos niiestras 
deudas, pero no tenemos dinero. 

6. It is necessary to observe that whenever the con- 
junction if, in English, is used in tlie sense of whether, 
the termination ria is the only one that can be employ- 
ed; as, I asked him if his father, or whether his father, 
would come to-morrow, le pregunte si su padre vendria 
manana; she wrote to us to know if we ivould buy the 
house, ella nos escribio para saber si comprariamos la casa. 

28 



326 SYNTAX. 

r. "When the verb by which the imperfect of the sub- 
jtinctive is governed, denotes promise or assurance^ the 
termination ria is the only one which can be us^d; as, 
me prornetio que vendria, he promised me that he would 
come; te asegure que saldria, I assured thee that he 
would go out. 

8. The termination ria is the only one used to denote 
a supposed action, &c. done within a period of time not 
including the present moment; as, pero le pareceria 
que ddndome su mula gastaria ?nmos en el viage^ but 
(I suppose) it seemed to him, that by giving me his 
mule he would spend less on the journey. 

9. When tvere is used in English for would be, and 
had for would have, the former is expressed with ria, 
and the latter with ra; as, it ivere (that is, it would be) 
the greatest folly to believe all that is said, seria, la ma- 
yor locura, creer todo lo que dicen; many crimes which 
had been (that is, which would bave been,) punished at 
other times, were then committed with impunity, muchos 
delitos que hubieran sido castigados en oiros tiempos, se 
cometian impunemente e7it6nces. 

10. It is almost unnecessary to observe, that when 
in English, tvould, shoidd, might, are not employed as 
signs of the subjunctive mood, but as principal verbs, 
they must be translated by querer, deter, poder; as, 
he would not go, that is, he was unwilling to go, no 
quiso ir; we should forgive our enemies, that is, we 
ought to forgive, dehemos perdonar a nuestros enemigos; 
I know he might have, that is, he had it in his pow er to 
have written before, se que pudo haber escrito antes. 

EXERCISES. 

1. Though lions might roar. If she should come. 
leon rugir si venir 



SYNTAX. 32r 

(To the end that) they might study, I bought many 

dfin de que estudiar comprar 
books for them. 
libro 

2. Had we less pride and more humility, 
tener menos orgullo hwnildad 

(we would be) happier. Were we to follow the 

seriamos feliz seguir 

dictates of our conscience, (we would be) better. 
dictado conciencia seriamos 

Should you go, tell him I am unwell. 
iR DEciR estar malo 

3. He obtained permission, to deliver as many 

OBTENER para decir 

*Drations, as he thought proper. They told him 

creer propio decir 
they (would only give him) (as much) money as he 

solo le darian cuanto diner o t 
could make in one day. 
poder hacer 

4. I said to him that I would not go. They 

decir ir 

knew that they would arrive before me. They 
saber llegar {dntes-de) 

sent messengers ten days before, that every 
embiar mensagero {para que) 

thing might be prepared. A guard of tv/enty soldiers 
ser preparado guardia soldado 

was sent, that they might prevent any disorder. 
ser remitir prevenir desorden 

5. I would go, but I do not dare. Would you 

ir pero atraverse 

not call a man ^ood, if he acted (according to) the 
Uamar obrar ses:un 



328 SYNTAX. 

laws? Would men be so wicked if they only 
lei ser malo si solo 

considered, that after their death they must 
ronsiderar {despues de) muerte deberdn 

give an account of their actions, 
DAR cuenta 

6. This gentleman sent me a word to know if 

caballero embiar recado para saber si 

I would see him. The general (had recourse to) tha*. 

VER us6 de 

stratagem, to be perfectly convinced if 
estratagema para estar perfectamente convencido si 
the enemy would not change their quarters. 
enemigo cambiar alojamienfo 

7. The Duke promised the company that his 

duque prometer a compania 
attendance would be sure. If it were now in the 
presencia ser seguro ser de t 

(daytime,) I assure you that the first flower we 

dia asegurar primer Jlor 

would meet, would present so many wonders, 
encontrar presentar maravilla 

that you would be astonished. 
estar asombrado 

8. The robbers (no doubt) imagined that we would 

ladrones imaginarse 

patiently submit to their cruelty. He thought, 
con paciencia someterse crueldad creer 

(I suppose,) that (I would be mean enough to) second 
tendria la bageza de favorecer 
his vile project. They did not speak to yoiu 

vil proyecto hablar 

because, no doubt, they were engaged, 
porgv.e estar ocvpad(^ 



SYNTAX. 329 

9. It were a very injudicious thing, were I to 

&er injuicioso cosa 

accede to such propositions. It were a pity to 

acceder tal ser Idstima de 

lose so worthy a man. They had passed without 
perder digno hombre pasar sin 

stopping, if a celestial voice had not called them. 

pcvrarse voz haber llamar 

We had perished long since, had not his gene- 

perecido (mitcho timpo ha) gene- 

rosity been so great. 
rosidad ser grande 

10. They would not follow his advice, so 

sEGui'v consejo (por eso) 
they were ruined.* You might have told it to 

arruinarse poder decir 

me. If we (turned out) so soon, people might 

SALiR temprano gente 

say we were crazy. We should comply with our 
DECIR estar loco complir 

duty, (at the sacrifice of) every pleasure, nay, 

obligacion {aunque sacrificdramos) placer {que digo) 
(even at the sacrifice of) every comfort. 
aunque sacrificdramos reposo 

PERFECT. 

RULE XLIX. 
The Perfect of this tense denotes a contingent action 
which has been commenced and completed sume time 
ago, or which is finished some time hence^ as, ''aunque 
no le hayd visto por diez afios, siempre nie manifiesta 
amor en sus cartas,'^^ though I may not liave seen him 

* Translate this with se. See (2.) page 264. 
28* 



330 SYNTAX, 

for ten years^ he always expresses sentiments of iove 
for me in his letters^ "no admitas a nadie, cmnque haya 
pagado," admit no person tliough he may have paid, 

EXERCISES. 

Men promise pleasures to themselves, though at 
jirometerse placer aunque 

the time they express their hopes, they may have 

tiempo espresar esperanza 

lost every power to gratify them. Provided 

PERDER poder de gratificar con tal que 

they have been faithful to their promise, set them 

fiel promesa poner 

at liberty. He said, though we have lost our 



en libertad 


DECIR 






PERDER 


money, though 


none of 


our 


former 


friends 


have 


dinero 






antiguo 


amigo 


haber 


come to assist 


u^, though 


fortune 


appears 


to 


VENIR ASISTIE 






for tuna 






be against us, 


despair 


not 


, my children. 




ser contra desesperar 




hijo 





PLUPERFECT. 

RULE L. 
This tense refers to a contingent action which was 
finished some time since, or before an action did, or 
will take place. This tense is used in the same man- 
ner as the simple perfect, which has been explained at 
large, in pages 324, 325 and 326, to which we refer the 
student. 

EXERCISES. 

Who would have thought that after having 
ereer [despite sde) haber 

befriended him, he should have become our 

{tratado como amigo) hacerse 



'" 






SYNTAX. 3S'l 

enemy? Would you not have been killed, had it 

enemigo morir 

not been for his incessant attention. Should we not 

incesante atencion 
have loved God, should we not have been good 

amar a ser 

Christians? Who, but a fool, would have ever acted 
cristiano sino tonto jamas obrar 

so rashly? 
ttmerariamente 

FUTURE IMPERFECT. 

RULE LI. 
This tense refers to a contingent action which will 
take place at a future time; as, '•'Si mahana Uoviere no 
iremos^^^ if it should rain to-morrow we will not go. 
^^Jlunque el eclipse tomare lugar al tiempo mencionado,^^ 
though the eclipse should take place at the time men- 
tioned. 

EXERCISES. 

Though it may rain* to-day, the weather will not be 
LLovER hoi tiempo ser 

cooler. If my father weret to arrive next* 

(masfrio) llegar (que viene) 

Monday,^ I shall certainly relate to him this affair. 
lunes ciertomente relatar negocio 

Should my suit (be concluded) to-morrow, I shall 

pleito concluirse manana 

depart immediately. 
SALiR imediatamente 

*It was observed, in page 322, speaking of the present of tfie 
subjunctive, that it may be used for the future. We repeat the 
same thing now, with regard to the future. 

t See number 2, pages 324, 325. 



332 SYNTAX. 

FUTURE PERFECT. 

RULE LII. 
This tense refers to a contingent action which will 
have already taken place some time hence, or before 
another action commences; as, "Si vmd. hubiere visto 
a mi padre antes de partir no debe tomar otra medida,"^ 
should you have seen^ my father before you go away, 
you need not take any other measure. 

EXERCISES. 

Even when such a thing should have happened 
aun cuando tal t cosa suceder 

before he arrives,t do not divulge it. Should it not 
6ntes llegar divulgar 

have rained to-morrow by ten o'clock, we will find 
LLovER mahana a hollar 

all the plants withered. If they should have pro- 
todo planta asecado haber pro 

nounced the sentence before we reach the town-house, 
nunciar sentencia llegar cabildo 

we shall have walked in vain. 
pasearse vdno 

OBSERVATION 

On the difference between the Imperfect and Future of 
the Subjunctive. 
In the definition which we have given of the above tenses, we have 
said that both these tenses could represent a future action. That 
the student may not misapply them, he must observe, that the futu- 
rity expressed by the imperfect is always referred to time past, 
counting from the period we speak; and that which is expressed by 

* See number 2, page 324. 
I See antes de, page 185. 



SYNTAX. 33S 

the future, represents an action which is yet to take place in time to 
come. If we said, that such a person would be rich, if he had been 
economical, we have no reference whatever to time coming, only 
to time past. The futurity expressed by would be, extends only 
to the time in which the observation is made. In the phrase, 
''the teacher ordered that the students should write exercises," 
there is futurity expressed, but it only extends to this present 
moment, for the students may have already complied with the 
wishes of the teacher, and consequently the imperfect should be 
employed. But if the phrase be, the teacher says, that every 
student who shall not write exercises wiU be punished, the act 
of writing the exercises is yet to take place, and therefore to 
commence after the time in which we make the assertion, the 
future, and only the future, could be used. The first sentence 
would therefore be translated by, El maestro ordeno que los disci- 
pulos escribiesen temas; and the second by. El maestro dice que el 
diseipulo que no escriba 6 escribiere temas sera castigado. We say, 
escriba 6 escribiere, for the present may be used for the future 
of the subjunctive, or vice versa, if the conjunctive if he not em- 
ployed. 

EXERCISES. 

The general issued an order that all the soldiers 

ESPEDiR orden soldado 

who might desert should be shot. I 

desertar (pasados por las armas) 

say that if he should not come to-day, I will not 

DECIR VENIR 

wait (any longer.) If the contract had been 
esperar inas contrato 

made* last year, it would be valid, and (there would 
KACEK pasado ano ser valido no habria 

be no) necessity that another should be made.* (There 
necesidad oiro ser hacer hai 

are) some men who would not shudder, (even if) 

aturdirse aimqi'^ 

"■ We again refer the student to note (2,) page 264. 



334 SYNTAX. 

(the whole) world were to perish. By what appellation 

todo el mundo perecer por que nombre 

would we distinguish the wretch who should pay 

distinguir d malvado pagar 

with ingratitude the favours received in time of want? 

ingratitud recibir necesidad 

What words can express the pity we feel for 

poDER espresar compasion sbihtib. por 

him who should have an irresistible desire to do 

tenir deseo de hacer 

good and had not the means. 
bie?i tener medio 

INFINITIVE MOOD.— PRESENT. 

RULE LIII. 

This tense represents an action as going on at any 
indefinite time, without any distinction of persons; as, 
**Zes vimos andar,^^ we saw them coming. Pervertir, 
to pervert. Dormir^ to sleep. 

J^ote 1. The masculine definite article is often placed before 
an infinitive. When this occurs, the infinitive is a noun, and as 
such, called a verbal noun; as, "ei oir y el hablar son dos cosas mui 
diferentes,''^ to hear and to speak are two very different things. In 
such cases, the present participle is often used in English, with 
articles, or possessive pronouns. 

J^ote 2. The infinitive is used in an absolute manner for the 
pluperfect of the subjunctive. In that case the preposition a. 
must precede it. The phrase, a saber yo esto, is as grammatical 
and elegant as, si yo hvMiera sabido esto, had I known this. 

EXERCISES. 

We heard them arguing.* We saw him (taking 
OIR argument ar ver despe- 

*To hear and to see require the present indicative, and not the 
gerund, in Spanish. 



SYNTAX. 335 

leave of) his father. He intends (to go awaj.) 
'lirsc de padre intentar partir 

(Note 1.) His telling me this, was enough. To 
decir str bastante 

begin is not to end. To suffer with patience the 
comenzar ser acabar sufrir paciencia 

miseries of this life, is done bv few. 
'miseria vida ser haceh por 

(Note 2.) If he had not acted thus, he would be 
obrar asi ser 

ruined. Had they not come, he would have 

arndrnar vexir haber 

killed me. 
matar 

PERFECT. 

This tense represents, without distinction of person? 
an action as past, but it is indefinite with regard to the 
time in which the action took place; as, ^^?ne acuerdo de 
haberle visto,^* I recollect to have seen him. ''*Nimca 
me olvidare de haberle oido cantar, I shall never forget 
to have heard him sing. 

EXERCISES. 

How could we have refrained from laughing at 
como PODER haber dejarse de reir 

such nonsense. Thev will have soon forgotten to 

disparate haber alvidarse 

have seen us. 
haber ver 

OF THE GERUND.* 

RULE LIV. 
The English participle present, is construed, iu 
Spanish, by tJie gerund; as, ''^Siendo ciertas las noti- 
* See page 84. 



336 SYNTAX. 

c«as," the news being certain. ^'Estoi escribiendo,'^ I 
am writing. '^Paseando, or estando paseando,^^ walk- 
ing, or being walking. "Zos encontre leyendo,^^ I met 
them reading. 

J^ote 1. When the present participle expresses some circum- 
stance referring to the objective case of the verbs to see, or to 
hear, it is construed by the present infinitive; as, ^^La oigo 
cantar," I hear her sins^ing. -'Awic« vt representar esa comedia,^'' 
I never saw that play acting, or being acted. 

J^ote 2. Gerunds require the same prepositions as the verbs 
from v\^hich they are derived; as, "Arrepintiendose de sus culpas,-'' 
repenting of his crimes. "No atreviendose a saZir," not daring to 
go out. "Riniendo con todos,''"' quarrelling with all. 

JVote. 3. If the English participle follow the preposition by, we 
may use either the gerund, or the infinitive preceded by con; as, 
^^La memoria se aumenta agercitandola, or con agercitarla," the 
memory is increased by exercising it. 

JVbfe 4. If the participle be used in English as a verbal noun, 
and there is, in Spanish, a substantive of the same import, this 
substantive should be preferred to the gerund; as, "£/ temor de 
JDios es el principio de la sabiduria,'''' the fear of God is the begin- 
ning of wisdom. "Sw ida es la causa de mi venida," his going is 
the cause of my coming. 

M)te 5. Instead of the compound, the simple gerund, preceded 
by the preposition en, is sometimes elegantly used; as, "En dici- 
endo esto se fue,^^ or habiendo dicho eslo sefue, having said this, he 
went away. 

EXERCISES. 

Ferdinand having disposed of every thing for 
Fernando haber preparado t {todo lo necesario) para 

a siege, of which he foresaw^ the difficulties* and dura- 
sitio PREVER t di/icultad 

tion,* appeared before Seville, on the 20th of Au- 

presentarse sevilla 

g7^st, 1247. People are always talking of happiness 
estar hablar felicidad 



SYNTAX. ^ 337 

"ivhich is never found in this miserable world. We 



ser 



iiaw them quarrelling most violently for nothing, 

RENiR 77mi violentamente 
They were going from. Havana to Caracas, when they 

IR 

were surprised by a pirate who unmercifully mai- 
mer sorprendido pirafa cnielmente 7ncil- 
treated them. The Asiatics remembering the dignity 
tratar Jlsidtico acordarse 
of Berenice, and pitying her hard fate, 
coMPADECERSE desgraciudo siierte 
sent her succours. Clouds are formed from exhala- 
embiar socorro mihe ser formar ecsala- 
tions, arising* from the earth. (How many) have 
cion levantarse ciicmto 
repented for not having applied themselves during 
ARREPENTiRSE Jiaber aplicar durante 
their youth. Happiness does not consist in living, 
jiiventud consistir vivir 
but in knowing how to live. We shall obtain peace, 
sino saber t obtener 
by making great sacrifices. W^e ought to spend some 

sacrijicio pasar 

of our time in admiring the attributes of God. The 

admirar atributo 

changing of times, and seasons, belongs^ to Providence 
cambio estacion pertenecer 

* When the English present participle, can be resolved by the 
relative and the corresponding cense of ihe verb, this latter con- 
struction should always be used iu Spanish; for instance: arising; 
which arise, que se levantan; accruing^ which accrue, que resulta or 
rciultan. 

29 



338 SYNTAX. 

alone.' We may improve our style by reading 
solo poDER 7nejorar estilo her 

attentively the best models. 
atentamente modelo 

PASSIVE PARTICIPLE. 

RULE LV. 
This past participle is declinable, except when it is 
preceded by the verb huher^ to have; as, ''Ha escrito,'' 
he has written. ^^Ellos han llegado,^^ they have arriv-' 
ed. ''Seremos felices,^^ we shall be happy. "^/ ha 
estado mui malo, y ella ?nui buena,^^ he has been very 
ill, and she \erj well. 

J^ote 1. Tentr, is, sometimes, used instead of haber, before a 
participle; and, in this case, the participle is indeclinable; but 
when tcner governs a substantive, then the participle becomes de- 
clinable; as, " Tengo escrito," I have written. '■'■Tengo escrita una 
carta," I have icritten a letter. '■'■Todo lo tengo hecho," I have done 
e.y^T'Sf thing. ^^ Tengo hechas las diligencias necesarias.'''' I have 
taken the necessary steps. 

J^ote 2. The participle is, in Spanish, used as a case absolute; 
thus, acabado, being finished; hecho, being done; muerto, being 
dead; &c. When this occurs, it always begins the sentence. 
Examples: "Acabada la ccna, nos fuhnos a pasear,'" supper being 
ever, we went a-walking. "Tomada esta rerolucion, me levante, 
cuando me parecio que Leonarday Domingo podian yaestar dormidos,'''' 
this resolution being taken I rose, when it appeared to me that 
Leonarda and Domingo might already be asleep. ''Hecho este 
juramento, que estaba bien resulto d no quebrantar, mc fui a buscar 
algun ?neso?i," this oath being taken, which I was well resolved not 
to break, I went to look for some inn. 

EXERCISES. 

The cruelties which some barbarous nations have 
crueldad bdrbaro 



i 



SYNTAX. 3S.9 

committed, are horrid. Alphonso the tenth, siirnamed 
cometer ser horrible Jilfonso apeUidar 

the sage, renewed the treaty which his father had 

sabio renovar tratado 

made with Abousaid. Ihave^ never ^ seen, ^ said he, so 



cruel a man. Greenland was discovered in the ninth 

Greolandia ser descubrir 

century by a Norwegian, called Eric; it is situated 

siglo Noruego llamar estar situado 

between Europe and America. Let us consider who 
has given us being, and for what end we have been 
ser Jin ser 

created; how many are the mercies received; and how 
criar ser favor cuan 

great the ingratitude with which « e have repaid them. 

ingratitud volver 

We have said to liim (to get up early in the morning.) 

que madrugase 
He concealed himself to avoid the praises he had 
esconderse para evitar cdahanza tener 

»o well deserved. Granada (being taken,) Ferdinand 

merecer tomar Fernando 

ordered* all its inhabitants (to go out) of it, carrying 
ordenar habiiante salir llevar 

with them all their property and treasures. The 
consigo efecto tesoro 
male issue of the Gotliic kings (being extinct) 
masculine Unea goiico estingcdr 

the crown of Leon passed to Vermundo's sister. 
coronar — - — pasar hermana 



340 SYNTAX. 

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES OF THE TENSES OF VERBS- 

The excess of the dis':emj;er, makes the physician 
estrernidad mal medico 

crupl. A good instructor endeavours to render agree- 

— ESFORZARSE a HACER ClgrU- 

able every thing which is useful. Youth want 

dahle util juvmtud {no tener) 

wisdom to deliberate. Youth sows the seeds 
aahidurla para deliberar sembrar semilla 

of repentance, by pleasure^ and the harvest is 
arreyentimiento con cosecha ser 

gathered in (old age,) by pain. God is propitious 

recoger vegez con pesadumbres ser propicio 

to those who implore him. Nero was a detestable 

implorar ser 

tyrant. The Lacedemonians sacrificed their children. 
tirano Lacedemonio sacrificar hijo 

He sets out to-morrow for Spain. The prodigal 
partir para prodige 

Jives rich and dies poor^ the miser lives poor and dies 
vivir MORiR avaro 

rich. Most* people live without reflection. As soon 
vivir hiego 

ast Csesar had entered the senate, the conspirators 
que entrar en senado 

threw themselves upon him. The king prohibited 
echarse prohibir 

the export of silk goods. I (shall have set out) 

estraccion seda genero purtir 

liefore thy return. We (have applied) often to him, 
vuelta acndir [muchas veces) a 



■' See note 1, page 242. 
■f See note 2, page 317 



SYNTAX. 341 

I do not permit his visits. Let us restrain his 

pennitir restrinir 

ambition. All his honour, riches, and powder, vanished 
riqueza poder vanecer 
immediately. We (had then corresponded with each 

correspotiderse 
other) for more than ten years.* When man considers 

how long (he has offended) his Creator, and (He 

(cuanto iiempo) ofender d 

has pardoned) him, he shudders. God (will reward) 
perdonar estremecerse recompensar 

the good, and punish the wicked. On the 4th of 

d bueno gastigar d malo 
March, 1825, James Monroe will have been President of 

Diego j)residente 

the United States eight years.t PcrhapsJ the ministers 

ministro 
are now signing the capitulation. I suppose (they 
estar firmando -^_^_^ suponer 

have learnt) this news. (Is there) a grief like his? 
oiR noticia haber dolor como 

Some said. Can this man be a Deity under the human 

DEciR PODER SBT deidttd bajo 

form.P Remember, man, that thou art dust. Forgive 

figura AcoRDARSE ser polvo perdonar 

them. Father, for they know not what they do. 

porque saber hacer 

* See page 317, note 1. 
t See page 316, note 2. 
I See page 319, note 1. 

29* 



34a M'K'TAX. 

Come to-morrow witli thj son, but come not'^ early. 
VENiR vExiR temprano 

Let us profit by his examf)le. Use thy authority 
aprovecharse egemplo usar de autoridad 

with moderation, and do not abuse thy power. How 

— abiisar de poder 

many men wouldt have perished in that battle! 
cuanto perecer batalla 

Nations would be happy, if wisdom were the only 
feliz sabidiiria ser unico 

object of sovereigns. Hadij: we no pride, ; we should 

soberano tener orgullo 

not complain) of the pride of others. We should 
quejarse 
be happy now, if Adam (had not sinned.) Caligula 

ser pecar — — 

commanded that the Romans (should render) him divine 
mandar hacer divino 

honours. Were| men to follow the dictates of reason, 
honor seguir jnecepto razon 

'they would save themselves) many sorrows. Hadj 

cHiorrarse jjesadumbre 

Caesar been less ambitious, he would have done more 

ser menos amhicioso 
honour to human nature. DidJ you but know 

naturaleza solo saber 

where I am now, (you would put up) a thousand 

ofrecer 
^•upplications to heaven, that (I might return) to your 
suplica porque volver 

^The student must read with particular attention, note !, in 
page 320. 

t See ?'a, via, and se; pages 323, 324, 325. 
1 See number 2, pages 324, 325. 



SYNTAX. 343 

house. Oh! had I seen her before her death! Fearing 

vER {antes de) muerte temer 

that study (might fatigue) me. He ordered the general 

fatigar mandar que 

to take* the fortress, and to (put to death) (as many 
tomar fortaJeza y que matar a cuantos 

as) he found armed, and to pay for all the 

encontmar armado pa gar 

provisions whicH he might want. Without tempta- 
viveres necesltar tentacion 

tions (we should not be able) to know ourselves. 

PODER COXOCERSE 

The innkeeper to whom I related my adventure, 
posadero confar aventura 

with which the scoundrel was perhaps better 

de hellaco estar 

acquainted than I, pitied me. No one 

informado (compadecerse de) 

seemed to me, then, more suited to believe every 
PARECER eyitonces apto para creer 

thing. (I might choose) to tell him. Thou wdlt have 

qUERER DECIR 

(as manyt conveniences as) (thou mayesti choose) 
cuantas conveniencias querer 

• When the English preterite, being expressive of order or 
command, precedes an infinitive; this infinitive is, in Spanish, 
rendered by the imperfect of tlie subjunctive, with se; and the 
preterite is followed by the conjunction que: as, "He ordered the 
general to take the fortress," mando que el general tomase la foi- 
ialtza; that is, [he ordered that the general should take the fortress.] 

i Jis much as, is frequently translated by cuanto-Si; and, as many 
«s, by cu«nYos-as. 

+ S*e present, page 305; and/itfure imperfect, page 331, 



344 SYNTAX. 

He gave them permission to do what (they might 

DAR de HACEH 

happen to like;)* hence it is that they did then what 

QUERER (de aqui) 
they pleased^ they do now what they choosey and 

qUERER QUERER 

doubtless will do hereafter what they will.t Ye 
[sin dudd) (en adelanfe) # querer 

may stop in my hermitage ^ as long as 
poDER quedarse hermita {todo el tiempo que) 

ye like. He that hasj valour, let him follow me. 

QUERER TENER SEGUIR 

He had ordered that all neutral vessels which (should 
mandar neutral huque entrar 

enter) the ports of England, or should have been 
en piierfo ser 

searched by the English cruizers, should be confiscated 
registrado por crucero ser conjiscado 

(as soon as) they entered the ports of France. 
luego que entrar puerto 

AGREEMENT OF VERBS.!! 

RULE LVI. 

The verb agrees with its nominative case, in number 

and person I as, "Fo aprendo^"^^ I learn. "7m estudins^'^ 

thou studiest. '''Ella i;iene," she comes. '•'Nosotro» 

rez>/i05-," we laughed. " Fmd CG?2^a, " you sing. ''£llo$ 

* See observation, pages 332, 333. 
t See observation, pages 332, 333. 
I See Subjunctive Mood, page 112. 
H See page 305. 



^SYNTAX. 345 

nos encontrdron,^^ they met us. "^5* «si," it is so. 
^'^El presidente es sabio,^^ the president is wise. 



EXERCISES. 

Nature begins 5 education 

naturcdeza comenzar; ' — 

dence is the eye of virtue. 

dencia ser ojo virtud 



make the comforts of life. 
GONSTiTuiR delicia vida 

Greeks the use of letters. 
Griegos uso de car act er 
are diseases, which no human 



finishes. Pru- 

— acabar pru- 

Innocent pleasures 

inocente placer es 

Cadmus taught the 

Cadmo ensenar d 

Vicious habits 

vicioso costinnbre 

aid can reme- 



ser enfermcdad humana ayuda poder reme- 

dy. The tjo great indulgence of parents, 
diar. demasiado indulgencia padres 

ruins children. The dog barks when we 
urruinar d hijo perro ladrar cuando t 

knock at the door. God has imprinted in the heart 
llamar d la puerta Dios haber estampar corazon 

of man the love of liberty. The prayers of the 
libertad oracion 

efficacious. No sooner had 
ejicaz no bien haber 

the voice, than he (grew ashamed) of 
la voz cuando el avergo)izarsei 

* The nominative case of an impersonal verb, is never express- 
ed in Spanish. The pronoun <?Zio, [it,] is, therefore, understood 
in the above sentence, ^^es asi.'''' See the conjugation of imper- 
sonal verbs, from page 164 to page 169. 

t The pronoun se, as it has been observed, at the end of an infi- 
nitive, denotes that the verb is reflective, and that it must be 
conjugated accordingly. See the conjugation of a reflectire 
verb, from page 1 19 to page 12] , 



amor de 
vighteous (will be) 

jiisto ser 

Adam heard 
Adan 



346 SYNTAX. 

his nakedness. The Romans always kept the 

desnudez Bomano siempre tener 

sacred fire in the temple of Vesta. Plato banished 

sagradofuego teinplo de Platon desterrar 

music (out of) his commonwealth. Socrates learn- 

musica de repuhlica apren- 

ed to dance when he was (an old man.) (At all times) 
der a hailar cuando t ser viejo. siempre 

the number of the \dcked has exceeded that of the 

numero malo haber esceder 

good. The Scythians sacrificed to Diana all the 

huenos Citas sacrificar a 

strangers who fell into their hands. 
tstrangero caer en mano 

RULE LMI. 

Two or more nouns in the singular, connected by 
any conjunctive conjunction, have their verb in the 
plural; as, '^ Socrates j Plato erdiii sabios,^^ Socrsdes and 
Plato ivere wise. '^El estudio^ la perseverancia y la 
paciencia hacen al hombre sabio^^^ study, perseverance 
Mnd patience make a man wise. 

EXERCISES. 

Age and merit render a man venerable^ rank 

edad merito hacer d puesto 

and dignity render him respectable. Liberality 

y dignidad respetable liberalidad 

and thankfulness are the bonds of concord, 

reconocimiento ser vmcidos concordia 

Neither wealth nor power renders us happy. His 

JS'i* riqueza ni hacer. 

* Ni, {neither^ nor,] is considered, in Spanish, a conjimctiye. not 
£. disjunctive conjunction. Seepage 188. 






SYNTAX. 347 

valour and his consfancj M^ere never more exposed. 
valor constanda ser nunca uias espiiesto 

She, he, and I began a concert of mournful howl- 
coMENZAR concurto funebre ala- 
ings. The sun that lights us, the food that wc 
rido sol alurabrar el sustento 

receive, and the rest that we enjoy, admonish 
recibir descanso gozar demostrar 

us of the infinite beneficence of our Creator. 
infmito beneficencia Criador. 

RULE LVIII. 

When the disjunctive conjunction d, [or,] is used 
between two or more nouns, in the singular, the verb 
agreeing with them, must also be in the singular ^ as, 
'*Za felicidad 6 la desdicha del hombre, esta.e?2 sus ma- 
nos,^'' man's happiness or misery is in his hands. 

^lote I. In such expressions as, 5 tu o yo, either thou or I] 5 el o 
ella, either he or she, &c. the verb is always put in the plural; as, 
'■^Otu, 6 yo estaraos equivocados,^^ either thou or I am mistaken. 

EXERCISES. 

Death or life is very often put (into the 
muerte vida estar (mitchas veces) poner en 
hands) (of a) judge. A harsh reply, or an improper 
manos del juez agria respuesta una hnpropio 

word, (is capable^ of imbittering domestic life 
palcd)ra poder [echar amarguras d) domestic vida 
When sickness or infirmity attacks us, the 
Cuando enfermedad pobreza atacar 

sincerity of friendship (is approved.) Either my 
sinceridad amistad probarss* O 

* See (2.) page 264. 



348 SYNTAX. 

father or my mother (will come) to see us. Either 
padre madre venir a ver O 

weakness or imagination disturbs him. Either his 

flaqueza perturhar 

enthusiasm or his sensibility has made him crazy. 
entusiasmo sensihilidad haber volver loco 

RULE LIX. 

If two or more nouns, either in the singular or in the 
plural, are not connected by any conjunction, and the 
last makes an aggregate of them all, the verb always 
agrees with this last; as, "•Escuadras^ egercitos, dinero 
todo se sacrafico," fleets, armies, money, allioas sacri- 
ficed. 

J\"ote 1. If two or more persons are subjects to the verb, this 
must agree with the pronoun understood; as, ^^Tus padres, y yo 
(nosotros) vendremos," thy parents and I (loe) will come. 

EXERCISES. 

Palaces, temples, sumptuous edifices, nothing 
pcdacios templo suntuoso edi/icio 
(will remain.) Wealth, dignities, honour, every 

quedar riqueza dignidad honras 

thing disappears at the hour of death. Entreaties 

DESAPARECER eu kc lioru dc muerte ruegos 
lamentations, tears, nothing (will be of any service) 
lamentacion Idgrima nada servir 

to the wicked. Thou and he who conducts thee 
a malo y conducir 

(shall perish. ) He and his companions (will be) here. 
pereger companero estar aqui 

His father, my mother, and myself have said it. 
padre, madre y yo haber decir 



SYNTAX. 349 

RULE LX. 
When the verb is prefixed to two or more subjects 
in the singular, joined by the conjunctive conjunction i/, 
the verb is also put in the singular. But, should the 
subjects differ in number, the verb agrees with that to 
which it is most near,- as, **Es mui necesaria la jmci- 
PMciay el estudio,^^ patience and study «re very neces- 
sary. ^'Mia es esfa casay estos prados,^^ or ''Alios son 
est s pr ados y esta casa,*^ this house and these mea- 
dows are mine. 

EXERCISES. 

His are, he will say, the victory and wonders 
ser DEciR victoria maravilla 
which we have achieved. Great are the prudence 
haher cumplir ser prudencia 
and judgment which he manifested. So irresistible 
jiiicio manifestar irresistible 
are his politeness and attractions that they charm 
ser Krbanidad atraccion encantar 
every body. Much is the trouble and many are 
(a todo el mimdo. ) mucho ser trabajo f f 
the vexations which we must endure in this 
t vecsaciones deber sufrir en esta 
miserable life. 
vida. 

COLLECTIVE NOUNS.* 

RULE LXL 
Definite collective nouns, have generally the verb in 
the singular; as, ''El regimiento consistia de muchos sol- 
dados,^^ the army consisted of many soldiers. '^La arbo- 

* See page 57. 



350 SYNTAX. 

leda era mui agradable,^^ the grove was very agreeable. 
"X« asamblea contiene muchos hombres sabios,^^ the 
assembly contains many wise men. 

Indefinite collective nouns, generally require a plu- 
ral verb; as, "Una tropa de ninfas coronadas estaban 
sentadas junto a ella^'^'' a band of nymphs crowned with 
flowers was seated near her. '•'Esta gente aunque los 
llevan, van de por fuerza^'' although these people art 
brought with them, they go against their will. '*Parte 
huyeron a los monies, parte se acogieron d la. ciudad, 
el resto fueron pasados a cuchillo,^^ a number Jled to the 
mountains, a part took refuge in the city, and the rest 
were put to the sword.* 

EXERCISES. 

The congress is not in session during the sum- 

congreso estar en • — durante {meses 

mer months. The public are always ready to cen- 
del verano.) publico estar siempre listo para cen- 
sure or to praise. When the nation complains, the 
surar 6 t alabar, cuando la quejarse, {los 

* The rule given above on the collective nouns, will, in general, 
be found correct. As, however, there are many writers who do 
not attend to it, and who, on some occasions, make a singular, and 
on others, a plural verb agree with a collective noun, we think it 
necessary to observe, that such instances must be considered as 
necessary exceptions to the general rule. Nor can such excep- 
tions be exhibited, because they, in a great measure, depend on 
the ideas, which the author who writes entertains concerning this 
species of nouns; and therefore, what would be an exception to 
the rule in one author, would be wholly consistent with it in ano- 
ther. The investigation of these trifling distinctions is often 
very troublesome, but seldom of any material importance to the 
student. It is our opinion, therefore, that to follow, in all cases, 
the rule which we have given above, will be the surest and the 
most correct plan which the learner can pursue. 



SYNTAX. 35.1 

rulers should listen to its voice. The present 

que la rigen) deber escuchar voz. la presente 

generation is more enlightened than the former. The 

ser tnas ilustrada que la ultima. la 

board of health consisted of twelve members. People 
junta sanidad consistir niiembro gentc 

are led by the impulse of their passions. We 

dejarse llevar por impidso pasiones. t 

read the resolutions in presence of all, but the ma- 
leer resolucioius presencia pero phi- 

jority opposed them. A multitude of youths 
r alidad openerse a multitud jdvenes 

i^agerly* pursue^ pleasure as their chief good. 

{co)i ardor) perseguir {el placer) como su mayor bien 

USE OF HABER AND TENER—TO HAVE.' 

HABER, as it has been observed at the bottom of 
page 89, is employed as an auxiliary verb only; and it 
can therefore, never be used but before a participle; 
as, *'*Hemos visto muchas cosas en este siglo,^^ we have 
seen many things in this age. ^^Ellos no se hubieran 
destruido, si hubieran tenido mas jidcio,*^ they would 
not have ruined themselves, had they had more judg- 
ment. 

TENER, is used as an active verb denoting posses^^ 
sion; as, ^K9demas de su buen entendimiento, tiene un 
gusto raro,^^ besides his good understanding, he has a 
rare taste. ^''El puede tener diner o, pero el dinero no 
le da honra^^^ he may have money, but money does not 
give him honour. 

»Se9 their eonjugatiop, from pages 85 to 93, 



S52 SYNTAX. 

TO BE THIRSTY, hungry, ashamed, eold, warm, 
or afraid; is translated by to have thirst, hunger, <^c. 
fener sed, hambre, verguenza, frio, calor or teraor; as, 
•'They ivere thirsty, and yet ashamed to ask for water;" 
tenian sed, y sin emhargo tenian verguenza de pedir 
etgua. 

TO iftAVE TO, is rendered, in Spanish, by tener 
que; as, "Then we had to go,^^ entonces teniamos que 
irnos. "Though we have to stay here, it is an agree- 
able stay," aunque tenemos que estar aqui, es una esta- 
da agradable. 

TO BE TO, is construed, haber de; "I am to be at 
that place at three o'clock," he de estar alii a las Ires, 
^'Am I to be here also?" jhe yo tambien de estar aqui. 

TO HAVE JUST, is translated acabar de; &s, "/ 
have just learned, that you are arrested," acabo de sa- 
ber que vmd. estd preso. ' 'This is the vessel which ha.% 
just noio wrecked," este es elbuque que acaba de nau- 
fragar. 

EXERCISES. 

Children say what they do, (old people) what they 
niho HACER viejos 

have done, and fools what they (are going)* to do. 

^nto iR d 

King Alphonsus said, that books had been his best 

Alfonso sido 

counsellors; because they had^ never ^ flattered him.' 
consegero lisongear 

The miser does not more enjoy what he has, thaa 
avaro gozar 

* All verbs may be conjugated with the verb to be and the jjre- 
sent parlicipls, [see note 3, p. 306,] except irj to go; and venir, to 
come: "are going," must therefore be translated vav, they go. 



SYNTAX. 353 

what he has not. A man who has genius, and judg- 

ingenio jui- 

ment, (will be) deliberate in thought, and active in 
do ser maduro reflecsion activo 

action. Never reproach another with the 
(la obrd) (echar en cara)* (d otro) t 

services you have rendered him. Although Tantalus 
favor que hecho Tantalo 

has the water close to his lips, he always is thirsty. 

agua junto d labio siempre 

Some persons appear wicked only because they are 

PARECER malo solamente 
ashamed of appearing good. Censure is the tax 
hueno censura ser impuesto 
which a man is to pay for his eminence. Man 

pagar eminencia 

should always bear in mind that he is to give an 
deber (traer d la memoria) 

account of his life to God. To live in this world with 
cuenta para mimdo 

tranquility, we have to endure silently many incon- 
tranquilidad svfrir (con silencio) inco- 

veniences. They had just signed the treaty of peace, 
modidad Jirmar tratado paz 

when war was again declared. The messenger whom 

ser declarado mensagero 

we expected, has just arrived. 
esperar Ilegar. 

* An imperative, preceded by a negative, requires the subjunc- 
tive present. 



30* 



354 SYNTAX, 

SER ^ND ESTAR— 7^0 BE. 

OBSERVATION. 

To explain clearly, the distinction which exists between Sc'i\ 
and Estar, is the most arduous task that an author of a Spanish 
grammar, can take upon himself to perform. He who commences 
it, is well aware of the difficulties Avhich he must encounter, and 
th^ obstacles which he must surmount, to be perspicuous, com- 
prehensive, and precise. It is for this reason, that this subject 
has not been treated in that extensive manner, which its impor- 
tance required. Numerous detached rules have, on various oc- 
casions, been given upon it; but, as the distinction of Ser, and 
Estar, depends on a fixed principle, they could not tend much to 
its elucidation. 

In the acquisition of the Spanish language, we know not of 
any particular part of grammar,, which merits the attention of 
the student, so much, as that concerning the difference between 
these two verbs. It is a difference, which has been heretofore 
reckoned, in some measure, as attainable, by those persons only, 
whose vernacular tongue was the Spanish, or who had already 
become well acquainted with this language. 

We have sometimes taken the liberty to observe, that no study 
or labour would prevent us from rendering this work as perfect 
as it lay in our power to make it. We have, therefore, under- 
taken this difficult and important task, notwithstanding our being 
fully convinced, that in aspiring to success, we expose ourselves 
to animadversion. 

Existence, when expressed in English by the verb to be, is, in 
Spanish, denoted either by ser, or estar. This existence, is there- 
fore, divided into two states, and, according to the particular state 
in which it is, ser or estar, must be employed. 

These two states are not easily distinguished by persons who 
cannot see any difference of existence, between "i/e IS well;'''' 
and "f/e ISfefmrfscwje;" at the same time that a Spaniard, perceives 
a very great one. He conceives, that to he ivtll, is a quality, the 
existence of which is precarious; that it depends upon a variety 
of circumstances, of which we seldom have any knowledge; and 
that, as it has so many dependencies, it cannot be suppos^^d per- 
manent by any determined or undetermined period. This seiK 



SYNTAX. S55 

fence, he would, therefore, have translated by estar; thus: El 
ESTA 5tie?io. 

On the other hand, to be handsome, is a quality, the existence of 
which is certain, not precarious; it does not depend upon any cir- 
cumstance, but those upon which, as a relative thing in regard 
to time or eternity, it must necessarily depend; and a quality, 
which, as it is natural, must be deemed permanent, so far as the 
nature of beauty is deemed so: and he would, therefore, translate 
is, in that sentence, by ser, — thus. El ES hei-moso. 

From this general observation it follows, that, when we have 
relation to the existence of qualities, which are inherent in, or 
essential to the nature of objects; or, in other words, of qualities 
which denote the nature .or kind of the objects to which they 
belong, ser must be employed; — and, on the contrary, estar should 
be used when speaking of the existence of accidental qualities; 
qualities which denote the manner in which objects exist. To 
this general rule, no exception can be absolutely attached. 

As there are, however, many instances in which the kind and 
manner of existence are so nearly allied, that the student, how- 
ever sagacious, is at a loss to make the right distinction; the au- 
thor will endeavour to render this remark perfectly intelligible 
to him, by placing before his view those cases in which the dis- 
tinction is most ditTicult to be perceived. 

It is very plain, that if we say "i/iis book IS good,^^ is, in this sen- 
tence, shows that the natural quality of the book is goodness; 
goodness, or badness, &c. being qualities which must be inherent in 
the nature of any object. But, if we say "f/m book IS icell fcoujjrf;" 
is, in this sentence, exhibits a quality, which is altogether acci- 
dental in the book; for its nature does not require that it should 
be either well, or badly bound. The first sentence would, there- 
foi'e, be translated by ser; and the second by estar, thus: Este 
libro ES bueno. Este libro ESTA bien encvadernado. 

If we speak of the attributes of any object, or of the physical 
or moral qualities of men, it is abundantly clear, that whatever 
Ihey may be, they are descriptive of the possessor's nature. For 
instance: if I say, this man is wise, learned, discreet, judicious, 
passionate, &c.; or if I say, "The summer is warm;"" "the winter 
is cold;" ''cloth is made out of wool," &,c., I aa'i the whole time 
descrii?Lng his or its natural qualities; or those (qualities which are 



356 SYNTAX- 

inherent in his or its nature. In such case?, therefore, the verb 
ser, would be employed; as, "God is powerful," Dios e?> poderoso. 
"Ice is cold," el yelo esfrio. "Women are tender," las mugeres son 
ticrnas. "He is wise," el es sabio. "This is,'''' esto es. 

Speaking of the location, situation, &c. of a river, a city, momi- 
ment, or any other object; we have reference to the manner in 
which that certain object exists, but not to any of the qualities 
which naturally belong to a river, a city, or monument; such as 
dimension, beauty, greatness, &c. Kence it is, that all kinds of lo- 
cality, are always expressed by esfar; for instance: "Here is Lon- 
don, a city which is great in every thing," aqut esta Londres, ciudad 
que en todo es grande. "If this monument were placed on a high 
hill, its magnificence would be shown to a greater advantage," 
si este monumento estuviese colocado en im alia colina, su magnijicen-' 
cia se veria mas ventajosamente. 

If the verb, to be, and the present participle, be in English, 
used to conjugate a verb, it is plain that in Spanish, the verb 
estar must be employed. Saying such a person is running; such 
another teas jumping; a third njill be dancing, &c., I mean to ex- 
press the manner in which they did, do, or will exist; it being 
apparent, that it is not in the nature of man, to be, or not to be 
dancings running, Sfc; for instance, "£Z esta escribiendo,''"' he is writ- 
ing. '■^J^osotros estaremos comiendo a las siete,''^ we shall be eating 
at seven o'clock. "£/ estaba escribiendo cuando una bala le paso 
por medio da las piernas,'''' he was writing when a bullet passed 
through his legs. 

When we place the verb to be, before the past participle, or an 
adjectified participle, it is not so plain. On some occasions, we 
have reference to the qualities which must be considered as in- 
herent in the object of which we speak; and some others, as de- 
noting the manner of its existence only. Whenever an object 
has been acted upon by an agent, it has received a certain quality 
which has remained attached to its nature; and, therefore, it 
must be expressed by ser. Thus, for instance: "he is loved," es 
amado. "He is wounded," es herido. "He has been taken," el ha 
aido pi- endido. '■'■The house is cleaned;'''' la casa es limpiada. In every 
one of these phrases, there is an agent understood; and we have, 
therefore reference to the action which the object contained in 
them has received, which action, is now inherent in the nature 



SYNTAX. i57 

of the object; since it must remain, so long as the object itself 
shall remain. 

But, if we had reference to the manner in which the object 
existed at the time we spoke of it, and not to the action it had 
received, then estar, would, doubtless, be used. The phrase, '■'■Thh 
house is cleaned,^'' imports that the house has undergone an opera- 
tion which has remained, and must always remain in it; and would, 
therefore, be translated as above. If, however, I say, '^This house. 
is clean,'''' I have no reference but to the manner of its present 
existence; and how long it will continue, it is not for me to in- 
vestigate; but it is taken for granted, that its existence of clean- 
liness may end. If it be said, "I loas wounded," I may either 
mean that I received from some individual, an injury, the effects 
of which can never be removed, or that, I was at a certain 
time existing in a wounded condition; but that the wound 
having been cured, I enjoy my former state of health. This 
sentence, taken in the first meaning, would be, indubitably, 
translated by ser; and in the second, by estar. El fue herido. 
El estaba herido. And thus will happen in the following and 
similar cases: '^Este libra es escrito por Lavizac,^'' this book is 
written by Levizac. ^^Este lilro esta escrito enfrances,^'' this book 
is written in French. ^'£sta quinta es hecha por el divertimiento de 
su 6?Heno," this country seat is made for the amusement of its pro- 
prietor. Esta quinta esta hecha con balcones,^'' this country seat is 
made with balconies. 

There are some qualities inherent in the nature of objects, the 
existence of which, at the time we speak of them, has already 
taken, or is yet to take, place. It is not to be supposed, that on 
this account, those qualities change their nature. Speaking, for 
instance, of a city which once was, or which it is believed at a 
future period will be large or small; — rich or poor; — splendid or 
miserable, &c., but now it is not so; we must speak of these quali- 
ties as past, or future; but as being, at the time of their exist- 
ence, descriptive of the nature of the city. For instance: "Bal- 
timore, seventy years since, ivas the retreat of the panther and 
the serpent; and now is the abode of seventy thousand souls," 
Hace setenta ahos que Baltimore era el recinto de la onza y de la 
sierpe, y ahora es la morada de seterUa mil almas. Speaking of a 
person who was judicious in all his actions, and at present, owing 



358 SYNTAX. 

to circumstances, is no longer so; we must certainly speak of 
the quality of this individual as inherent in his nature, when it 
was in existence: as, "JEi ersi juicioso en todas sus operaciones,'''' he 
was judicious in all his actions. This rule is also applicable 
when we speak of the manner in which an object exists; thus, 
for instance: "JSi estaba aqui ayer, y sin duda estara aqm manana; 
he was here yesterday, and undoubtedly he loill be here to- 
morrow. 

It frequently happens, that the same quality may, in an object, 
be either natural or accidental; it may either express the natu- 
ral, or the accidental existence. When this occurs, we must 
select the verb which our meaning requires. Suppose we wish 
to say that the water of a certain fountain is naturally warm; 
and that the water of a certain tube is also warm, but that it 
has become so by the process of fire. In the first instance, we 
should unquestionably use ser; and in the second estar; thus: Esta 
agua es caliente; and, Esta agua esta caliente. The same would 
take place in regard to any person who had injured any one of 
his limbs. If it was supposed that his cure was beyond any me- 
dical or surgical operation, the injury would become as perma- 
nent as if it were natural; and, therefore, expressed by ser; but 
if, on the contrary, it was supposed of a short duration only, it 
would be a certain manner of existence. Translating "that man 
is lame" by este liombre es cojo,^^ his lameness is considered per- 
manent; and Este homhre esta cojo^ temporary only. If it be said, 
^^Juan esta melancolico,'''' we mean, John feels now melancholy; 
taking for granted, that the moment the circumstances which 
rendered him so, subside, he will no longer be in this situation. 
But if we say, "Jiwtn es melancolico,^'' we convey the idea that 
John is of a melancholy disposition. And thus it is with re- 
gard to any other object which is susceptible of these two ex- 
istences. 

When we mention the occupation, or profession, -of an indivi- 
dual, we speak of it as its being a natural quality. It is well 
known, that every human being is considered as having a certain 
employment; this employment becomes, therefore, essential to 
the nature of man. His changing this employment or occupa- 
tion for another, is, consequently, no reason for its not being 
attached to his nature: ser is, then, the verb by which this quali- 



SYNTAX, 359 

ty must be expressed; as, '■'■J^apoleon fue emperadcyr,^'' Napoleon 
ivas an emperor. "£Z ha sido capiian, pero ahora es general,^^ he 
. has been captain, but he is now general "£/ era zapatero, es 
satire, y sin duda sera carpintero,'''' he ic«s a shoemaker, is now a 
tailor, and I doubt not that he will be a carpenter. 

The author indulges a hope, that if the student peruse with at- 
tention the preceding observations, he will no longer feel at a 
loss to make the right distinction between Ser, and Estar,* how 
intricate soever the object of his difficulty may be. 

EXERCISES. 

History is the picture of times and men. Solomon 

retrato 

who was the son of David, and who built the temple 

coNSTRuiR templo 

of Jerusalem, was the wisest of kings. Health is the 

sabio salud 

support of life, and joy is the soul of health. 
apoyo alegria alma 

Reason was given to man to control his passions. 

razon para suhordinar 

It is honourable to be a friend to the unfortunate. 
honroso desdichado 

Attention is a very necessary thing to improve our 

atencion cosa para mejorar 

mind. The hundred gates of the city of Babylon 

entendimiento puerta Babilonia 

* Owing to the various meanings of some adjectives, it happens 
that when applied in one sense, they require ser, and when in 
another, eslar. Bueno, and malo, for instance. The first of these 
words means §ood, and also well; and the other bad, and ill. If a 
person wishes to say that he is not well; he will, of course, say: 
yoio estoi hueno; this being the manner in which he now exists; 
but that another is not good, he will say, el no es bueno; this being 
a quality descriptive of his nature. 



360 SYNTAX. 

were of brass. Telemachus come to rest for thy 

bronce d descansar pues 

clothes are wet. When kings are beloved, it is a * 
vestido mojado 

certain proof that they deserve to be so. To comfort 

prueba merecer lo t consolar d 

the afflicted, is an act of mercy. Eternity is a 

cifiigido obra mesericordia 

continued circle, its centre is every where, but its 
continuo circulo centra {en todas partes) 
circumference is no where. All that is, was, or ever 
circimferencia (en ninguna) jamas 

shall be in heaven, earth, or sea, is known to God. 

cielo tierra -mar 
Those manners which (are becoming) w^hen they are 

7nanera caer b'len 

natural, render people ridiculous, when they are 

hacer (a imo) ridiculo 
affected. People are afraid of seeing themselves what 
afectado ver {ellos mismos) 

they are, because they are not what they should be. 

deber 
Knowledge is the treasure, but judgment the treasurer 

tesoro tesorero 

of a wise man. He who is diligent, will be rewarded. 
diligente recompensado 

The temple of Diana was at Ephesus. Some nations 

templo d Efeso 

which are called frivolous, have produced the most 

frivolo 
grave men 5 and others, which are called grave, have 

produced the most frivolous. 



SYNTAX. 3^1 

SER. 

RULE LXII. 
The verb, to be^ {ser^ is frequently conjugated iinper«^ 
sonally, with the nouns menester, Men, &c. and the adjec- 
tives, preciso^ necesario; as, "Es menester que los horn- 
bres sean realmente grandes, para atraer la aclainacion 
del siglo,^^ men must be really great to attract the ac- 
clamation of the present age. *'Es preciso que ye 
vaya,^^ it is necessary that I should go, or, I must go. 
*'Es necesario hacer atencion a las cosas del mundo,^' 
it is necessary that we should pay attention, or, we 
must pay attention to tiie things of the worlds 

J^'ote 1. As, ser preciso^ to be necessary, ser necesario, to be ne- 
cessary, &c., require the subjunctive; when we say, in English, 
it is necessary for me to go, for them to be here, &c., we must 
say in Spanish, it is necessary that I should go, that they be here, 
&c. Es necesario^ or, es menester que yo vaya, quo ellos se queden 
aqui. 

J^ole 2. There are some personal verbs which are often conju- 
gated impersonally; as, "basta que el lo dig-a," it suffices that he 
says so. *'No basta que el lea, debt leer 6ien," it is not enough that 
he reads, he must read well. 

Js'ote .3. When ser, to be, is used impersonally, and precedes a 
pronoun, the verb ser must agree with this pronoun in number 
and person; as, '■'■Soi yo quien lo hizo," it is I who did it. "5o7i 
ellos los que lo dicen," it is they who say it. 

EXERCISES, 

There n^eds* (no more) than a bad inclination 

(710 ser menester) sino t = 

to make a man vicious. (It is not enough) to think 
para hacer & viciose no bustar pensar 

* See observation, page 1^9, 



362 SYNTAX. 

with exactness, we must also express ourselves 

ecsactitud [ser menester) espresarse 

with cle^ness. (It is necessary) to prefer our duty 
daridad ser preciso t preferir obligacion 
to our pleasure. 
gusto 
(Note 1.) (It is not enough) for a general to be pru- 
no bastar 
dent, it is also necessary that he be fortunate. It is 

afortunado 
not enough for us to study, we must learn. It is not 

esiudiar aprender 

enough for men to appear modest, it is necessary that 

parecer modesto 
they really be so.* 
realmente lo 
{Note 2.) It is the gospel that commands us to 
evangelio manda 

forgive our enemies. It is not those who speak 
perdonar a hablar 

most that men admire. It is thou who (hast deceived) 
mas admirar engahar 

us. Men- must^ obeyt the laws, since it is 

[ser menester que) puesque 

they that defend us. It was envy that occasioned 

DEFENDER euviditt ocasiouar 

the first murder in the world. 
asesinato mundo 

* So^ whem used in the sense of if, as aboye^ should always be 
translated by lo. 
t See obseryation, page 169 



SYNTAX. .363 

EXERCISES 

On the impersonal and irregular verbs. ^ 
But ]et us suppose that your general should 
suponer 
^come out) victorious. I already told you, that although 

salir victorioso ya decir 

he may shed tears, they cannot pardon him. Al- 

verier lagrima poder pardoner 

though he may know me, he will not come. He 

conocer venir 

counterfeited ten dollar bank notes. Oh! and 
confrahacer {notas de banco de dies pesos) 
(how much) do I suffer with my disease. Do not 
cuanto t padecer enfermedad 

condescend to change your opinion without sufficient 
eondescender cambiar sin bast ante 

ground for it. (Give consolation) to the afflicted. 
fundamento consolar 

All heard Marcus Brutus. The Roman people did 

oir a Marco Bnito el Romano pueblo 
not regret the assassination of Ccesar, but they 

sentir asesiny'io Cesar pero 

regretted that after his death the vile Cinna 

sentir {depucs de) 

should speak ill of him. It (fell to his) lot to live 
decir mal caberle en suerte vivir 

so long. They ought to have reviewed the 

{ta?ito tiempo) deber rever 

works. Should we obtain the office we wish, how 
obra conseguir puesto desear cuan 

happy I would be. The trees blossom again. We 

rejiorecer 
* SQft Etymology, from page 125, to page 17C 



^164 SYNTAX. 

would never oppose a negotiation. Let them propose 

oponerse a ^ proponer 

the conditions. (Make thyself acquainted) with their 

imponerse en 

proposals. Prefer virtue to riches. (They have 
propuesta anteponer com- 

composed) various works. If (they should expose) 

])oner esponer 

her to his rage. Her groans attracted the attention 

cdlera gemido atraer 

of the hearers. To the end that the delinquents 
oyente [a Jin de que) delincuente 

(might take refuge) in the church. It snows very 

retraerse iglesia 

heavily. Although it should snow, the ceremony 
mucho ceremonia 

(will take place.) It thundered last night. If it 
efectuarse* 
thunder I shall not go. In summer it (grows light) 

verano 
very early. In the morning the field was co- 
teynprano manana campo tu- 

vered with soldiers.t There are men (whom we like) 
hrir de soldado que nos gustan 

and men (whom we dislike) without knowing the 

que nos disgustan sin saber 

reason. If there should be so many persons, we shall 
razon 

be uncomfortable. It is cold. It was so cold last 
incomodado hater frio hacer pasado 

* If an infinitive be found beneath an inclosure of twa or three 
words, the student must put it in its right tense, 
t See observation, page 166. 



SYNTAX. 365 

winter, that some men were found frozen in the 
invierno hallarse congelado 

streets. It is extremely warm this summer, and no 
calle estremo calor verano sin 

doubt, it will be very cold next^ winter,^ Would 
duda (que viene) placer 

to God, he would become good. If it should please God^ 

hacerse placer 

I will go. Let them subtract the half of the sum. Al- 

ir subtraer mitad 

though (it may not be worth) the while. The profits 

valer pena ganancia 

(would be equivalent) to the labour. He will surpass 

equivaler trabajo sobresalir a 

liis predecessor in humility. The innkeeper conducted 

liumildad mesonero conducir 

me to the house of a carrier. If this orator were 

aii'iero 
never to introduce his similies. If the trees (should 

introducir — ctrbol 

not produce) fruit next summer. We shall 
producir fruta {el verano que viene) 

abide by your opinion. In order that (they might 
atenerse d nianie- 

keep up) their establishment. He would not entertain 
ner establecimiento tntretener 

them. Refrain thy passions. Though some accident 

co7ile)ier 
(may happen) to them, they never will infringe the 

sobrevenir [contravenir a) 

laws. The bad smell arose from the drain. We 
mal olor provenir caiio 

31* 



366 SYNTAX. 

prepared ourselves for the battle. I never retract 
prevenirse desdecirse de 

what I have^ once^ said. ^ They will bless the 

una vez bendecir 

hand. He (had predicted) that (they would curse) him. 

predecir maldedr 

Though he (should contradict) the assertion, I will 

contradedr afirmacioji 

not retract. This bread is blessed. 
pan 

OOVERNMENT OF VER:BS. 

RULE LXIII. 
An active transitive verb, governs the noun to which 
its energy is transmitted, in the objective casej as, "Pb 
te amare, I shall love thee, ""Dios aborrece el vicio,^' 
God hates vice. 

J^ote 1. In the following instances, the verb governs the objec- 
tive case, with the preposition a. 

1 . "When tlie objective case is a person or any inani- 
mate object personified; as, ^'Dios ama al justo^^'^ God 
loves the righteous man. ''Atacaroh a Toledo,''^ they 
attacked Toledo. ^'Bonaparte nunca pudo conquistar 
a la Espana;^^ Bonaparte never could conquer Spain. 

2. When tlie nominative, and the objective are in 
the same number^ both representing inanimate objectSy 
aiid the nominative exercising a certain power over the 
objective; as, '*A la leiia quema el fuego^^^ fire burns 
wood. "^7 verba rige al adverbio," the verb governs 
the adverb, "^Z sol alumbra a la tierra," the sun lights 
the earth. 

J^'ote 2. When the sentence contains two objective cases, of 
-^'hich. OBe, is, in Englisbj governed hy a verb, and th& other by 



SYNTAX. 36r 

the preposition to; the d, should, in Spanish, be omitted; as, '^In- 
troduciremos el conde [not al] a Ja tna?-gttesa," we shall introduce 
the Earl to the Marchioness. 

EXERCISES. 

They whom opulence has made proud and whom 
opidencia orgidloso 

luxury has corrupted, cannot relish the simple 
disolucion cori'ojnper gustar ■ 

pleasures of nature. We should fear and obey 
placer temer obedecer 

the Author of our being, (even him who) (has power) 

autor ser sz, a el que puede 

to reward or punish us for ever. God will reward 
premiar castigar para siempre recompensar 

the good and punish the wicked. Spain (used to govern) 

castigar gohernar 

Mexico, but now she has lost every power over it. 
Megico perder todo poder sobre 

When a person sees the present dissolution, he 

observar actual • 

would suppose that nothing but vice leads the world. 

creer sino regir 

Cortes sent four envoys to the Tlascaltecas to 
remitir embiado — ^__ para 

(request of them) entrance into their towns. 
pedirles eiitrada en ciudad 

OF VERBS GOVERNING THE INFINITIVE. 

RULE LXIV. 
If two verbs come together in English, and the se- 
cond be in the infinitive, it is generally used in the same 
mood in Spanish; as, "Z^eseo aprender," I wish to 
ham* ^'Es menester regir nuestras pasiones,^^ it is ne- 
cessary to rule our passions. 



36S SYNTAX. 

J^ott 1. Verbs denoting to darcy to begins to teach, to learn, t* 
compel, to submit, to exhort, or invite, to prepare, to assist, to be destin- 
ed, and to accustom one''s self, generally require a before the infini- 
tive which they govern; as, "JVb me atrevo a hablar," I dare not 
speak. '■'■Empece a aprender el Espanol,''^ I began to learn the Spa- 
nish. "/S<^ puso a estudiar," he set about to study. "Le convide a 
cenar cowmig-o," I invited him to sup with me. '■'■Meestd siempre 
ecsortando a vivir oistianainentCf''^ he is always exhorting me to live 
like a Christian. 

.iNote 2. Verbs signifying to abstain, to cease, to deprive, tofinish^ 
govern the infinitive with de; as, "Se abstiene de beber vino,'''' he 
abstains from drinking wine. "JWe has privado de verla,''"' thou hast 
deprived me of her sight. ^^Acabare de escribir a la una,'''' I shall 
leave off writing at one. "Cesaron de atormentarme,'''' they ceased 
to torment me. 

J^ote 3. When the preposition to, before an English infinitive, 
denotes /or the sake of, it is, in Spanish, construed by por; and by 
para, when that particle means in order to; as, "There are many, 
who, to speak,'''' [that is, for the sake of speak'ing,] "speak nonsense," 
haimuchos que por hablar, hablan dispara'.es. "God has granted us 
the power of speech to convey our ideas," [that is, in order to con.' 
vey; or, that we might convey our ideas] "to our fellow beings," Dios 
nos ha concedido el poder del habla para coraunicar nuestras ideas d 
auestros semejantes. 

EXERCISES. 

Men (ought to) abstain themselves from whatever 
deber abstenerse 
may lead them to vice. A man ought not to 

poder conducir 

mention other person's faults, for he may fall into the 

Tuencionar falta poder caer en 

same. (It is better) to prevent evil than to be under 

valer mas mat bajo 

the necessity of punishing it. Men have no need 

castigar necesidad 

to shun society to be virtuous. Fortune causes* 

abandonar sodedad virtuoso hacer 



SYNTAX. 369 

mir virtues or vices (to be se^n. ^ )^ He caused himself 

ver hacerse 

{to be beloved) by his subjects by his affability. The 

wnar de vasallo por afabilidad 

mayor ordered us (to be taken up. ) Men often 

corregidor mandar prender 

(suffer themselves) (to be overcome) by temptations, 

dejarse veneer 

because they dare not expose themselves to the 

atreverse esponerse 

sarcasms of the world. It was not easy (to meet with) 
sarcasmo hollar 

a more favourable conjuncture to free ourselves from 

conjuntura librarse 
his dominion. To obtain a convenient seat, it 

dominacion lograr comodo asiento 
was necessary to go very early, but who (would not 
temprano ma-- 
rise betimes) to have the pleasure of hearing his 
drugar gusto oir 
speeches? The victory is not yet gained. t The 
discurso alcanzar 
capitulation was not signed. There remains to us 
jirmar quedar 

* When an English verb being reflective, or expressive of com- 
mand, governs a passive infinitive; this infinitive must, in Spanish, 
be always active; as, "She did not suffer herself fo be seen,^^ no se 
dejo ver. "He caused him to be killed,'*'' le hizo matar. "He or- 
dered him to be brought,^^ le hizo traer. 

t The verb quedar, or esiar, with the preposition por, is used be- 
fore an infinitive, to denote, that the action of this infinitive, is 
not yet accomplished; as, "The letter is not yet icritten," la carta 
estd por escribir. J^bs quedan sets leguas por andar. "We have six 
miles iog-o.'*^ 



370 SYNTAX. 

yet (a great deal) to suiFer. Nothing ought to be left 
aun mucho padecer 

undone. Our wrongs remain still unrevenged. We 
hacer agravio aun vengar 

ought to suffer with resignation all the evils which we 

sufiir mal 

cannot avoid. The republic of Colombia, appears to 

evitar 

have conducted herself very discreetly since the 

conducido discretamente desde 

day in which she dissolved her chains. Men ought 

di solver cadena 

to teach one another to practise virtue. Whoever 

ensenarse 
begins to learn a science ought not to leave it, 

aprender ciencia dejar 

until he is master of it He who is accustomed 
{Jiasta que sea) maestro acostumhrar 

to suffer, knows (how to appreciate) innocent pleasures. 

padecer apreciar 

Religion compels us to forego pleasures, and to re- 
ohligar olvidar deleite re- 

vere our superiors. 

verenciar ' 



VERBS GOVERNING THE INDICATIVE OR 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

RULE LXV. 

When two verbs come together in English, and the 

latter is governed in the indicative or subjunctive by a 

conjunction, the Spanish verb will, in general, admit 

the same mood 5 as, '^Dijome este que pensaba paitiv 

mtes de amanecer, y que el tendria midado de disper- 



SYNTAX. ;Jri 

tarme^^^ the latter told me that he meant to set out 
before day -break, and that he would take care to awake 
me. 

J<ote 1. Verbs denoting Jittiess, or necessity, such as imply cc/jt- 
manding or permission^ those which signify desire, or joy, loonder, or 
douht^ and hnperfonals used interrogatively or negatively^ generally 
require the verb which loliows them, to be in the subjunctive;* 
as, '■'•Conviene que venga mahana,'^'' it is proper that he should come 
to-morrow. ^^Mando que rindiesen la plaza," he ordered the place 
to be given up. '■^Q^uiero que aprendas," I wish you to learn. 

JSTote 2. The conjunction must ahva}'S be expressed in Spanish; 
although in English it may be only understood; as, "Jl/e dijo que 
i'endrm," he told me [that] he would come. 

JVote 3. When the verb which in English is governed in the in- 
finitive, can, by means of the conjunction that, be changed into 
another mood; this latter mood ought always to be adopted in the 
Spanish. Thus, for instance, the sentence "I know him to be 
good," can be changed into, I know that he is good; and this, 
therefore, should be the Spanish construction: — Yo se que el es 
bueno. "He commanded me to follow him," [that is, that I should 
follow him] me maiulo que le siquiese. 

M>te 4. The subjunctive must be employed after any conjunc- 
tive conjunction in which que is included; such as, — dado que, 
granted that; — con tal que, provided that; — amenos que-, unless 
that; — 710 sea que, lest; — antes qite; — sin que, &i'c. as, "Dado que me 
escriba no le respondere,''^ granted that you should write me, I shall 
not answer you. "Con tal que vmd. calle, yo me contentare ,''"' pro- 
vided you keep silent, I shall be satisfied. "Amenos que restituya 
el dinero no le perdonardn,''^ tmless he returns the money, they will 
not forgive him.f 

The tenses of the subjunctive are frequently directed 
by the governing; verb in the indicaiive; thus: — 

1. If the governing verb be in iho^ present or the/ie- 
ture imperfect of the indicative, the verb governed ought 

*The conjunction that, in this case is generally used. 

t The student should also read attentively the rules given m 
e1;ymology, from page 112 to page 12L 



372 SYNTAX. 

to be in the present or perfect of the subjunctive 5 as* 
"Ze suplico a vmcL que venga aqui mmtana,^^ I en- 
treat you to come here to-morrow. '^Le dire a. mi her- 
mano que no saiga hasta las tres,^'^ I shulltellmj brother 
not to go out till three o'clock. ''Dudo que haya Uegado 
aun,^^ I doubt his having yet arrived. "Celebrare que 
haya logrado el empleo,^^ I shall be happy to know that 
he has obtained the situation. 

2. If the governing verb be in the imperfect, the 
perfect indefimte^ or the pluperfect of the indicative, 
the verb governed ought to be in the imperfect or pluper- 
fect of the subjunctive, with the terminations ta, or se; 

as, '''•Mi hermana queria que vinieramos toclos los dias,^^ 
my sister ivished us to come every day. ^'£1 goherna- 
dor le permitio que saliese," the governor ;9ermi7f erf him 
to come out, "Temi que hubiese venido la semana 
pasada,-^ I was afraid that he would have come last 
week. 

3. If the governing verb be in the perfect definite or 
the future perfect of the indicative, the verb governed 
must be in the present or the imperfect -of the subjunc- 
tive with the termination ra or se; as, *'E1 rei ha man- 
dado que el embajador vuelva iinediatarnente,^^ the king 
has ordered that the ambassador should return imme- 
diately. "Fo le habra dicho su padre que no la vuelva 
a ver," his father has, no doubt, already told him not to 
see her again. "Ze habr4 dicho que viniese para decir- 
selo,''^ he {most likely) told him to come in order to tell 
it him. 

These directions are not equally applicable in all 
cases; regard must be had to the meaning of the govern- 
ing verb: thus, for instance, verbs of commandvig and 
of promising can never goyern the verb in the perfect 



SYNTAX. 373 

or pluperfect of the subjunctive, because an order or a 
promise must necessarily precede its performancce 

Exercises. 

Despise not any condition lest it hap- 

despreciar ninguno situacion {no sea que) aeon* 

pen to be your own. Consider, man, that (every thing) 

tecer t todo 

has had a beginning, and that it will have an end. 

principio todo Jin 

Chimalpopoca, in the eleventh year of his reign 

reinado 

ordered a great stone to be brought to Mexico. God 

tnandar piedra truer 

has told us to fulfil his commandments, and 

(complir con) mandamiento 

(we would be saved.)* Although Duhesme, in eighteen 

salvarse 

hundred and eight, entered Barcelona in a friendly 
cntrar de amigahle 

manner, yet he wished the governor after 

modo sin embargo querer gobernador 

some days of his entrance, to give him the keys of that 

entrada dar Have 

capital. There are few persons of so penetrating a 

sublime 

genius, and so just a judgment as* (to be capable of) 
ingenio verdadero juicio que poder 

learning the arts and sciences, without teachers. Is it 
aprender sin maestro 

not (to be wondered at,) that this age should be so much 
de maravillarse siglo 

* See note 1, rule xviii., page 23%^ 

r>2 



S74 SYNTAX. 

con-upted? Ferdinand the third ordered Seville to be 
CDrrom2:)er Sevilla 

attacked on the 20th of August, l£4r. Though the 
einbestir 

invention of machines in England, for the making 

indquina egecucion 

of merchandize, be useful to make them cheaper, and 

mercaderias util barato 

more abundant, is it not pernicious to those poor human 

pemicioso 
beings who were employed in making them? Provided 

ser emphado 

we act as God commands us, let the envious world 

ohrar mandar envidioso 

say w^hat it pleases. 
querer 

OF VERBS REQUIRING CERTAIN PREPOSI- 
TIONS. 

OF VERBS REqUIRIXG THE PREPOSITION DE. 

RULE LXVI. 
1. Passive verbs require the preposition de or por' 
before the noun which denotes the agent: as, ^^Los ma- 
los son aborrecidos de, or por Dios»^' the wicked are 
hated by God. ^^El reo fue sentenciado por el juez.'' 
the culprit was sentenced by the judge. 

Ji'ote 1. Neuter yerbs, acMve intransitiye, as well as some re- 
flective verbs, govern a word with de, which denotes what causes 
their effects; as, Bramar de corage, to roar with passion. Enfer- 
mar de calentura. to sicken with fever. Tiritar de frio, to shiver 
with cold. 

*Por may always be used. But this is not the case in regard 
to de. For, generally, it may only be employed when the verb ex- 
presses an effect of the mind; as, ^'El es amado des« padre,'"' he is 
htcd bv his father. 



SYNTAX. 375 

JVbfe 2. Verbs implying plenty or want, remembrance or oblivion, 
govern a noun generally preceded by de; as, ^^Lleno la casa de 
gente," he filled the house ivith people. '■^Acuerdate de tu Criador," 
remember thy Creator. "Se ha olvidado, de mi,"* he has forgotten 
me. 

J^ote 3. Verbs implying blaming, absolving, using, repenting, jeer- 
ing, 2ind pitying, generally govern a noun also with de; as, "JVo te 
alabes de valiente,'''' do not extol thy courage. "El se gloria de 
sabio,''^ he makes a boast of his wisdom. "Se arrepintio de sits 
delitos,^^ he repented o/his crimes. 

J^ote 4. Verbs implying distance or separation, generally require 
tie before the noun which they do not directly govern; as, "Me 
alejare de mi tierra," I shall remoye far from my country. "Apdr- 
tate de la ocasion," avoid the opportunity. "Cuando disper to del 
sueno," when he awoke from his sleep. "Escapdron de la prision," 
they escaped //om the prison. 

To all these verbs, may be added the following: 

Adolecer de enfei-medad, To be seized with illness. 

Agi-aviarse de algo. To take offence at something. 

»S.legrarse de las nuevas, To rejoice at the news. 

Avergonzarse de la respuesta, To be ashamed at the answer. 

Atemorizarse de algo. To be frightened at something. 

Airarse de la respuesta, To be angry at the answer. 
Abochornarse de la conversacion, To blush at the conversation. 

Abundar de riquezas. To abound in riches. 

Ahitarse de manjares. To be surfeited with meats. 

Apercibirse de armas, To provide one's self with arms. 

Armarse de paciencia. To arm one's self with patienc6. 

Abstenerse de lafruta. To abstain from fruit. 

Ahorrar de razones, To spare words. 

Apearse del caballo, To alight from the horse. 

Apewrse de sxi opinion^ To alter one's opinion. 

Apelar de la sentencia. To appeal from the sentence. 

Aseg^urarse del peligro. To shelter ourselves from the 
danger. 

* Except the expression, traer a la memoria, to remind; or olvi' 
dar, to forget, which admits no preposition whatever; as, "Le 
trdge d la memona la promesa,^^ I reminded him of the promise. 
"Olvido la respuesta,'''' he forgot the answer. 



376 

Begar de su autoridad, 
Bordar de oro, 
Bufar de ira, 
Calarse de agua, 
Cargar de trigo, 
Convencerse de lo contrariOj 
Comerse de envidia^ 
Confundirse de la que se ve, 

Convalecer de enfermedad, 
Degenerar de su nacimiento, 

Deponer de un empleo, 
Derivar de otra autoiidad, 

Descansar del trabajo. 
Descender de huen linage, 
Desconfiar de alguno, 
Desertar del regimientOj 
Desembarcar de la nave, 
Descargarsc de w^u, 

Descargarse de la casa, 
Desnudarse del veslido, 
Despoblarse de gtnte, 
Disgustarse de alguna cosa, 
Espantarse de la pregwitUf 
Eslraer una cosa de otra, 

Fasiidiarse de alga, 
Llevarse de aiguna pasion, 
Morir de dolor, 
Mudarse de casa, 
Ofenderse de la conducta, 
Salir del peligro, 
Zafarse de alguno, 



SYNTAX. 



To recede from one's autbopity 

To embroider in gold. 

To swell with rage. 

To be wet through. 

To load with wheat. 

To be convinced of the contraiy. 

To be gnawed with envy. 

To be confounded at what one 
sees. 

To recover from sickness. 

To degenerate from one's ances- 
tors. 

To depose from an employment. 

To derive from another authori- 
ty- 

To pest from labour. 

To come from a good family. 

To misirust any one. 

To desert from the regiment. 

To debark from the vessel. 

To exonerate one's self froT» 

something. 
To get rid of the houae. 
To pull off the suit. 
To depopulate. 
To be disgusted at something. 
To be astonished at the question. 
To extract something from some 

other. 
To be cloyed with something. 
To be led away by some passion, 
To die of grief. 
To change one's dwelling. 
To be affronted at the conduct. 
To come out safe from danger. 
To get one's self away from one. 



EXERCISES. 

Great men are persecuted bj envy. The West 
persegidr occidental 



SYNTAX.' ^77 

Indies were discovered by Columbus, in fourteen hun- 

India descubierto Colon 

dred and ninety-two. Homer's Iliad (was translated) 

Ho7nero Iliada traducir 
by Alexander Pope. When boys cry with passion, 

Alejamlro llorar colera 

they ought to be severely reprehended. Some 

severamente reprehendido 
people are ashamed to do things which ought to be 

avergonzarse 
supposed the most honourable. The crew of the 
suponer honroso tripulacion 

vessel in which Columbus was, soon (grew tired) of 
navio Colon pronto cansarse 

being at sea, and all was quarrel and dissention. 

estar al mar (no habia sino) rina ■ 

O man, remember him who does you a service, and 

acordarse te favor 

do not forget, if you can, to do him another. No 

olividar 
one can say, I want noboby. Men ought never to 

no neccsitar nadie 
praise their wisdom. The last war between France 
alabarse t sabio idtima 

and Spain was so inveterate, that the Spaniards 

inveterado 
i^iad no mercy on the French, nor the French, on 
[fener misericordia) 
the Spaniards. Men ought to (avail themselves) 

[»:derse 
of every opportunity of doing good. An honest man 
ocaaion honrado 

32^ 



373 SYNTAX. 

(does not value himself) upon any thing. Thy parents 

preciarse padre 

will repent having lectured a simpleton so much. 

arrepentirse arengado mentecato 

We did not laugh at hearing him sing, but at seeing 

reirse oir cantar sino ver 

him dance. Those things which degenerate from 

bailar degenerar 

their nature (are apt) to be admirable if they are 



good, and most vile if they are bad. We renounce^ 
vil renunciat 

more^ easily^ our interests than our pleasures. 
facilmente 

OF VERBS REQUIRING THE PREPOSITION A,. 
RULE LXVII. 

Verbs of demanding, and of granting or refusings 
require generally the preposition c, before the noun to 
which their energy is transmitted^ as, ''Fide perdon a 
Dios,^^ he asks pardon frojn God. ''El amo nego la 
Ucencia al criado,'^ the master denied the leave to the 
servants 

JNote 1. Verbs implying yielding, or resistance, generally require 
« before the noun to which their energy is transmitted; as, '■'Sun- 
que declare ella su parecer, yo nosoi uno de los que som^ten su opinion 
al dictdmen de otros,'''' altiiough she may declare her opinion, I am 
not one of those, who submit their opinion to the opinion of others- 
^^Me opondre a las leyes,''"' I shall oppose the laws. 

JVbfe 2. Verbs of comparing generally require a before the nouQ 
with which the comparison is made; as, "£i hip se parece, al pa- 
dre," the son resembles the father, '■'■La hija se semeja a la madre," 
the daughter is like the mother. ^'■Poi' lo demas, no es mas parecido 
un huevo a otro huevo," as to the rest, one egg is not more like 
y.nother egg. 



SYNTAX. 



379 






JVbfe 3. Verbs implying to belong, to concern, to happen, to play, 
as well as most of the impersonal verbs, generally require a be- 
fore the noun to which their energy is directed; as, ^'Pertenecemos 
si la tierra," we belong to the earth. '■'■Los bienes de un deudor cor- 
responden a sus acreedores," the property of a debtor belongs to 
his creditors. ^'Iinporta si los Cristianos," it concerns Christians. 
^'■Desgracias acontecen si los incautos," misfortunes happen to the 
umcary. ^'Jugard a los naipes," he will play at ccfi-ds. ^'■Todo le 
parecia a ella 'U?iswereo," every thing seemed to her a dream. '^Le 
convenia a ella la propuesta,''''* the proposal was advantageous to 
her. 

Aofe 4. Verbs of condemning, require the punishment to be pre- 
ceded by the preposition a; as, ^'■Condendron at reo a galeras," 
they condemned the culprit to the galleys. ^' Sentenciardn al desertor 
a ser arcabuceado," they will sentence the deserter to be shot. 



The following and similar 
Abandonarse a su suerle, 

Accedzr d la propuesta, 
Acogerst d alguno, 
jlcomodarse nl reglamenio, 
Acostumbrarse al trabajo, 
Adlierir al niismo dictdmen, 
Agregarse a otros, 
Ajustarse d la razon, 
Apegarse a algo, 
Arreglarse a lo jiisto, 

Aparecerse a mnchos, 
Arrogarse algo a si, 

Alribuirlo d otros, 
Ceder a los ruegos, 
Ceiiirse d poco, 
Condescender d los ruegos, 



verbs belong to the above. 

To abandon one's self to one's 

lot. 
To accede to the proposal. 
To have recourse to somebody. 
To conform with the regulations 
To become used to labour. 
To adhere to the same opinion-. 
To join one's self to others. 
To conform to reason. 
To adhere to something. 
To regulate one's self by what 

is just. 
To become suddenly visible. 
To arrogate something to one's 

self. 
To attribute it to others. 
To yield to the entreaties. 
To limit one's self to little. 
To condescend to the entreaties. 



* Str, when used in the sense of to belong, requires de instead of 
6 before the noun which denotes the possessor; as, la casa es de 
mi tioj the house belongs to my wide. 



380 SYNTAX. 

Comimicar luz a otra parte, To give light to another place. 

Consagrarse a Dios, To consecrate one's self to God. 

Humiltarse a alguno, To humble one's self to some- 

body. 

Inspirar la venganza a, alguno, To inspire some one with ven- 
geance. 

Participar algo dmuchos, To impart something to many. 

Pe7initir mueho a alguno^ To allow a great deal to some 

one. 

Restituir lo robado a su dueho, To restore what was stolen to 

its owner. 

Rendirse a ta razon, To yield to reason. 

Siigetarse a las leyos, To subject one's self to the laws. 

EXERCISES. 

AVe cannot conceal our actions from God, (how 

ociiltar por 

s€cret soever they may be.) The Germans evacuated 

mas secretas que secin Aleinan evaciiar 

Barcelona where thev could not maintain themselves. 

manfenerse 

The adventures of Gil Bias, says Father Isla, were 

jmdre 

stolen from Spain, and adopted in France. The French 
robar aclopfar 

buy wool of the Spaniards, and then the Spaniards 

comprar lana Espahol 

buy it of the French, manufactured. He made war 

fabricar hacer 

upon the two sovereigns, and took from them* various 
soberano 

* Any preposition governing the objective pronoun in English, 
must be, in Spanish, changed into that preposition which the 
governing verb requires. The above from them, is therefore to 
be translated by Us; this being the pronoun equivalent to the 
English to them. 



SYNTAX. 381 

places. I (went out) of Ithaca to inquire after my 

plaza salir preguntar por 

father, of the other kings who had returned from the 

vuelto 
siege of Troy, Men ought always to answer the 
sitio Troy a deber responder 

question* put to them with coolness and modesty. 
pregunta ponerse blandura modestia 

Speak to God as if you were heard by men. The king 

oido 
sent over a great store of gentlemen and warlike 
t 7iumero senor guerrera 

people amongst whom he distributed the land. The 

gente entre tierra 

Moors determined to be buried under the ruins 
Moro determinarse [dejarse enterrar) hajo 
of Toledo, rather than surrender. Mula, and Cartha- 

antes que entregarse Carta- 

thagena refused to open thoir gates to Infante Don 

genu rehusar abrir puerta '■ — — > 

Alphonzo, but they were obliged to open them in the 

Alfonzo obligado 

year one thousand two hundred forty-two. It is neces- 
sary that we should apply ourselves to improve our 

aplicarse mejorar 

minds. It is said that the natives of the Isle of 

entendimiento natural isla 

Wight, resemble very much those of the valleys of 

asemejarse valle 

Arragon. It concerns princes to judge of their 
" importar principe juzgar 

* Whkh are, or ivhich is.^ must always be expressed in Spanish 



382 SYNTAX. 

ministers, but it concerns vassals to submit to 
ministro vasallo someterse 

their will. Mexico has ceased to belong to Spain. 

voluntad pertenecer 

Tantalus was condemned to a continual thirst, and to 
Tantalo continuo sed 

have the water up to his chin, and not (to be able) 

(junto d barba poder 

to taste it, 
probar 

VERBS REQUIRING EN. 

RULE LXVIII. 

Most verbs precede a noun, or an infinitive, with the 
preposition en, when the noun denotes in what the 
meaning of the said verb is conspicuous 5 as, "Zo5 con- 
denaron en las costas," they condemned them in the 
eoats, ^'EHa crece en virtudes^^^ she increases in viv' 
tue, ^'Siempre pensare en ti," I shall always think 
on thee. 

The following verbs may be included: 

Jibrasarse en deseos, To burn with desires. 

Mundar enriqiiezas, To abound in riches. 

Jlferrarse en sxi opinion, To be tenacious of one's opinion. 

».9ndar enpleitos, To be engaged in lawsuits. 

Barar en tien'a, To run aground. 

Consentir en la propuestOf To consent to the proposals. 

Dar en mamas^ To be seized with some mania. 

Encenegarse en vicios, To wallow in vice. 

Esmerarse en algo, To exert one's self in any thing. 

Hallarse en la fiesta^ To be present at the feast. 

Imponer en algo, To instruct in any thing. 

Prorumpir en Idgrimas, To burst into tears. 

Medundar en benejieio de otrQ. To redouud to another's benefit 



SYNTAX. 383 

EXERCISES. 

It is better not to abound with riches, than to 
abundar 
burn with the desires which they excite. If we 

abrasarse escitar 

thought oftener on the prodigies of nature; 

reflecsionar umenudo prodigio 

(how much more) (would we not admirej the wisdom 
cuanto mas admirar sabiduria 

of that Supreme Being who' rules (everything.*) 

supremo ser gobernar todo lo 

It is better not to be occupied, than to be thinking of 

ocupado pensar 

the ways of doing mischief. It is not those who 

7nodo mal 

burst into tears the soonest,* that**feel the 

pronimpir Idgrima pronto sentir 

most. 

VERBS REQUIRING CON. 

RULE LXIX. 
Verbs denoting behaviour generally require con 
before the persons towards whoui the behaviour is 
directed; as, '''Ella se ha airado con su hermano," she 
is aifranted with her brother. ^'El se caso con su pri- 
ma," he married his cousin. ^'Me desahogare con mi 
padre," I will unbosom myself to my father. '•''Jus- 
tarse coil alguno," to settle with any one. 

Xote 1. VVlien the verb meters" is used in the sense of to med- 
dle, or to inierfere, it requires con before the noun, if it be a per- 
son, and en if it be a thing; as, '■'■Aconsejote, amigo, que en adelante 

* The soonest, should be translated by the comparative mas 
pronto, without the article. 



384 SYNTAX. 

no te vuelvas a meter con semejante gente,^^ I advise thee, friend, 
not to meddle in future icith such people. "Wo te metas en negocios 
ag-enos," do not irt^erfere icith the affairs of others. 

OBSERVATION. 

When there is a noun in the sentence denoting the means 
whereby the action of the vferb is effected, it may be governed 
with con, de, or a, according to the following rules: — 1st, If the 
noun signify the instrument or weapon with which the action was 
done, it requires con before it; as, "£Z le mato con el pie," he 
killed him with the foot; "con un punal," xcith a poniard;'''' "con un 
martillo," with a hammer. 2d, If the noun be the name of the in- 
jury or blow given with the weapon or instrument, it requires to 
be preceded by de or con when used in the singular number, and 
by a when in the plural; as, '■^Ellt mato de or con un puntapie," 
he killed him with a Jc'ick; "a puntapies," icilh kicks; "de w con 
una pufialada,"* icith a stab of a poniard; "apuualadas,"?)!/ several 
slabs with a poniard; "de or con un marlillazo," toith the blow of a 
Jiammer; "a martillazos,"' by giving several blows with a hammer. 

• EXERCISES. 

That man who fulfils his duty, and acts (according 

cumplir obrar segun 

to) the precepts of our Holy Mother, the church, will 

precept santo inglesia 

(undoubtedly) obtain glory. We ought to behave 

sin duda portarse 

prudently (as w ell) to our friends as to our 

{con prudencia) asi coino 

enemies. Mothers sometinaes suffocate their children 
sufocar hyo 

* It is a peculiaritj' of the Spanish language that, by adding the 
syllable azo, oilo, &:c. to the name of an object, the compound word 
thus formed, is then expressive of a blow with the object itself. 
For instance: tintero, inkstand — tinterazo, a blow with an ink- 
stand; — libro, book — librazo, a blow with a book; — canon, gun — 
cahcnazo, a shot with a gun; — cwhillo, a knife— cuchiUada, a stab, 
or a blow with a knii<\ 



1 



SYNTAX. 385 

with caresses, a fault as reprehensible as it is per- 

caricia costumbre per- 

nicious to the children. How many persons of (un- 
nicioso nino ir- 

questionable character,) did not the negroes in St. 

reprehensible conducfa ' Santo 

Domingo kill with blows, with stabs, and (in the 

garrotazo cucMllada de 

most atrocious manner that ever was heai'd 
nn modo mas atroz que ninugiino de los que antes se 
of before.) from 1791, to 1801. They threw a 
habia oido hast a echar 

curtain down with a single (shot of their gun. ) 
cartina (en tierra) solo cahonazo 

OF PREPOSITIONS REQUIRED BY VERBS 
OF MOTION. 

RULE LXX. 

Verbs implying motion to, towards or from a place, 
govern the noun denoting whence the motion proceeds 
with de, the noun wiiich shows its direction with a; 
and the noun expressing tlie space through which it 
passes with por; example: ''''Fueron de Londres a Chel- 
sea, por el parque,^"^ they went from London fo Chelsea, 
through the park. '^Vengo de la comedia, y me vol 
adonde esticve anoche, y donde pienso quedarme hasta 
mahana,^^ I corae fro7n the play, and am going whither 
I was last night, and where I think I shall stay till to- 
morrow. 

J^ote 1. When we mean to denote only the place to which the 
moving body seems directed, we use hmia or para, instead of a; 
as, "Fa hacia el Parque, pero no creo que llegue alld,^^ he is going 
S3 



386 SYNTAX. 

towards the park, but 1 don't imagine he will reach it. "/SaJio para 
Londres,''^ he set out/or London. 

JsTote 2. The verb volver is also used before an infinitive, when 
we mean to denote the repeating of the action implied in the in- 
finitive; as, '■'■Volvl a leer la carta ^'*'' I read the letter over once 
more. " Volverd a pedirlo,''^ he will ask for it again. " Volvimos a 
entrar en la casa,''^ we re-entered the house. 

The following verbs belong to the above rule: 
*%alanzarse a los peligros, To rush on danger. 

Mordar una nave a olra. To bring one ship along side of 

another. 
^pelar a otro tribunal, To appeal to another court. 

Jlpropincuarse a alguno^ To draw nigh any one. 

Arrojarse a la hatalla, To dart forwards at the battle. 

Jlxisentarse de Madrid, To quit Madrid. 

Balancear a tal parte, To vibrate towards such a side. 

Caminar por el monte, To travel over or through the 

mountain. 
Ladearse a tal parte, To incline to such a side. 

Jicercarse a, la lumbre, To draw nigh the fire. 

Copverfirs Id Dies, To turn tp God. 

Cmcimir a la junta, To attend the meeting. 

Mandarla carta a Espaha, To send the letter to Spain. 

Traer vinos de Francia, To bring wines from France. 

Emhiar a las Indias, To send to the Indies. 

EXERCISES. 

The promptitude with which men sometimes pass 

p res fez a pasar 

from the bitterest grief to the greatest joy, is 

emargo dolor alegria 

really astonishing. The rapidity with which 

{en realidad) asombroso rapidez 

light passes is prodigious; only being seven or 

luz pasar prodigioso solamente est a 
eight minutes in its progression from the sun ^o the 
mimito ' ■ • - sol 



SYNTAX. 387 

earth; in* this short space of time traversing^ se- 
tierra corto espacio travesar 

veral millions of miles. Through (how many) dangers 
milla por cuantos peligro 

did not the great American hero pass, and he always 

he roe 
(came out) of them without the least injury. He 

salir sin menor daho 

was going towards Rome, when (he was attacked) by a 

asaltar 
gang of (highwaymen.) Columbus went to the courts 
cuadriUa ladron Colon 

of England and Portugal (to inform) them of the 

dar noticia 

existence of a new world, and he was, in both, heard 
ecsistencia {las dos) 

with universal contempt. He did not understand the 

desprecio entendcr 

letter, and he read it again. (Not being able) to 
carta leer no pudiendo salir 

succeed, he again tried the experiment. 
hien hacer prueba 

OBSERVATION OX gustar AXD f altar. 
There are two neuter transitive verbs in the Spanish language, 
s^itstar and fallar; which, when translated into English by to likty 
and to want, or to be in icant of. the sentence requires a different 
construction from that which the student would at first imagine. 
As by means of the preposition a, (which, when those parts of 
grammar are used in the above sense, is absolutely necessary,) 
their action is transmitted to him that forms the nominative 
case, which nominative case must, in Spanish, be the objec- 
tive; and the Spanish objective, the English nominative. Thus, 
for instance: "/ like him," el me ^ista a mi. [that is, Ae pleases 
me.] "/ want books," me faltan libvQS. [that is, to me hooks are 



J88 .SYNTAX. 

necessary.] This kind of sentence begins generally with the pre- 
position a, and if it govern the third person, the additional pronoun 
le or les, is employed. [See the second and third paragraphs of 
page 262;] as, -'A Dios no le falta logica, ni la usa,''^ God neither 
wants logic, nor ^tses it. "A los hombres siempre les falta algo,''^ 
men are always in ivunt of something. "A eltos no les gusto et 
fiano," they did not like the evil. 

Tlie verb pesar, to be sorry for, or to, has this same peculiarity, 
with this exception, that it is only used before an infinitive with 
the preposition de, [of;] as, for example, ^'Jl ml me pesa de ha- 
bcrlo heclio," / am sorry to have done it. 

EXERCISES. 

When men have all they wanted before, new wants 

falta 
urise. I did not like the manner in which they 
aacer moclo 

treated him. The audience liked the orator. The 
trafar audit orio 

poor are always in want of riches; and the rich 

riqueza 
frequently want charity. It is not those who 
[muchas veces) caridad 

have sublime genius and profound erudition that 

■ . ingenio 

men like the most, but those who have the best heart 

sino t 

and the greatest judgment. The fortress was in want 
of provisions, and surrendered to the besiegers. He 

vzveres entregarse sitiador 

who is sorry for having committed wrong, is gene- 

hecho daho 

vous, and may become good. Seeing the many 
poder {Jlegar a 8er) viendo 



SYNTAX. 389 

benefits wMcFi we receive from the bountiful hand of 
favor bundadoso 

the Almighty; who can be so vile, as not to be 

Todopoderoso vil 

i^orry to have committed so many irreverences against 

irreverencia 
Him. 

ADVERBS. 
RULE LXXI. 
Most of the adverbs in mente, are formed from ad^ 
jectives; as, from cartes, polite, cortesmente, politely; 
from comun, common,^ comimmente^ commonly. If the 
adjective have two terminations, the feminine should 
be selected to form the adverb; thus: alto, alta, high; 
altamente, highly: — piadoso, pious; piadosamente, pious- 
ly. When two or more of these adverbs in mente^. 
modify the same verb, all the adverbs lose the termina- 
tion mente, except the last; thus for instance, "j&/ ha- 
bla clara y elegantamente," he speaks dearly and ele- 
gantly. ''Cuando calumnian a tu amigo abierta y desca- 
radamente, dejiende su caiisa,'^^ when thy friend is ca- 
lumniated, openly and boldly defend his cause. 

iN'ote 1. Adverbs of manner are mostly placed after the verbj 
as, ^'■Lo habia dicho frecuentemente," he had frequently said it, 
**Ab hemos hecho bien," we have not done xoell. 

J^ote 9.. Sometimes the abverb begins the sentence, for the sake 
of elegance; as, "Imediamente me puse en marcha,^^ I marched 
immediately. 

JSoie 3. Mas, and menos, -when they da not begin the sentence, 
should follow the verb which they modify, as, ^*Q,ueria mas de lo 
que me dieron,''^ I wanted more than they gave me.. "Tengo meaoa 
de lo que peiisa&a," I have less than I thought. . 
33* 



390 SYNTAX. 

JVbfe 4. Sz and no being used as an objective case to some 
verbs, require que before them, unless they be used as substan- 
tives; as, "You say yes and 1 say wo," vmd. dice que si, y yo digo 
que no. "He answered not a icordy" no respondio ni un si ni wnno. 

OBSERVATION ON jcmos, nuHca, no, AND 7nui. 

Jamas, is sometimes coupled with nunca, never, and with siemprBf 
ever, to render the expression more energetic; as, ^^JVunca jamas 
lo hare,'''' I shall never do it. "Que vives y reines por siempre jamas,''"' 
who livest and reignest for ever and ever. 

Two negatives in the Spanish language, strengthen the nega~ 
tion; as, "A^o tengo nada,'''' I have nothing. ".ATo he visto a nadie,^'' 
1 have seen nobody. If the negative adverb commences the sen- 
tence, the no then cannot be used; as, ^^nada fewg-o," I have no- 
thing; — A nadie he visto. Sac. 

J\lui, which is translated by very, cannot qualify a verb, in such 
cases, mucho must be used; as, "J)fe gusta mucho,'''' 1 like him very 
much. '■^ Se asemrja a su pudYe mucho,'''' he resembles his father 
very much. 

OF PREPOSITIONS. 
PULE LXXII. 
Prepositions govern the objective case; as, ''PocU- 
mos ser buenos y felices, sin riquezas, we may be good 
and happy without riches. 

C\''ote 1. The preposition segun, has the peculiarity of beir^g 
used alone with a verb in its indicative or subjunctive mood;, as, 
^^Segun creo,'''' according to what T believe. '•'■Entonces el arriero 
segun swpe con et tiempo,^'' then the carrier, as I was afterwards 
informed. 

EXERCISES ON PREPOSITIONS AND ADVERBS. 

A friend who candidly and judiciously w^arns us 
candido juicioso advertir 

ef our faults, is a treasure which we cannot easily 
yerro tesora facU 



SYNTAX. 391 

acquire, nor sufficiently appreciate. When the gen- 

adquirir suficiente apreciar 

eral asked him whether he did not want more 

pregimtar si necesitar 

than those hundred men to conquer the enemj, he 

conquistar 
answered, no. Never despise your inferiors^ 

responder despreciar — — 

(on the) contrary, treat them with kindness and 

al trafar cariho 

affability, and relieve them when they are in need. 
afabilidad socorrer (rnenesferoso) 

man never let a day* pass^ without giving thanks 
dejar sin gracia 

to the Almighty for all the benefits he has 

( Todopoderoso) heneficio 

bestowed upon you. After she had read the history 
conceder t 
of Nero, she exclaimed with a doleful voice, 

Neron esdamar lastimoso 

never, no, never (would have I thought) that men 

creer 
(could become) so cruel and depraved. It is better 

poder hacerse depravado 

to suffer with resignation, than with impatience, the 

sufrir impaciencia 

calamities of this world. Youth is very much in- 
ccdamidad mundo 

clined to vice. Persons sometimes offend others 

{la gente) ofender 

very much, without wishing to do so.* No one can be 
desear 
*When so^ stands for if, it is always construed lo; as, "You 
?ire rich, but I am not so,''"' vmd. es rico, pero yo no lo soi, "It is 



392 SYNTAX. 

pronounced happy before his death. Let us not delay 

llamar diJatar 

until to-morrow, to become good. Respiration is the 

hacerse 

principal and most essential function of animal life. 

funcion vida 

Children, discountenanced by their parents for 

nino {tratados confrialdad) padre 

any fault, find refuge in the caresses of foolish 
fait a refugio caricia malvado 

flatterers. That the authority of man should prevail 
lisongero autoridad reinar 

with men, either against or above reason, 

t contra 6 (mas de lo qve es razonahle) 
is no part of our belief. Our antipodes are not beneath 

fe antipoda 

us, nor are we beneath them. The art of engraving 

ni esculpir 

on copper, was invented at Florence, by a goldsmith 
en bronce inventar Florencia platero 

named Finguerra, in the beginning of the sixteenth 

llamar principio 

century. If we are all informed of what has been 

srglo informar 

before us, we shall not be entirely ignorant of what 

{del todo) 
is to be after us. 

aay intention to come, and see you; — well, do so," /engro inlencwn 
(te venir a verle: bien hdgalo. 



SYNTAX. 393 

OF CONJUNCTIONS.- 

RULE LXXIII. 
The conjunction hut, not being preceded by a nega- 
tive, is expressed by pew, or mas; and after a negative, 
it is construed sino; as, "Fo soi rico, pero or mas no 
soi dichoso,'^ I am rich, but I am not happy. *'i\^o es 
dichoso, sino rico,^^ he is not happy, but rich. '^Todos 
fueron alia, pero or mas sw hermano llego el primero,^^ 
they all went thither, but his brother arrived the first. 
'^ No fueron el lunes sino el martes,^^ they did not go on 
Monday, but on Tuesday. 

J^ote 1. It is to be observed, that although sino is the most pro- 
per to be used after a negative, pero, or mas are preferable when 
the verb is repeated; as, "They did not go on Monday, hut they 
went on Tuesday," no fueron el Lunes, pero, or mas fueron el 
Martes.] 

Jfote 2. The exceptive but being preceded by an interrogative 
pronoun, or by a negative, is rendered by sino; and not foiiowing 
a negative, is construed menosj as, "^:Quic/i lo dijo sino nnc/.?" 
who said it but you? "£/ no come sino fruta,'''' he cats nothing hut 
fruit. "JE^ coine todo menos la corltzu,''' he eats all but the rind. 
''Todos fueron alia menos su hermanu,'''' they all went thither but 
his brother. 

J^ote 3. When the word hut is used as a substitute for some 
other words, it is generally rendered, in Spanish, by the words 
which it represents. Thus: 

He was hardly gone out but (ivhen) the house fell down, apenas 
hvbo salido cuando se cayo la casa. 

But (if it were 7iot) for me, he would die with cold, si no fuera 
por mi el se moriria de frio. 

But that I thmk (if I did not think that) it would vex thee, I 
would tell it thee, si yo no pensara que le molestase, se lo diria. 

*See pages 188, 189 and 190. 

t Pero is sometimes used as a substantive, and then it signifies 
defect; as, ella no tiene pero, she has no blemish. 



394 SYNTAX. 

There is no one but is (that is not) a sinner, no hai ninguo que 
no sea pecador. 

He went no day into the country but he returned (that he return- 
ed not) loaded, nins:un dia fue at campo que no volvio cargado, 

I have but (only) one servant, tengo solo tin criado. 

I came but (I came not till) yesterday, no viene hasta ayer. 

That means no more but (than) to tell me to go away, eso no 
quiere decir mas que decirme que me vaya. 

The annexed conjunctions are translated in the follow- 
ing manner: 

t^s is 007710; example: black as pitch, negro como la 
pez. 

As being followed by so, is expressed asi como; exam- 
ple: as he rewards virtue, so he punishes vice, asi 
como premia la virtud, asi castiga el vicio. 

As meaning tvJien, is cuando; example: we met her as 
we were going home, la encontrdmos cuando ibamos 
a casa. 

Neither and nor is ni; example: he will neither sell it 
7ior give it, no quiere venderlu nl darlo. 

Neither^ at the end of a sentence, is translated tampoco; 
as, nor I neither^ ni yo tampoco.* 

Rather: this adverb, when used as an adversative con- 
junction, is resolved into antes or antes bien; exam- 
ple: I owe him nothing, rather [on the contrary] he 
owes me something, yo no le debo nada, antes or a-ucs 
bien el me debe algo. 

Whether is si; example: tell me whether he will come 
or not^ digame vmd. si el vendrd 6 no. 

Whether^ in phrases like the following, is expressed by 

* When either comes accompanied by a negative, it is translated 
like neither; example: I will not see them, nor she either. "Fo no 
quiero verlos, 7ii ella tampoco." 



SYNTAX. 395 

que; example : lohether he comes or not, I don't care any 
thing, que venga 6 que no venga, no se me da ncida, 

Botli, meaning as well ns^ is translated either asi coma, 
or tanfo conio; as asi el como yo vendremes, both he 
and I will come; tanto el conochniento de libros^ como 
de hotnbres es necesario; both the knowledge of books 
and men, is necessary. 

However^ or howsoever, is rendered, jpor or por mas; 
as, however great a man may be, he must always be 
humble, por grande que sea un hombre, debe siempre 
ser humilde; how horrid soever vice may be, it will 
always find followers, por mas horrible que sea el 
vicio, siempre encuentra secuaces. 



EXAMPLES. 



None but God can know our thoughts. Every thing 
conocer 
but the hour of death is-uncertain. I do not complain 

quejarse 
of the law, but of her servants. Death is terrible, but 

ministro 

judgment will be more so: let us not fear then the 

juicio lo pjues 

hour of death, but the day of judgment. What his 

juicio 
valour achieved was much, but what his mind suffered 
ob ra r esp iritu padecer, 

was more. Fame is the rev/ard of conquerors, but 

fama recompensa conquistador 

virtue will have another recompense. Of what ser\nce 

premio servicio 

was the death of Nero to the Romans, but to make 

Neron de dar 



396 SYNTAX. 

an opening for Otho and Vitellius? The happiness 

entrada a Oion Vitelio dicha 

of a liberal and opulent man, does not consist in 

dadivoso rico 

having riches, but in spending them, and not only in 

gastar 
spending them, but in spending them well. But for 

thee, niY son would have been murdered. Without 

asesinar 
friendship, the world would be but a wilderness. Why 

desierto 
does he grieve? He ought rather to rejoice at seeing 

ajligh se deber alegrarse 

himself among us. As he lived, so he died. Whether 

thou be rich or poor, thou art not less obliged to be 

virtuous. He died on the twenty-fifth, as the clock 

fallecer reloj 

struck three. We travelled without knov/ing whether 

dar saber 

it would be possible to arrive before day -break. I did 

llegar amanecer 

not like his verses, nor his prose either. For a person 

gustar verso prosa 

to succeed, he must possess both genius and 

{teller buen escito) ingenio 

judgment. Both vice and virtue are frequently mis- 

equi' 
taken. How polite soever we may be, we must always 
vocar nrbano 



SYNTAX. ' 397' 

be dignified. However certain a man may be of 

(guardar dignidad) cierto 

a thing, he should, (on no occabion,) be positive. 
deber nunca positivo 

OF INTERJECTIONS.* 

RULE LXXIV. 
Adjectives employed as interjections, require de be- 
fore the noun to which they are applied; as, "Pobre de 
mi padreP^ oh! mj poor father! "Desdichada de mi 
madreP'^ oh! my unhappy mother! 

J^oie 1. The interjection ai, when used like the English 100, 
requires de before the following noun; as, ai de ti! ivo to thee! 
;ai de aquellos que mueren en sus pecados! too to them who die in 
their sins! 

JsTote 2. The interjection ete is used with the personal pronouns 
only, and always joined to the objective case; as, "Etela que 
ric?ie."' lo she comes! "Eteme aquitjafuera de OvudoP'' behold me 
here, or, tb here am I, already out of Ovicdo! 

EXERCISES. 

Oh, my father! my friend! how gi-eat has been my 
ingratitude! Oh, piety! oh, virtue! how insensible have 

ingratitud 

I been to thy charms! Unhappy we, how shall we 

encanto 
have courage to fight with our friends! Happy thou, 

valor pelear 
Telemachus! with such a guide thou hast nothing to 
fear! Wo to me, should death come before I am pre- 

jD re- 
pared! Lo, here they come ! prepared to insult us. 
parar insidtar, 

* See page 190, 



398 SYNTAX. 

OBSERVATION. 

It was considered expedient to give, in the first edition of this 
grammar, a specimen of the various modes of translation which 
had been heretofore adopted. Experience has taught us, that 
they increased the size of the book, without affording any imme- 
diate or Demote utility to the student. As it has always been our 
object to render this grammar, as useful and acceptable as study 
and reflection would permit us, w^e have substituted in place of 
those models, a few short extracts, which will serve both as pro- 
miscuous exercises of the syntactical rules, and lessons to pre- 
pare the student for translation and composition. 

PRUDENCE. 

Hear the words of prudence, (give heed unto) her 

prudencia atender a 

counsels, and store them in thine heart: her max- 

^ consejo guardar mac- 

ims are universal, and all the virtues (lean upon) her: 

sima defender 

she is the guide and mistress of human ]ife.« Put a 
guia dueno f 

bridle on thy tongue; set a guard before thy lips, 
freno d lengua poner guarda d labio 

lest the words of thine own mouth destroy thy 

i^paraque) {no destruir) 

peace. Let him who (scofteth at) the lame, (take care) 
burlarse cojo guardarse 

that he (halt not himself:) whoever speaketh of 

cogear 
another's failings wdth pleasure, shall hear of his own 

falia deleite 

with (bitterness of heart.) Of much speaking cometh 

amargura 
repentance, but in silence is safety. (Boast 
nrrepenthniento (el siiencio) teller seguridad 



SYNTAX. 399 

not of thyself,) tor it (shall bring) contempt upon 
alabarse eso grangear tnenosprecio t 

thee: neither deride another, for it is dangerous. 
biirlarse j^eligroso 

' DODSLEY. 



GRATITUDE. 

There is not a more pleasing exercise of the 
deleifabie operacion 
mind than gratitude. It is accompanied 

(coi'azon humano) 
with so gi-eat inward satisfaction, that the duty 

interior ohligacioii 

is sufficiently rewarded by the performancCv 

quedar recompensar ohra 

It is not, like the practice of many other virtues, 

como practica 

difficult and painful; but attended with so much plea- 
pe7ioso seguh' de- 

sure, that were there no positive command which 
hiie mcmdato 

enjoined it, nor any recompense (laid up) for it 
ordenar recompensa preparar 

hereafter, a generous mind would (indulge in) 

{en el otro mimdo) alma practicar 

it for i\iQ gratification it affords. 

— — ofrecer addisox^ 



DISCRETION. 

There are many shining qualities in the mind 

brillante prenda entemlimi'- 



400 SYNTAX. 

of man; but there is none* so useful as discretion: 

ento 

(it is this) which gives a value to all the rest, 
est a es la aprecio demas 

which sets them (at work) in their proper times * 
[la que) hacer trahajar 

and places, and turns them to the advantage of 

lifgar iy la que) volver vcnfaja 

the person who is possessed of them. Without it> learn- 

cono- 
ing is pedantry; wut, impertinence; and vir- 

I'imiento pcdanteria ingenio impcrtincncia 
tue itself, looks like weakness. Discretion is 

mismo {tener apariencia de) flaqueza 
ibe perfection of reason, and a guide to us in all the 

razon guia t t 

duties of life; and does not only make a man 

ohligacion solo 

the master of his own parts, but also of 
t d.ueho propio calidad sino fambien (de 

other men's. The discreet man (finds out) the 

las de otros homhres.) encontrar 

lalents of those he converses with, and knows how 

hahlar t 

to apply them to proper uses. lie carries his 

aplicar adecuado fin llevar 

thoughts to the end of every action, and 

pensamlento termino ohra 

considers the^ most distant, as^ (well as) the most 

remoto asi como 
immediate effects^ of it. 
imediato t t addison. 

* Which is, being understood, it must, in Spanish, be supplied 
by qiiesea- 



SYNTAX. 401 

EMPLOYMENT OF TIME. 

Time is precious, life short, (and consequently) not 

corto por consigidente ni 

I moment should be lost. Sensible men know hov/ 

deber perder sensato t 

to make the most of time, (and put out their whole 

y to do lo emplean en 
sum to interest.) They are never idle, but conti- 
cosas utiles ocioso 

nually employed in rational amusements or study. 

divertimiento 

It is a universal maxim, that idleness is the mother 

ociosidad 
of vice. Itis, ^ however,' certain,- that 

(de todos los vicios) (sin embargo) 

laziness is the inheritance of fools^ and nothing 

indolencia propiedad tonto 

can be more despicable than a sluggard. Whatever 

despreciable haragan 

business you* have, do it the first moment you 
ocupacion cumplir al t 

can, never by halves, but finish it without interrupt 

7nitad ferminar 

tion, if possible. 

[si es posible) chesterfield. 



TRUE AND FALSE MODESTY. 

Nothing is more admirable than true mudesty. 

verdadero modestia 

* Addressing, in this general manner, tu should always be used, 
in Spanish. 

34* 



402 SYNTAX. 

and nothing is more contemptible than the false. The 

aborrecible falso 

one guards virtue, the other betrays it. True modesty 

proteger vender 

is ashamed to do any thing that is repugnant to the 

repugnante 
rules of right reason: false modesty is ashamed to 
regia huena razon 
do any thing that is opposite to the humour of the 

contrario himiour 

company. True modesty avoids every thing that is 
compaha - evitar 

criminal, false modesty every tiling that is unfashionable. 

{no es de moda) 

The latter is only a general indetermined instinct: 

solo indeterminado instincto 

the former is that instinct, limited and circumscribed 

{que se circunscribe) 
by the rules of prudence and religion. 



JUDGMENT. 

Deeply impress your mind with the vast 

profundamente grabar {en tu) alma t grande 
importance of a sound judgment, and the rich and 
necesidad solido juicio preciosa 

inestimable advantages of right reasoning. Review 

ventaja verdadero discurrir repasar 

the instances of your own misconduct in life, and 
caso {impropia conduta) 



SYNTAX. 40S 

observe how many follies and sorrows (jou had es- 

locura pesar ahorrarse 

caped) if from your (early years,) you had taken 

desde mocedad 

due pains to judge aright concerning persons^ 

{el trabajo) juzgar verdaderamente de 
times, and things. Do not hover always on the 
tiempo pararse en 

surface of things, or ('take up) suddenly with mere 
superficie ni ceder [de repente) a mero 

appearances, for this will fill the mind with 
aparienda pues llenar entendimiento 

errors and prejudices, and give it an ill habit of 
error preocupacion (le acostumbraria a mal) 

thinking; but penetrate into the depth of matters (as 
pensar t penetrar t fondo materia tanto 

far as) your time and circumstances will allow. 
(:omo {te lo permitan) 

WATTS, 



PART IV. 

PROSODY. 

That part of grammar which treats of the aceent, 
Jiiid establishes the laws of versification^ is called 
Prosody. 

OBSERVATION. 

In Orthography, pages -4 7, 48, 49, we spoke of accent as a 
written sign, denoting that the vowel upon which it is placed, 
must be pronounced with more force, than any other letter in the 
same word. The accent in prosody is taken in a different sense. 
It refers not to that orthographical mark, but to the stress, by 
which a certain letter of every word is distingtiished from the 
rest. 

Majesty seems to be inherent in the Spanish language, and this 
quality is very apparent in its pronunciation. No syllable* or 
consonant is ever accented; vowels only are susceptible of this 
distinction. The consequence of this custom is, that every word 
has a vowe] long, which must necessarily tend to render this 
language full and sonorous. 

In some words, the vowel upon which the stress is placed, is 
distinsuished by that mark or acute accent mentionjid in Or- 
thography. But, in some others, the vowel is considered suffi- 
ciently conspicuous without any sign Avhatever. Hence the 
student must not onlj know the accented vowel of every word, 
but those words which require this vowel to be designated by 
that orthographical accent. It is presumed that this task may, in 
a great measure, be compassed by carefully perusing the rules 
which are now laid down. They will, we are satisfied, guide 
i:he scholar in all instances, with regard to the laying of the 

* Very frequently we speak of the accented syllable, instead of- 
the accented vowel of a word. 



PROSODY. 405 

stress on the right vowel of every word in reading; and if they 
do not, in the same manner, present to his view all the words 
that require the accent to be marked; practice will soon make 
him familiar with those few cases Avhich theory could not have 
explained, but by numerous and confused rules. 

The consideration that no individual can obtain a good pro- 
nunciation unless he be well acquainted with this part of gram- 
mar, has induced us to use our utmost exertions in endeavour- 
ing to render the Spanish accent precise, clear and easy of 
•acquisition. If the student should find that this has been accom- 
plished, we shall consider our toils fully repaid. 

ACCENT. 

P.ULE I. 
Every monosyllable has a vowel long,* without any 
accent; as, caU lime; can^ dog; so/, salt.t 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. Those monosyllables which have two significations, are ac- 
cented Avhen they are slowly pronounced; as, el, the; el, he; se^ 
itself; se, I know. 

2. The vowels c, e, c, w, when used by themselves, are accent- 
ed; as, void Madrid, I am going to INIadrid; padre e hijo, father 
•and son: el 6 yo, either he or I; dlez u once^X^xn. or eleven. 

RULE II. 
In words of two or more syllables ending in a vowel, 
the stress is laid on the vowel before the last, without 
any marked accent; a.s^pano, cloth;* verrfe, green; tin- 
few, inkstand; hortelano^ gardener; almirantazgo, 
admiralty-court. 

* The vowel upon which the stress is laid, is, in Spanish, called 
aguda, or lar^a, [acute, or long.] 

t Some of these rules have already been given in Orthography, 
speaking of the accent as a sign. 



406 PROSODY. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. The accent will be written in those words composed of the 
first and third person of the preterite, or any person of the future 
indicative, and a pronoun; as, temile, I feared him; terminose, it 
was terminated; concluyolo, he concluded it; amardnse, they will 
love themselves. 

2. The esdrujulos* have always the antepenult vowel long; 
and it is always marked with the accent; as, impetu, impulse; 
cdmara, chamber; santisimo^ most holy; altilocuo, using high sound- 
ing words. Under these words are considered those which are 
formed from a verb and a pronoun; as, oyeme, hear me) deten- 
ganse, let them stop. 

3. Any tense of a verb to which two pronouns are affixed, have 
the fourth vowel (counting from the last,) long, and marked with 
the accent, except the tenses mentioned in the first exception 
of this rule, which have the antepenult long and accented; as 
detengamelos, let them be stopped for me; di3;eronse\o, they said 
it to them; b'lscantele, let them seek him for you; traerdselo, he 
will bring it to her; //eucselo, you took it away. 

4. The adverbs terminating in mente, follow, in every respect, 
the adjectives from which they were formed; as, indastriosa-mente; 
industriously; bdrbara-menie, barbarously. 

* The esdriijidos are those words which, ending in one or two 
vowels, and consisting of more than two syllables, are accented 
on the antepenult vowel. This is one of those instances in 
which theory could not show the number of these esdrujulos, 
unless they were given in a catalogue, which, as it would be very 
numerous, could not be acquired without considerable labour. 
The arrangement of the above rules, supersedes, we think, the 
necessity of all this trouble. The student knows well, that ac- 
cording to the 2d exception to Rule II. the esdritjulos are marked 
with the accent; no mistake can therefore be committed in pro- 
nouncing them. This kind of words is also very easily distin- 
guished, and a little practice in reading, will educate the scholar's 
ear in a manner, as to place beyond difficulty, this part of Pro^' 
sody. 



PROSODY. 4or 

5. There are some vowels, which, contrary to the present rule, 
have the last vowel long. In this case it always bears the accent; 
as, alia, there; aqui, here; cafe, coffee-house ,^ Perw, Peru. 

RULE III. 
Words ending in a diphthong, or two vowels, have 
their penult vowel long, without being accented j as, 
*'serio, serious; feria, fair; mutiio, mutual 5 duo, duettoj 
reo, culprit. 

EXCEPTION. 

1. The orthographical accent will be used in all those words, 
the last syllable of which is long;* as, minue, minuet; J\Ionjui, 
Monjui, [a fortress in Catalonia.] 

RULE IV. 
Words of three or more syllables, terminating in 
the diphthongs ia, ie,i io, iia, ue, no,, have generally 
their penult long, without the marked accent^ as, con- 
cordia, concord; emperio, empire; desaguo, discharge 
of water; desague, channel. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

1. When the above terminating; vowels are not a diphthong, the 
accent must be written on which ever of the two vowels the 
stress happens to be laid; as, Jilosofia, philosophy; ganzua, a 
picklock. 

RULE y. 

Words which end in ae, co, au, eo, ec, oe, 00, (these 
letters not being diphthongs,) are accented on the penult 
without anv mark; as, ^*bacalao, codfish; kermosea, he 
beautifies; arcabuceo, the act of shooting criminals; 
lincdoe, aloes; Feijoo, Feijoo; (the name of a great Spa- 
nish writer] loo, I praise. 

* A little practice will soon make the student acquainted with 
these. 

t A diphthong is considered like a single vowel, although both 
'-^wels are fuily pronounced. 



408 PROSODY. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

When the above vowels are diphthongs, the word to which they 
belong, has the antepenult long, and marked with an accent; as, 
Cesdrea, imperial; eterea, etherial; ciUdneo, cutaneous; momentaneo, 
momentary; heroe, hero. 

RULE VI. 

Words ending in a consonant have the last vowel 
long, but not marked with the accent; as, caridad^ cha- 
rity; ahnacen, store-house; albahil, bricklayer; borrador, 
the rough copy of any writing; correr, to run; amar, 
to love; advertii\ to take notice of. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

All words ending in a consonant, which have not the last vowel 
long; the vowel upon Avhich the stress is laid, must be marked 
With the accent. The number of these words is very trifling, in 
comparison to those which come under the general rule, yet we 
think it too considerable for insertion. The following will serve 
as examples, and, it is believed, to guide the student in all the 
rest: arhol^ tree; volumen, volume-; rlrgen, virgin; indrtir, martyr; 
crisis, crisis; alfertz, ensign; Aristotdes, Aristotle. 

RULE VII. 

The plural follow the singular of words in every 
respect whatever; as, '•-drhol^ drbohs^ trees; hortelano, 
konelatios, gardeners; espiritu, espiritus^ spirits. 

RULES TO KNOW ON WHICH VOWEL TO LAY THE STRESS 
IN THE TENSES OF VERBS.* 

1. If the termination of the tense of a verb be an a. 
e, or 0, alone, or followed by n or s, the penult vowel 

* They comprise all the regular, and many of the irregular 
yerbs, 



PROSODY. 409 

is aeeented;* as, eonsidero, I consider 5 amas, you love; 
Henen, they have. 

Except the first and third persons singular of the perfect indi- 
cative, the last vowel of which is always accented; as, considers, 
I considered; eonsidero, he considered. 

2. Verbs have the accent on the first vowel of the 
termination,! if this consist of more than one vowel; as, 
consider-dba, I considered; consider-dhamos^ we consi- 
dered; consider 'dramos; consider-as emos. 

Except the future indicative, which has the accent always 011 
the second voAvel of the termination; as, considcr-are ; am-ards; 
eonsider-aremos. 

S. If the termination of a verb contain an /, either 
alone, or immediately followed by an a, or an 5, the 
accent is on the t; as, correspondi; correspondia-n; 
preservar-iais; atormentar-iais; siifr-is. 

4. Verbs ending in (/, or r, are always long; consi- 
derad^ corresponded^ venid; correr^ consegidr. 

No vowels upon which the stress is laid in the tenses 
of verbs, will be marked %\ith the acute accent, but 
those in the following tenses: 

1. The first and second persons plural of the imper- 
fect indicative, will have the vowel, upon which the 
stress happens to be laid, marked with the accent; as, 
amdbainos; escribiamos; confesdbais; const ruiais. 

2. All the persons of the preterite, the first person 
plural excepted; as, ame^ sacdste, convido, vendimos. 
consumisteis, enternecieron. 

* We shall then give rules which will show the persons that 
require the accented vawel marked. 

7 The termination of a verb is the syllable or syllables added 
to its radicals, seepages 101 to 108. 
35 



410 PROSODY. 

3. All the persons of the future indicative^ sls, ado- 
lecere, concluirds, celehrard, sorprenderemos, conten- 
dreis, lisongeardn. 

4. The first and second persons plural of the three 
imperfects, and of the future, of the subjunctive; as, an- 
duvieramos, tendrian, amariamos, partieremos, compre- 
hendiereis. 



I After very mature reflection, we have decided to write the 
versification in Spanish. The reasons which have prevented us 
from presenting this treatise in English, are explained at the end 
of this grammar, where it has been deemed expedient to place 
t)iis second part of Prosody.] 



APPENDIX. 



COLLOQUIAL IDIOMS. 



To act as, hacer de; as, ''^He acted as a teacher dur- 
ing the voyage," hizo de maestro durante el viage. 

To afford, estar 6 hallarse en estado de, tener los me- 
dios; as, ''How many things would one buy if he could 
&fford its^^ cuantas cosas no compraria uno si tuviese 
los medios. 

To agree, speaking of eating, is rendered by sentar 
hien; as, "Chocolate does not agree ivith me," el cho- 
colate no me sienta bien. Speaking of climates and 
seasons, by acomodar; as, ''The climate of Havana 
does not agree with me," el clima de la Havana no me 
acomoda. 

Amiss if, when it is followed by not to be, is rendered 
hj no ser fiiera del easo; as, "It would not he amiss if 
you ^vent thither," no seria fuera del caso que vmd. 
vaya alia. 

To answer, corresponder, in such expressions as the 
following. "This year's crop does not ansiver our ex- 
pectations," la cosecha de este ano, no corresponde a. 
nuestras esperanzas. 

To answer for, {i. e. to stand security for,) salir fia* 
dor; as, "I loill answer for him," yo saldre fiador por 
el. 

Answer, hacer or acomodar, "I have a pair of shoes 
which ivill ansiver 3^ou," tengo un par de zapatos que 
le acomodaran. 



412 APPENDIX. 

To avail one's self of an opportunity^, vahrse de ia- 
f*casio7i. 

To became, hacerse; '*He became rich after his mo- 
(lier's death," se hizo rico despues de la muerte de su 
madre. 

To become, meterse; he became a priest, a soldier, 
&c. &c., se metio sacerdote, soldado, 4'C. 

To become, speaking of dress, is translated caer^ or 
seniar; as, "This coat does not become you well," esta 
casaca no h cae bien. 

To become, is translated ser, in such expressions 
as, "What will become of my father?" que sera de mi 
padre? 

To become, ir a parar, hacerse; as, "What has 
become of my hat?" que se ha hecho de mi sombrero? 
"If such maxims and such practices prevail, what is 
become of national liberty?" ^si tales macsimas y tales 
costicmbres prevalecen, d donde ha ido a parar la liber- 
tad nacionul? 

To be the dupe, enganar, quedar burlado; "Rome 
was the dupe of the manner in which Nero began to 
Feign," los principios del reinado de Neron, engaiiaron 
a los Romano s. 

To be in tlie right, tener razon; to be in the wrong, 
no tener razon; "He is in the right to complain," tiene 
razon de quejarse. 

To be obliged, quedar agradecido a uno; as, "/ am 
very much obliged to you," le quedo mui agradecido. 

To be near, estar a pique de, or por poco; as, "I was 
very near falling," por poco me cai, or, estuve a pique 
de caerme. 

To be fond, gustar d unoi as, "J am fond of read- 
ing," d mi me gusta el leer. 



APPENDIX, 413 

To be sure not, giiardarse Men de; as, "Carry this 
letter to him, but be sure not to tell him who sent you," 
llevale esta carta, pero guardate bien de decirle quien 
te embio. 

To be within musket-shot, gun-shot, &c. estar a tiro 
de fusil, de canon, 4'C.^*^as, *'The two fleets were within 
gun-shot, and very near beginning the engagement, 
when we left them," las dos escuadras estaban a tiro 
de canon, y a punto de empezar la funcion, cuando las 
dejdmos. 

To be well off, estar bien, or rico. 

To be in great favour with some one, privar con al- 
guno. 

To be very near to, or upon the brink, estar a punto 
de. '*I loas very near falling down," estaba a punto de 
eaerme. 

To be, in such expressions as the following, is trans- 
lated ir/ as, "The abdication was nothing to the sub- 
jects," nada les iba a los vasallos en la abdicacion. 

To be to blame for, tener la culpa dt; as, ".^m / then 
to blame for his cruelties?" ^pues que tengo yo la culpa 
de sus crueldades? 

To be even, estar or quedar en paz; "I shall pay 
you this bill, and we shall be even,"^^ le pagare esta cuen- 
ta, y quedaremos, 6 estaremos en paz. 

To be easy, or to do without, pasarse; "When T have 
wine I drink it, but when I have none, / am easy with- 
out it,^^ cudndo tengo vino le bebo, pero cuando no ten- 
go, me paso. 

To be so kind as, or so good as, tener le bondad de; 
as, "i?e so kind as to write to your friend that I enjoy 
a perfect health," tenga vmd. la bondad de escribar a 
su amigo que yo goxo de perfecta salud, 
.35* 



414 APPENDIX. 

To bespeak, encomender, apalabrar. 

To be beyond one's reach, estar fuera del alcance de 
lino. 

To bid adieu, or to take leave, despedirse. 

Birth day, dia de cumple anos. 

To be oyer^ pasar; as, "The tempest is o?;er," pas6 
/« fempesfad. 

To bring up, criar; as, "My parents brought me up 
in this manner," asi me criaron mis padres. 

To catch cold, resfriarse. 

To care, in such expressions as, I care nothing, or I 
don't care, is translated darse or importar; as, "/ care 
nothing for his talking," nada se me da por su hahlar; 
•'What care I?" ^que me importa a ml? 

To choose, elegir; but in such expressions as the 
iollowing is rendered dar a uno la gana; "Why don't 
you tell me your name? because I don't choose," 
^^Porque no me dice vmd. su nomhre? porque no me da 
la gana. 

To come to pass, suceder, acontecer. 

To depend upon, fiar de; as, ''Depend upon my 
word," fie vmd. de mi palabra. 

To do, in such expressions as the following, is ren- 
dered ir; as, "How do you do.^" ^como le va? (i. e.- 
how does it go with you.) 

Droll saying, dicho gracioso. 

Droll affair, cosa vara. 

Drop tears, soltar Idgrimas. 

Engine, mdquina. 

Steam engine, mdquina de vaho^ or vapo'^. 

Fire engine, bomha de fuego. 

Pile engine, martinete. 

To fancy, afitojarse; as, ''He fancied that he could 
Team without study, but he soon perceived that he was 



APPENDIX. 415 

mistaken," se le antojo a el que podna aprender sin 
estudiar, pero pronto vio que estaba engahado. 

To fare, tratarse; as, ''He fares like a king," se trata 
co)7io d rei. 

Fashionable, d la moda. 

Fast and loose, inconstante. 

To find fault with, hallar que decir; "^q finds fault 
with every thing," en todo halla que decir. 

To favour, (i. e. to resemble,) parecerse; "That young 
man favours his mother," aquel joven se parece a su 
madre. 

Fellow, applied to a pair of objects which ought to be 
similar, is rendered compahero-a; as, "My boots are not 
fellows,'^^ mis botas no son companeras. 

To fetch a sigh, dar un suspiro. 

To fill up the time, emplear el tiempo. 

To find in one's heart, determinar. 

To find out, descubrir. 

Fortnight, quince dias, 

A fortified town, plaza de armas. 

From top to toe, de cabeza d pies. 

To furnish a house, adornar tma casa con muebles. 

Fresh water, agua duke. 

To get, grangear^ ganar, adquirir. 

To get oft", deshacerse de alguna cosa. 

To get ofi", escapar, huir. 

To get up, levantarse de dormir, 6 del asiento. 

To get through, salir de, pasar por. 

To get clear off, zafarse, libertarse. 

To get well, restcdjlecerse de alguna enfermedad. 

To get a good name, tener buenafama» 

To give up the ghost, entregar el alma d Dios. 

To give one's respects, dar muchas memorias. 



416 APPENDIX. 

To give evidence, atestiguar. 

To give one his own, reprehender, reganar. 

To give out, publicar, darse d conocer por quien 
no es. 

To give up, ahandonar^ entregar. 

To give way, ceder, hacerlugar. 

To give in, rendirse. 

To go about, procurar, intentar^ emprender. 

To go to the bottom, irse a pique. 

To go on, atacar, p)'oseguir, seguii\ 

To go through, agecutar alguna cosa. 

To grate the teeth, rechinar los dientes. 

To happen to be, ser 6 estar por casualidad; as, "I 
happened to he there, when he arrived," estaba yo por 
casualidad all I cuando el lie go. 

To happen not to be, no hallarse; as, "I unfortunate- 
ly happened not to be there when they paid, and thus I 
lost my money," ^or desgracia no me halle yo alii cu- 
ando pagdron, y asi perdi mi dijiero. 

Hard, t/wro, solido, firme, dificil, &c. When hard 
follows a verb, and stands in the place of an adverb, it 
is translated in Spanish by that word, which it repre- 
sents; thus, for instance: to study hard, {to study ea- 
gerly,) estudiar con ahinco; to drink hard, {to drink to 
excess,) beber con esceso. 

Hence it is, de aqui es, de aqui dimana. 

To hit the nail on the head, acertar 6 dar en el hito. 

To have, or to be an instance, tenerse egemplar; as, 
**There never was an instance of such a thing here," 
jamas se tubo aqui egemplar de tal cosa. 

Instant, [when applied to the present month,] corri- 
ente; as, "On the tenth instant," el diez del corrienfe. 

In witness whereof, y para que conste, or en fe de lo 



APPENDIX. 417 

cual; as, '^In witness whereof^ we have granted these 
presents, in the city of Baltimore," &c. en fe de lo 
cual, or para que conste, damos lapresente, en la ciudad 
de Baltimore, &,'c. 

To have a high opinion of one's self, or to think high- 
ly of one's self, estar imo lleno de si mismo; as, ''He has 
a very high opinion of himself," el estd mui lleno de si 
mismo. 

To have a sore leg, arm, hand, throat, &c. dolerle a 
uno la pierna, el brazo, la garganta, 8fc. 

To have a turn for mathematics, languages, &c. estar 
inclinado a, or tener disposidon para^ las matemdticas, 
idiomas, 4^c. 

To keep, fener; as, ''He keeps a shop," el tiene tienda. 
**A good table," buena mesa. 

To knock down to the highest bidder, rematar en el 
mayor postor. 

To lay the blame on, echar la culpa a, "People some- 
times lay the blame on the innocent," a veces la gente 
echa la culpa, al inocente. 

To learn by heart, aprender de memoria. 

Long, when applied to time, is rendered by tiempo,^ 
''^How lo7ig is it, since you arrived in this country?" 
cuanto tiempo hace desde que vmd. llego en este pais. 

To look to, when applied to inanimate objects, caer; 
as, "The windows of my room look to Washington 
Square," las venta^ms de mi cuarto caen en la plaza de 
Washington. 

To have weight with, hacer fuerza d; as, "All you 
say has no weight with me," todo lo que vmd. dice no 
me hace fuerza d mi. 

*^nd the verb to be, by haaer. See pages 167, and 168, 



41S APPENDIX. 

To look well," sick, &c. applied to persons, is, tener 
huen d mal semhlante^ a car a; as, "(jHow do I look?'* 
^que semblcmte tengo? *'You look sick," vmd. iiene 
semblante de enfermoo. 

To look handsome, uglj, &c., parecer, or tener apa- 
riencia; as, ";How pretty he looks!" ;que hermoso pa- 
rece.' or ;que hermosa apariencia tiene! 

To make over, ceder^ transferir, traspasar. 

To make pay, llevar; as, ''They made me pay eight 
dollars for last night's supper," me llevaron ocho pesos 
por la cena de anoche. 

To make a fine show, hacer gran papel. 

To be the matter with, /e?ier, ajligir; as, ''What 
ivas the matter with you last night?" que tenias, or que 
te afligia anoche. 

To matter, importar; as, "It matters not," or ''it is 
no matter," no importa. 

To miss, echar m,enos; as, "As soon as I got up, I 
missed my purse," luego que me levante, eche menos 
rai bolsillo. 

Objection, reparo; as, "He had no objection in giving 
me letters of recommendation," no tuvo reparo alguno 
ra franquearme cartas de recomendacion. 

To oblige, agradar grangearse 6 atraerse la volun- 
tad 6 benevolencia de otros, agradecer, or estimar a 
uno; as, "You are very polite, and consequently oblige 
every person," vmd. es mui urbano, y por consigidente, 
se atrae 6 se grangea la voluntad de otros. "Sir, you 
will extremely oblige me, by writing to me as soon as 
you arrive at New York," le agradecere, or le estimare 
infinitamente, que al instants que llegue a Nueva York me 
e^ariba. 



APPENDIX. 419 

Occasion, [when it implies necessity] necessidad^ as 
*•*;! shall have no occasion to buy these books now, shall 
I?" Yo no tendre necessidad de comprar estos libros 
ahora, ^es verdad? 

Old, [when applied to the age of a person] edad; as, 
*'How old are you," ^que edad tiene vmd,? and it 
might also be rendered by, cuantos ahos tiene vmd. lite- 
rally, how many years have you. 

Out of, por or de, in such expressions as these; "He 
did it out of mercy," lo hizo de Idstima. "Of friend- 
ship," por amistad. 

To own, [when implies acknowledgment] confesar, 
[when implies possession] ser; as, '*he owns it," el 
lo confiesa. '*He owns it," [i. e. he possesses it] es 
de el. 

To part with, deshacerse de; as, "/ would not part 
with this library for all the world," no me desharia de 
esta libreria por todo el mundo. 

To pass one's word for another, empenar uno su pa- 
lab j^a por otro. 

To pay the tribute of nature, morir. 

To perform one's promise, cumplir uno con su pala- 
bra. 

To play, [when applied to musical instruments] tocar; 
as, ''I have been told you jtlay very well on the vIb- 
Hn,^^ me han dicho que vmd. toca el violin mui bien. 

To play the fool, hacer el tonfo. 

To please, dar gusto^ agradar; as, ''I would do 
every thing to please you,''^ todo lo haria para agra- 
darle. 

To please, [when implies request] servirse; as. 
^'Please to come soon to-night," sirvase viiid. veair 
temprano esta noche. 



420 APPENDIX. 

To put to death, matar. 

To put up, aguantar sitfrir. 

To rap, or knock at the door, tocar a lapuerta. 

To revenge an affront, vengarse de una afrenta. 

To right one's self, tomar la justicia por su mano. 

To stand in need of, hacer falta a imo; as, "/ stand 
in need of some Spanish books," a mi me hacen falta 
algimos libros espaholes. 

To search a house, registrar una casa. 

To stand security, salir Jiador por otro. 

To sell for cash, or ready money, vender de contado. 

To sell on credit; vender aljiado^ 6 a plazos. 

To sell by auction, almonedear. 

To settle disputes, cornponer pendencias. 

To settle accounts, ajustar cuentas. 

Short of money, escaso de dinero. 

To sink a mine, cavar una mina. 

To sleep soundly, dormir a pierna suelta. 

To smell of, or like, oler a; as, "They all smelled of 
gunpowder," todos olian kpolvora. 

To snuff the candle, despavilar la vela* 

Soon, in such expressions as the following, should be 
translated tardar, to stay long; as, ''How soon will 
your father be back, dear Charles? ^cuanto tardar^^^w 
padre en volver? querido Carlos, 

To spare, [when implies omission] perdonar; ''He 
spared no labour to become learned," no perdono fa- 
tiga para llegar a ser erudito. 

To spend, [when applied to time or seasons] pasar; 
as, "how delightful it is to spend the summer in the 
country, " cuan delicioso C5, pasar el verano en el campo. 

To speak to the purpose, hablar al caso. 



APPENDIX. 421 

To split with, laughing, reventar de risa, literally to 
burst with laughter. 

To spoil, hechar d jierder; as, "Boys generally spoil 
their books before they have learned what they con- 
tain," los nihos genercdmente echan a perder los libfos 
antes de liaber aprendido lo que contienen. 

To stand upon an end, erizarse. 

To stop one's mouth, tapar la boca. 

Strange face, cara desconocida. 

To succeed, scdir bien, acertai\ lograr itno su interi' 
to; as **I wish you may succeed./' me alegrare, que vmd. 
ucierta, 6 que le saiga bien. "It is almost impossible 
for poets to succeed without ambition," es cuasi impos- 
sible que los poetas logren su intento sin ambicion. 

Sweets of life, las delicias de la vida. 

To take amiss, llevar a. mal; as, "I hope you won't 
take amiss what I say," espero que vmd. no Uevera kmal 
h que digo. 

To take, or make a tour, viajar. 

To take for granted, dar por supuesto. 

To take care not to do a thing, guardarse bien de 
hacer algo; ''^Tahe care not to discover me," guardate 
bien de descubrirme. 

To take an oath, jurar 6 hacer juramento. 

To take in, enganar, estafar. 

To taste of, or like, scdjer d; as, ''This wine tastes 
of. or like vinegar," este vino sabe a vinagre. 

To think one's self an honest man, a great mathema- 
tician, &:c. '•"Tenerse por hombre honesto, por gran 
matemdtico, 4'C." 

Thus far, or so far, hasta aqui. 

To give or put into any trouble, molestar; as, '^I am 
36 



422 APPENDIX. 

sorry, to put you into, or to give you any trouble,'* 
siento niolestarle. 

Upon pain, sopena,- as, '*No person shall desert i^pon 
jKiin of death," nadie desertara sopena dc muerte. 

To wear out, or to exhaust one's patience, hacer per- 
der la paciencia. 

To wind up a watch, dar cucrda d un rcloj. 

Witty sapng, chisie. 

To wonder, is not translated in Spanisli in such ex- 
pressions as the following: as, "^ J ivonder whaiher these 
complaints will ever end?" si se acabardn jamas esta.s 
qiiejas. '*I wonder whether we shall see land to-day," 
si veremos tierra hoi? 

To word a letter, dictar uno carta. 

If, in common conversation, the verb is repeated in 
linglish in the affirmative, when the sentence is in t!ic 
negative; and vice versa, in the negative, when the sen- 
tence is in the affirmative; to render, as it is presumed, 
the interrogatory more expressive, the words ^es ver- 
dad? [it is true?] ^no es verdad? [is it not truer] are 
used in Spanish: Example; '^You have seen my father; 
have you not? Vnid. ha visto d ml padre ;no es verdad? 
•'He \\i\\ not travel much; — will he?^^ El no viajard 
niucho ;es verdad I "you would go there, if permitted; 
wou'dn'tyou?" Si se lo permifiesen, Vmd, iria alia ;no 
es verdad? 



SYNONYMES. 

Aqitl, Acd. 

Aca,, means here, or hitlier, as well as aqui, with this 
diftereiice, that acd applies more forcibly to this place^ 
here; for instance: come here, [the very spot which is 
marked] venga^ vmd. acd; I live here, [i. e. in this 
house, mansion, country seat, &c. ] aqui vivo. 

Ahi, All'i, Alia. 

Their equivalents in English are, tlitre, thither^ or 
that place.) but they can, by no means, be indiscrimi- 
nately used. Ahi always denotes a place near at hand, 
and generally supposes it close to the person addressed; 
^s, "Examine, O man! thy heart, thou wilt there see 
the motives of thy actions," ecsamina, homhre^ tu cora- 
zoii, ahi verds los motivos de tus acetones. All'i and 
alia both denote a remote place, but tlie latter should 
always be used for, to that place; as, "I shall go there 
{to that place) to-morrow," yo ire alia manana. "Do 
you not see there, on that rock, how many men there 
are," no ves alii, or alia sobre aquella pena, que de horn- 
hres Jmi. 

Luego que, Despues que. 

As both these adverbs may be rendered in Englisli 
by after, it must be observed, that the former circum- 
scribes the time within determined boundaries, and con- 
-^equently equivalent to so soon as; example: "After 
he arrived, he came to see me," despues que llego; 
(some time after,) me vino d ver. "-Luego que llego;-^ 
(immediately after,) 7ne vino d ver. 



424 APPENDIX. 



Bespacio, Poco a Poco. 



Both these expressions mean an action which is ef- 
fected in a slow manner. There is however this differ- 
ence: despacio is applied to the slow operation of the 
action in itself; ;?oco a poco, denotes the slow operation 
of its progress towards the end. If we saj, ''Fui poco 
^ poco gonando terrene,^'' I went by degrees gaining- 
ground. We mean, that, although slowly, we gained 
some of the ground wliich was to be gained. If des- 
pacio be substituted, we then have relation not to the 
slow progress we made in gaining ground j but our s/ozt'- 
ness^ in the act of gaining it. 

Adulador, Lisongero. 

Flatterer is the English equivalent of these two words. 
They cannot, however, be indiscriminately used in 
Spanish. Adulador [from Adidator~] is the person 
who thinking, that, because persons are susceptible of 
flattery, he must sacrifice truth, justice and opinion to 
the object of his adulation. The lisongero is the per- 
son, who, by means of his manner and mode of expres- 
sion, can give to all his praise the semblance of truth — 
he persuades with ingenuity,* and introduces himself 
into the good opinion of the person flattered by indi- 
rect and insinuating means. Hence it is said, that a 
wise man must despise the one that uses adulation, or 
the adidador, and fear him who uses flattery, or the 
lisongero. This latter adjective is, therefore, applied 
to those expectations, anticipations, &c. which, in 
appearance, are delightful; but, in reality, mere sha- 
dows. 



APPENDIX. 425 

Romper^ Quebrar. 
The import of these verbs is to destroy any object by 
separation, or fracture. Romper, however, is not so 
limited in sense as quebrar. It is used with regard to 
any thing physical or abstract, which is susceptible of 
being broken. Quebrar is only used in reference to a 
tangible substance of a vitreous or inflexible nature: we 
therefore say, '^El rompio el co7ifrafo,^^ he broke the 
contract. ^'El quebro el vaso,^^ he broke the tumbler. 
'''EUos rompieron los libros, y quebraron los jarros,^^ 
they tore the books to jrieces^ and broke the jugs. 

L\ Irsc. 
Both these verbs import the act of leaving a place— 
the first, however, is used when the place for which the 
first was left, is mentioned; and the second, when no 
reference is made but to the place from which w^e sepa- 
rate ourselves. It is said, therefore, "F« a. 3Iegico,^^ 
he goes to Mexico; and ^^Se va de Megico," he goes 
away from Mexico- 

Honra, Honor. 
As these two words have, in English, one equivalent 
only, — \Jionour~] their difterence should be perfectly 
understood. When we speak of a man having honor, 
we mean that he is honourable in all his transactions 
and dealings; or that he has been born with honourable 
principles. Honra is the effect of these qualities. 
Honor, cannot be given, it must exist in the man. 
Honra is always received from a superior, or the 
public in general. We say, ^'Su honor es toda la 
honra de su fa7mUa,^^ his honour [hor.'^'irable princi- 
ples,'] is all the honour of w^hich his family can boast. 
.36* 



426 APPENDIX. 

"El president e le hizo Za honra de nombrarle consid^^' 
the president did him the honour to appoint him 
consul. 

No Obstante^ Mmque^ Bienque. 

These three conjunctions are always employed to 
exclude an opposition, but their import is not exactly 
the same: no obstante^ serves to exclude a positive oppo- 
sitionj aimqice, one that is contingent; and bienque, 
serves to modify the first idea, diminishing its force. 
Examples: ''-The Romans won the battle, although 
their force was much smaller," los Romanos gandron 
la batalla, no obstante que susfuerzas eran mucho mas 
pequenas. "I shall make sail to-morrow, although the 
wind may be contrary," manana saldre, aunque el vi- 
cnfo sea contrario. ''The emperor and the prince are 
both great generals, though the latter is certainly very 
superior," el emperador, y el principe son grandes gene- 
rales, bienque este en realidad es mui superior. 

Opinion, Farecer, Dictdmen, 
Opinion (from opino) denotes opinion only as con- 
ceived, the others as declared; but /?arecer (from^a- 
reo) implies such an opinion as is given on the existence 
or non-existence of a thing, the truth or falsehood of 
an assertion. Dictdmen (from dicto) tends to influence 
future conduct. "Every one has his opinion,^^ cada 
ami tiene su opinion. "I am of opinion that he vdll 
conquer," soi de parecer que vencerd. ''They would 
not follow his opinion,^^ no quisiSron seguir su dictd- 
men. 

For que, Pues, 

When these words are employed to denote cause, 
motive, Of reason, they are synonymous; but porqut 



APPENDIX. 42r 

expresses a positive inference, and pues one that is only 
probable; as, "Ha does not know his lesson because he 
has not studietl it," el no sabe la leccion porque no la 
ha estudiado. "He shall never learn the English, be- 
cause it is very difficult," el nunca aprenderd la lengua 
Inglesa, pues es tnui dificiL 

Sospecha, Recelo. 
Both these words imply suspicion, but sospecha may 
allude either to good or evil, when recelo can only allude 
to evil. The first, therefore, denotes every kind of 
suspicion, and the second that which is accompanied 
wdth a degree of fear only. Their derivatives sospechar 
and sospechoso, and recelar and receloso, are subject to 
the same distinction; as, "I /ear, or suspect that he will 
impose upon us;" recelo 6 sospecho, que Slnos engahara, 
"He raised the stone, suspecting that it concealed a 
treasure," levanto la losa sospechando que ocultaba un 
fesoro. - 

Vcneno, Ponzoha. 
Veneno denotes any species of poison, either as sim- 
ple or compound; ponzona generally implies animal 
poison, sometimes vegetable poison, but in its natural 
state only; as, "^/ veneno 6 la ponzona de las viboras,^' 
the poison of vipers. " Todos los cosmeticos son vene- 
nos preparados,^^ all cosmetics are prepared poisons, 
'^Sospecho que habia veneno oi la bebida,^^ (not pon- 
zona) he suspected there was poison in his drink. 

Foz, Palabra. 
Both these terms are rendered in English by words 
but they can, by no means, be indiscriminately used in 
Spanish. Foz, implies a word considered as uncon- 



428 APPENDIX. 

nected and imuttered, and should, therefore, be adopted 
when we treat of the structure, the real meaning, or the 
derivation of words: — palabra denotes an uttered word 
considered as a component part of a sentence, and re- 
gards all the circumstances which refer to the pronun- 
ciation, the figurative meaning, or the energy of words. 
"This Dictionary contains many words," este Diccion- 
ario contiene miichas voces, "I took them at their 
word," les cogi la palabra. "The word ennui is a 
French tvord, and a icord very difficult to pronounce," 
/« voz ENNUI 68 voz franccsa^ y palabra miii dificil dt 
pronunciar. 



A VOCABULARY 

OF THE MOST NECESSARY WORDS^ 
Of God, ^'C. 

Digs, God. el cielo, heaven. 

Gesu-Cristo, Jesus Christ el paraiso, paradise. 

elEspiritu Santo, the Holy la gloria, heaven. 

Ghost. nn angel, an angel. 

d Redentor, the Redeemer, un santo, a saint. 

el Criador, the Creator. wi martir, a martyr. 

una criahira, a creature. un prof eta, a prophet. 

la naturaleza, nature. un evangelista, an evange- 
un espiritu, a spirit. list. 

im cuerpo, a body. tin patriarca, a patriarch. 

TTie Elements. 
Elfuego, the fire. el agua, the water. 

el aire, the air. el mar, the sea. 

la tierra, the earth. 



APPENDIX. 



429 



El sol^ the sun. 

la luna, the moon. 

una estrella, a star. 

im planet a, a planet. 

un cometa, a comet. 

los rayos del sol, the rajs of 

the sun. 
la luz, the light. 
las tinieblas, darkness. 
elfrio, cold. 
el calor, heat. 
im vapor, vapour, steam. 
el viento, wind. 
icna nube, a cloud. 
la lluvia, rain. 
el granizo, hail. 



The Planets, ^c, 

el rocio, dew. 

la nieve, snow. 

la niebla, fog. 

una tempestad, a tempest. 

iin reldmpago, a flash of 
lightning. 

el trueno, thunder. 

un trueno, a clap of thun- 
der. 

el rayo, a thunderbolt. 

un terremoto, an earth- 
quake. 

el diluvio, the deluge. 

una imindadon, an inun- 
dation. 



Una ocasion, an opportuni- 

im dia, a day. 
una Jornada, a journey. 
el amanecer, day -break. 
la manana, morning. 
el mediod(a, mid-day, noon. 
el ponerse el sol, sun-set. 
la noche, the night. 
un dia de trabajo, a work- 
ino; dav. 



Of Time. 

un dia de fiesta, a holy day. 

un rato, a while. 

un instante, an instant; 

una semana, a week. 

un mes, a month. 

im aho, a year. 

un siglo, an age. 

la eternldad, eternity. 

el principio, the beginning, 

el medio, the middle. 

elfin, the end. 



The Days of the Week. 
Domingo, Sunday. Jueves, Thursday. 

Lunes, Monday. Viernes, Friday. 

Martes, Tuesday. Sdbado, Saturday, 

Mihcoles, Wednesday. 



430 



APPENDIX. 



The Months of the Year, 
Enero, January. Julio, July. 

Febrero, February. Agosto, August. 

Marzo, March. Sepfiembre, September. 



Abril, April. 
Mayo, May. 
Junio, June. 



Octubre, October. 
JVovievnbre, November. 
jDiciembre, December. 



Seasons and Holidays. 
La primavera, spring. la semana santa,\vo\y week. 



el verano, the summer. 

el otono, the autumn. 

el invierno, the winter. 

la canicida, dog-days. 

las niieses, the harvest. 

las vendimias, vintage. 

el esquileo, sheep-shearing- 
time. 

el dia de ano nuevo, new- 
years day. 

carnestolendas, 6 carnaval, 
carnival. 

Miercoles de Ceniza, Ash- 
Wednesday. 

la quarestna, Lent. 



el Domingo deRamos^Vdlm. 

Sunday. 
PaSqua de Besurreccion, 

Easter Sunday. 
Fiesta de Pentec6stes,y^\i\i- 

suntide. 
el Corpus, Corpus-Christi. 
Dia de todos Santos, All- 

saints day. 
el Adviento, Advent. 
Navidad, Christmas. 
Vigilia, Vigil. 
dia de ayuno, fast-day. 
dia de viernes, fish-day. 
dia de came, meat-day. 



Individuals atid Ages, 



Un hombre, a man. 
una inuger, a woman. 
un viejo, an old man. 
una vieja, an old woman, 
un muchacho, a boy. 
unjoven, a young man. 
una muchacha, una moza, 
a young girl. 



un niho, una niha, a child. 
una do7icella, a maid. 
un gigante, a giant, 
icn enano, a dwarf. 
la infancia, childhood. 
la juventud, youth. 
la edad viril, manhood . 
la vejez, old age. 



APPENDIX. 



431 



TTie Human Body. 



El cuerpo, the body. 
los 7nie7nbros,t\\e members. 
la cabeza, the head. 
los sesos^ the brain. 
el pescuezo, the neck. 
la cabellera^ the queue. 
las sienes, the temjiles. 
la f rente, the forehead. 
las cejas, the eye-brows. 
cl ojo, the eye. 



las harbas, the beard, 
las espaldas, the back. 
los hombros, the shoulders. 
el espinazo, the back bone. 
el p echo, the breast. 
cl esiomago, the stomach. 
el costado, the side. 
las costillas, the ribs. 
el corazon, the heart, 
el higado, the liver. 



la nina del ojo, the eye-ball, los pidmones, the lungs. 
/o57?a/7J«c?05,the eye-lashes, la Iriel, the gall. 



las orejas, the ears. 

/a nariz, the nose. 

/a ventanas de la nariz, the 

nostrils. 
nariz roma, Roman nose. 
nariz aguilena, Grecian 

nose. 
la cava, face. 

las facciones, the features. 
cl carillo, 6 megiUa, the 

cheeks. 
la boca, the mouth. 
los labios, the lips. 
las quijadas, the jaws. 
las enczas, the gums. 
la lengua, the tongue. 
el paladar, the palate. 
/« garganta, the throat. 
/o5 dientes, the teeth. 



/«.s entranas, the bowels, 
/a vegiga^ the bladder, 
/a sangre, the blood. 
^<n /meso a bone, 
/as venas, the veins. 
Zos nervios, the nerves. 
/o5 brazos, the arms, 
e/ cofZo, the elbow. 
/« muneca, the wrist. 
w?i« memo, a hand, 
e/ c/efZo, the finger. 
el dedo pidgar, the thumb. 
las coder as, the hips. 
los mv.slos, the thighs, 
/as rodillas, the knees, 
/as piernas, the legs. 
la pantorilla, the calf. 
el pie, the foot, 
e/ tobillo, the ankle. 



/as muelas, the back teeth, /a planta del pie, the sole of 

grinders. the foot, 

/a barba., the chin. e/ /a/on, the heel. 



4S;2 



APPENDIX. 



los caHos, the corns. 
las Unas, the nails. 
la came, the flesh. 
el pellejo, the skin. 

Things belonging to the Body. 



el pelo, the hair. 
los bigot es, the mustaches. 
la tez, the complexion. 
las Idgrimas, the tears. 



El sueno, the sleep. 
un suerio, a dream. 
la voz, the voice. 
lapalabra, tlie speech. 
la hermosura, beauty. 
lafealdad, ugliness. 
la salad, health. 



la gordura, fatness. 
lajlaqueza, thinness. 
el semblante, the counte- 
nance. 
el taile, the shape. 
la traza, appearance. 
cl andar, the walking. 



Natural Actions. 
La visa, the laughter. el hipo, the hiccough. 



el aliento, breath. 

un suspiro, a sigh. 

el estornudo, a sneeze. 

The 

La vista, the sight. 
el oido, the hearing. 
el olfato, the smelling. 
el gusto, the taste. 
el tacto, the touch. 



el ronqiddo, the snoring. 
un gesto, a gesture. 
un ademan, an attitude. 
una posturUf a posture. 

Five Senses. 

el color, the colour. 
el sonido, the sound. 
el olor, the smell. 
el hedor, the stink. 
el sabor, the smell. 



Defects and Maladies of the Body. 
Una berruga, a wart. un mal, a sickness. 



una arruga, a wrinkle. 
un grano, a pimple. 
una corcova, a hump. 
pecas, freckles. 
una enfermedad, a disease. 



un dolor, a pain. 

un dolor de muelas, tooth- 
ache. 

un dolor de cabeza, head- 
ache. 



APPENDIX. 



433 



la calentura, the fever. 
la tos, cough. 
la peste, the plague. 
la rabia, hydrophobia. 
nn resfriaclo, a cold. 
las viruefas, the small-pox. 
el sarampion, the measles. 
la tiricia, the jaundice. 
toi dolor colico, a colic pain. 
la gofa, the gout. 
un desmayo, sl fainting fit. 
una perlesia, palsy. 
la hidropesia^ the dropsy. 
?m dolor de coatado, the 
pleurisy. 



almorranas, the piles. 
la gangrena, gangrene. 
una herida, a wound. 
una cortadura, a cut. 
una llaga, a sore. 
una cicatriz, a scar. 
sahahones, chilblains. 
un golpe^ a blow. 
impuntapie, sl kick. 
la vida, life. 
la muerte^ death. 
la resurrecdon, resurrec- 
tion. 



Of the Soul 



el alma, the soul. 

cl entendimienfo, the under- 
standing. 

la imaginacion^ imagina- 
tion. 

la memoria, memory. 

la voluntad, will. 

la razon, reason. 

d sentido, sense. 

el genio, genius. 

la estupidez, stupidity. 

la viveza, liveliness. 

el olvido, forgetfulness. 

la sabiduria, wisdom. 

la locura, craziness. 

el co7zocimim/o, knowledge. 

la ciencia, science. 
57 



el error, error. 

ei amor, love. 

el aborrecimiento, hateful- 

ness. 
el odio, hatred. 
lafe, faith. 
la esperanza, hope. 
la caridad, charity. 
el temor, fear. 
la desesperacion, despair. 
lapaz, peace. 
la alegria, joy. 
el gozo, enjoyment. 
el sosiego, ease. 
la tranquilidad, tranquility. 
la tristeza, sadness. 
el placer, pleasure. 



434 



APPENDIX. 



el dolor, grief. 

el disgusto, disgust. 

la duda, doubt. 

la sospecha, suspicion. 

el deseo, desire. 

el atrevimiento, boldness. 

la arrogancia, arrogance. 

la timidez, timidity. 



la bondnd, goodness. 

la envidia, envy. 

la conjianzi, confidence. 

la colera, anger. 

et dnimo, spirit. 

la piedad, piety. 

el valor, valour. 

la misericordia, mercy. 



Of Wearing Apparel worn by Men. 



Un vestido, a suit. 
una casaca, a coat. 
una chupa, a waistcoat. 
calzones, breeches. 
medias, stockings. 
ligas, garters. 
zapatos, shoes. 
hebillas, buckles. 
impahuelo, a handkerchief. 
un sombrero, a hat. 
un espadin, a sword. 
los guantes, gloves. 



un sombrero de tres picos, 

a cocked hat. 
botas, boots. 
corbata, cravat. 
los vuelos, ruffles, 
una faltriquera, a pocket. 
una camisa, a shirt. 
un reloj, a watch. 
U7ia cageta, a snuff-box. 
un baston, a cane. 
un paragua, an umbrella. 
una bolsa, a purse. 



Of the Wearing Apparel worn by Women, 

El zagalejo, the under pet- encage, lace. 

tic oat. alfileres, pins. 

Unas agnuas, a white up- coginete, a pincushion. 

per petticoat. los zarcillos, ear-rings. 

una soya, a black petticoat, los braznletes, bracelets, 

un guardapies, a silk pet- un anillo, a ring. 

ticoat. una sortija, a guard. 

un tontUlo, a hoop petti- un abonico, a fan. 

coat. un bonete, a bonnet. 

un gorro, a plain cap. unjubon, a, spencer. 



APPENDIX. 



435 



una escqfia, a dress cap. 
pelo postizo, false hair. 
la cotilla, the stays. 
el cordon., the lace. 
el herrete, the tag. 
una bata, a gown. 
im delantol, an apron. 

Of Mankmd 

Un hombre, a man. 
iin viejo, an old man. 
una muger, a woman. 
un solfero, a bachelor. 
una do?icella, a maid. 
el marido, the husband, 
la muger, the wife. 
itn viudo a widow. 
un huerfano, a male or 

phan. 
un heredero, an heir. 



una innnfilla, a shawl. 
un capofillo, a mantle. 
ztna palutina^ a tippet. 
un velo, a veil. 
un manguito, a muff. 
las chapines, clogs. 



general. 

un muchacho, a boy. 

w?i mocito, a lad. 

em ?ii«o, a male child. 

zm nf/zo de tela, a sucking 
child. 

una madrastra, a step-mo- 
ther. 

un suegro, a father-in-law. 

c? yerno, the son-in-law. 

/« nuera, the daughter-in- 
law. 



eZ mayorazgo, an heir at eZ cunado, the brother-in- 



law. 

e/ bisabuelo^ the great 
grandfather. 

w/i bisnieto, a great grand- 
son. 

MM abuelo, a grandfather. 

«m nie^o. a grandson. 

el padre, the father. 

la niadre, the mother. 

zm hijo, a son. 

'm padrasto^ a step-father. 



law. 

wn ifio, an uncle. 
un sobrino, a nephew. 
un hermano, sl brother. 
un primo, a cousin. 
primo hermano, first cousin.. 
padrino, god-fatlier. 
madrina, god-mother. 
ahijado, god-son. 
un pariente, a reIation> 



436 



APPENDIX. 



^^ames of Individuals according to their Rank, Pro- 
fession or Employment. 
El papa, the Pope. un medico, a physician.' 

nn cardenal, a cardinal. tin cirujano, a surgeon. 
nn arzobispo, an archbishop im boiicario, an apotheca- 
nn obispo, a bishop. rj. 

un dean, a dean. un conierciante,SiUierc\mnt. 

un canoniga, a canon. un mercader, a mercer. 

un vicario, a vicar. un corredor, an exchange 

un cura, sl rector. broker. 

un teniente de cura, a curate un tendero, a shop-keeper. 
un emperador,2ii\ emperor, un escribiente, a clerk. 
iina emperatriz, an empress un sastre, a tailor. 

un zapatero, a shoemaker. 

un sombrerero, sl hatter. 



an ret, a king. ^, 

una reina, a queen. 
un principe, a prince. 
una princesa, a princess. 
an conde, an earl. 
una condesa, a countess. 
un marques, a marquis. 



un carnicero, a butcher. 
un panadero, a baker. 
un especiero, a grocer. 
un cervecero, a brewer. 
un carpintero, a carpenter. 



una marquesa, a marchio- un cantero, a mason. 



ness. 
un lor, a lord. 
una sehora, a ladj. 
un caballero, sl gentleman. 
una darna, a lady. 
el corregidor, the mayor. 
unjuez, a judge. 



un jjastelero, a pastry cook. 

un confitero, a confection- 
er. 

un peluquero, a hair-dress- 
er. 

un vidriero, a glazier. 

un pintor, a painter. 



un alcalde, a justice of the un librero, a bookseller. 

peace. un impresor, a printer. 

im abogado, a counsel. un grabador, an engraver. 

un procui^ador, a solicitor, wn remendon, a cobbler. 

?m escribano, a notary. zm mcindaderOj a porter. 



APPENDIX. 



437 



un cerragero, a locksmith, un cartero, a letter carrier. 
tin albeiiar, a farrier. el pre goner o, the crier. 

un relogero^ a watchmaker. 

Names given to Persons according to their Native 
Place. 



Un Europeo, an Europe- 
an. 

un Asiano^ an Asiatic. 

un Africano^ an African. 

un Americano, an Ameri- 
can. 

un Ingles, an Englishman. 

un Escoces, a Scotchman. 

un Irlandes, an Irishman. 

un EspahoU a Spaniard. 

un Gadituno, a native of 
Cadiz. 

un Sevillano, a native of 
Seville. 

U7i Madrileno, a native of 
Madrid. 

un Gerezano, a native of 
Xerez. 

un Porteho, a native of 
Port St. Mary's. 

un Poteno, a native of Ro- 
ta. 

icn Estremeno, a native of 
Estremadura. 

un falenciano, a Valen- 
cian. 

un Castellano, a Castilian. 
S7'* 



un Andaluz, an Andalu- 
sian. [guese. 

un Portuguez, a Portu- 

un Prances, a Frenchman. 

un Flamenco, a native of 
Flanders. 

un Itcdiano, an Italian. 

un Napolitano, a Neapoli- 
tan. 

un Ginehrino, a Genoese. 

un Genoves, a native of 
Geneva. 

un Suiz, a Swiss. 

un Aleman, a German. 

un Austriaco, an Austrian. 

un Sacson, a Saxon. 

im Bdvaro, a Bavarian. 

un Holandes, a Dutchman. 

un Bohemio, a Bohemian. 

un Hungaro, a Hungarian. 

un Prusiano, a Prussian. 

un Polaco, a Pole. 

un Griego, a Greek. 

un Turco, a Turk. 

un Persa, a Persian. 

un Chino, a Chinese. 

un Negro, a Negro. 



458 



APPENDIX. 



un Catalan, a Catalan. 

mi Vizaino, a Biscayan. 

un Manchego, a native of 
la Mancha. 

un Malagueno, a native of 
Malaga. 

un Granadino, a native of 
Granada. 

ten ^isturiano, a native of 
Asturias. 

un Gallego, a native of 
Gallicia. 

un Dinainarquez, a Dane. 

un Sueco, a Swede. 

wi Muscovita, a Musco- 
vite. 



un CartagineSf a Carthagi- 
nian. 

un Jlrabe, an Arabian. 

un Egipcio, an Egyptian. 

un Algerino, an Algerine. 

un Indio, an Indian. 

un Moro, a Moor, 

un JRuso, a Russian. 

un Navarro, a native of 
Navarre. 

un Arragones, a native of 
Arragon. 

un Criollo, a Creole. 

un Mont an es, a Mountai- 
neer. 

un Serrano, a Highlander. 



Of a City and its Farts. 



etna ciitdad, a city. 

una villa, a town. 

un lugar, a village. 

una aldea, a hamlet. 

los arrabales, the suburbs. 

una calle, a street. 

un call ej on, a lane. 

una plaza, a square. 

el cano, the kennel. 

el mercado, the market. 

una casa, a house. 

la casa de cabildo, the 

town-house. 
una parroquia, a parish. 
la casa de comedias, the 

play-house. 



la pescaderia, the fish-mar- 
ket. 

la carniceria, the flesh mar- 
ket. 

la panaderia, the bread- 
market. 

el Matadero, the slaughter^ 
house. 

un edificio, a building. 

un palacio, a palace. 

el muelle, the wharf. 

una tienda, a shop, 

una iglesia, a church. 

una ayuda de parroquia, 
a chapel of ease. 

el Correo, the Post-office. 



APPENDIX. 



439^ 



una universidad, a univer- 
sity. • 

un colegio, a college. 

una academia, an acade- 
my. 

un hospital, an hospital. 

una casa de locos, a mad- 
house. 

U7ia cdrcel, a prison. 

un cafe, a coffee house. 

unafonda, a hotel. 

unfigon, a cook's shop. 

una posada^ an inn. 

la Bolsa, the exchange. 

la Aduana, the Custom- 
house. 

el Ahairantazgo, the Ad- 
miralty. 



una oficiana, an office. 

un escritorio, a counting- 
house. 

el teatro, the stage. 

los bastidores, the scenes. 

el patio, the pit. 

un oposoento 6 palco, a 
box. 

un monasterio, a monaste- 
ry- 

im convento, a convent. 

un almacen, a warehouse. 

una fdhrica, a manufac- 
tory. 

un taller, a work shop. 

una escuela, a boys' school. 

escuela de ninas, a girls' 
school. 



Of the House and its Divisions, 



El solar, the ground floor. 

tin alto, a story. 

el primer piso, the first 
floor. 

el portal, the porch. 

el patio, t!ie court. 

las escaleras, the stairs. 

un escalon, a step. 

una alcova, a bed room 

una anticdmara, an anti- 
chamber. 

un tocadar, 
room. 



los corridores, the galleries. 

un ciiarto, a room. 

el comedor, the dining- 
room- 

una sala, a parlour. 

la estrada, the drawing- 
room. 

un desvan, a garret. 

un tejado, a tiled roof. 

una ventana, a window. 

un balcon, a balcony, 
dressing- una puerta, a door. 

el aldabon, the knocker. 



%m retrete. a closet* 



el umbral, the threshold. 



440 



APPENDIX. 



la despensa, the pantrj, 

la cocino, the kitchen. 

una alhacena, the cup- 
board. 

?m mirador, an observa- 
tory. 



la bodega, the cellar. 
la caballeriza, the stable, 
la cochera, the coach house. 
el jar din, the garden. 
el parque, the park. 



Of Household Furniture. 



Una armadura de cama, a 

bedstead. 
las cortinas, the. curtains. 
la alfombra, the carpet. 
un phimon, a feather-bed. 



un sillo7i, an easy chair. 
un canape, a sofa. 
un estante, a book-case. 
una papelera, a bureau. 
un escritorio, a writing desk 



un colchon de lana, a flock- el aparador, the sideboard. 

mattress. un espejo, a mirror. 

un gergon depaja, a straw- una araha, a chandelier. 



mattress. 

una almohada, a pillow. 

una sdbana, a sheet. 

una funda de almohada, 
a pillow-case. 

los cobertores, the blank- 
ets. 

la colcha, the counterpane. 

una silla^ a chair. 

una mesa, a table. 



un forte piano, a pianoforte. 

un guardaropa, a ward- 
robe. 

un gabinete, a cabinet. 

un biombo, a screen. 

tm bahul, a trunk. 

to2« Cf/;*«, a box. 

una gaveta, sl bureau draw- 
er. 

un cajon, a table drawer. 



La mesa, the table. 
el mantel, the table cloth, 
una servilleta, a napkin. 
un cuchillo, a knife. 
un tenedor, a fork. 
una cuchara, a spoon. 



Of the Table, ^»c. 

una garrafa, a decanter. 



unjarro, a jug. 

«n servicio de mesa, a table 
service. 

un servicio de te, a tea-ser- 
vice. 



APPENDIX. 



441 



im salero, a saltcellar. 

un plato, a plate. 

una salcera, a sauce-tu- 
reen. 

ias ampolletas, the cruets. 

el pimentero, the pepper- 
box. 

el mostacero, the mustard- 
pot. 

un vaso, a tumbler. 



la tetera, the teapot. 
ima cafetera, a cofFee-pot, 
un c/iocolatero, a chocolate- 
pot. 
el molinillo, the mill. 
el azuquero, a sugar-basin. 
el lechero, a milk-pot. 
itna fasa, a cup. 
un platUlo, a saucer. 



Of Meat 
Came, flesh. 

came cocida, boiled meat. 
came asada, roasted meat. 
pescado, fish. 
vaca, beef. 
carnero, mutton. 
tocino, bacon. 
un pavo, a turkey. 
tm pichon, a pigeon. 
una perdiz, a partridge. 
unfaisan, a pheasant. 
un pato, a duck. 
U7i ganso, a goose. 
pan, bread. 

pan fresco, new bread. 
ternera, veal. 
vejiado, venison. 
cordero, lamb. 
janion, ham. 
c«zo, game. 
i<?i JO0//0, a chicken. 
una gallina, a fowl. 



and Drink. 

huevos, eggs. 

salza, sauce. 

las verduras, the vegeta- 
bles. 

las escabeches, the pickles^. 

sal, salt. 

pimienta, pepper. 

mostaza, mustard. 

aceite, oil. 

vinagre, vinegar. 

pudin, pudding. 

el primer cubierto, the first 
course. 

te, tea. 

cffe, cofiee. 

chocolate, chocolate. 

nata, cream. 

pan duro, stale bread. 

vino, wine. 

vino tinto, red wine. 

vino bianco, white wine. 

ensalada, salad. 



442 



APPENDIX. 



una costrada, sl mince- 
pie. 

una torta, a fruit-pie. 

los postres, the dessert 

uvas, grapes. 

melones, melons. 

pinasy pines. 

naranjas^ oranges. 

peras, pears. 

manzanas, apples. 

melocotones, peaches. 

damoscos, apricots. 

nueces,, walnuts. 

avellanas, filberts. 

almendras, almonds. 

pasas, raisins. 

manjar bianco^ blanc 
mange. 

jahas, jellies. 



queso, cheese. 
manteca, butter. 
cerveza, beer. 
cervezajioja, table-beer. 
agua, water. 
un pastel, a meat pie. 
una empanada, a fish-pie. 
leche, milk. 

azucar de pilon, loaf-sugar. 
azucar terciado, moist su- 
gar. 
tostada, toast. 
aguardiente, brandy. 
ron, rum. 
punche, punch. 
s angina, negus. 
or chat a, orgeat. 
Umonada, lemonade. 



MOST NECESSARY AND USEFUL 
DIALOGUES. 



DIALOGO I. 



DIALOGUE I. 



Para saludar, despedirse, 4'C. To salute, take leave, ^c. 



Buenos dias caballeros. 
Buenas tardes tenga \^nd. 

senora. 
Buenas nochos seiior. 
Criado de vmd. 
Servidor de vmd. 
Soi el suyo. 
jComo esta vmd.? 
Mui bien. 

Mui dispuesto a servirle. 
^•Como se lo pasa? 
;Como va su salud? 
Bastante buena ^-y la suya? 
^Esta vmd. bueno.^ 
Mui bien, jy como esta vmd. 
^Como ha estado vmd. des- 
de que tuve el gusto de 
verle? 
Espero que le veo en per- 

fecta salud. 
Espero que hallo a vmd. en 

buena salud. 
Estoi en perfecta salud. 
iY como esta vmd? 



Good morning, gentlemen. 
Madam, I wish you a good 

afternoon. 
Good night, sir. 
Your servant. 
I am your servants 
I am yours. 
How do you do? 
Very well? 

At your service. 

How is it with you? 

How is your health? 

Quite well, how are your 

Are you well? 

Very well, how do you dor 

How have you been since 
I had the pleasure of 
seeing you? 

I hope I see you well? 

I hope I find you in good 

health. 
I am perfectly well. 
And how is it with you? 



444 



APPENDIX. 



Pasablamenle bien. 

A mi ordiiiario. 

Lo celebro inucho. 

Me alegro de verle en bu- 

ena salud. 
Le doi mil gracias, or se lo 

agredezco. 
^•Como esta su senor her- How does jour brother do? 

mano? 
Creo que esta bueno. 
Me alegro mucho de oirlo. 
,3Adonde esta? 
Al campo. 
En la ciudad. 
En casa. 
Ha salido. 

Se alegrara mucho de verle. 
(jComo esta su seiiora? 
Esta mui buena. 
No esta buena. 
<:De que se queja? 
^jQue mal tiene? 
Tiene calentura. 
Lo siento muchisimo. 
(jHa mucho que esta indis- 

puesta? 
Digale vmd. que siento mu- 

chismio que este indis- 

puesta. 
No faltare de hacerlo. 
A Dios caballero. 



Pretty well, I thank you. 

As usual. 

I am glad of it. 

I am very happy to see 

you well. 
I am obliged to you. 



I believe he is well. 

I rejoice to hear it. 

Where is he? 

In the country. 

In town. 

At home. 

He is gone out. 

He will be glad to see you. 

How is your lady? 

She is very well. 

She is not well. 

What ails her? 

What complaint has she? 

She has an ague. 

I am sorry for it. 

How long has she been ill? 

Tell her I am sorry to hear 
she is ill. 

I will not fail. 
Farewell, sir. 



APPENDIX. 



445 



BIALOGO II. 

Para hacer una visita. 

Llaman a la puerta. 
Vaya a ver qui en es. 
Vaya a abrir la puerta. 
Es la Seiiora B. 
Buenos dias tenga vmd. 
Don N. Doiia N. me alegro 

mucho de verle. 
Es cosa rara el ver a vmd. 

Vmd. se hace estrangero. 
Hagame vmd. el favor de 

sentarse. 
Me parece que hace un si- 

glo desde que le vi. 
Hagame el gusto de tomar 

un asiento. 
;No quiere vmd. sentarse.^ 
Da una silla a Dofiia B. 
Vmd. Uega mui oportuna- 

mente. 
Iba a su casa para hacerle 

una vista. 
Me alegro mucho de tener 

la delantera; vengo para 

informarme como va su 

salud. 
Estoi pasablamente bien 

hoi. 
4 Y como esta su seiiora ma- 

dre? 
No esta mui buena. 



DIALOGUE II. 

Paying a visit. 

Somebody knocks* 

Go and see who it is. 

Go and open the door. 

It is Mrs. B. 

Good morning to you. 

Mr. N. or Mrs. N. I am 

very glad to see you. 
It is quite a favour to see 

you. 
You are quite a stranger- 
Pray be seated. 

It appears to me that it is 
an age since I saw you. 
Do pray sit down. 

Will you not sit down? 

Give Mrs. B. a chair. 

You are come in very op- 
portunely. 

I was going to your house 
to pay you a visit. 

I am very glad to have the 
start of you : I am come 
to inquire after your 
health. 

I am pretty well to-day. 

And how does your mo- 
ther do.^ 
She is not very welL 



446 

Lo siento mucho. 
jAdonde estasu seiioraher- 



Ha salido, pero vol vera lue- 

^Quiere vmd. pasears-^ en 
el jardin conmigo? 

Con mucho gusto. 

;Quiere vmd. quedar a co- 
mer con nosotros? 

No puedo. 

Es menester que me vaja. 

Vmd. esta mui de priesa. 

^Hagame el favor, porque 
tanta priesa? 

Espero que tendre el gus- 
to de verle en breve. 



DIALOGO III. 

Sohre el est ado del tiem- 
po. 

^;Que tiempo hace.^ 
Hace buen tiempo. 
Hace mal tiempo. 
Hace calor. 
Hace mucho frio. 
Ha nevado. 
Hiela. 
Desliiela. 
Llueve. 
Llo^izna. 
Llovio a cantaros. 



APPENDIX. 



I am sorry for it. 
Where is your sister.^ 

She is gone out; but she 

will return very soon. 
Will you take a walk in 

the garden with me? 
With all my heart. 
Will you stay and take 

dinner with us? 
I cannot stay. 
I must go. 

You are in a great hurry. 
Why are you in such a 

hurry? 
I hope I shall have the 

pleasure of seeing you 

again soon. 

DIALOGUE III. 

Concernhig the state of 
the weather. 

How is the weather. 
It is fair weather. 
It is foul weather. 
It is hot. 
It is very cold. 
It has snowed. 
It freezes. 
It thaws. 
It rains. 
It drizzles. 

The rain poured down in 
torrents. 



APPENDIX. 



447 



Truena. 

Relampaguea. 

El rajo cajo en la casa. 

Solo vi un relampago. 

Oi dos truenos. 

Cae aguanieve. 

Hace una neblina mui es- 

pesa. 
Se levanta una niebla. 
Cone mucho viento. 
Hace mucho aire. 
Viene el viento mui fiio. 
Amanece. 
Anochece. 
Es de dia. 
Es de noche. 
El sol sale. 
El sol se pone. 
El cielo esta estrellado. 
Hace luna. 



It thunders. 

It lightens. 

The lightning struck the 

house. 
I saw but one flash. 
I heard two claps. 
There is a sleet falling. 
There is a very thick mist. 

A fog rises. 

The wind is high. 

The wind blows hard. 

The wind blows cold. 

IL begins to grow light. 

It begins to grow dark. 

It is day. 

It is night. 

The sun rises. 

The sun sets. 

It is a starlight night. 

The moon shines. 



DIALOGO IV. 



DIALOGUE IV. 



Al levantarsepor la manana. At rising in the morning. 



^•Quien llama a la puerta.^ 

^•Quien esta alii? 

^•Esta vmd. aun en la cama? 

(jDuerme vmd.? 

^•Esta vmd. despierto? 

Estoi despierto. 

^Es tiempo de levantarse? 

^Son las ocho? 



Who knocks at the door.^ 

Who is there .^ 

Are you in bed still.'' 

Are you asleep? 

Are you awake .^ 

I am awake. 

Is it time to get up? 

Is it eight o'clock? 



44i^ 



APPENDIX. 



Abra la puerta. 

Esta cerrada con Have. 

Agiiarde un poco. 

Me acoste mui tarde. 

En cuanto a. mi, creo que 

el sueiio de la maiiana es 

el mejor de todos. 
;P6rc[ue no se viste vmd.? 

Diga vmd. a la criada que 

me traiga una camisa 

limpia. 
Hagame el favor de darme 

la bata. 
Aqui estan sus zapatos. 
Es menester que me lave 

las manos. 
Deme una bacia. 
Deme un poco de jabon. 
Mis manos estaban mui 

sucias. 
^Adonde esta mi camisa? 
Aqui esta. 
No esta limpia. 
Esta camisa no esta cali- 

ente. 
Deme un paiiuelo. 
Deme el paiiuelo que esta 

en lo faltriquera de mi 

casaca* 



Open the door. 

It is locked. 

Stay a little. 

I went to bed very late. 

For my part, I think that 

the morning sleep is the 

best of all. 
Why do you not dress 

yourself.^ 
Tell the maid to bring me 

a clean shirt. 

Pray give me my morning 

gown. 
There are your shoes. 
I must wash my hands* 

Give me a basin. 
Give me a little soap. 
My hands are very dirty. 

Where is my shirt? 

Here it is. 

It is not clean. 

This shirt is not warm. 

Give me a handkerchief. 

Give me the handkerchief 
that is in my coat pock- 
et. 



APPENDIX. 



440 



DIALOGO V. 



DIALOGUE V. 



Para Desttyunarse, (6 al- 
morzar. ) 

;Se serrira vmd. venir a 
desajunarse conmigo? 

Aceptare el favor de vmd. 

jQue es lo que le gusta 

vmd. tomar? 
Pan y manteca con te y 

leche. 
^Quiere vmd. que las tosta- 

das se hagan con la man- 
teca en la cocina? 
No, seiior. no me gusta el 

pan tostado. 
^- Antes que vmd. empiece, 

querra vmd. un par de 

huevos frescos .P 
Me permitira vmd. servirle 

con este par destinado 

para mi. 
■Senor, le doi a vmd. mu» 

chas gracias, nunca uso 

otro desayuno que este. 

Cada cosa es buena en su 

genero. 
Mi amigo aqui se desayuna 

siempre con cafe. 



To Breakfast. 

Will you be pleased to 

come to breakfast with 

me. 
I will accept of your fa- 
vour. 
What do you choose to 

have.^ 
Bread, butter, and tea, 

with milk. 
Will you have the bread 

toasted and buttered in 

the kitchen? 
No, sir, I do not like 

toasted bread. 
Before you begin, will you 

have a pair of new laid 

eggs.^ 
Will you permit me to 

serve you with this pair 

intended for me.^ 
Sir, I return you many 

thanks; I never make 

use of any breakfast but 

this. 
Every thing is good in its 

kind. 
My friend here always 

breakfasts on coffee. 



450 



APPENDIX. 



Este caballero que viajo 
por Espaiia quisiera me- 
jor una gicara de choco- 
late. 

Si senor, si se sirve vmd. 
mandarmela hacer se lo 
agradecere. 

Muchacho, vete presto, y 
haz para el caballero una 
gicara de chocolate de 
Espana, que esta tenido 
por el mejor de toda la 
Europa. 

Que este bien batido, y con 
bastante espuma. 

No te olvides de traer biz- 
^ochos, porque los puede 
preferir al pan. 

Pero ante todas cosas, pon 
en la mesa la conserva, 
y una salvilla con vasos 
grandes ilenos de agua 
de la fuente. 

Ya ha tornado vmd. dema- 
siado trabajo por mi.- 

Senor, ninguno hallo en 
servir \k vmd; y cuanto 
mas amenudo^ me favo- 
rezca con sus visitas, 
tanto mas apreciables 
me seran, 



The gentleman who tra- 
velled through Spain, 
may be for a cup of 
chocolate. 

Yes, sir, if you will be 
pleased to order it for 
me, I will be obliged to 
you. 

Boy, go quickly, and make 
the gentleman a cup of 
the Spanish chocolate, 
as it is considered the 
best in Europe. 

Let it be well beaten, and 
it will froth high. 

Do not forget bringing bis- 
cuits, as he may prefer 
them to bread. 

But above all things, put 
on the table some pre- 
serves, and a salver, with 
tumblers full of spring- 
water. 

Sir, you have taken too 
much pains on my ac- 
count. 

Sir, I find none in serving 
you, and the oftener you 
honour me with your vi- 
sits, they will be more 
and more agreeable to 
me. 



APPENDIX. 451 

Es un efecto del buen co- It is an effect of jour good 

razon de vmd., por lo heart, for which jou have 

que le doi sinceras gra- mj sincere thanks, 
cias. 

Quedo siempre a la dispo- I am always yours, 
cion de vmd. 



DIALOGO VI. 

Comiendo. 
La comida esta en la mesa. 
Caballeros, si vmdes. gus- 
tan^ vamos al comedor. 

Muchisimo me agrada la 
propuesta. 

Pase vmd. adelante. 

Voi a seguirle. 

No, seiior^ despues de vmd. 

Seiiores, mientras que 
vmdes. gastan el tiempo 
eiTcumplimientos] se en- 
friala comida. . 

Seiiorai hagame vmd./el fa- 
vor de tomar el primer 
asiento. 

Seiior Don Diego, sirvase 
vmd. sentarse junto k la 
seiiora, 

^jQuien quiere sopa.^ 

jSenora, gusta vmd. que le 
mande una tajada del 
salmon.^ 



DIALOGUE VI. 

At Dinner, 

Dinner is on table. 

Gentlemen, if you please, 
let us go into the dining- 
room. 

The proposal pleases me 
very much. 

Walk in. 

I'll follow you. 

No, sir; after you. 

Gentlemen, whilst you 
spend the time in com- 
pliments, the dinner gets 
cold. 

Madam, do me the favour 
to take the first place. 

Mr. James, be pleased to 

take the next seat to the 

lady. 
Who likes soup? 
Madam, will you allow me, 

to send you a slice of 

salmon.^ 



452 



APPENDIX. 



^Le gusta k vm. la salsa de 

camarones 6 la de ancho- 

vas? 
Muchacho, quita la sopa y 

el pescado. 
Vamos, senores, echemos 

un trago juntos. 
hNo quiere vmd. tomar un 

vaso de vino con noso- 

tros? 
No, seiior, por ahora me 

contentare con un vaso 

de cerveza. 
Traenos las garrafas y las 

copillas, y dale al seiior 

un vaso de cerveza fu- 

erte. 
Mas me gusta la cerveza 

floja. 
Senores, a la salud de 

vmdes. 
Buen provecho le haga a 

vmd. 
Danos pan tierno, este pan 

es duro. 
Corta unas rebanadas de 

pan casero. 
Seiior Don Pedro, ^-quiere 

vmd. hacerme el favor de 

trinchar esa gallina.^ 
Vmd. es mejor trinchante 

que yo. 
Seiiora, vol k mandarle a 

vmd. las pechugas. 



Do you like shrimp sauce 
or anchovy.^ 

Boy, take the soup and fish 

awayc 
Come, gentlemen, let us 

take a glass together. 
Won't you take a glass of 

wine with us.^ 

No, sir, I shall content my- 
self with a glass of beer 
for the present. 

Bring us the decanters and 
glasses, and give the gen- 
tleman a glass of porter. 

I like small beer better. 

Gentlemen, your liealths. 

I thank you, sir. 

Give us new bread, this 
bread is stale. 

Cut some slices of home- 
made bread. 

Mr. Peter, will you do me 
the favour to carve that 
fowl? 

You are a better carver 
than I. 

Madam, I am going to send 
you the breast. 



APPENDIX. 



45S 



^Le gusta a vm. eX alon 6 

la pieina? 
(^Hai a quien le guste el 

higado J la molleja? 
^Cual le gusta a vmd. mas, 

el cocido 6 el asado? 
Le cortare a vm. una taja- 

da del lomo de vaca. 
No, viva vmd. mil anos, me 

gusta a mi mas bien este 

guisado. 
Hagame vm. el favor de 

servirse a si mismo. 
Coma vmd. patatas, berzas, 

6 escabeches. 
El relleno de esta gallina 

esta mui zonzo. 
Echele vmd. sal j pimien- 

ta. 
;Que plato es ese que tiene 

vmd. delante? 
Tengo dos, y le dire k vmd. 

lo que son. 
El uno es un gigote de ter- 

nera, y el otro un estofa- 

do de carnero con albon- 

digas. 
Traeme la salza de mante- 

ca. 
Siento mucho que no tengo 

ninguna caza qu^ pre- 

sentarles a vmdes. 
Yq prefiero una buena po- 

11a, a todas las perdices 

y liebres del mundo. 



Do you like the wing or 

the leg? 
Is there any one who likes 

the liver and gizzard? 
Which do you prefer, 

boiled or roast? 
I'll cut you a slice of the 

sirloin. 
No, I thank you, I like 

this hash better. 

Do me the favour to help 

yourself. 
Eat some potatoes, greens, 

or pickles. 
The stuffing of this fowl 

is very insipid. 
Put pepper and salt to it. 

What dish is that you have 
before you? 

I have two, and I'll tell 
you what they are. 

The one is minced veal, 
and the other is stewed 
mutton, with forced 
meat balls. 

Bring me the melted but- 
ter. 

I am sorry I have no game 
to offer you. 

I prefer a good pullet to 
all the partridges and 
hares in the world. 



434 



APPENDIX. 



Voi a cortarle a vm. una 

tajadita de la lengua de 

vaca. 
No, seiior, no mas. 
He comido bastante. 
Esa seiiora no ha comido 

casi nada. 
Perdone vmd. me ha ser- 

vido de cuanto habia en 

la mesa. 

JEspero, senores, que no me 
dejaran comer solo. 

^Vamos, senor coronel, de 
que quiere vm. que le 
sirva,^ 

Venga una tajadita del ja- 
mon, solo por hacer com- 
paiiia a vm. 

^Quiere vm. magro 6 gordo? 

Ambos me gustan bien. 

^•Gusta vm. seiiora, que la 
sirva del pastel de man- 
zanas, 6 del de ciruelas.^ 

^•Le gusta a vm. la costra? 
Si, seiior, pero no me de 

vmd. mucho zumo. 
Basta. 
Estimare me mande vmd. 

un pedacito de queso. 
Cortese vmd. pan. 



I am going to cut you a 

small slice of the neat's 

tongue. 
No, sir, no more. 
I have eaten sufficiently. 
The lady has scarcely 

eaten any thing. 
I beg your pardon^ you 

have helped me to every 

thing there was on the 

table. 
I hope, gentlemen, you 

won't suffer me to eat 

alone. 
Come, colonel, to what 

shall I help you.^ 

Hand me over a small slice 

of ham, only to keep 

you company. 
Will you have fat or lean? 
I like both very well. 
Madam, will you permit 

me to help you to some 

apple-pie, or to some 

plum-pie.^ 
Do you like crust,^ 
Yes, sir, but do not give 

me too much juice. 
That's enough. 
I'll thank you to send me 

a small piece of cheese. 
Cut yourself some bread. 



APPENDIX. 



455 



;Que! ^-le gusta a vm. el What! do jou like crumb 

migajon mas que la cor- better than crust? 

teza? 
No he alinado la ensalada, I have not dressed the 

para que cada uno la salad, that every one 

aliiie a su gusto. may dress it to his 

taste. 
Muchacho, trae las ampo- Boy bring the cruets which 

lletas que est^n en el are on the sideboard. 

aparador, 
Destapa esa limeta. Uncork that bottle. 

He perdido mi tirabuzon. I have lost my cork-screw. 
Toma el mio. Take mine. 

Esta es cerveza de Escocia This is Scotch beer, and I 

y quiero que la prueben should like you to taste 

vmdes. 
Le diremos a vmd. nuestro 

parecer. 
Pues, (jque tal.^ 
Es mui buena, pero fortisi- 

ma. 
Muchacho, lava esos vasos. 
Pon el vino en la mesa, y 

traenos los postres. 



It. 
We'll give you our opi- 

nioL. 
Well, what do you think? 
It is very good, but very 

heady. 
Boy, rinse those glasses. 
Set the wine on the table, 

and brin"; us the dessert. 



DIALOGO VII. 



Tomando el Te, 



DIALOGUE VII. 



On Drinking Tea, 
4 Ha traido el recado para Have you carried in the 

el te? tea things? 

Todo esta en la mesa. Every thing is on the ta- 

ble. 
^jHicrve el agua? Does the water boil? 

El te esta pronto. Tea is quite ready. 



456 



APPENDIX 



Aguardan para vmd. 

Vengo. 

Le seguii'e. 

No ha puesto uno basija so- 
bre le mesa. 

No tenemos tazas bastan- 
tes. 

Nos faltan todavia dos ta- 
zas J uno salvilla. 

Traiga otra cucharita. 

No ha traido las tenaci- 
tas. 

^Toma vmd. azucar.'^ 

jToma vuid. nata? 

Me hara favor de darme un 
poco mas de leche. 

El te estademasiadofuerte. 

Puedo hacerle mas ligero. 

;Que tomara vmd..^ 

Aqui hai bollos. 

Tomare pan y manteca. 

Ma hara el favor de darme 
un poco de pan j man- 
teca. 

Su te esta mui bueno. 

Este es un te escelentisimo. 

(jAdonde le comproVmd. ? 

Le compre en casa de . 

Tiene la mejor tienda para 
te y cafe. 

^Ha acabado vmd. ya.^ 



The company are waiting 

for you. 
I am coming. 
I will follow you. 
You have not put a basin 

on the table. 
We have not cups enough. 

We want two more cups 
and a saucer. 

Bring another spoon. 

You have not brought the 
sugar tongs. 

Do you take sugar? 

Do you take cream? 

I will thank you for a lit- 
tle more milk. 

The tea is too strong. 

I can put more water in it. 

What will you have? 

Here are cakes. 

I shall take a slice of bread 
and butter. 

1 will thank you for some 
bread and butter. 

Your tea is very good. 
This is most excellent tea. 
Where did you buy it? 

I bought it at . . 

It is the best shop for cof- 
fee and tea. 
Have you done already* 



APPENDIX. 



457 



; Vmd. tomark otra taza? 
Vmd. puede tomar otra ta- 
za. 
Le echare otra media taza. 

No puede rehusirmela. 
No mas, le doi muchas gra- 

cias. 
He tornado tres tazas, y 

nunca tomo mas. 



You will take another cup? 
You can take another cup. 

I will pour you out half a 

cup. 
You cannot refuse me. 
Much rather not, I thank 

you. 
I have had three cups, and 

I never drink more. 



DIALOGO VIII. 

Para ir d la cama. 

Es mui tarde. 

Es tiempo de ir a dormir. 

Velamos hasta las doce. 

Levantese vmd. y vaya a 
acostarse. 

Venga vmd. conmigo. 

Quiero ir a la cama. 

Caliente mi cama. 

^Adonde esta el calenta- 
dor? 

Buenas noches. 

Dios se las de a vmd. 

Traigame el gorro de 
noche. 

Venga luego a tomar la ve- 
la. 

Llevese la vela- 
La apagare. 



DIALOGUE VIII. 

To get to bed. 

It is very late. 
It is time to go to bed. 
We sit up 'till midnight. 
Rise and go to bed. 

Come with me. 
I will go to bed. 
Warm my bed. 
Where is the warming- 
pan.^ 
Good evening. 
Good night. 
Give me a night-cap. 

Come soon to fetch the 

candle. 
Take away the candle. 
I will put it out. 



458 



APPENDIX. 



Despierteme manana tern- Call me to-morrow early. 

prano. 
^'Se acordara de desper- 

tarme.^ 
Si, le despertare. 
No falte. 
Tengo que levantarme al 

romper del dia. 



DIALOGO IX. 

Al hablar a un sastre. 
Seiior maestro, quiero ha- 

cerme un vestido negro. 
^•De que le quiere vmd. 

La casaca de pafio de 
Francia, la chupa de se- 
da, y los calzones de 
casimiro. 

Aqui tiene vmd. muestras. 

:Cuantas varas necesito pa- 
ra casaca y chupa? 

Dos varas y media para la 

casaca, y vara y media 

para la chupa. 
(iDe que se ha de aforrar 

la casaca.^ 
De lo mismo. 
Hagame vmd. un vestido 

que me venga bien. 
Quedara vmd. content©. 



Will you remember to 

awake me? 
Yes, I will awake you. 
Do not fail. 
I must rise by break of 

day. 

DIALOGUE IX. 

On Speaking to a Taylor, 

Sir, I want to get a suit of 
black made. 

What will you have it 
made of? 

The coat of French cloth, 
the waistcoat of silk, 
and the breeches of ker- 
seymere. 

Here are some patterns. 

How many yards do I 
want for the coat and 
waistcoat? 

Two yards and a half for 
the coat, and a yard and 
a half for the waistcoat. 

What will you have the 
coat lined with? 

With the same. 

Make me a suit to fit well. 

I shall give you satisfacr 
tion. 



APPENDIX. 



459 



^Cuando me traera vmd. el 
vestido? 

Senor, cuanto antes. 

iQuiere vmd. probarse el 
vestido? 

Ese vestido le cae a vmd. 
bien. 

Me giista mucho esta ves- 
tido. 

Hagame vmd. una casaca 
de paiio azul con botones 
dorados 5 un par de pan- 
talones del mismo color; 
y tres pares de cal- 
zones de marinero de 
mahon. 



When will you bring me 

my suit? 
As soon as possible, sir. 
Will you be pleased to try 

on your suit? 
That suit becomes you 

well. 
I like this suit very well. 

Make me a blue cloth coat, 
with gilt buttons; a pair 
of pantaloons of the 
same colour; and thrise 
pair of nankeen trow- 



DIALOGO X. 

Al hablar a un zapatero. 

Hagame vmd. un par de 

zapatos. 
<:Para cuando los quiere 

vmd. ? 
Para el domingo sin falta. 
Los ultimos no valian na- 

da. 
Nome duraron quince dias. 

Este zapato me lastima. 
Vmd. no ha entrado el pie 
todavia- 



DIALOGUE X. 

On speaking to a Shoema- 
ker, 

Make me a pair of shoes. 
When do you want them? 

On Sunday, without fail. 

The last were good for no- 
thing. 

They did not last a fort- 
night. 

This shoe hurts me. 

Your foot is not quite in 
yet. 



460 APPENDIX. 

No me viene bien este za- This shoe does not lit me.. 



Est^ mui ajustado. 

Me aprieta un poco en el 

empeine. 
3e ensanchara k pocos dias. 

Bien, higame vmd. otro 
par como este, y un par 
de botas, y traigame las 
botas luego que esten 
acabadas. 

Las traer6 a vmd. la se- 
mana que viene. 



It fits too close. 

It presses on my instep. 

It will widen in a few 
days. 

Well, make me another 
pair like this, and a pair 
of boots, and bring me 
the boots as soon as 
they are finished. 

I'll bring them to you 
next week. 



A FEW MODELS 



COMMERCIAL DOCUMENTS. 



S9^ 



CARTAS DE COMERCIO. 



Frojmesta para una Correspondencia, 

Seiior Don Jose Malba. 
Havana. 

Baltimore, 29 de Mayo, de 1822. 

Mui seiior moi; deseando establecer en esa ciudad 
una correspondencia segura con un sugeto de probidad 
para las varias comisiones, j encargos que puedan ocur- 
rirme en los asuntos de mi comercio; informado de las 
circunstancias, y calidades que concurren en V. ; me 
tomo la libertad de suplicarle se sirva aceptar el encar- 
go de corresponsal mio, y de avisarme de su resolucion 
para mi gobierno. 

El buen nombre que la persona, j casa de vmd, tienen 
en esta. me inducen igualmente a ofrecerle mis servi- 
cios para cuanto fuere de su agrado^ y ya sea que acepte 
V, 6 no, mi proposicion, apreciare mucho se digne 
honrarme con sus preceptos. 

Dios guarde la vida do vmd. los muchos aHos que le 
desea su atento servidor, q. s. m. b.* 

FRANCISCO SAURIN. 

* These letters are contractions of que susmanos besa, who kisses 
vour hands. 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS. 



A proj:)oscd for a Correspondence. 

LETTER I. 

Baltimore, May 29th, 1822. 
Sir, 

Desiring to establish a regular correspondence 
with a respectable commercial house in your city, for 
the various commissions and dealings which may occur 
in my business, and being informed of your respectable 
standing as a merchant, I take the liberty to request 
you to accept the offer of being my correspondent, and 
also to inform me of your determination thereon for 
my government. 

Your respectable character, and the good credit of 
your house in this place, induce me, likewise, to oifer 
you my services in transacting any affairs in which your 
interests may be promoted 5 and whether the proffers 
of my correspondence meet with your approbation or 
not, I shall nevertheless be very happy if you honour 
me with your commands. 

I am, with very high regard, and consideration, 
Sir, your most obedient servant, 

FRANCIS SAURIN. 



4^4 APPENDIX. 



Repnesta. 
Seiior Don FrancisCo Saurin. 
Baltimore. 

Havana, 14 de Jimio, de 1822. 

Mui Seiior moi; el honor de ser corresponsal de una 
persona del credito de vmd. no puede dejar de aceptarse 
con la mayor satisfaccion. Yo desde luego le admito, 
dandole las gracias por esta prueba de sa confianza con 
que me distingue, y ofreciendo servirle con la puntua- 
lidad, y eficacia que vmd. me merece. 

Espero manifestar a vmd. la sinceridad de mis senti- 
mientos luego que se sirva emplearme, segun propone^ 
y me aprovechare iguahnente de sus ofertas, a que estoi 
mui reconocido. 

Dios guarde k vmd. ms.* as. como lo pide su mui 
afecto atento servidor. q. s. m. b. 

JOSE MALBA. 



CARTA III. 

Sombre un embarco. 

Seiior Don C. D. 

Havana, Agosto 18, de 1820. 
Mui Seiior moi: en esta fecha, y con arreglo a las 
ordenes de vmd., he embarcado por su cuenta, y riesgo a 
bordo de la fragata el Aguila, capitan Juan Quick, con 
destine a Filadelfia^ a la orden y conocimiento de Don 
D. P. los efectos que constan de la factura, y conociitir- 
ento que incluyo en esta. 

* See abbreviations, page 49. 



APPENDIX, 465 

LETTER II. 

The Answer » 
Sir, Havana, June 15, 1822. 

The offer of being a correspondent of a person of 
jour character, with which, I must confess, I consider 
myself honoured, could not fail to be duly appreciated. 
I avail myself of the earliest opportunity to inform you, 
that I most heartily accept your offer of entering into 
a correspondence with you, and also request of you 
to accept my most grateful thanks for the confidence 
which you have reposed on me; assuring you of my 
readiness and punctuality in fulfilling your commis- 
sions. 

I hope to show you the sincerity of my sentiments, 
as soon as you will honour me with your orders, agree- 
ably to your proposal; and I will likewise avail myself 
of your proffer of services, for which I heartily thank 
you. 

I am, with the greatest respect and consideration, 
Sir, your most obedient servant, 

JOSEPH MALBA. 



LETTER III. 

On an Embarkation. 
Dear Sir, Havana, August 18, 1820. 

In conformity with your orders, I have this day ship- 
ped, on your account and risk, on board the Eagle, 
J. Quick, master, bound to Philadelphia, to the order 
and consignment of Mr. D. P. the goods as per invoice 
and bill of lading herewith inclosed . 



466 APPENDIX. 

Espero que seran del gusto de vmd. asi por su calidad 
eomo por su precio, j que Uegaran bien acondicionados, 
pues se han enfardado con mucho esmero. 

Celebrare la buena salud y prosperidad de vmd. pues 
soi su mui afecto j. s, s. s.* 

q. s. M. B. A. B. 



FACTURA. 

Factura de los efectos, que por cuenta, y riesgo de 
Don C D, y con la marca, y ntimero del margen, tengo 
embarcados a bordo de la fragata mercantil Aguila, su 
Capitan Jaime Quick, con destino a Filadelfia, para 
entregar ^ la orden de Don B. P. A saber, 

jo. r. 
P. D. ^ No.1,20piezasdecotonina,a4pesos 80 
Q. V No.2, 110 docenas de guantes, a 6 p. 660 

No. 1, a 3. J No.3, 80 sombreros, a 3 p. 240 



980 




18 


4 


. 19 


7 


Pesos 1018 


3 



Derechos y gastos, 
Comision a 2 por ciento, . 

Havana, 18 de Agosto, de 1820. 



CONOCIMIENTO. 

Yo Jaime Quick, Maestre que soi del buen navio (que 
Dios salve,) nombrado el Aguila, que al presente esta 
surto y anclado en el puerto de la Havana, para con la 
buena ventura seguir este presente viage al puerto de 
Filadelfia, conozco liaber recibido, y tener cargado, den- 
tro del dicho mi navio debajo de cubierta, de vos Dn. A. 
B. tres cajas de varies efectos: todo enjuto y bien acon- 

* These three S, are contractions of s^t st^uro servidor, your 
assured serrant. 



APPENDIX. 467 

I hope that the quality and price of these effects will 
meet with your approbation, and that they will arrive 
in good order, having been very carefully packed up. 
I am, with the greatest esteem, sir. 

Yours, &c. A. B* 



Invoice of sundries, marked and numbered as per 
margin, shipped on board the Eagle, J. Quick, master, 
bound to Philadelphia, to be delivered to Mr. D. P. or 
order, for account and risk of C. C. To say, 

Dolls. Cts. 

P. D. -) No. 1, 20 pieces of dimity, at §4. 80 00 

" No. 2, 1 10 dozen gloves, at 86. 660 00 

• No. 5, 80 hats, at S3. 240 00 



P. D. ^ 1 
Q. I 

No. 1, to 3. J I 



980 00 
Duties and charges, 18 50 

Commission at 2 per cent. 19 97 

Havana, August 18, 1820. 



BILL OF LADING. 

jShipped in good order, and well conditioned, by A. 

P. D. ^ B. in, and upon, the ship called the Eagle, 

Q. >■ whereof is master, for this present voy- 

No. 1, to 3. J age, James Quick, now in the harbour of 

Havana, and bound for Philadelphia, to say: 

3 Boxes of sundries, 
being marked and numbered as in the margin, and are 
to be delivered, in like good order, and well-condition- 



468 APPENDIX. 

dicionada j marcado con la marca del m^rgen, con lo 
eual prometo, j me oblige, llevuiidome Dios en buen sal- 
vamento con el dicho mi navio, al espresado puerto, de 
acudir j entregar por vos j en vuestro nombre; dichos 
generos igualmente enjutos y bien ocondicionades (salvo 
los peligros de mar) a D. P. 6 a quien por el alii fuere 

parte; pagandome de flete a razon de con capa 

y averia. Y en fe de que asi me abligo cumplir os doi 
tres conocimientos de un tenor, firmados de mi nombre 
por mi, 6 por mi escribano; el uno cumplido, los otros 
BO valgan. En la Havana, a 18 de Agosto de J 820. 



LETRA DE CAMBIO. 

Nueva York, a. 28 de Diciembre, de 1824. 
A ocho dias vista se serviran vmds. mandar pagar 
por esta mi primera de cambio (no habiendo hecho por 
la segunda, ni tercera) j a la orden de Don M. R. la 

cantidad de valor recibido de dicho Seiior, que 

anotaran vmds. en cuenta, segun aviso de s. s. s. q. s. 

M. B. 

J.C. 

Primera 
A los Sehores E. y V. en la Havana. 

El Endoso. 
Pagiiese a la orden de Don Ji. B. Nueva York, ^c. 

M. R. 



APPENDIX. 469 

ed, at the aforesaid port of Philadelphia, (the dangers 
of the seas only excepted,) unto D. P. or his assigns, 
he (or they) paying the freight for the said goods, at the 

rate of with primage and average accustomed. 

In witness whereof the master of the said ship has af- 
lirined to three bills of lading of this tenor and date; 
one of which being accomplished, the others to stand 
void. — Dated in Havana, August 18, 18£0. 



A BILL OF EXCHANGE. 

Exchange for First. Neiv-York, Bee. 28, 1824. 

At eight days sight of the first exchange (second and 
third of same tenor and date unpaid,) please to pay to 

the order of Mr. M. R. the sum of value received, 

and charge the same to account as advised by 
Your obedient servant, 



J. C. 



To Messrs. E. 4* V. Merchants^ Havana. 

The Endorsement. 
Pay to Mr. A. B. or order. New-York, Sf-c. 



M. R. 



4f) 



VERSIFICATION. 

It was our intention, at first, to have presented this part ol ' 
Prosody in English, as in the first edition of this grammar. %h^it 
following considerations however, have induced us to present it 
in Spanish: 

1st. That after the student has gone through the grammar, we 
think he will have made a sufficient progress to understand any 
grammatical rule, although it be laid down in Spanish. 

2d. That it is very seldom persons will attend to versification 
before they are tolerably vv^eil versed in this language. For 
these individuals, the rules written in Spanish will, unquestiona- 
bly, be preferable. 

3d. That whether the rules be in English or Spanish, the ex- 
amples elucidating them must absolutely be in this latter lan- 
guage; it being impossible to give any adequate translation. 

4th. That v.'hen the peculiarities of an idiom are to be ex- 
plained, if they must not be placed in contradistinction with the 
rules of another, it is always better that they should be written 
in the language which they are intended to elucidate. 

We conceive these reasons to be sufficient to sanction oui 
change. Indeed, as our anxiety has been, throughout this gram- 
mar, to promote the advancement of the student, it could scarcely 
be supposed, we would give place to any arrangement, which, in 
our opinion, did not tend to this great object. As our zeal, how- 
ever, might carry us so far as to mislead us, we have thought it 
proper to explain the motives which have induced us to make so 
remarkable an alteration. 

De la Versificacion 6 arte metrica. 

Versificacion es el conjunto de un numero determinado de 
silabas, arregladas segun ciertas leyes. 

Rima es la correspondencia que tienen los sonidos finales de 
unos versos con los de otros. 

Hablando del acento en pagina 404 se dijo que todo monosilabo 
tiene acento, esto es, que todo monosilabo tiene vocal larga. As^ 



APPENDIX. 47] 

es, pero en la versificacion, tendran esta vocal larga 6 enfdtica, 
segun la naturaleza de la linea en que se liallen. I^i aigunas 
que estan mas dispuestas a ser enfaticas que otras, y al contrario: 
y otras, que si se quiere, se pueden 6 bo hacer enfaticas. 

Ademas del acento prosaico de que se ha hablado tratando del 
acento; se usa muchas veces de otro, que se llama poetico, a fin 
de guardar la medida; particularmente en los polisilabos. Pro- 
nunciandado la voz desgraciddamente, que tiene su acento verda- 
dero en la cuarta silaba, estamos obligados a dar un poco de 
fuerza a la primera y quinta, y se producen tres tfoqueos. El 
acento prosaico en todo ritmo, esta obligado muchas veces a 
ceder al poetico: pronunciaudo velozmente silabas enfaticas; y 
con fuerza, otras que son breves. Aunque los versos espafioles, 
esten regulados por lo general per el enfasis 6 silabas enfaticas, 
contribuye mui esencialmente un cierto balance de cantidad. 
En todos los versos solemnes 6 graves, se vera que sobrepasan las 
silabas largas a las cortas; y que, al contrario, en los versos 
donde el muylmionto os x'aIo:^ y vivo, se hallara que las silabas 
cortas, son las que prevalecen. 

Tenemos en el idioma castellano dos especies de versos; los 
que se forman 6 dividen segun pies; y los que segun su ritmo 
particular. 

De la division de versos segun sus pies. 

Todos los pies en la poesia consisten de dos 6 tres silabas; y 
se pueden reducir a muchas clases; pero se puede decir que lo'= 
usados en nucstro idioma son los tres siguientes: — 

Troqtjeo, Yambo, Antapesto. 

El Troqueo consiste de dos silabas; la primera larga o enfatica, 
y la segunda breve; como, te-mo; me-nos; Pe-dro. 

El Yambo tiene tambien dos silabas; la una breve; y la otra 
enfatica; como, te-mor; fe-liz; ser-vtl. 

El Anafesio se compone de tres silabas ; las dos primer&s breves, 
y la ultima enfatica. 

Las silabas que no son enfaticas se demostraran por esta senal 
^ o ), y las que lo son, por esta (-). 

fcja medjda troealca mas corta que se halla en nuestro idioma. 



4f£ APPENDIX. 

consiste de un troqueo y medio pie con rima doble d de dos sila- 
bas: V. g. * 

Claros I ri os. 

Celos I fri OS. 

En la medida trocaica se introduce algunas veces un yambo; 

Ni me I deja el | llan to 

De cir I como | que do. 

Jamas escede a cinco pies la medida trocaica y rara vez se 

compone de tantos; el siguiente es un egemplo de trespies con 

rima doble 6 de dos silabas: — 

Hombre | que sin | asco | so rba. 
La medida yambica mas corta que se halla en nuestro idioma 
consiste de un yambo hipermetrico, 6 con rima de dos silabas; 
Se mue | ve, 
La na [ ve, 
Mas le I ve, 
Que iin a | ve. 

Se escriben con medida yambica los versos ecsametros d he- 
roicos, consistiendo de cinco pies; y, siendo de rima doble d d« 
dos silabas, consisten de once silabas, por lo cual se llaman tam- 
bien endecasUabos: 

Pas t5 I res que j dor mis ] en la | maja da 
Se introduce muchas veces un troqueo en el primer verso de 
ia medida yambica; y hai poetas que le introducen en otros pa- 
rages de la linea. 

Graves ) mi ra | das y ] mi rar | sua ves. 
Y cuan | to el mar | el a? | re el sue | lo encier ra. 
Si me J quie res J o frez | co a tu | belle za. 
Los %Q.napesto& se hacen de varias dimensiones, pero nunca 
esceden a cuatro pies. Se omite por lo regular la primera sila- 
ba del primer pie. 

Los a I nimds ar } den en Dios | abrasa dos. 

Del ritrno 6 nma. 

Los versos se dividen en parejas; 'd versos cuyos ritmos estaa 
eguidos; esto es, el primero,^ rimando con el segundo; el terce- 



APPENDI5t. 473 

vo, con el cuarto, &c. y coplas; 6 versos alternados; esto es, el 
primer verso, rimando con el tercero; y el segundo, con el cuay- 
!o: V. g, 

"La noche ya senora de este miindo 

"Con cadenas de sueno el mas prq/wndo 

"Los mortales tenia aprisionados 

"Que mas muertos estaban que embarga^fos.*' 

"Caciques, del Estado defensores, 
"Codicia de mandar no me convida 
"A pesarme de veros pretens57'es 
"De cosa, que a mi tanto era debida.^' 

Hai tambien otras especies de rima en los tercetos, 6 versos de 
tres llneas; en los citm-tetos, 6 versos de cuatro lineas; quintetos 6 
de cinco, &c. en que se hallan varios modos de hacer consonan- 
cia. En los tercetos, por egemplo, el primer verso puede se^' 
suelto;* y el segundo hacer consonancia con el tercero: 6 el 
primero, puede rimar con el tercero; y el segundo ser suelto. 
En las piezas compuestas de tercetos; el primer y el tercer ver- 
so hacen consonancia; y el segundo, la hace con el primero del 
fcrceto preeedente, v. g. 

"En aquel prado alH nos reclinamos, 
"Y del Cefiro fresco recogieiitZo 
"EI agradable espiritu, respiramos- 
"Las flores a los ojos ofreciendo 
"Diversidad estrana de pint?/rrt, 
"Diversamente asi estaban oliendo; 
"Y en medio aquesta fuente clara y pura, 
'•'Que como de cristal resplandecTa 
"Mostrando abiertamente su hondwra, 
"El arena que de oro parecia 
••De blancas pedrezuelas \a.ndda 
"Por do manaba el agua se bullfa." 
En la lengua castellana hai dos especies de rima; la una aso- 
•:.mte; y la olra consonante. Rima asonante requiere las misraas 

* Versos sueltos, is blank verse, 
40* 



474 APPENDIX. 

letras en ambas lineas, desde la vocal en que carga ei acentf* 
hasta el fin 5 v. g. 

"Pues defended el reino rostros bellos 

"Que yo pondre la planta en vuestros cuellos.'^ 

La rima asonante solo requiere una similaridad de voeales, 
pero no de consonantesj y asi es que ligero puede formar aso- 
nancia con cubierto; amores con noches; melones con azotes, &c. v. g. 

"Sordo a las voces, con que el hombre intenla 
"Delenerle en su curso, al tiempo cdno 
"Ni el vuelo acorta, ni el semblante yuelve, 
"Ni presta oidosa sus ruegos blant/os." 

Sin contravenir a las reglas de la poctica, la mismo voz se 
puede usar al fin de las dos lineas rimantes; con tal que se usen 
en sentido diferenle. De este modo sagrado puede rimar con sa- 
grado, si uno de estos dos vocablos significa cosa sagrada; y el, 
otro aiilo, alber^ue, &c. 

Muehas veces se escriben versos de medida latina; y en este 
case, los versos tienen sus nombres diferentes segun el numero 
de pies de que consisten. Asi es que se llaman sdficos adonicos 
los versos cuyo metro consiste de cinco pies, de los cuales, el 
tercer siempre debe ser dactilo, y los otros son yambicos. A ca- 
da tres versos saficos hai un addnico, que consta de un pie dacti- 
lo y otro espondeo. Hai otros de otras medidas que no se ponen 
aqui, porque apenas jamas s6 usan. Los siguientes son saficos 
adonicos de Lope de Vega. 

••Amor poderoso en el cielo y iierra* 
"Dulcisima guerra* de aquestos sentidos. 
•';0 cuantos Tperdidos con vida inqukta, 
"Tu imperio siigeta! 

•'Hai algunas composiciones poeticas, en las cuales, como se 
ye arriba, la ultima vcz de un verso, hace consonancia con la 
uegunda del siguiente. Estos versos no son mui frecuentes; pues 
se escriben mas para hacer vcr la facilidad con que el poeta puede 
vimar, que ya porque sean mas harmoniosos; o mas confcrmes a 
ias reglas de la versificacion castellana. 



APPENDIX. 475 

"Con vanos deleites y locos empleos, 
"Ardienles desaos y helados temores, 
"AJegres dcloies y dulces engahos 

"Usurpas Ids anoS."^^ 

Be la division de verso segun sii rima. 

Los versos espanoles se dividea en tres espec4es A^udos, Llanos, 
J Esdrnjulos. 

Los versos Agudos 6 bien scan deuna sola rima, tienen el acen- 
to sobre la ultima silaba; como, 

"Mas aunque muera por tl 
"No te lo dare a entente?-; 
"Por que no me quiero ver 
"Como te viste por nu." 
Los versos Llancs son aquellos sobre cuya peniiltima silaba 
■argala pronunciacion; 6 bien sean versos de rima doble; como, 
"0 musa celestial! tu, que asisflsfe 
"A el alarde glorioso, y las hWeras 
"De los fulgentes querubines v7sle 
"Tendidas ya las inclitas bant/eras; 
•Los nombres dime, que en el cielo ohie 
■'De tanto campeon, que en duraderas 
* "Laminas, guarda el libro de la vida: 
"Honra a sus altos triunfos bien deblda."' 
Los versos Esdrujulos son los que tienen la antepentiltima silSt- 
ua acentuada; 6 bien sean versos de rima triple; v. g. 
"Silvano mio, una aficion rSirisima, 
"Una beldad que ciega luego en yiendola, 
'•Un seso y discrecion escelenffsima; 
"Con un dulce habla que en oyendola, 
"Las duras penas mueve eterneciendolas : — 
"jQue sentiria un amador perdiencZoZa?" 
Hai ademas de estas tres especies de versos, dos mas; que son; 
versos de pie quehrado; y versos sueltos. 

Los versos de pie qmbrado se usan generalmente en las compo- 
siciones dramaticas, que son inumerabjes en nuestro idioma. 
Estos consisten por lo regular de cuatro pies yambicos y pueden 



476 APPENDIX. 

formarse de menos tambien si se quiere; el siguieute egempio 
consiste 4e cuatro pies. Tambien se cuentan todos estos versos 
por silabas como se vera despues. 

Piles I si a mar | ga la | verdad, 

Quie I ro echar f la de [ la b5ca, 

Y I si al al 1 ma sii [ hiel to | ca, 

Es I cander ^ la es ne J ce dad. 
Los versos suellos son aquellos que solamente tienen un cierto 
ritmo, pero, las voces finales de unas lineas no hacen asonancia, 
ni consonancia con las de otras; al contrario, se evita cuanto sea 
posible la menor correspondencia, que en cuanto a sonido, pueda 
ecsistir. Es precise advertir, que entre los poetas espanoles, no 
se tiene mucho cuidado en la rima de unas palabras con otras; 
y asi es que hai muchos pedazos de poesla IJamada asonante, que 
en todo rigor pertenece a la suetta. Sin embargo, esto no de- 
pende ni de la falta de habilidad del poeta; ni de su descuido; 
solo de la lengua. Es esta tan rica y magestuosa, que habiendo 
correspondencia de metro, no necessita los ornamentos adventi- 
cios de la rima para darle brillantez y realce. Mas es asameja 
nuestro idioma, en cuanto a eso a los idiomas antiguos griego y 
latino, que ningun otro ecsistente. No podremos pues ilamar 
versos sueltos los que solo no hacen asonancia con otros, sino que 
sera preciso no haber la menor dependencia 6 co||pcsion de 
sonido: Egempio: 

"Canta con voz suave y dolorosa, 
"0 musa, los amores lastimeros, 
"Que en suave dolor fueron criados. 
••Canta tambien la triste mar en medio 
•'Ya Festo de una parte, y de otra Abyde 
"Y amor aca y allayendo, y viniendo, 
•'Y aquella diligente limbrecilla 
'•Testigo fiel, y dulce raensagera, 
'•De dos fieles y dulces amadores. 
•'0 mereciente luz de ser estrella, 
-'Lucienle y principal en las estrellas, 
•'Que fueron desde aca al cielo enviadas, 
- ''Y alcanzaron alia notables nombres. 
''Pero comienza ya de can tar, Musa, 



APPENDIX. 47r 

"El proceso y el fin de estos amantes: 
"El mirar, el hablar, el entenderse, 
"El ir del uno, el esperar del otro, 
"El desear y el acudir, confqrme, 
"La lumbre muerta, y a Leandro muerto." 
Asi los versos Agudos, Llanos y Esdrujulos, como tambien los 
sueltos pueden consistir de varias medidas. Sin embargo, es pre- 
eiso observar, que en castellano los versos se cuentan mas por 
silabas que por pies; y para que se tenga buen conocimiento de 
las varias dimensiones que tenemos de versos, se pondran a con- 
tinuacion todas ellas. Con esta advertencia, que los agudos tienen 
una sflaba menos que lo que se cuenta; los llanos, son ecsactos; 
y los esdrujulos, una de mas. 

Los versos que con tienen once silabas 6 cinco yambos; se 11a- 
man endecasilabos; como, 
"Sal I ga I mi I tra | ba | ja | da | voz { y | rom | pa 
"El I son I con ) fu | so y | mi | se | ro | la | men ( to 
*'Con J e I fi I ca I cia y | fuer | zas j que in | ter ( rom ( paia 
"El { ce I les I te y I ter | res | tre | mo | vi | mien | to." 

Los que contienen diez sflabas, se Uaman decastlabos: 
■'Los I que an | dais | em | po | llan | do o | bras j de o | otras 
"Sa I cad [ pues, J a | to | lar | vues | tra | cri | a | : 
"Ya I di I ra 1 ca I da au I tor; | es | ta es | mi | a; 
"Y j ve I re [ mos [ que os [ que | da a | vo I so j tros." 

Hai tambien composiciones de nueve silabas sin otro nombre 
particular, v. g.: 

•'Si 1 que | rer | en J ten | der | de | to 1 do, 
"Es 1 ri 1 di i cu 1 la 1 pre i sun | ci 1 on, 
"Ser 1 vir I so I lo 1 pa I ra u 1 na I CO I sa 
"Su I e I le I ser [ fal [ ta 1 no ) me 1 nor," 

Los versos de ocho silabas se llaman: versos de redondills 
mayor; v. g. 

"Al i in I fier j no el ] tra j cio Or | fe | o 
"Su 1 mu ( ger | ba j jo i a | bus | car, 
"Que 1 no 1 pu 1 do a j pe I or j lu I gar 
s'Lle 1 var | le ] tan | mal i de [ se 1 o " 



478 APPENDIX. 

Se hallan tambien versos de siete silabas, sin darseles outj 
nombre particular; v. g. 

ij^Quien | es | a | quel | que | ba | ja 
"Por I a I que | 11a | co | li | na, 
"Su j bo 1 te ] 11a en j la | ma | no, 
"En I el I ros | tro | la ] ri j sa,"? 
A los versos de seis silabas se les da el nombre de redondilU 
menfff; come, 

"Fres I cos | ai | re | ci | llos, 
"Que a I la j pri I ma I ve I ra, 
"Des I te I geis | guir | nal ( das 
"Y es I par | ceis | vio | le | tas; 
"Ya I que os | ban | te | ni | do 
"Del I sa I CO en I las | ve | gas," &c. 
Se encuentran tambien versos de cinco, cuatro, ires y dos sila- 
bas de los cuales se pondra un egemplo a continuacionj 
Cincij sildbds. Cuatro silabas. 

"0 I que I de I ma I les "Yo | sui J vi j va 

"Ven I los I mor | ta | les, "Soi j ac | ti | va; 

"Si I hu I ye I la [ paz: "Me ] me | ne | o, 

To I do es I te I mo I res "Me | pa | se j o 

"I I ras I ren ] co | res "Yo | tra | ba j jo, 

"Si j hu I ye | la | paz." "Su | bo y | ba | jo.'? 

Tres silabas. 

"Dineros son calidad, 
"Ver I dad: 
"Mas ama quien mas suspira 

"men 1 TI I RA." 

Dos silabas. 
"Ingrata, hermosa Antandra, 
"En cuyas centellas 
"£e I lias 
"El alma es salamandra." 
Hai versos de catorce silabas y versos de doce, 6 de arte mayor; 
y estos no son mas que la reunion de versos de siete y seis sila- 
bas: 

"Yo I leT I no I se I don | de, [ que en I la { len [ gua ] her j bo 
ta j ria, | 



APPENDIX. 4Td 

•■'Sa j lu I dan | do a un [ to j mi j llo j la j yer j ba } pa j rie | 
ta I ria, | 
"Con I so I cor | ro | ne | ri j a | le | di | jo | de es j ta | suer [ 

te" 

^•"No I he ( mos | de j reir | nos | siem | pre | que | oho | che j a 

"Con I an I ci I a I nas ] fra | ses | un | no | vel | au j tor?" 

Se debe advertir que los versos de catorce, de diez, y de nuevc 
noo son de uso mui frecuente. 

Los versos de ocho, seis, cinco, cuatro, tres y dos silabas se co- 
nocen bajo la denominacion de versos de redondilla; y los de 
once y siete por la de versos italianos. 

Llamanse versos enteros los que se componen de once, ocho j 
seis silabas, en contradistincion de los compuestos de siete, cinco, 
ciitttro, tres, y dos que sellaman quebrados, 6 de pie quebrado. De 
estos ultimos ya se hablo. 

Se ban dado aqui los varies modos de forinar versos en nues- 
tra lengua de una manera mui compendiosa por ecsigirlo asi lbs 
limites del libro. No se ban escrito como en un tratado cuya 
intencion es la de enseiiar completamente el mecanismo de nues- 
tra versificacion, sino para dar de ella una idea clara y concisa, 
que es todo lo que se requiere para saber leerla con precision, 
rectitud, energia y efecto. A continuacion se pondra el raodo 
de escandir; esto es, averiguar el numero de silabas 6 pies de que 
consta el verso. 

La mayor dificultad que occurre en escandir nueslra poetica, es 
saber, cuando en las voces que contienen una combinacion de 
dos vocales, si estas se deben suponer dos silabas separadas 
6 una sola. Sin embargo esto se puede aprender facilmente con 
atender con cuidado a las observaciones siguientes: — 

Cuando el acento prosaico no cae sobre ninguna vocal, se con- 
sideran las dos como a diptongo; v. g. 

Por pies anapestos Dich5 | sos voso [ tros a quien I 16s cuidd \ 

dos. 

Por zllahas Di | cho j sos | vo ] so | tros | a | quien | los [ cui \ 

da I dos. 

Si el acento prosaico cae sobre la segunda de las dos vocales, 

cuenta por lo regular como a diptongo; pero, si sobre la prime- 

ra, como a dos silabas ; v. g. 



480 APPENDIX, 

For -pies anapestos Los a | nimbs ar [ den en Dfos \ abra si. j doi 
For sUabas Ma | ri | a j vir | gen | be | 11a j Ma J dre J es j po | 
sa. 
Si la primera de c'os vocales es a 6 e se cuentan por lo regu- 
lar como a silabas separadas sin hacer atencion al acento; v. g. 
Por pies anapestos Que en v i | da 6s qxi^ma \ is en fue j go a mo j 

ro I so. 
Por silabas Que en | vi | da | os | que | ma | is J en j fue j go | 
a I mo I ro I so. 
Si una voz termina en vocal, y la siguiente comienza con vo- 
cal, la terminante nunca se cuente: 
Por pies irocaicos Entro | con e | lla aquel j que tan [ tos da j 

iios. 
Por silabas En | tro | con | e | lla a | quel | que | tan j tos j 
da I nos. 
•Si la pronunciacion cargare sobre la vocal terminante; en- 
tonces por lo regular se cuenta como a silaba separada: — 
Por pies irocaicos EuTRd | en un | jar din ( heri j do de | amor | 
Por silabas En [ tro | en | un | jar | din [ he | ri | do | de j a | 
mor. 
Cuando una voz termina en una vocal y la que sigue comien- 
za en h la elision se quede d no hacer: — 
Por pies Irocaicos Ni al | terror | de HORRen | da gue | rra. 
Por Silabas Su a \ mor | pues | no | se j ha | ha ] bla | do. 

Siempre que la vocal terminante, preceda a una y usada como 
a consonante, se cuenta por silaba separada: — 
Pies anapestos Do estan | do 16s cuer [ pos cai | dos e yer | tos. 
Por silabas Do es 1 tan do | los ] cuer | pos [ ca | i j dos j e [ 
yer I tos. 
Estas reglas sera suficientes para poder escandir cualquier 
pedazo de poesia, asi por pies como por silabas. Se vera que 
muchas veces una linea tiene una silaba de menos, la cual se 
anade al principio del verso siguiente. Tambien que al fin de 
una linea hai un medio pie mas 6 menos ei cual se quita 6 anade 
al principio de la otra. 



ALPHABETICAL INDEX.- 
A. 

Papre. 

A, a vowel, its sound, 26 

A, a preposition, 184 

A, a preposition, forming the contraction al, with the arti- 
cle cZ, 68 

A, required after some verbs, 378 

ABOUT, its various meanings, 185 

ABBREVIATIONS used in writing, .... 49—54 

\CCENT, an orthographical mark, 4^? 

Which are the words that bear this mark, . 47 — 49 
On what syllable this stress should be laid, . 405 — i09 
WTiich are the words whose stress is expressed by 
the orthographical accent, and which are those 
that are not distinguished by this mark, . . ib. 
A certain stress of the voice placed on a vowel, ob- 
servation, 404 

ACCENTS of Adjectives, rule 16, . . '. . .229 

ADJECTIVE, the definition of it, 67 

When it requires a neuter article, '. . 70, 71, 213 

Divided into two classes, 221 

Formation of their plural number and feminine gen- 
der, . .• 71, 221 

How rendered when they qualify articles of commerce, ib. 

Agreement of adjectives, 222 

What kind of adjectives are used when two or more 

nouns are to be qualified, ib. 

How two or more adjectives agree with a plural noun, 225 

* As this work is intended, not only for the rudiments of the 
young begmner, but as a book of reference for those who have 
already become proficient in the Spanish language; it has been 
presumed that an index, by means of which any matter contained 
in this grammar might instantly be found, could not but be a de- 
sirable object 
41 



48£ INDEX. 

Pagt. 
Position of adjectives with regard to the noun which 

they qualify, 226 

Adjectives which preceding the substantive lose their 

termination, 229 

Adjectives requiring certain prepositions, . . 244 — 247 

Peculiarities of the adjectives alguno, ninguno, tercero, 231 

ADMIRATION, how used in Spanish, .... 48 

ADVERB, the nature of it, 179 

ADVERBS, of place, time, manner, quantity, comparison, 

order, affirmation, negation, and doubt, . 179 — 182 
How adverbs in mente are generally formed, • 389 

Place of the adverb in a sentence, notes 1, 2, 3, . ib. 

ADVERBIAL phrases, 183 

Si, and no, require sometimes que, note 4, . . 390 
Two negative adverbs are, in Spanish, used to strength- 
en the negation, . 390 

Adverbs requiring de, or a, . . . . 182-183 

Jamas, J^unca, J^o, and jyiui, . . . . . 390 
AFTER, a preposition, its various meanings explained, . 185 
AGREEMENT, or concord and government explained, . 191 
ALPHABET, with the English pronunciation, . . 25 

ALPHABETIC* list of all the irregular verbs, . . 156--164 

ANAPESTO, 471 

ANCIENT terminations of Spanish verbs, placed in contra- 
distinction with the modern, . . . 175—178 
APPENDIX, See Words, Commercial Documents, Dialogues, kc. 411 
APPOSITION, which are the nouns used in apposition, . 217 
ARRANGEMENT, the Syntax of this grammar has been ar- 
ranged dififerently from that of the second edition, 

preface, 7 

ARTICLE, its nature, 67 

Use and nature of the neuter article Lo, . . 70, 213 
Use and translation of the English article a, . . 214 
The Spanish indefinite article agrees in gender, num- 
ber and case, . . • 193 

^ As this list is arranged in an alphabetic manner, in which any 
of the irregular verbs may be found in a glance, the necessity of 
including them in this index, is entirely superseded. 



INDEX. 483 

Page. 
When the indefinite article is used, rules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 

6, 7 194-204 

When the article is omitted. . , . 205—213 
Use of some or antj, notes 2 and 3, . . . 206 
AS, a conjunction, its various meanings explained, . 394 
When as, preceded by so, requires a different transla- 
tion in Spanish, note 1, 239 

AT, its various meanings, 185 

AUGMENTATIVE, and diminutive nouns, . . . 67 

AUXILIARY verbs, their nature and use, . 89, 351, 359 

Their conjugation, 85 — 100 

B. 

B, a consonant, its sound, 26 

B'^FORE, BY, their various meanings explained, . 185 

TO BE thirsty, hungry, and how translated, . . 352 

BLANK verse, 476 

BOTH, its peculiarities explained, .... 395 

BUT, a conjunction, 393 

How but is translated in its various significations, 393, 394 

c. 

C, a consonant, its sound, 26 

CASE, the nature of it, . . . . . . .65 

Reasons supporting that in Spanish there are but two 

cases — note *, 65 — 68 

The pronouns have two objective cases, . . 77 — 80 
Use of these two objective cases, . 257 — 262 

Position of the two objective cases, . . 252—250 

The author has assigned but two cases to the Spanish 

language, 65 — 68 

CARDINAL numbers, . . . , . . 72 — 73 

COMMERCIAL documents, 461 

COMPARISON, nature of it, . . . . • . .71 
Words used in Spanish to denote comparison, . 235 
So much, as much, so many, how translated — note 1, 236 
When mas precedes de when gue,— note 2, and |, ib. 

Irregular comparatives, ib 



4^4 INDEX. 

Manner of rendering the indefinite article tht when it 

deriotes comparison, ..... 239 

Cual used sometimes to compare — note 4, . . ib. 

Cuanto and Tanto, how translated — note, rule 18, ib. 

Spanish comparatives are sometimes used for English 

superlatives — rule 20, 242 

How the English superlatives are rendered in Spanish, 

rule 19, 240 

How Sprnish superlatives are formed— note 1, 240 — 241 
Various peculiarities of superlatives, . . . ib. 

Irregular superlatives, ib. 

The least, and the most, are translated sometimes 
mas and menos.^ without the article — note *, . 383 
COLLECTIVE nouns, the nature and use of them, . 40, 349 

COLLOQUIAL idioms, 411 

CONCORD, the same as agreement, 191 

CONJUGATION, the manner in which the conjugation of 

regular Spanish verbs is formed, . • . 101—108 

Conjugation of regular verbs, 109—116 

Conjugation of passive or reflective verbs, . 117—122 
CONJUNCTIONS, their definition, .... 188 

Their division, . ib. 

Their peculiar use and construction, . . 393—397 
What conjunctions govern the subjunctive mood, 

note 4, 371 

The copulative and disjunctive conjunctions, operate 

differently on the verb, .... 346, 347 

CONSONANTS, the sound of them, .... 26-30 

CUAL, a relative pronoun, .... 79, 278, 282 

CUYO, see p-onoun, a relative pronoun, . . 79, 278, 280 

CH. 

CH, a consonant, its sound, . . . . . . 27 

D. 

D, a consonant, its pronunciation, very peculiar, 7iote t, 26 

Various notions entertained respecting its sound when 
it terminates a word, . . ib. 



INDEX. 485 

Page. 
DECLENSION, Articles, Nouns and Pronouns declin- 
ed, 67, 70, 77, 89 

DEFECTIVE verbs, 85, 169—170 

DEGREES of comparison, 71 

Comparatives, how made, and used, . . 235—339 
DEMONSTRATIVE pronouns, use and definition, 79, 80, 288—295 
DERIVATION, how nouns are derived from other parts 

of speech, 55 

DIALOGUES, the most useful and necessary, 

To salute — Paying a visit — Concerning the state of 
the weather — At rising in the morning — To break- 
fast — At dinner— On drinking tea — To go to bed- 
On speaking to a tailor — On speaking to a shoema- 
ker, 443 

DIURESIS, an orthographical mark, .... 47 

DIFFERENCE between Haber, and Tener, . 89, 351—353 

Between Ser and Estar, .... 354 — 359 

Between the imperfect and preterite of the indi- 
cative, observation, . . . . . 311 

DIMINUTIVE Nouns, 57 

DIPHTHONGS, the number of them in the Spanish, . 31 

Two vowels cease to be a diphthong when one of 

them is accented, lb. 

When accented, when act, . . . 405 — 409 

DISTINCTION between Ser and Estar, . . . 354—359 
DIVISION OF VERSES, 471—475 

E. 

E, a vowel, its sound, . . . . . . . 26 

EL, pronoun, •• . . 77 

Definite article, 68 

In what cases is this word marked with the ortho- 
graphical accent, 405 

EMPHASIS, never so strong on particular words as it is 

in English 30 

ESTAR, its conjugation, 9? 

Difference between Ser and Estar, . . 354 — 359 

ESTAR, or quedarpor, for what translated, note I, . 369 
41* 



486 INDEX. 

Page. 
ETYMOLOGY, the nature of it, ..... 55 

See the Etymology of the article, page 67, of the 
noun 56, of the adjective 69, of the pronoun 75, 
of the verb 81, of the adverb 179, of the. prepo- 
sition 184, of the conjunction 188, of the inter- 
jection, . . . . ' . , . . 190 
EXCEPTIONS, to the gender of nouns, . . . 60—64 
To the rule of the-prosodical accent, . . 405 — 409 
EXCLAMATION, same as admiration, .... 46 
EXERCISES, of great importance, and preferable to any 
other mode of learning any language, see Preface. 
Exercises, some attached to every rule, note, and 

observation, which see. 
Recapitulatory exercises in the article, . 211 — 213 

. in the adjective and noun, 232 — 235 

in the pronouns, . . 301 — 305 

in the tenses, verbs, 340 — 344 

EXTRACTS, used for promiscuous exercises, on the ir- 
regular verbs 363— -366 

F. 

V, its pronunciation, 26 

FALTAR, on gustar, 387—388 

FEET, poetical feet, 347 

FOR, a preposition, its various meanings, . . 186 

FORMATION, of the tenses of the Spanish regular verbs, 101—108 
Of the gerund and participle, .... ib. 

The FORMER, how translated, rule 38, . . . 233 

FUTURE, perfect and future imperfect, rules 44, 45, . 318 

■ perfect and imperfect of the subjunctive, 

51, 52j 331—332 

G. 

G, the sound of it, - • 27 

SENDER, the nature of it, 58 

In Spanish there are five dififerent genders, but pro- 
perly speaking, two only, .... ibid. 
Rules to distinguish the gender of nouns, . . 58 — 59 
Ejiceptio^s to these rules, .... 60—64 



INDEX. 48r 

Page* 
(GENITIVE, no gmitive, or possessive case in Spanish, . 219 

GERUND, nature of it, 84 

How it is formed, 107—108 

Use and application of it, .... 535 — 336 
GOVERNMENT, the nature of it, .... 191 

Government of verbs, 366 

Which are the kind of verbs that govern the infinitive, 367 
Verbs governing the indicative, or subjunctive, 370 
Which are the conjunctions that govern the subjunc- 
tive, 371 

GRAMMAR, the nature of the Spanish Grammar, . . 25 
GRANDE, when it loses its termination, . . . 229 

GUSTAR, observation on gustar, and f altar, . . 387 — 388 

H. 

H, never sounded in Spanish, 28 

HABER, an auxiliary verb, its conjugation, . . . 85 — 89 

The use of Haber, 351 

To HAVE JUST, how translated, 352 

HISTORICAL sketch of the Spanish language, . . 17-24 
HOWEVER, how translated in Spanish, .... 395 

1. 

I, its sound, 26 

IDIOMS, colloquial, . . . . . . . 411 

IMPERATIVE mood— rule 46, 320 

IMPERFECT indicative— rule 40, . . . . . 309 

Difference between the imperfect and preterite of the 

indicative, observation, 311 

IMPERFECTS of the subjunctive, . . . 324-326 

Difference between the imperfects and futures of the 

subjunctive, observation, 33^ 

IMPERSONAL verbs, 164-170 

IN,^ its various meanings, , . 186 

INFINITIVE mood, 83, 334 

INNOVATIONS, in the tenses of verbs, . . . .175 

INTO, its various meanings 181 

lliJTfiRJECTIONS, the nature of them, . . . .190 



488 INDEX. 

Tage. 

Adjectives used as interjections require de, . .397 

How the interjection ai, is translated, ... ib. 

INTERROGATIVE pronouns— rule 35, ... . 286 

INTERROGATION, an orthographical mark, . . 46 

IRREGULAR verbs, 156-164 

comparatives, 235 

superlatives, . . . . . . 247 

IT, meaning so, is translated by Zo, 391 

J. 

J, a consonant, its peculiar sound, 28 

JAMAS, an adverb, used sometimes with nunca, . . 390 

K. 

K, its sound as in English, 26 

This character is only retained in the Spanish lan- 
guage, to be used in foreign words, , . . ib. 

L. 

L, its sound, 26 

LA, le, los, las, articles, 68, 193 

LANGUAGE, sketch of the Spanish, 13 

The LATTER, how translated— rule 38, ... 293 

LETTERS, voicels and comonants, .... 26-30 

Commercial letters, 461 

LL, a consonant, its sound, ...... 28 

M. 

M, a consonant, its pronunciation, 26 

MODELS, of the irregular verbs, .... 125—155 
MOOD, the nature of the infinitive^ indicative, imperative, 2iud 

subjunctive moods, 83 

Use of the moods, .... 305, 320, 322, 334 

In what cases conjunctions require the subjunctive 

mood, note 4, 371 

MULTITUDE, nouns of multitude known by collective nouns, 

which see, . . . ... ; . .57 

Use of the collective nouns, rule 61, . . . 349 



INDEX. 489 

N. 

Page. 

JV, a consonant, see its sound, .26 

NEGATION, two negative adverbs in Spanish, confirm the 

negation in a stronger manner — observation, . 390 

"When any other abverb except no, begins the sentence, 

one negation is only used, ib. 

NEITHER, and nor, how translated, . . . . 394 

NEUTER, adjective, 70,213 

NEUTER Article, . 70, 203 

Verb, 81 

NO, an adverb, always preceding the verb, . . . 179 
No, with another adverb of negation strengthen the 

negative, 390 

If the negative adverb precedes the sentence, the 7io 

is not used, ib. 

NOMINATIVE, its nature explained, .... 66 

It always precedes the verb, except in the imperative 

and interrogative sentences — rule 24, . . . 250 
The nominative case is, in Spanish, placed more fre- 
quently before, than after the verb — note* . . ib. 
If it be a pronoun, it is seldom expressed in Spanish, 

note 1, 251 

In Spanish there are but two cases, the nominative and 

objective — note* 65, 68 

NOUN, its nature explained, 56 

Two modes of distinguishing their gender, . . 58 

The number of nouns, how formed, ... 64 

Spanish nouns have but two cases, ... 65 

Singular nouns joined by a copulative, require the verb 

that agrees with them, to be in the plural, . . 346 
Singular nouns connected by a disjunctive, require the 

verb that agrees with them, to be in the singular, 347 
Nouns of multitude require, when they are definite, a 

singular, and when indefinite, a plural noun, . 349 

Some authors do not sufficiently attend to this rule, 

note *, . 350 

Nouns do not take the article used in apposition, rule 10, 208 



4^ INDEX. 

Page. 
The Spanish nouns have no possessive case, . 219 
Nouns are divided into p'oper, common, and abstract, 66 
The Spanish language has augmentative and diminu- 
tive nouns, . 57 

How they are formed, ib. 

Declension of nouns, 68 — 71 

NUMBER, the nature of it explained, .... 64 

There are two numbers, ib. 

Cardinal and ordinal numbers, . . . 72 — 75 

The plural number of adjectives formed like that of 

substantives, . 71 

NUNCA, an adverb, used sometimes with ja?na5, . 390 

N. 

N, its sound, . . . .... 28 

0. 

0, a vowel, its sound, 26 

OBJECTIVE case, the nature of it, ... 6ft 

Use of objective cases in the personal pronouns, 257 — 269 

ON, a preposition, its various meanings explained, . 187 

ORDINAL numbers, 73 

ORTHOGRAPHY, its nature shown, .... 26 

The alphabet Avith an English pronunciation, . ib. 

The orthographical notes, [few excepted,] are the 
same, and used for the same purpose in Spanish as 
in English, . . . . . . .49 

The reason of the variety of opinions concerning the 

sound of c, 6, d, t, v, explained, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 

Rules to pronounce the Spanish without any foreign 

accent, . 29 

Division of the Spanish words into syllables, . . 45 
Words similar in sound, but different in spelling, 44 

Rules for spelling according to the modern usage of 

the most eminent Spanish authors, . . 43 

Orthographical accent, when used, . . . 47 

Words in Spanish are spelled as they are uttered, 44 

OVER, a preposition, its various meanings explained, . 187 



INDEX. 491 

P. 

Page, 
P, its pronunciation, . . .... 26 

PARTICIPLES, a list of verbs having the participle irregu- 
larly formed, . 171 

Participles which have an active signification and are 

used as verbal adjectives, . . . .174 

Participle past, its nature and properties explained, 83 
Formation ot the participle, . . . 107 — 108 

Use of the participle, 338 

The participles sometimes require the verb ser, some- 
times the verb estar, .... 356 — 357 

The past participle is used as a case absolute in Spa- 
nish, note 2, ....... 338 

Participle present, like the gerund, . . 84, 335 

PARTS OF SPEECH, we have, like the authors whose divi- 
sion is most universally adopted, assigned nine parts 
of speech to the Spanish language, . . -.56 

PASSIVE participle, the same as participle past, . 83, 338 

PERFECT indefinite, or preterite indicative, rule 41, . 310 
Perfect of the subjunctive, rule 49, ... 329 

Difference between the imperfect and preterite of the 

indicative, observation, 311 

PERSONIFIED, nations, toions, cities, &c., take the article, 

rule 3, . ...... 197 

PERSONS, three belong to each number, ... 82 

POETICAL feet, of how many syllables they consist — their 

division, . 471 

POR, sometimes is used with estar or quedar, to show that 

an action is not finished, . . , . 369 

POSITION t)f the nominalive, rule 25, ... 250 

Position of the 1st objective case, rule 25, . . 25S 

2d objective case, rule 26, . 256 

Position of adjectives, rule 16, .... 226 

POSSESSIVE pronouns, . . . .78, 270—276 

PREPOSITIONS, their nature explained, . . . 184 

Which are the prepositions deemed such, . ib. 

English prepositions with their correspondent ones in 

Spanish, . . . . . 185, I8i 



493 INDEX. 

Page. 
The use of prepositions, ..... 390 

Tliey always govern the second objective case of the 

personal pronouns, ..... lb. 
They always precede the relative pronouns, note 1, 284 
Prepositions required by verbs of motion, . . 389 
PRETERITE, or perfect indefinite, rule 41, . . 310 
Difiference between the imperfect and preterite, ob- 
servation, 311 

PRESENT of the indicative, rule 39, ... 305 

Of the subjunctive, rule 47, .... 322 

Present participle, the same as gerund, . . 84, 335 

PRONOUN, its nature explained, . ... 75 

Pronouns are divided into five classes, the personal, 

jjobsessive, relative, inleri'ogativey demonstrative, and 

indefinite, 76 

Personal pronouns, their declension, . . 76 — 77 

They have two objective cases, ... ib. 

The necessity that the student be well versed in 
them, observation, .... 252 — 253 

Position of the nominative, .... 250 

Position of the first objective case, . . . 253 

Position of the second objective case, . . 256 

Use of both objective cases, ... 257, 259 

The pronoun VMD. is considered a third person, like el, 249 
Observations on the personal reciprocal pronoun se, 263-266 
Observations on the difference between le and lo, 267 — 269 
The two objective cases are sometimes used to- 
gether, . . . ~ . . . 261 — 262 
Possessive Pronouns, their declension and quantity, 78 

Their agreement and use, 270 

Sometimes the article used in place of them, obser- 
vation, 274-276 

'Relative Pronouns, their declension and quantity, . 60 
Their agreement and relation, .... 279 

Their use and peculiarities, 280 

JFTio, f/iai, f/iaf vj/iic/i, and M;^af, how translated, . 281 
He who, she who, or that, they or those who, how trans- 
lated, . . . . . . . . . 285 



INDEX. 493 

Page. 
Interrogative Pronmms, they are the relative used to ask 

questions, 286 

Who always, quien; ivhich, cual; and lohat, que, . ib. 

Demonstrative Pronouns, their use and quantity, . 288 

How they are to be applied in regard to distance, . 2'30 
When he, she, they, those, are translated by the articles, 

when by the demonstrative pronouns — rule 37, ib. 

The ^a«er, and the /o7-mer, how translated, , . 293 

That is, meaning namely, esto es — note 2, . . ib. 

Indefinite Pronouns, their quantity, .... 295 
The explanation of each one in particular, . 295-298 

PLUPERFECT, of indicative, 316-318 

of subjunctive, .... 330,331 

PROSODY, its nature explained, 404 

Difference between the orthographical and prosodical 

accent, 404, 405 

Rules showing Avhere the accent of each word is to be 

placed, 407-410 

No person can read the Spanish with propriety who is 
not well acquainted with the accent, , . 405 

PUNCTUATION, nearly as in Enghsh, .... 49 
PURITY, to read with purity it is necessary to attend to the 

observations in pages . . . 26,42,404,410 

Q- 

Q, a consonant, its sound, 28 

QUE, when used as a substantive is always accented — rule 35, 286 
QUESTION, when a question is asked, the note of interro- 
gation is placed both before and after, ... 46 
In quesiiom, the nominative follows the verb, . 250 
QUIEN, a relative pronoun, 279, 280 

R. 

R, a consonant, its sound, 28 

RATHER, how translated, 394 

REGULAR verbs, in what manner their conjugation is 

formed, 101-108 

Conjugations of regular verbs, . . . 109-116 
42 



494 INDEX. 

Page. 
A list of regular verbs to exercise the student, . 122 
Regular comparatives, how formed — rule 17, . 235 

superlatives, how formed — rules 19, 20, 240-242 

Ra, ria, se, the terminations of three imperfects of the 
subjunctive, .... 323—326 

RELATION of relatives, .... 279 

RELATIVES, ...... 278 

REPETITION of the objective case, how used, . 261, 262 
RHYME, its definition, 472 



S, a consonant, its sound, .... 29 

SCANNING, or rules to measure verses, both by feet and 

syllables, 479 

SE, a personal reciprocal pronoun, explained at large, 263 — 266 
SER, difference between Ser, and Estar, . 364—359 

How Ser is translated with preciso, necesario, &c. 361 
How Ser is translated, when impersonally used, . ib. 
SIMPLE and compound adverbs, . . . 179 

SKETCH of the Spanish language, . . . 17—24 

SOUND of the letters, ..... 26—30 
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, its definition, . . .322 

When directed by the tense which precedes it, 371, 372 
What conjunction governs it, note 4, . . 371 

SUBSTANTIVE, the same as noun, . . 56, 67, 219 

SYLLABLES, rules for dividing them, . . 45, 46 

SYNONTMES, between Aqu'i, Acd; Mi, Mli, Mid; Luego 
que, Despiies que; Deapacio, Poco a Poco; Mulador, Li- 
songero; Romper, Quebrar; Ir, Irse; Honor, Honra; JVb 
obstante, Aunque, Bienque; Opinion, Parecer, Dicfdmen; 
Porque, Pues; Sospecha, Recelo; Veneno, Ponzona; Voz 

Palabra, .423 

SYNTAX, its nature explained, . . . 193 

Of Pronoun, see j)ronoatn. 
Of Verb, see verb, &c. 
SPELLING, rules showing the manner in which words are to 

be spelt in Spanis^h, . ... 43 

The various late changes in Spanish spelling, . ib. 



INDEX. 495 

Page. 
SO, meaning it, is translated by lo, note,* . . 391 

SUPERLATIVES, how formed and used, , 240, 24?. 

T. 

T, a consonant, its sound explained, . . • . 26 

TENER, an auxiliary verb, its conjugation, . . 89 — 93 

Use of tener, . . . . . .351 

How this verb is translated with the adjectives, thirsty, 
hungry, &,-c. ..... 352 

TENSES, their nature explained, . . ". 305, 338 

Present of Indicative, . . . 305, 306 

Imperfect of the Indicative, .... 309 

Perfect Indefinite, .... 310 

The difference between the Imperfect, and Perfect Inde- 

^ni^e, clearly shown, . . . 311 — 313 

Perfect Definite, .... 314 

Pecxt/tarifies of the Perfect Definite, . . 31S 

Pluperfect, .... 316, 311 

When the Pluperfect is used, . . . ib. 

Future Imperfect, .... 318 

Future Perfect, ... . . . . ib. 

Peculiarities of the Future, . . . . 319 

Imperative Mood, its use, 320 

Subjunctive Mood, explained, 322 

Present of Subjunctive, ib. 

Imperfect of SubjunctiA-e, 323 

Peculiar use of the three imperfects of the Subjunc- 
tive, 323—326 

Perfect tense, 329 

Pluperfect, ........ 330 

Future Imperfect, 331 

Future Perfect, 332 

Observations on the Tenses of the Subjunctive, . ib. 
Of the termination ra, ria, and se, . . 322 — 326 
Rules for the correct application of these three imper- 
fects, ib. — ib. 

Different significations of the Preterimperfect, and the 
Imperfect Future of this Mood, . 332— S3S 



496 INDEX. 

Page. 
Infinitive Mood, its nature explained, . . 334 

Use of the Infinitive, ib. 

Present, Perfect, Gerund, compound of the Gerund, Pas- 
sive Participle, . . . . . 335—340 
TENER, see difference between Hab er Ziud Tener, . 351—352 
TERMINATIONS, changed to form the tenses of regular 

verbs, 101—108 

Ancient terminations, .... 175 — 179 

TRIPHTHONGS, those which belong to the Spanish, . 31 

u. 

U, a vowel, its sound, 26 

UNDER, its various meanings explained, . . . 187 

USE of the lenses, 306,338 

of the definite article, rules 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, . 193, 205 

of the neuter article /o, 213 

of the noun, rule 13, 219 

of 1st and :id objective cases, rules 27, 28, . 257, 259 

» of the tenses, present, indicative, 305 — imperfect, 309 — 
perfect, 310— perfect definite, 314 — pluperfect, 
316 — future imperfect, SIS — imperative mood, 320- 
subjunctive, present, 322 — imperfect, 323, 324, 325^ 
326 — perfect, 329 — imperfect, 330 — future imper- 
fect, 331 — future perfect, 333. 

. of prepositions, , 390 

of conjunctions, . 393 

USTED, a personal pronoun, explained, . . . 249 

Its contraction, vmd., 86, 249 

V. 

V, a consonant, its sound, 26 — 30 

V, a contraction of Ustedf 86—249 

V, and B, distinct in sound, ,. 30 

VERB, its nature explained, . . . . . 81 

Divided into Active, Passive, and J^euter, . . ib- 

Conjugation explained, 85 

Mode of conjugating regular verbs, , . 109 — 1 1 

How regular verbs are formed, . • . 101 — 108 



INDEX. 497 

Page. 
A conjugation of the auxiliary verbs, . 85 — 100 
Mode of conjugating a passive verb, . . 117 — 119 
Mode of conjugating a reflective verb, . 119 — 121 
A list of all the irregular verbs, . . . 126 — '164 
Difference between the ancient and modern termina- 
tion of verbs, 175 

Defective verbs, a list of them, . . . 169 

Impersonal verbs, a list of them, • . • . 164 
Construction which some of them require, . 169 

A short essay on the use of Ser and Estar, . 354 — 359 
Active verbs govern the objective case; and with the 

preposition a, they govern a person, . . 366 — 367 
Verbs governing the indicative or subjunctive, . 370 
Passive verbs require the preposition dp., or for, 374 

Neuter verbs, active intransitive, as well as some re- 
flective verbs, govern a verb with de, . . ib. 
A list of verbs requiring the preposition de, . ib. 
Verbs which require the preposition a, , . 378 — 380 

Verbs requiring en, 382 

Verbs requiring con, 8S3 

Verbs of motion require either the preposition a, de^ 
por, or hacia, ....... 589 

Observation on ^ustccr, faltar, and pesar, . . 387 

VERBAL Adjectives, those which are formed from verbs, 

or participles adjectively used, . . , 174 

VERSE, its various dimensions explained, . , 471 

Troqueo, Yambo, Aaapesto, ..... ib. 

Division of verse according to its rh}Tne, . 475 

Called Agiidos, Llanos, Esdrujulos, ... ib. 

Of verses, called pie quebrado, .... ib. 

Verses, called versos stieltos, [blank verse,] . . 476 
VERSIFICATION, its nature explained, . , . 470 

Of Rhyme, 472 

A curious manner of rhyming, the last word of a 

verse, with the second of the following, . 474 

Manner of measuring the Spanish verses, . . 479 
VMD., a personal pronoun, its nature, use, and application 

explained, ....... 86—249 



498 INDEX. \^f^ 

VOCABULARY, of the most useful and necessary words — 
Of God, &c.~The Planets, &c.— Of Time— The Days 
of the Week — The Months of the Year — Seasons 
and Holidays — Individuals and Ages — Thin|i;s be- 
longing to the Body — Natural Actions — The Five 
Senses — Defects and Maladies of the Body, &c. &c. 428 

V'OWELS, their sound exhibited, 26 

w. 

W, this character does not belong to the Spanish alphabet. 

WITH, a preposition, its meaning explained, . . 188 

WITHIN, a preposition, &c. ib. 

WITHOUT, a preposition, &c ib. 

WORDS, the most useful and necessary words, . . 428 

X. 

X, a consonant, its sound, ...... 29 

Y. 

Y, a consonant, its sound, ...... 29 

Used also as a vowel, ib. 

Many authors npv*»r uco<J it but ap o, oonoonant, ib, 

2, a consonant, its sound, .,...,, 2$. 






Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proi 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IM padcq ddcccdi/atiau 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 

III iiiiiiiiii till 111 iiniiillil 1111 T"'' 



003 213 079 3 



